initial commit of ebook 25473HEADmain

11 files changed, 20827 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/25473-8.txt b/25473-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6781c68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6365 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Frontier Boys on the Coast
+       or in the Pirate's Power
+
+Author: Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+Release Date: May 15, 2008 [EBook #25473]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."--P. 204.
+
+_Frontier Boys on the Coast._]
+
+
+
+
+FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST
+
+OR
+
+_IN THE PIRATE'S POWER_
+
+BY CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT
+
+          NEW YORK
+          HURST & COMPANY
+          PUBLISHERS
+
+
+
+
+THE FRONTIER BOYS
+
+By CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT
+
+
+This series tells the adventures of Jim, Joe, and Tom Darlington, first
+in their camp wagon as they follow the trail to the great West in the
+early days. They are real American boys, resourceful, humorous, and--but
+you must meet them. You will find them interesting company. They meet
+with thrilling adventures and encounters, and stirring incidents are the
+rule, not exception.
+
+Historically, these books present a true picture of a period in our
+history as important as it was picturesque, when the nation set its face
+toward this vast unknown West, and conquered it.
+
+           1. Frontier Boys on Overland Trail
+           2. Frontier Boys in Colorado
+           3. Frontier Boys in the Rockies
+           4. Frontier Boys in the Grand Canyon
+           5. Frontier Boys in Mexico
+           6. Frontier Boys on the Coast
+           7. Frontier Boys in Hawaii
+           8. Frontier Boys in the Sierras
+           9. Frontier Boys in the Saddle
+          10. Frontier Boys in Frisco.
+          11. Frontier Boys in the South Seas
+
+          _Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth_
+          _Price per Volume, 50 Cents_
+
+
+          COPYRIGHT, 1909, BY
+          THE PLATT & PECK CO.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+  CHAPTER                            PAGE
+       I. CAPTAIN BILL BROOM            9
+      II. THE COVE AND THE CAVE        16
+     III. THE BARBED WIRE              23
+      IV. PETE'S YARN                  30
+       V. THE FOUR BOYS                37
+      VI. THE HUNCHBACK                45
+     VII. FARMER BROOM                 53
+    VIII. THE CAMP IN THE POCKET       60
+      IX. THE ATTACK                   68
+       X. "HAUL IN"                    76
+      XI. MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE         82
+     XII. THE RANCHERO                 90
+    XIII. A NEW FRIEND                100
+     XIV. THE PURSUIT                 109
+      XV. JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE       118
+     XVI. THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE       127
+    XVII. ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE      135
+   XVIII. A DAY AT SEA                144
+     XIX. THE PASSENGER               152
+      XX. TO THE RESCUE               161
+     XXI. THE BANDITS                 169
+    XXII. RACE WITH THE TIDE          177
+   XXIII. THE ENCHANTED ISLE          184
+    XXIV. IN THE WHITE BOAT           191
+     XXV. IN PERIL                    198
+    XXVI. TWO LASSOES                 206
+   XXVII. ANOTHER FRIEND              214
+  XXVIII. A TALE OF YORE              220
+    XXIX. A WONDERFUL LEAP            232
+     XXX. IN THE STRAIT               239
+    XXXI. CONCLUSION                  246
+
+
+
+
+FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+CAPTAIN BILL BROOM
+
+
+"What devilment has old Bill got on for tonight, Pete?"
+
+The speaker was seated on an old scarred sea chest in a dimly lighted
+forecastle.
+
+"I dunno," replied Pete, "maybe he's lookin' fer a wreck."
+
+"I heard the mate say somethin' about a passel of four boys," put in a
+third man who was laying back in his bunk, "that the skipper was
+a-lookin' for."
+
+"Kidnapping, eh?" said Cales, the first speaker. "Hold 'em for ransom, I
+suppose. Well, the old man has been in worse games than that. I reckon
+the kids' parents are rich and are willin' to pay a high price for their
+darlings."
+
+"You're on the wrong tack, matey," said the man in the bunk. "Cap'n
+Brinks, who landed in San Diego from a Mexican port put the old man
+wise. He told him that those fellars had considerable money and a raft
+of jewels with 'em that they picked up in Mexico."
+
+"Ho, Ho, that's the game, is it," cried Cales, thumping his knee with a
+gnarled fist, "that ought to be easy then."
+
+"Looks so, but it ain't," replied the other, "those four boys have got
+somethin' of a reputation in the southwest. Hard fighters and good shots
+and their leader is a husky lad and about as crafty as a red Injun."
+
+"He ain't met the Old Man yet," said Cales significantly.
+
+"I don't see where you get all your news from, Jake," growled Pete from
+his seat on the chest, "you ought to be a reporter."
+
+"I keep my eyes open and my mouth shet," replied Jake, "any man can get
+larned if he will do that."
+
+"I'd like to have a picter of you with your mouth shet," remarked Pete.
+"It's open even when you are asleep." He dodged just in time to avoid a
+heavy shoe flung from Jake's ready hand that crashed against the wall.
+
+"Don't do that agin," he warned, a red light showing in his eyes. "I'll
+larn you boys that I ain't as old as I looks to be."
+
+Jake laughed harshly.
+
+"You mustn't keep your own mouth open so wide, Pop, cause you'll have to
+swallow your own words if you do."
+
+"I guess I'll never git choked," replied Pete, truculently. "Kin you
+tell me what the skipper means snooping down this coast with no lights
+showing when it's plumb dark? We are liable to sink ourselves or
+Californey all of a suddint."
+
+"Why don't you ask the Cap'n what he is up to?" inquired Cales, "that
+is, if you want some real useful information, Pop."
+
+Pop raised himself up and glared at the speaker.
+
+"I ain't done living," he replied.
+
+"We are navigating pretty careful," remarked Jake. "You can hardly feel
+the Sea Eagle moving."
+
+"Running for the cove, I reckon," suggested Cales, "I'm mighty pleased
+not to be the man at the wheel. Well, I'm goin' to turn in for a
+snooze."
+
+In a brief time the two men were snoring loudly, while old Pete sat
+smoking his pipe, as stolid as a wooden Indian and the forecastle was
+fogged with the smoke, through which the swinging lantern shone dimly.
+The air is stifling so let us go up on deck where we can breathe the
+salt ozone and incidentally get acquainted with Captain Bill Broom, who
+is to occupy such a prominent place in this narrative.
+
+He is well worth meeting, not only as the opponent of our old friend,
+Jim Darlington, but because of his own unworthy but interesting
+character. In those days Skipper Bill Broom was known all up and down
+the coast and beyond. His fame, such as it was, comes down even to this
+recent day.
+
+On deck it is muffling dark, with the stars obscured in some dim way by
+mist or fog. There is a breeze blowing steadily from the broad wastes of
+the ocean. The bulk of the California coast looms dimly on the port bow.
+Not more than a half mile distant can be seen the white rushing forward
+of the breakers towards the rocky coast.
+
+Dangerous work this, navigating the Sea Eagle through the thick gloom of
+the night but the old man knew his business. He was on the bridge pacing
+back and forth like some strange animal and giving hoarse directions to
+the man at the wheel. He knew every inch of that coast, the sunken reefs
+and dangerous rocks.
+
+"Starboard your helm," he growled.
+
+The sailor spun the wheel obediently. And the captain resumed his pacing
+back and forth upon the bridge. Not much could be seen of him, except
+that he was a powerful man, with a peculiar crouching stoop, as if he
+and the sea were engaged in a mysterious game. One striving to get a
+dangerous death-hold upon the other, both wary and using unceasing
+watchfulness.
+
+There was a strange softness in Captain Broom's tread like that of a
+padding panther, but his arms had the loose forward powerful swing of a
+gorilla's. Once he stepped into the chart house to look at something and
+the light of the lamp will give us a square look at him.
+
+"That man a pirate!" you exclaim at the first glance; one who carried
+the blackest name along the coast as a smuggler and wrecker, who had
+brought cargoes of wretched slaves from Africa in the days before the
+Civil War and who had had more marvelous escapes than any man in the
+history of piracy with the exception of Black Jack Morgan! Impossible!
+
+"Why that man is nothing but an old farmer," you exclaim in
+disappointment, when you see him. "He ought to be peddling vegetables on
+market day." But just wait.
+
+True, Skipper Broom had come from a long line of New England farmers,
+hard, close-fisted, close-mouthed men. Young Broom had broken away from
+the farm and followed his bent for sea-faring, but to the end of his
+days, he kept his farmerlike appearance and he affected many of the
+traits of the yeoman which he found to be on more than one occasion a
+most useful disguise.
+
+Let's look at him. That heavy winter cap pulled down on his grizzled
+head gives him a most "Reuben" like appearance. Jeans pants are thrust
+into heavy cowhide boots. The deadly gray eyes soft as granite have
+become red rimmed from fits of fury and hard through many scenes of
+coldly calculated cruelty. A most dangerous customer and I for one, and
+I ought to know, consider that he will have the better of Jim Darlington
+in their approaching encounter--and yet Jim is never beaten until the
+last shot is fired and so it is impossible for me to foretell how this
+contest of wit and daring will come out.
+
+After examining his chart closely, Captain Broom crouched out through
+the door and on to the deck. He took one keen look towards the shore,
+then he approached the helmsman. "Git below, Bill. I'll fetch her in."
+
+The helmsman relinquished the wheel gladly enough and under the
+Captain's masterful hand the Sea Eagle swung slowly around and pointed
+in towards the curving shore.
+
+The dark form of the mate could be seen on the deck below waiting for
+the order that he knew must come soon. The crew of the Sea Eagle though
+subordinate enough were necessarily partners in Captain Broom's wicked
+enterprises so that the discipline was somewhat different than in
+ordinary vessels.
+
+"Call 'em up, Mr. Haffen," roared the skipper to the mate. "It's chore
+time."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," replied Mr. Haffen.
+
+The watch was called on deck and the dark forms of the men could be seen
+in the bow. The pulsing of the Sea Eagle had stopped and with scarcely a
+sound the anchor was dropped into the water.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+THE COVE AND CAVE
+
+
+The starboard boat was lowered into the water. First the mate, then
+Captain Broom and two men got in. The latter were Cales and Pete who
+pulled noiselessly at the oars. The boat glided quietly through the
+silent darkness towards the shore. The Captain was seated in the stern,
+his great bulk crouched forward, but there was nothing inert in his
+posture. His big hands clasped either side of the craft.
+
+In a few minutes the boat grounded softly on the sand of the beach and
+all hands got ashore. Scarcely a word was spoken, though the cove was so
+hidden that there seemed to be no possible chance that the landing of
+the free-booters would be observed. However, Captain Bill Broom took no
+risk of being discovered. He had many enemies upon the coast and inland
+as well. Besides, the State of California had set a price upon his head.
+
+Two thousand dollars was the reward for his capture, and so profitable
+an investment was apt to be realized on sooner or later by some
+enterprising citizen. So Captain Broom took due care whenever he went
+abroad not to attract undue attention.
+
+This cove was a favorite lurking place of his when close pressed, where
+he would take refuge after some daring adventure upon the high seas,
+until such a time as the hubbub along the coast had died down. Sometimes
+he lay in hiding there, with the Sea Eagle screened behind the
+encircling cliffs, waiting like a black spider to rush out and capture
+some unsuspecting craft.
+
+"Pick her up, boys," said the Captain, "you know where she belongs,"
+pointing to the boat.
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," they replied, and putting it on their shoulders they
+carried the boat along a narrow path that divided the thick undergrowth;
+until, after going several hundred yards, they reached a thick screen of
+brush through which they shoved, and came to a cave.
+
+Although so well hidden, the entrance to the cavern was quite high, so
+that the men gained admission without stooping, and going a short
+distance into the dark interior, they placed the boat gently down
+against the wall. There was a constant and heavy drip of water, so that
+there was no chance for the boat to warp, as it would have surely done
+if placed outside in the dry California air.
+
+"I don't like this yere cave," remarked Pete, when left alone with
+Cales.
+
+"What's the matter with it? It's dark and damp, but that is the nature
+of caves."
+
+"It makes me feel creepy, that's all," replied Pete, "and it takes
+considerable to do that."
+
+"Whatever happened?" inquired Cales, grinning, "something terrible, I
+reckon, to make your thick hide chilly."
+
+"It were before your time," replied Pete somewhat reluctantly, "we
+raided a ranch back thar agin the mountings. Senor Sebastian owned it
+and it was said that he could ride all day and never git off his place,
+and that he had more sheep and cattle than thar is folks in Frisco."
+
+"The Captain shanghied him, I reckon," cut in Cales.
+
+"You hold your windlass," commanded the old man in a querulous tone,
+"I'm telling this yarn."
+
+"All right, Pop," said Cales in a conciliating manner, "have it yer own
+way." He was really anxious to hear the story the old man had referred
+to.
+
+"Young fry is always flapping," the older speaker mumbled,--then he
+took up the course of his narrative. "Waal, as I was telling ye, this
+Senor had lots of money and the Cap'n being short of funds thought that
+he could use some of it. So one night we ran into the cove, it was
+blacker even than this. I don't see how the old man ever got the craft
+past the sharks' teeth at the entrance but he did."
+
+"He could have brought her in with his eyes shut," declared Cales. "I
+never have seen his equal for navigating."
+
+"Waal, we made camp here that night, and the next day, the Cap'n with
+some of the gang, left for the ranch and I stayed to look after things.
+Nothing happened that day, and I was dozing by the fire about midnight
+when I heard them coming back. They had the Senor, a fine-looking old
+man with a gray mustache and as cold and proud-looking as they make
+them.
+
+"The Cap'n was furious because he had not been able to lay his hand on
+the coin, and he swore that he would make the old Senor tell where his
+money was or there would be trouble. He took him into this cave and I
+don't know what happened there, and I don't want to know. All I'm sure
+of is that I never saw him come out.
+
+"The Cap'n sent me to the ship to get some chains on the second day and
+he took 'em into the cave. We sailed a couple of days later, but not a
+sign did I see of the Senor. That's why this cave makes me creepy,
+Cales."
+
+They were standing near the entrance, when there came a distinct low
+moan from the interior. It was not a ghostly sound, either. There was no
+mistaking it.
+
+"Did you hear that, Cales?" asked old Pete in a quavering voice.
+
+"Yes," replied Cales, "I heard it all right. It can't be the Senor?"
+
+"No," replied Pete. "He has been dead these years."
+
+"Let's find out," said his comrade.
+
+"There's nothing in this world could make me go in thar," declared Pete
+solemnly, "besides, it's agin the Captain's orders."
+
+"Well, I'm going," said Cales either more brave or less experienced than
+the other. "It sounds to me like a woman's voice."
+
+"And I'm goin' to git," declared old Pete, tottering towards the path.
+
+"You're a brave old pirate," said Cales contemptuously, and with that he
+went slowly back into the cave. He had to go cautiously, for beyond a
+certain point he was not acquainted with the interior. He could feel the
+moist ground under foot and he kept his hand stretched out, not knowing
+what he might run against in the dense damp darkness.
+
+Then, suddenly, his hand struck a stone wall. Groping his way, he turned
+a sharp corner and followed along a low narrow passageway that obliged
+him to stoop. Then came the sound of the moaning just ahead. Jack Cales
+was a brave man but it was all that he could do, to keep from turning
+and running in panic for the mouth of the cave. But though his
+determination had received a severe shock, it did not turn to flight.
+
+He saw a faint light ahead, spreading a glow at the end of the passage
+as he came nearer. Then he saw something that held him stone still with
+a clutch of weird fear. He had reached the end of the narrow passage,
+and dimly made out a domed room in the rock, white with translucent
+encrustation.
+
+He struck a match. About him, before, to the right and to the left he
+could see forms all of ghostly white, some crouching, others standing.
+Hardly had the light flared up than it sizzled out. Some drops of water
+falling from the roof had extinguished the blaze. Then was repeated that
+awful sound of distress.
+
+Cales groped around almost in a frenzy of terror. Where was the exit
+from that awful room? Round and round he went, and all the time there
+were strange whisperings in his ears, and unseen hands seemed to clutch
+his clothes. Once he slipped and was trembling so that he was hardly
+able to get to his feet. Just as he did so, something swept past him
+like a breath of wind. Rendered desperate he made another dash, and this
+time if he had not found a passageway, he felt that he could have
+knocked a hole through the wall. Then he stood at the mouth of the
+cave.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE BARBED WIRE
+
+
+Just at that moment was heard the hoarse voice of Captain Broom booming
+through the darkness outside.
+
+As Cales turned about, some furry animal sprang past him dashing between
+his legs and nearly upsetting him.
+
+"On deck, you scoundrel, come out of there," called the Captain.
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," came the reply of Cales in a strangely weak tone,
+though he was now more concerned by the possible penalty to be meted out
+by the Captain for disobedience of orders, than by thought of the
+undetermined occupants of the cave. If it were a cat it was certainly a
+good joke on old Pete. This was, had they but known it, the swift
+solution of the mystery.
+
+Oddly enough the Captain said not another word, a fact suggestive to
+Cales that there was something amiss in the cave and the little company
+at once took up their line of march. Captain Broom was in the lead,
+followed by the mate, then Cales, with old Pete bringing up the rear.
+Just as they started Captain Broom extinguished the lantern and they
+took up the trail in total darkness. Every precaution would now be
+necessary for they would soon be in a region where the very name of
+Broom was execrated with bitter hatred, and every bush would grow a
+poniard if his whereabouts were known.
+
+It was evident that the skipper was as good a guide on land as he was a
+pilot at sea, for he led his little party at a steady gait by a winding
+cow-path through the thick undergrowth. He doubtless knew this region
+thoroughly, for he had made more than one raid in this locality.
+
+It was soon to be determined, however, that they were not the only ones
+abroad that night.
+
+They had walked in silence for some time, well on to two hours, when
+they came to an open space, with the irregular form of a live oak on the
+southeast corner. Then Captain Broom stopped suddenly, his keen eyesight
+which no darkness could baffle had discerned some object moving out from
+the shelter of the oak tree.
+
+It came slowly with uplifted black arms and white hair falling around
+its face. There was a terrible intensity in its advance across the open
+space, withal that it moved so slowly. The figure stopped directly in
+front of Captain Broom.
+
+"Get out of my way, you hag," he roared, but for the first time in his
+life a certain tremor crept into his voice. Perhaps he was growing old.
+He drew back his arm as though to strike the woman in his path.
+
+As he did so Jack Cales stooped and picked up a round rock at his feet,
+intending to hurl it, not at the woman but at the skipper, for he alone
+of the party divined the possible cause of this poor woman's dementia.
+But his interference was not necessary for it seemed as though the
+Captain's arm was paralyzed. He declared afterwards that some invisible
+hand had seized his arm.
+
+Then, in a loud, wailing voice the woman put a curse upon the slayer of
+her husband, for this spectre was none other than the Senora Sebastian.
+It was terrible to hear her and it must have sent a shiver into the soul
+of the hardy skipper.
+
+When she had finished, the woman moved past them and vanished in the
+direction of the ranch. For a full minute the line of men stood without
+moving a step and in absolute silence, Captain Broom with his arm
+upraised as he had lifted it to strike.
+
+Then, without saying a word, he took the first forward step and the
+others followed him through the darkness.
+
+"Say, Cales," growled Pete in a low voice, "what was it you found in
+that cave? My old timbers are shaking yet."
+
+"Keep your old jaws shut," yelled the Captain, who had wonderfully keen
+hearing, when anything was spoken that concerned him.
+
+"How do you suppose the old man heard me?" mumbled Pete to himself. He
+dropped back a pace or two, then whispered, "The old man must be crazy.
+He is making direct for the Sebastian ranch."
+
+"Do you reckon that these four boys he is looking after, are located
+there?" asked Jack.
+
+"I dunno," replied Pete, "you can calkerlate on one thing though and
+that is that the skipper knows pretty nigh where those lads are. One of
+his messengers, a one-eyed, twisted greaser, came aboard the other day,
+and was gabbling in the Captain's cabin. Then the next thing I knew we
+was under sail, and came kiting down to the cove."
+
+Just then the party halted at the confines of a four strand barbed wire
+fence. This was the first indication that they were entering the great
+ranch property that formerly belonged to the Senor Sebastian, the
+elderly man the Captain had made captive, and which was now the property
+of his only son.
+
+"Now, lads," said the leader of the expedition, "Here's a chance to make
+yourself small. This yere barb is like a devil fish if it once gits a
+holt of your panties--it won't let go."
+
+"That's so, Captain," said the mate, a generally silent and saturnine
+man.
+
+"I reckon you know, mate," said the Captain. "The last time we was
+through these parts, and that some considerable years ago, this same
+fence got a holt of yer pants and wouldn't let go. I never heard you
+talk so much and so earnestly in my life before. You want to be more
+keerful this time."
+
+The mate simply grunted by way of reply and, lying close to the ground,
+he very gingerly and carefully worked his way under the wire and thus
+escaped his mentioned former unpleasant detention. He then held the
+lower wire up as high as he could until his chief had wiggled under.
+
+Pete was the only one of the party who was seriously detained, for Jack
+Cales had slid under as slick as an eel. But Pete's joints were old and
+rusty and the venomous wire got a clutch on his coat and his pants.
+
+"What's keeping you back?" inquired the Captain, gruffly, as Cales and
+his comrade did not put in an immediate appearance.
+
+"Pete has got caught, sir," said Jack.
+
+"What are you doing there, you old barnacle?" inquired the Captain as he
+came back to the fence.
+
+There was a certain odd comradeship between the skipper and the old salt
+who had been with him since his African days. Both were New Englanders
+and had come from neighboring homesteads.
+
+"Just resting, sir," replied the captive.
+
+It certainly did have something of that appearance, for Pete had kept a
+decisive grip on his old black pipe with his stubby teeth and was
+puffing at it in apparent peace and resignation.
+
+"Want me to git you a piller?" inquired the skipper, sarcastically.
+
+"Thank ye, sir," replied Pete imperturbably.
+
+Meanwhile the mate had been at work with deft fingers and he finally
+succeeded in extricating the old man and putting him upon his pins.
+
+"Now if ye are sufficiently rested," proposed the skipper, "we will hike
+along."
+
+This they did. Their way now lay between two stretches of fence that
+enclosed a road not much traveled for there were only faint traces of
+wheels in the turf. It was probably not a public highway but belonged to
+the great ranch.
+
+Everything seemed smooth sailing now, as there was no more barbed wire
+to be immediately met but Pete soon made himself prominent again. He
+was rolling along with that gait peculiar to a sailor when aboard land,
+when he gave a sudden spring and clutched Cales convulsively in the
+back, giving that individual a big scare.
+
+"Dad burn it, boys. I've stepped on a rattler." An investigation was
+made very carefully and Captain Broom quickly picked up a short piece of
+rope.
+
+"I'll rattle you," he cried, touching up the old man with the rope's
+end.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+PETE'S YARN
+
+
+They went along steadily through the darkness in an almost directly
+easterly direction. Being now clear of the brush they could make good
+time on the springy turf.
+
+"How far are we now from the ranch, Pete?" inquired Jack.
+
+"Too durn close to suit me," replied Pete. "I can't tell exactly for
+these ranches are as big as all outside creation, but I guess we must be
+as close as a mile to the buildings."
+
+"I reckon the Captain is going to walk up to the front door and ask for
+accommodations."
+
+"Wouldn't s'prise me a bit, if he done that," replied Pete querulously.
+"The old man ain't lacking in nerve. Back thar was the first time I ever
+seen him hang back in my long experience with him."
+
+"When the old lady was speaking her piece? Suppose I ask him how much he
+made when he captured the Senor," suggested Cales, who had recovered his
+flippant humor.
+
+"I wouldn't git gay, lad," said old Pete, warningly. "She is just as
+liable to haunt you in your black spells."
+
+"Don't have 'em, uncle," replied Cales.
+
+"You collect the material for 'em when you are young," said the old man
+wisely, "and they come out of your bones like rheumatiz when you git
+old."
+
+"Somebody is coming back of us," suddenly whispered Cales.
+
+"Take to cover, lads," ordered the skipper, who was as quick to hear as
+the younger man. The only cover was a high and thick growth of wild
+mustard growing alongside the fences.
+
+Quickly they stepped from the open road into the shelter of the tall
+mustard. They had not long to wait. There was the jingle of spurs and
+the thud of horses' feet walking slowly along. Next came the voices of
+men talking.
+
+"It is useless, Senor, to try and find her, I fear," replied one man to
+the other.
+
+"It seems so," replied the other sadly. "My mother always seems to be
+worse when the time of the year approaches that my father disappeared.
+In spite of all our care she will escape."
+
+They had now arrived at a point opposite where the free-booters were
+hidden. The man who had last spoken struck a light and lit a cigarette;
+the instantaneous glare showed the dark handsome face of the Spanish
+type. There was the high-peaked sombrero, the striking clothes, the
+intent face and then the light died suddenly out.
+
+"Ah, Manuel," said the young man to his companion, "if I could only once
+lay hands on that cursed Gringo," and he ground his teeth in fury,
+unable to express himself.
+
+"Humph, Gringo," grunted the Captain, disdainfully.
+
+"Did you hear anything, Senor?" asked Manuel.
+
+"Nothing."
+
+"I was sure I heard something," asserted his companion. They had reined
+in their horses and sat listening quietly for a few seconds.
+
+"It was probably nothing but a calf by the roadside," said the Senor.
+
+The other shook his head doubtfully, then they turned and rode on
+towards the rancho.
+
+When they were safely out of range, the party of pirates took up their
+line of march once more.
+
+"So the greaser took me for a calf," remarked Captain Broom. "If it had
+been you, Jack Cales, there might be some excuse fer such a mistake."
+
+"Aye, sir," replied Cales, glumly.
+
+"Getting kind of close to the ranch, ain't you, Cap'n?" ventured old
+Pete.
+
+"I thought of leaving you there, Pete, while the rest of us corralled
+those kids. You are getting too old for these long tramps."
+
+No more remarks were heard coming from the direction of Pete, for he was
+not at all sure but that the Captain might, in a moment of irresponsible
+humor, do just as he threatened without regard to the consequences.
+
+After they had gone on for a mile from the point where the two men had
+overtaken them, Captain Broom led his party away from the road in a
+southerly direction, once more undergoing the harrowing experience of
+getting through the barbed wire fence. But this time Jack Cales was
+especially detailed by the Captain to get old Pete through so there
+would not be any unnecessary delay.
+
+It was evident that they were getting into a different section, a short
+time after they left the road, for they began going up and winding among
+little rocky hills. At last they came to a stopping place. They climbed
+up an elevation and sat on some rocks among a group of dark trees.
+
+"Now, lads, take it easy," said the Captain, "ye have had quite a
+footin' and when morning comes, there will be some more ahead and at a
+faster gait."
+
+"Gosh, Cap'n," declared old Pete, "It's the most walking we've done
+together since the time we corralled the last bunch of niggers on the
+west coast of Africa."
+
+"We certainly made money that trip when we sold that cargo of coons to
+the traders on that Palmetto Island below Charleston. But we will clean
+up about as much money when we round up those four boys and twice as
+easy. Tell the two lads about that trip, Pete."
+
+The old sailor sat on a rock, and taking out his bag of tobacco filled
+his short black pipe with one thorny thumb, then he commenced his
+narrative, with the glow of his pipe lighting up his weatherbeaten face.
+
+"Well, orders is orders, and the Cap'n wants me to tell this yarn. I
+might just as well begin it, lads. I never knew any good to come to
+sailormen cruising around on dry land any more than on this trip." He
+cast a wary eye at Captain Broom, but that worthy merely grunted and
+Pete resumed his story.
+
+"Our clipper lay at anchor in a wide bay with only a couple of men on
+board and the Captain, myself and six men trailing inland for to find a
+village of naygurs that our guides had told us of.
+
+"It certainly was hot and steamy going through the jungles and every
+once in a while a big snake as large as my leg would crawl across our
+path and rustle away into the undergrowth. Once I felt one of 'em
+a-twisting and rolling under my foot like a big log that had came to
+life. I guess I must have jumped twice as high as my own head and I lit
+on the back of one of the naygurs that was guiding us.
+
+"He didn't know what struck him; probably thought it was a tiger for I
+sunk my hooks into his hide. He let out a yell and went ripping and
+snorting through that jungle and me not having sense enough to let go,
+until a grape vine about as thick as a manilla rope chucked me under the
+chin and I fell flat on my back and I guess that naygur is still
+running."
+
+Here the captain who was evidently enjoying the narrative hugely, burst
+into a volcanic roar of laughter.
+
+"I can see yer yet, Pete, on that bounding buck of a nigger, and him
+a-hiking through the jungle and a-yelling like a wild Injun."
+
+"I remember you got out of the way mighty quick," said Pete, "when you
+heard us a-coming behind you."
+
+"It certainly was a curious spectacle," said the Captain, "but go on
+with your yarn, Pete."
+
+"The further we went into the jungle the worse it got. The mosquitoes
+fairly ate us alive and they wern't the only cannibals in those woods by
+any means. There was a tribe of man-eaters beyond the Big River and we
+didn't try to capture any of them. They wern't our stripe of bacon.
+
+"We went on for six days, with the monkeys chattering over our heads all
+day and the mosquitoes serenading us at night. Talk about birds, there
+was a whole menagerie of them and their colors beat the handkerchiefs
+that these greasers wear around their throats and you can't get ahead of
+that for color.
+
+"One night we got in range of the village we were after and there was a
+great pow-wow going on. There was a big fire in the circle of the grass
+huts and some big black bucks were doing a dance around it. Just then I
+saw--"
+
+"Hold on, Pete," said the Captain in a low, gruff voice, "somebody is
+coming our way."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE FOUR BOYS
+
+
+"Hey, Jim, where are we going to make camp?" It was his brother Jo's
+genial voice.
+
+"Not until we can strike water," replied Jim. "No more dry camps for
+me."
+
+"I don't think much of the coast range, or the Sierras, either." It was
+Juarez Hoskins' well-remembered voice, with its rather low, deep tones.
+
+"Give me the Rockies every time."
+
+Juarez was nothing if not loyal to his mountains.
+
+"I don't think any of the mountains are much to brag of."
+
+It is hardly necessary to say that it is Tom Darlington who is now
+speaking, for the discerning reader is pretty well acquainted with his
+style by this time.
+
+"There's always something to look out for," continued Tom, "if it isn't
+Indians it's rattlesnakes, and you have got to choose between a
+cloudburst or no water at all. Give me the East every time."
+
+"You make me exhausted talking about the East," said Jim. "Why didn't
+you stay there when you were there? I had just as soon take a chance
+with a rattlesnake as with an ice cream soda."
+
+"Tom would like to _play_ Indian," cut in Jo, "with turkey feathers
+sticking up from a red flannel band around his head. And creeping upon a
+flock of sheep pretending that they are antelope and that cows are real
+live bears."
+
+"Yes," said Jim, "you have lined it out all right, Jo. Then when they
+were tired of playing Injun, Tom and his little playmates could pretend
+that they were Daniel Boone's men with wildskin panties on."
+
+"Shut up, boys," said Juarez, coming to Tom's rescue. "What's the use in
+rubbing it in? The East is all right for some folks and if the boys back
+there can't have real adventures they have to do the best they can.
+After all, Jim, you are an Eastern boy. You can't get away from that."
+Jim writhed under the implication but replied good humoredly.
+
+"You're right, Juarez, old chap, but I can't help stirring up Tom once
+in a while. It is good for him too. It keeps his liver active, so he
+won't get bilious."
+
+"Juarez has got more sense than you two put together," said Tom.
+
+"Forget all about it now, Tommy," urged Juarez good-naturedly, getting
+the aforesaid Tommy by the nape of the neck with one vigorous brown hand
+and giving him a shake.
+
+Thus under Juarez's straightforward management the family quarrel was
+abated.
+
+"We might just as well ride now, boys," said Jim. "The horses are good
+and rested and we will soon be going down grade instead of up."
+
+The horses had been following in single file back of the four boys. They
+were to be trusted not to cut up any shindigs or to wander from the
+narrow mountain trail. The boys had had them a long time and together
+they had gone through the numerous hardships and adventures. They were
+as perfectly trained as Uncle Sam's cavalry horses.
+
+The horses halted as the boys dropped back to their sides, and they
+swung into the saddle simultaneously. Jim rode in the lead on a splendid
+gray, with a powerful arching neck, strong shoulders and hindquarters
+made for speed. Him, he called Caliente. Next rode Tom on a pretty bay.
+Then Jo on a black of medium size but finely built for speed and
+endurance. Juarez brought up the rear on his roan, a sinewy animal with
+a broncho strain in him which was liable to crop out at unexpected
+moments.
+
+It is to be noticed that there was a certain formation in the way the
+column rode. Jim, the strong and resourceful in front, and Tom, the less
+experienced and capable, following, forming the first division. The
+second division was composed of Jo and Juarez.
+
+Juarez having an equally important position with the leader, for he was
+rear guard, a more trying position sometimes than being in front for in
+their travels through dangerous regions, it was the man in the rear who
+was more apt to be cut off by the wily Indians. But the cool and crafty
+Juarez was not likely to be caught napping.
+
+Even now you notice as they ride along through the comparatively safe
+region of the coast range that Jim and Juarez are ever on the alert,
+glancing this way and that, halting to examine some peculiar mark on the
+trail, and not a motion of tree or bush upon either mountain slope
+escapes their attention. They had lived too long in the midst of
+treacherous enemies, Indians and outlaws, to be taken off their guard.
+They had been in Mexico on a venture the outcome of which was all their
+fondest dreams could wish for. Their expedition over, Tom was for going
+home, to at least deposit the treasure they had gained, but the others
+had outvoted him, and now the long pleasure trip to Hawaii was their
+object.
+
+Now, if they but had known it, they were riding to meet the most deadly
+danger that they had yet encountered. For as you know, Captain Broom and
+his party were advancing to meet them. In an open or running fight, we
+know perfectly well that the boys could take care of themselves, but in
+the skipper of the Sea Eagle, they were to meet a far more dangerous
+opponent than in Eagle Feather, described in "The Frontier Boys in
+Colorado" or Cal Jenkins in Kansas and in Mexico as detailed in
+"Overland Trail" and in "Mexico." In compliance with a determined plan,
+they were now on their way to Hawaii.
+
+Not only had Captain Broom the craftiness and cruelty of the Indian, but
+the cool, hard judgment of the New England Yankee, coupled with a
+knowledge of their possessions, supposedly limited to themselves alone.
+The Mexican spy, who had reported the route the boys were going to take,
+had given the game into his master's hands.
+
+"I wonder what has become of our one-eyed greaser friend," said Jim, "we
+haven't seen any sign of him since he gave us the shake a week ago at
+the hunting camp. I kind of thought we might run across him again."
+
+"It's good riddance to bad rubbish," said Juarez in a surly tone. "If I
+had my way I'd hang him to the first oak tree on general principles and
+on account of his personal appearance. I bet he is a treacherous little
+rat."
+
+"He isn't very pretty, that's a fact," admitted Jim, "but he is a useful
+little beast about the camp and can do a lot of chores."
+
+"I kind of like to hear him play his guitar," put in Jo, "and sing those
+Mexican tunes. They certainly sound pretty."
+
+"He's a picturesque beggar too," remarked Tom. "Just the kind that in
+the old days would have been made a king's jester. They dressed 'em up
+in a blazing bright style then. That hump would have made his fortune."
+
+Tom, as you remember, was an authority on Romance, and as pertaining to
+which he always carried two favorite volumes, much worn by hard travel
+and frequent usage, but which no amount of ridicule by his brothers
+could make him give up.
+
+"Have it your own way," acceded Juarez, "but he is not the sort of
+animal that I would recommend for a household pet."
+
+"Well, he is gone," said Jim, "so we don't need to worry about him."
+
+"I don't know but that I would a little rather have him in sight," said
+Juarez. "Then you know where he is."
+
+Jim laughed good-naturedly at the prejudice that Juarez showed against
+the little greaser and put it down to his darkly suspicious nature
+acquired by his life among the Indians. It would have been better if Jim
+had taken more stock in his comrade's suspicions. Now, Jim was not to be
+caught napping when once an enemy had declared himself, but it was his
+nature to be open-minded and unsuspicious.
+
+The four Frontier Boys were riding up a winding trail through a narrow
+mountain valley, having reached a point almost level with the summits,
+which rose several thousand feet above the eastern plain. It had been a
+hard, all day climb, and the horses were tired and the gray dust was
+caked upon their sweaty riders.
+
+Let us take a look at our old acquaintances, Jim, Tom, Jo and Juarez, to
+see if they have changed any since we saw them last. They are dressed
+about as we have always known them. In gray flannel shirts and pants of
+the same color, moccasins on their feet and on their heads battered
+sombreros with the flaps turned back.
+
+Their coats are tied back of the saddles, and their shirts open at the
+throat for the air is hot and dry in that California mountain valley.
+Their rifles are swung across their shoulders held by straps, revolvers
+in the holsters at their hips.
+
+Jim sits in the saddle tall and sinewy, grown somewhat thinner by
+constant exercise and by the drying effect of the desert air. His skin
+is baked to an absolute brown. Juarez, too, is black as an Indian and he
+rather looks like one with his hair quite long and of a coarse black
+fibre. The boys look a little fine-drawn but sinewy and strong and fit
+for any adventure.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE HUNCHBACK
+
+
+The shadows were already falling on that side of the range as the boys
+rode slowly into a narrow pass. The shade was a decided relief from the
+glare of the California sun that they had encountered all day.
+
+"Gosh, but I should like to have a cool breath from the Rockies,"
+declared Juarez with emphasis, "This sort of a climate makes me tired.
+Nothing but the sun staring at you all the time. It goes down clear and
+comes up with the same kind of a grin on its face."
+
+"It will be cooler when we get on the other side," said Jim,
+encouragingly, "and it won't be long now."
+
+"I hope we will strike water on the other side," remarked Jo. "I'm tired
+of looking at that bald-headed stream down there," indicating the dry
+blistered bed of a former water-course.
+
+Nothing more was said until of a sudden they rode to the top of the
+Pass, and saw a new landscape spread out before them.
+
+It was a broad and beautiful view, with the sun striking the wide
+Pacific, with a blazing glare of silver and below the wooded slope of
+the mountains, stretched an apparently level plain, where roamed
+countless cattle, and innumerable sheep. It had all the breadth
+characteristic of the Californian landscape.
+
+"That's a pretty good looking view," remarked Jim admiringly. He would
+have been still more interested if he could have seen a trim-looking
+black vessel in a small cove directly west but a good many miles
+distant.
+
+"I wonder if it isn't going to rain," said Tom. "See those clouds
+rolling in over the ocean."
+
+"Rain!" ejaculated Jim with superior wisdom, a wisdom that appertains
+particularly to older brothers, "I guess not. Those are fog clouds.
+That's a sure sign in this country that it won't rain."
+
+"Well, I'm glad to see them, anyway," said Juarez. "It looks sort of
+stormy even if it isn't."
+
+It was restful, there was no question about that, the change from the
+constant glare of a white sun in a blue sky, to the soft damp grayness
+of the fog. It was already rolling over the level plain towards the
+mountains and, in a short time, a high fog was spread over the whole
+sky.
+
+The boys had ridden down the western side of the range for a distance of
+a half mile, when Jim suddenly waved his hand backward in a sign of
+caution for the column to halt. He leaned forward, looking intently in a
+northwesterly direction to a point on the opposite side of the mountain
+valley. Juarez followed the direction of the leader's look with a keen
+gaze.
+
+"I was sure that I saw some one slipping through the undergrowth on the
+opposite side over there," Jim finally said, "but I could not make sure
+whether it was a man or some sort of animal."
+
+"I noticed the bushes shaking," said Juarez, "but I did not see
+anything."
+
+"Might have been a brown bear," hazarded Jo.
+
+"They do have them in this range," put in Tom.
+
+"Perhaps it is the bear that we hunted for two days on the other slope,"
+said Juarez, "and he has come to give himself up."
+
+"We had better keep our eyes open," advised Jim, though he did not take
+the trouble to unsling his rifle. "Jo, you and Tom watch the upper side,
+Juarez will take care of the trail in front."
+
+"All right, boss," said Juarez, cheerfully.
+
+"How much reward, captain, for the first glimpse of the lost child?"
+inquired Jo.
+
+Jim paid no attention to this sally, but kept his eye on the trail
+ahead. The trees were quite thick on either side of the trail and as
+dusk was coming on, it was difficult to make out any object clearly.
+
+Just as Jim rode around a turn in the trail, Caliente reared and leaped
+to one side and a less skillful rider would have been thrown.
+
+"Easy, old boy," said the rider, patting his horse's neck. Caliente
+stood trembling and snorting and watching a curious object that was
+struggling up the bank towards the trail.
+
+It was hard to tell what it was, whether man or beast and the dusk only
+served to make it more obscure. Then the object scrambled up on to the
+trail and Jim at once recognized the dwarf Mexican with his high-crowned
+sombrero and his velvet suit richly slashed. With his crooked back and
+one eye, he was anything but a prepossessing-looking creature. Caliente,
+when he, too, recognized who it was, put back his ears and rushed with
+bared teeth for the Mexican.
+
+Spitting out a curse, the greaser jumped to one side with a marked
+agility, and Jim succeeded after a struggle in bringing his furious
+steed to terms, but he had his hands full and there were not very many
+men who could manage Caliente when he got into one of his rages.
+
+"Hi! Manuel," (every Mexican was Manuel to the boys), cried Jim, "look
+out for my Tiger, he wants to eat that velvet suit of yours."
+
+"Si, Senor," called Manuel from a safe station on a granite rock. "He is
+a tiger as your Honor says."
+
+One would have expected to hear the crooked little greaser speak in a
+harsh croaking voice, but instead it had a rich sonorous quality.
+
+"Do you know where there is any water in this country?" asked Jo. "We
+are as dry as a desert."
+
+"Certainly, Senor, I will show you," replied Manuel. (It was true that
+Manuel spoke in Spanish of which language the boys had a working
+knowledge, due to their sojourn in the southwest. But I shall put his
+words in English.) "Where is Senor Juarez?" inquired the dwarf. "I do
+not see him."
+
+"The Senor is still with us," replied Jim, gravely, "but you cannot see
+him on account of the dusk, but you might hear him," he added in a lower
+tone.
+
+It was true that Juarez was growling to himself about the greaser for
+whom you know he had a cordial antipathy, a feeling which was
+reciprocated by the Mexican.
+
+"Lead on, Manuel," urged Jim, "we want to make camp before morning."
+
+"But, Senor, the tiger will eat me up," objected the Mexican.
+
+"I will take care of Caliente. He won't bite you. Go ahead."
+
+"Si, Senor," assented Manuel.
+
+Then he jumped down from the rock and took the trail at a discreet
+distance ahead of Jim's horse, who was held in check by his rider though
+his temper seemed in no wise abated. There was something sinister in the
+figure of the Mexican as he led the way down the trail.
+
+All in black, except the gray of his hat with its golden cord and the
+tinsel of his clothes. There was something malignant in his make-up and
+even the unimaginative Jim was affected by the presence of the Mexican,
+while Juarez was very uneasy, and asked Jo and Tom to allow him to move
+up next to the Captain. This they did, though it left Jo as rear guard
+on that rocky trail.
+
+He seemed quite isolated but he had become sufficiently enured to danger
+and though he kept a wary eye, he was not nervous. The boys had
+unholstered their pistols and Juarez kept a straight eye on the moving
+shadow in the darkness ahead. At the first sign of attack or treachery,
+he was going to get that particular Manuel.
+
+"I've got my eye on the little varmint," said Juarez in a low voice to
+Jim. "He may be leading us into an ambush."
+
+"Oh, I guess not," said Jim, with a note of hesitation in his voice. "We
+have got to find water anyway. The horses are suffering for it, and this
+beggar can show us where we can locate it."
+
+Just then Manuel threw up his hand with a shrill whistle that had every
+malignant intention in it. Juarez raised his pistol just ready to fire,
+when the Mexican laughed shrilly.
+
+"Senor Juarez very nervous. I just stretch and whistle a little and he
+want to shoot."
+
+A peculiar smile came over Juarez's face, but he said nothing. All the
+stolid Indian in his nature came to the surface. He merely grunted
+contemptuously at the Mexican's remark and this made the volatile Manuel
+uneasy in his turn, for he wanted to realize that his malice had struck
+home, but Juarez did not give him that satisfaction. There was a sort of
+hidden duel between these two, the subtle Mexican and the crafty Indian
+nature of Juarez. It remained to be seen who would win.
+
+The four Frontier Boys went silently along down the dark canyon, each
+one occupied with his own thoughts and the ill-omened Mexican guide in
+the lead. Juarez kept a sharp lookout on either side of the trail
+expecting an ambush. His horse seemed to feel something of the strain
+his rider was under, as a horse will. Once he shied at something he saw
+in a clump of bushes, and nearly went off the trail. It was only with
+the aid of Juarez's horsemanship that he clawed his way back to safety.
+The Mexican was much amused at this incident, and Jim gave him a sharp
+call down.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+FARMER BROOM
+
+
+We must now return to Captain Broom and his escort, whom we left sitting
+on a hill covered with trees near the Sebastian rancho. Old Pete's story
+had been interrupted by the skipper's warning,--"Somebody is coming our
+way."
+
+There was no question about that, they could hear the someone coming
+towards the hill whistling cheerfully. Then the form of a man could be
+seen, coming up the slope of the elevation.
+
+"I wonder where those altogether blessed cows are," he was heard saying
+in Spanish, but of course, this is a free and not a literal translation.
+
+"They are generally hiding under these trees," he continued. The sailors
+kept absolutely still and old Pete covered the bowl of his pipe with his
+hand so that its light might not discover them.
+
+"Carambe!" cried the Mexican as he stopped about three feet from the
+recumbent Captain, "I fear my good master's cows have been smoking, not
+like nice Mexican cows, a cigarette, but a pipe like a vile gringo.
+Come, get up, you black brute," noticing the big bulk of the Captain for
+the first time, and he hauled off and gave the skipper a hearty kick on
+the haunch.
+
+Never was there a more surprised greaser in the whole ungainly length of
+California for this apparently gentle cow that he kicked, (not for the
+first time either) suddenly turned and grabbed him with a powerful hand
+before he could yell, though he was so frightened that he probably could
+not utter a squeak. Another hand got him by the throat.
+
+"Take me for a cow, did you, you bespangled Manuello?" roared the
+Captain, and he waved the aforesaid Manuello about in his great grip as
+though he had been a rag.
+
+"No use killing the beggar, Captain," said the mate. "Maybe he can tell
+us something." The Captain let the Mexican drop and he lay on the ground
+perfectly inert.
+
+"He won't be able to say much right away," said the Skipper.
+
+It was now getting light, the first signs of dawn showing above the
+mountains. As the darkness was drawn away, they could see their position
+more clearly and there came the sounds of the morning from the direction
+of the ranch houses. The barking of dogs, the crowing of roosters, and
+the call of human voices.
+
+"I guess, lads, it's about time for us to have something to eat," said
+the Captain, "because we have got to do some tall climbing today and I
+want to get an early start."
+
+An expression of disgust showed itself on old Pete's face at the idea of
+more walking, which the Captain was quick to note.
+
+"How would you like to stay here, Old Bones, and look after Manuello?"
+said the skipper. But Pete shook his head.
+
+"I'll stay by the ship, Cap'n," said the old fellow stoutly.
+
+"Durn my buttons," said the Captain, whose oaths were as mild as his
+actions were vicious, "if you ain't a good old barnacle, Pete. I
+wouldn't think of leaving you in such company as this," and he gave the
+prostrate Mexican a shove with his foot. Manuello looked up at the
+Captain with an evil eye and a muttered curse.
+
+This roused the fury of Captain Broom and he held him off from the
+ground as if he had been a rat, his jaws working ominously and a look in
+his eyes that made the Mexican shrivel.
+
+Nothing was said, not even by the Skipper, and the others watched him
+fascinated as he glared at his victim, and even the iron composure of
+the saturnine mate seemed to be moved partially aside. The Mexican began
+to whimper and moan as his eyes shifted to avoid the terrible ones of
+the Captain. He was not suffering any special violence, but a strange
+tremor filled the soul of the Mexican, in the grip of the grizzled
+giant.
+
+As the greaser began to cry, the Captain gave a roar of laughter and
+threw him aside upon the ground, about all the humanity he had shriveled
+out of him. He lay there absolutely without any power of motion in his
+body.
+
+Just then the crew of the Sea Eagle became aware of the fact that a
+horned animal with big brown eyes was looking at them. All the farmer in
+the nature of Captain Broom came to the surface.
+
+"By Gum," he exclaimed, "if here ain't a bovine cow looking at us. I
+ain't milked one for forty years, but I'm not afeard to try. 'Member,
+Pete, when we used to milk the cows back in old Connecticut on the farm.
+After working in the hay all day, I'd go down in the side hill pasture,
+that was so steep that you had to hold on with your toes and your teeth
+to keep from sliding down to the brook."
+
+"You bring it back to me just like it was a living picture," said Pete,
+his hard face softening under the gentle showers of memory.
+
+"Then I'd drive the black and white one that was breechy, and the red
+mooley, the yaller and white that gave the richest milk. I'd drive them
+into the stanchions in the old barn, with the ground floor stoned up on
+the side, where it was sunk into the hill."
+
+"But it was winter, Cap'n," said Pete, "that it was interesting doing
+the chores," and he blew reminiscently on his fingers, "snow two feet on
+the level and the sun a piece of blue ice in the sky. A condemned sight
+better place than Californey, where you don't feel no more alive than a
+enbalmed corpse."
+
+The Captain began now a series of manoeuvres to get within range of
+one of the cows so that they might have fresh milk for breakfast. He
+managed it finally, and he certainly looked like a peaceful old farmer
+as with his gray head against a fat red cow's flank, he milked into a
+large tin cup. Pete selected a black mooley and soothed by the man's
+persuasive manner, she consented finally to give down a thin blue
+stream. But the saturnine mate was less successful as he knew much more
+about navigating a ship than he did about cows.
+
+Finally after much awkward manoeuvring, he got a cow cornered and
+began operations upon the left side with the result that the cow landed
+upon him with her hoof and sent him sprawling on his back to the great
+delight of the Captain.
+
+"Hurt bad, Bill?" inquired the Skipper with mock sympathy, "I'm afeard
+that you will never make a farmer."
+
+"I never calkerlated to," replied the mate. "It ain't my line of
+business."
+
+"Don't tell me that," said the Captain, "I can see that for myself. Come
+up here and I'll give you a drink."
+
+They had scarcely finished their simple breakfast when Jack Cales gave a
+sudden alarm.
+
+"Cap'n," he cried, "I see two men legging it our way. They are making
+straight for the hill."
+
+"I guess they are coming to see why Manuello doesn't show up with the
+cows," remarked the Captain, "we don't want to stir up this hen roost as
+we've got other chicken to fry. So we'll git."
+
+"Take the greaser?" inquired Jack.
+
+"You and the mate fetch him," said the Captain.
+
+Just as the two men were mounting the hill, the Captain and his crew
+made a swift sneak down the opposite slope, and were soon making their
+way through the bush towards the foot-hills. In a minute they heard the
+cries of the two men as they drove the herd of cows towards the home
+ranch for the morning milking. The sun had now risen above the eastern
+range just in front of them and was blazing down upon the plain and the
+sea beyond. There was something exhilarating in the air in spite of the
+heat.
+
+"We don't need the company of that greaser any further," said Captain
+Broom, after they had made some headway up a canyon back of the ranch
+buildings. So they took some rope grass, tough as manilla, and tied him
+firmly, and, after having gagged him, they left him to be found later by
+some of his countrymen.
+
+Then they toiled steadily up the trail of the canyon, until about noon
+they reached a pocket in the canyon where there was a pool of clear
+water fed by an invisible spring. Coming to meet them were four boys
+riding up the trail on the other side of the range.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+THE CAMP IN THE POCKET
+
+
+Under the guidance of the Mexican dwarf, the four boys came at last to a
+halt. It seemed as if the canyon down which they had been riding had
+come to an end for there was a wall of rock directly in front of them.
+
+"Down there, Senor, is a pool of clear water," announced the Mexican.
+
+"Glad to hear it, Manuel," said Jim heartily.
+
+"Did you ever see a picture, Jim," put in Juarez significantly, "of a
+pool where the thirsty animals have to come to drink and before they get
+their noses in the water the hunter shoots them?"
+
+But nothing of this dire nature happened and in a few minutes the
+famished animals were pumping the delicious water down their long, baked
+throats.
+
+"My Gracious, but that tastes good!" cried Tom, drawing in a long,
+gasping breath, after he had been drinking steadily for about a minute.
+"It makes my head swim."
+
+"I should think it would," said Jo, sarcastically, "considering the
+amount you have drunk."
+
+"You weren't far behind," grumbled Tom. "I thought that you were not
+going to leave enough for the horses."
+
+"I don't especially like this place to camp in," said Jim. "We are not
+accustomed to get in a pocket like this. But it is too late to pull out
+tonight and the horses need a rest, so we will keep guard."
+
+"Better drown the brown rat first," remarked Juarez to Jim. But the
+latter only shook his head and laughed.
+
+The camp was made about twenty feet east of the spring in a small grove
+of slender trees backed by a high wall of steep granite, down which
+poured a waterfall in the rainy season.
+
+The fire was built upon a flat rock in the centre of the grove where
+there was no danger of it catching in the grass and bushes which were
+dry as tinder. If once a mountain fire was started at the end of the dry
+season there would be no stopping it until it had devastated the whole
+country.
+
+The light of the fire showed the usual cheery and active scene that goes
+with making camp. How many times the Frontier Boys had gone through
+these preparations it is impossible to say. They had camped on the
+plains of Kansas, in the mountains of Colorado, on the Mesas of New
+Mexico, the banks of the Colorado river, and the Pampas of Mexico. Now
+we find them in the coast range of California.
+
+It was not an especially dangerous country in which they were camped,
+nothing to compare with parts of Colorado and Mexico, but never were
+they in greater danger than at the present moment and this camp promised
+to be their last together, except they had unusual luck.
+
+There was a traitor in the company, and even now four pairs of hostile
+eyes were watching them as they moved in the light of the fire. The
+Captain of the Sea Eagle and his three trusty men were hidden in some
+bushes at the top of the pocket on the western side.
+
+Juarez and Jim busied themselves first in looking after their horses.
+Removing the saddles they rubbed down each animal thoroughly, clear to
+the fetlocks and then gave them a good feed of grain. Jo and Tom were on
+the supper committee and busying themselves making preparations for a
+square meal. Manuello, who had been with the boys on the other side of
+the range and was accustomed to help in odd chores about camp, now
+offered to aid in getting the supper.
+
+"I will make the coffee with your permission, Senor Jo," he proposed.
+
+"Do you savvy it all right, Manuello?" inquired Jo.
+
+"Ah, yes, Senor. I can make such coffee as the Holy Father would be
+pleased to drink," he replied with fervor.
+
+"Not too strong because it keeps me awake," protested Tom.
+
+"No, no, Senor Thomas," replied Manuello with a sweeping bow, "the
+coffee I make is very soothing. It will give you a long, soft sleep."
+There was an undertone of subtle irony that was entirely lost upon the
+two straightforward boys.
+
+"That's a good fellow, Manuello," said Jo, cordially, and he handed the
+coffee pot filled with water to the Mexican, who went about the
+preparation of it with a deftness that showed that he knew what he was
+about. Not one of the boys saw him slip a white powder into the coffee
+pot. It quickly dissolved and the coffee began to bubble innocently
+enough under the eyes of the hunchback Manuello.
+
+Juarez and Jim just then came back from looking after the horses which
+were fastened near the wall of rock. As soon as Juarez saw the Mexican
+watching over the coffee pot, his eyes narrowed with suspicion.
+
+"Who made the coffee?" he asked Jo, bluntly.
+
+"Manuello," replied Jo.
+
+"The Senor will find the coffee truly delicious," said the hunchback
+with a bow, "only the Mexican knows how to keep its aroma when boiling
+it."
+
+"Humph," grunted Juarez, and he went deliberately to the fire and lifted
+the coffee pot off and poured its contents on the ground.
+
+"The American does not care for the aroma of your Mexican coffee," he
+said coolly.
+
+The Mexican merely gave a peculiar hitch to his shoulder, spat on the
+ground and turned away apparently mortally offended as he, no doubt,
+was. That part of his scheme had been blocked by the craftiness of
+Juarez, but the Captain might make good where his spy had failed.
+
+The Mexican sat back in the shadow on a rock smoking a cigarette, while
+the boys ate their supper of beans, meat, bread and coffee. He was the
+skeleton at the feast as it were, not only his malignant humor made
+itself felt, but there was a sense of depression that they could not
+shake off, try as they would.
+
+This was so unusual that they could not account for it. As a rule, they
+were jolly and even when danger was impending, they felt a certain
+confidence and assurance, but not so tonight.
+
+"What makes us feel so on the bum tonight, do you suppose?" asked Tom.
+
+"Maybe this canyon is haunted," proposed Jo, who had an imaginative
+streak in him.
+
+"I tell you the way I figure it," said Jim. "We are not used to camping
+in a hollow like this, for before this we have always selected a place
+that we could defend, and though there is no particular danger from
+outlaws or Indians in these mountains, we can't shake off our old
+habits."
+
+"I believe there is something in that," acquiesced Jo.
+
+"It's that rat over there," said Juarez loudly.
+
+The Mexican laughed coolly and insolently, and lighted another
+cigarette. This would have maddened an excitable person, but Juarez was
+in a stoical mood and he contented himself with flinging a bone that he
+had been gnawing at, carelessly over his shoulder, almost striking the
+Mexican in the face.
+
+This set that peppery individual wild and he tore around considerably,
+tearing his hair, stamping his feet and sputtering with maledictions at
+the insult that had been offered him.
+
+"I am no dog that you can throw a bone to," and he sizzled off into a
+string of unpleasant remarks.
+
+"Here you, Manuello," roared Jim, rising to his feet and standing over
+the Mexican, "not another yelp out of you."
+
+Manuello had a respect for this big American lad much as he despised his
+simplicity and he sobered down. Besides he had not finished his work for
+the night. He had failed to get the sleeping drug to the boys in the
+coffee and now he must be ready to help his master, Captain Broom of the
+Sea Eagle, in some other way.
+
+There was a person whom he feared and admired absolutely and he had been
+a most useful spy and agent for the Skipper in certain nefarious plots.
+It was well for the little hunchback that no one knew of his share in
+the betraying of old Juan Sebastian some years before.
+
+"You will have the first watch, Jo," ordered Jim. "It is now nine
+o'clock. I will relieve you at eleven and stand guard until two. Juarez
+from two until five and Tom can have the short watch."
+
+According to this arrangement, Jim and Juarez would be on guard during
+the danger hours.
+
+How many times in the past had the boys stood guard over their camp. Was
+this to be the last guard? There were the old Kansas days, when they had
+to be on the watch against horse thieves. Then came the dangerous crisis
+in their Colorado experiences, when they had to guard against the wiles
+of the Indians. And most exciting of all, perhaps, the night in old
+Mexico when they camped on the trail of the outlaws. I wonder if Jo, the
+first on duty, thought of these old times that night. Probably not, his
+mind being fully occupied with the business in hand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE ATTACK
+
+
+So the three boys rolled into their blankets with the saddles for
+pillows and dropped immediately to sleep as they were very tired from
+the long, hard ride. They lay at different points around the fire, which
+was allowed to die down as the fog seemed like a warm gray blanket over
+the whole landscape.
+
+Jo sat on a log by the slowly dying fire, with his rifle on his knees
+looking into the darkness and not far from him lay the Mexican a mere
+dark lump on the ground, apparently asleep, but keeping a wary eye on
+all around. Imperceptibly he crept nearer to where Jo was sitting, but
+he did not have the weapon he would have preferred in his hand, the
+stiletto, which was as natural to him as the fangs to a rattlesnake.
+
+But it did not suit the long-headed Captain Broom to have the boys
+killed. He wanted their life as well as their money, but in a different
+sense than the adage has it. From what he had heard of them, they were
+boys of unusual mettle and varied acquirements. If caught young, he
+could train them to good purpose. If they proved worthless, he would
+hold them for ransom.
+
+So Captain Broom had told Manuello briefly and to the point that there
+was to be no rib-sticking and the Mexican would have thought as soon of
+disobeying the commands of the Evil One as of going contrary to the
+instructions of the Captain. So as he crept towards Jo, he held not a
+poniard in his clenched hand, but a heavy weapon like a black-jack, made
+of leather with a weight at the end.
+
+Jo, however, spoiled his first attempt, for when the greaser had got
+within striking distance, Jo got up and went down to the pool to get a
+drink. If it had not been so dark, when they arrived, the boys would
+have seen tracks around the pool that would have aroused their
+suspicions. But everything seemed to work against them this time.
+
+Jo stooped down at the brink and scarcely put his thirsty lips to the
+water when some instinct of warning made him look quickly around and he
+saw a small dark object directly back of him.
+
+"Pardon, Senor, for startling you;" it was the voice of the dwarf, "but
+I, too, was very thirsty. It is in the air."
+
+"You needn't have been so quiet about it," said Jo, crossly. This little
+rat always had a way of baffling and irritating him, because he did not
+have Jim's force, which could beat down the dwarf when occasion demanded
+it, or the stoicism of Juarez, which blocked the hunchback.
+
+"I came softly, Senor," said the Mexican, imperturbably, "because I did
+not wish to disturb the slumbers of the Senors who are resting."
+
+"Get down and drink, then," said Jo, who, though he realized that the
+Mexican was up to some hidden deviltry, did not know how to meet him.
+Jim and Juarez would have knocked him out of the camp if they had
+discovered him trailing them, with a warning that he would be shot if he
+put in an appearance again.
+
+While the Mexican was pretending to drink, Jo satisfied his thirst at a
+point of the pool where he would be safe from a sudden attack by the
+hunchback. For Jo was not a fool by any means. Then he got to his feet
+and with the Mexican ahead of him, he saw to that, he made his way back
+to the camp.
+
+Scarcely had Jo seated himself upon the rock again than he heard a stick
+snap upon the mountain side above the horses, so he got to his feet to
+investigate.
+
+"You can stay where you are, Manuello," said Jo. "I don't need your
+company this time." The Mexican laughed softly to himself.
+
+"I hope the Senor Americano will not get lonesome," he said.
+
+Jo made a careful search in the direction of the sound but found no sign
+of a human being lurking among the trees. Though he felt exceedingly
+nervous, he was unable to account therefor or give a reason.
+
+Very quietly he went the rounds, so as not to awake the boys, who,
+however, were sleeping heavily. He found the horses all right standing
+with drooping heads as though dozing, Jo's black with his neck over
+Tom's bay, as these horses were great chums. But Caliente and Juarez's
+roan were not sociable and kept strictly to themselves.
+
+Then Jo returned to the rock where he had been sitting. He stirred the
+dying fire so that it sent up a feeble spurt of flame by the aid of
+which he looked at his watch. It lacked a few minutes of ten. The
+Mexican had taken up his old place on the ground watching for his
+chance. He was anxious that the attack should take place during Jo's
+watch for he had his doubts in regard to Juarez or the redoubtable Jim
+proving easy victims.
+
+All this time, Captain Bill Broom and his crew had been keeping watch
+upon their intended victims from the top of the cliff above the pool.
+They could see every move from the time the Frontier Boys had arrived
+until they lay down near the smouldering fire.
+
+"They are a husky lot," was the Captain's first comment. "That tall
+fellar, I guess, is a horse tamer and Injun fighter."
+
+Some time later when the altercation occurred about the coffee and
+Juarez expressed his opinion about the Mexican, the Captain could
+scarcely keep from haw-hawing right out.
+
+"Them fellars have got some dis'pline," commented the saturnine mate.
+
+"You're right they hev," said the Captain.
+
+"That lad don't know how to handle my pet rattlesnake," was the
+Captain's comment when the Mexican trailed Jo to the drinking pool.
+After Jo had returned from making his rounds and had resumed his guard
+again, the Captain decided that the time had come for action.
+
+"Now, lads," he ordered, "pull off your shoes and the first man that
+makes a sound will get his neck cracked. Knock 'em out, if necessary,
+but no killing this time."
+
+Then they started, the Captain in the lead, and old Pete bringing up the
+rear. They had had a good many hours in that vicinity and had made a
+path from their hiding place to the soft dust trail. So they moved in
+their sock feet without a sound. There was an oppressive stillness in
+that dark canyon under the heavy blanket of fog.
+
+Already it had began to lower and as the sailors advanced with
+snail-like slowness the heavy white fog settled down, filling the canyon
+with its white opaqueness. You could not see five feet in front, and the
+moisture beaded itself upon the eyebrows and mustaches of the men.
+
+This dense fog was a great help to the attacking party. They had now
+crawled half way down the main trail, when Pete came near putting all
+the fat in the fire, for his eyesight was not overly keen, and the fog
+made it more difficult for him. He did not see a round stone poised on
+the edge of the trail until it rolled down towards the pool.
+
+Although every sound was deadened by the fog, still the watchful Jo
+heard it distinctly. He got quickly to his feet and, with soft
+moccasined tread he went in the direction of the sound, his pistol in
+his hand.
+
+No sooner had the stone fallen than the Captain motioned the mate to
+halt. This signal was repeated to Jack Cales, who was so hidden by the
+fog that he could not see the Captain. He stopped suddenly so that old
+Pete tumbled over him, making some noise.
+
+The Captain almost had a fit of apoplexy because he did not dare express
+himself at this interesting juncture. Jo had heard the noise on the
+trail and his suspicions centered in that direction. Noiselessly he went
+up with slight footprints in the damp dust of the trail. The Captain
+waited his coming, crouched behind a bend in the trail.
+
+Then Jo saw a huge figure rising suddenly out of the fog in front of him
+and, before he could fire, a great hand gripped for his throat, but if
+he could not shoot in defense, at least he could give his comrades
+warning. He fired one shot, and then he was overpowered.
+
+Jim and Juarez heard it instantly. Then Manuello got in some of his
+work. Before Juarez could rise, he struck him a vicious blow upon the
+head that stunned him, rendering him unconscious. Cold with fury, Jim
+picked up the rat of a Mexican before he could land a blow upon him,
+whirled him over his head and dashed him upon the ground.
+
+Then he sprang through the fog in the direction of the shot. He heard Jo
+groan as the ruffians overpowered him and he leaped up the trail blind
+with a fighting rage. The Captain had just got up from the struggle
+with Jo, who lay as good as dead in the trail.
+
+Then Jim hurled himself upon him. Powerful though he was, the Captain
+could not withstand the sinewy lurch of that sudden attack and together
+boy and man crashed from the trail over rocks and through brush until
+with a fearful impact they struck the trunk of a pine tree.
+
+The mate sprang swiftly down to the rescue of his fallen master. He was
+a strong, sinewy man and knew how to act in an emergency.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+"HAUL IN"
+
+
+The jar of the fall had knocked out the Captain partially and Jim had
+risen to give him the coup de grace, when he heard the rush of the mate
+coming down through the fog. It was a strange sensation hearing your
+enemy but not able to see him.
+
+Then the mate plunged into view, a dark ball through the opaqueness. He
+could not have stopped if he had so desired and it was evident that he
+did not wish to. For, with lowered head, he came for Jim as he would for
+an ugly sailor.
+
+Jim stopped him with his shoulder and ripped in a right uppercut with
+his keen hard fist that would have stopped the heart action of an
+ordinary man, and it sent the seasoned mate back upon his haunches,
+partially dazed. Feeling the Captain squirming back to life, he planted
+a back blow with his heel in the latter's stomach that took the wind out
+of the Captain's sails for the time being. The mate, a really hardy
+individual, had made good use of the brief respite and, picking up a
+heavy stick, came for Jim with it.
+
+The latter dodged the blow aimed at his head and it glanced off his
+shoulder. Then he closed with the sailor, struggling to put him out.
+Three seconds more and Jim would have landed the proper blow, had not
+Jack Cales arrived upon the scene under cover of the mêlée. Before Jim
+could turn to meet this new assailant, a stone crashed against his
+head--and the frontier boys had lost.
+
+The Captain had now recovered sufficiently to get on his feet, and the
+fallen Jim was kicked until the Captain himself called a halt.
+
+"Wait till we get him on board ship, lads," he said, "and we will finish
+this job."
+
+"Better get the other two, Cap'n," advised the mate.
+
+So they dragged the prostrate Jim to the foot of the trail near where
+the drinking pool was and went to look for Juarez and Tom. They saw a
+small black object crawling towards them through the fog.
+
+"What's this a coming?" asked Jack Cales.
+
+"Why, it's my Mexican ferret," said the Captain. "What's the matter,
+Manuello?" he asked as he turned him over none too gently with his foot.
+
+"The big Senor throw me over his head and on the ground. I think I
+crack the world open," he explained. The Captain roared with laughter.
+
+"Where is the rest of this dangerous gang?" he asked.
+
+"I will show you," he said, struggling to his feet. The presence of his
+master gave him strength and confidence. "This way, Senor Captain."
+
+He brought them to where Juarez lay upon the ground, partially held up
+by Tom, who had been crying and endeavoring to bring his comrade back to
+consciousness from the ugly blow that the Mexican had given him. I am
+sure that none could blame Tom for tears upon this occasion for it was
+calculated to try the heart of the stoutest.
+
+"Why, this boy looks like an Indian," said the Captain regarding Juarez
+closely.
+
+"He lived with the Indians when a boy, Senor Captain," volunteered the
+dwarf, who by subtle means of his own had become possessed of the
+history of the four boys.
+
+"He don't seem to be much more than a boy, now," said the Captain. They
+had not paid much attention to Tom because he seemed a mere kid, but the
+hunchback was not to be caught napping, for he had worked around back of
+Tom, and as the latter aimed his revolver at the Captain, having worked
+it cautiously out of his holster, the dwarf grabbed him in the nick of
+time else the expedition would have lost its head.
+
+Instead of being infuriated as one might have expected, the Captain was
+decidedly amused at the temerity of the youngster, for that is all Tom
+appeared to him, and, therefore, he did not hand him a beating.
+
+"The nerve of the little rooster," guffawed the Captain. "I'll make a
+real pirate out of you."
+
+Tom struggled wildly, but it was no use, as Jack Cales and the mate
+disarmed him. Just then there came a loud yell from up the trail.
+
+"Haul in, Cap'n!" It was Old Pete's well known and melodious voice.
+
+"Jack, go and see what the old cuss wants," ordered the Captain. "I
+expect that the lad up there is trying to kidnap Pete."
+
+When Jack arrived on the scene, he found that the Skipper had guessed
+right. For Jo had been playing possum and was not nearly so badly hurt
+as he had appeared to be.
+
+He came near escaping from his keeper and it was only by a quick forward
+lunge that Pete had grabbed him and then occurred a short struggle in
+which Pete had called for help and just as Jo had wrestled himself
+loose, Cales appeared and grabbed him. It took both Pete and Cales
+quite a while to subdue him.
+
+Finally it was accomplished and they made him go down the trail, one on
+either side. At the foot of the incline he saw the bruised and battered
+form of Jim lying on the ground and a big lump came into his throat.
+
+"You fellows will pay for this," he said, rendered desperate by the
+sight of Jim. But his captors only laughed, not realizing that the
+Frontier Boys were apt to keep their word.
+
+Then they joined the main gang and Jo saw to his dismay that Tom and
+Juarez were in the coils as well as himself and that Juarez, too, had
+been laid out and appeared dazed and only partially conscious of what
+was going on. Thus there was little hope of escape with the two leaders,
+Jim and Juarez, done for.
+
+"Better search these beggars for their money, Captain," suggested the
+mate.
+
+"It hadn't slipped my mind," replied the Skipper.
+
+Now the money and the jewels that the boys had found in Mexico were in
+leather belts around their bodies. These were soon in the possession of
+the Captain, but the crew knew full well that they would receive their
+share and thus it was that the Skipper gave promise of living to a ripe
+old age instead of being murdered for his money.
+
+"It's about time to make a start, Cap'n," announced the mate, and the
+Captain consulted his watch by the light of a lantern. He found that it
+was half-past eleven.
+
+"We won't be so long going back," he said. "We will use their horses."
+
+This was easier said than done, for when any of the crew approached
+Caliente, that noble animal became transformed into a tiger and as he
+came for them with bared teeth or whirled and kicked out with his heels,
+they decided that discretion was the better part of valor and they left
+him alone. Sailors at best are not very clever horsemen.
+
+"Let me have a chance and I'll quiet him for you," volunteered Jim
+gruffly. "I don't want to see you poor fellows eaten alive."
+
+"My lad," said the Skipper solemnly, "I'm no spring chicken and you
+can't catch me with any such chaff."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE
+
+
+The other three horses proved more tractable than Caliente, and after
+some skirmishing they managed to get their new ships rigged up with the
+saddles and other tackle. Now as soon as they got their cargo aboard,
+they would be prepared to set sail and to cruise over the plains. (I
+must use this nautical language out of respect for Captain Broom and his
+crew.)
+
+As I have said before, sailors are poor horsemen and when it came to
+making fast the double cinches, they were quite at sea, where sailors
+should be, perhaps. Old Pete came near getting his head kicked off by
+pulling the back cinch too tight, but he and Captain Broom profited by
+their youthful experience on a New England farm, so the horses were
+finally all saddled and bridled and ready for a flight--except Caliente.
+He was to be left marooned in the lonely canyon.
+
+It was surprising to Jim and his comrades how quietly Juarez's roan took
+matters, but there is no relying on a broncho, because he always does
+the unexpected, and the Captain was so pleased with his behavior that
+he decided to ride the animal himself.
+
+"Now, that's what I call a well broken hoss," he said. "I ain't so sure
+of the black so I will let you cruise on him, Jack, being the most
+active. I don't know what I shall do for Pete, unless I can find him a
+rocking-horse."
+
+"What are you going to do with the boys?" inquired the mate. "Have 'em
+walk?"
+
+"They can ride their pack mule," said the Captain grimly.
+
+So Jo, Juarez and Jim were securely fastened on the patient mule, while
+Tom rode behind the mate upon his own horse, but no longer as master.
+Then the queer procession started up the trail through the dense fog.
+The Captain was in the lead, followed by the mate with Tom, then the
+mule with Pete and the Mexican dwarf guarding the animal and its cargo,
+while the active Jack Cales was the rear guard. It was exactly twelve
+o'clock when they weighed anchor and sailed from the harbor or cove in
+the mountain canyon.
+
+The three boys said little to each other. They did not waste their
+breath with threats of what they would do to their captors later on, but
+accepted the situation with true western stoicism. But you may be sure
+that their minds were active even if their tongues said little.
+
+They were so securely tied that there was no chance for them to make a
+move as their arms were corded tight to their bodies and their feet were
+tied under the belly of the mule. Unless they had been experienced
+riders they would have had a difficult time of it. But it was terribly
+humiliating, especially under the insolence of the malignant Mexican.
+But he did not dare do them any actual injury, because the Skipper had
+given him a warning which he did not dare to disregard. Finally, old
+Pete put an end to his slurring remarks to the prisoners, so he had to
+content himself with ugly looks and frequent expectoration wherewith to
+express his disgust.
+
+Before they reached the foot of the trail, Jack Cales changed with Pete,
+though the latter demurred at first, at boarding the strange black craft
+with four legs, but finally consented under the urging of Jack and the
+warm recommendation of the boys, who had taken somewhat of a fancy to
+the old sailor, since he had shut up the Mexican in their behalf.
+
+"He won't hurt you, Pop," said Jim, "he is a good horse. Any lady could
+ride him."
+
+"I ain't no lady," replied the old fellow suspiciously, as he slowly
+and stiffly mounted, while Jack held his head, that is to say, the
+horse's head, not Pete's.
+
+"What did he do that for?" inquired Pete, anxiously, preparing to
+dismount.
+
+"Stay on, you old Barnacle," roared the Captain from the head of the
+procession, for though he could not see anything in the rear, still he
+seemed able to keep an instinctive tab on his old comrade Pete.
+
+"That horse is all right, Pop," said Jo, "and I ought to know. I've
+ridden him a good many hundred miles. Don't tickle him with your heels,
+that's all."
+
+"I guess that's what I've done," admitted Pete.
+
+Then the procession resumed its march with Pete as rear guard, riding
+with due caution and circumspection as though his craft was loaded with
+dynamite and liable to explode at any time. Jack Cales tried to quiz the
+prisoners on the mule in a friendly way, but they would not relax in
+their attitude of grim, if not sullen, defiance towards their captors.
+
+Captain Broom need not think that his prisoners would ever accept any
+conditions from him. Doubtless, he thought that these boys might be
+trained to help him in his business for he appreciated their courage
+and fighting ability, but he did not fully understand what stuff the
+frontier boys were made of.
+
+The procession of pirates and their prisoners had now reached the foot
+of the range and were in close proximity to the ranch, but everything
+favored the plans of the Skipper of the Sea Eagle. The fog became denser
+when they reached the level plain so that it was scarcely possible for
+the rider to see the ears of his horse.
+
+Every sound was deadened, so that they could have gone directly past the
+ranch houses and not even the dogs would have heard them. But the
+Captain was determined to take no chances, and as soon as the party were
+free of the canyon, he bore off toward the south, making quite a
+circuit.
+
+Anybody but an experienced navigator would have been lost in the fog
+upon the plain, but you could not lose Captain Broom either on the high
+seas or the low plains. They passed between two wooded hills, which the
+reader will have to take on faith as he cannot see them. Then across a
+gully, on the other side of which they came to a barb wire fence.
+
+This did not stop them long, as the Captain cut it and they rode
+through. From the footing which was about all that could be observed,
+they appeared to be in a pasture land with a gentle slope towards the
+sea. The fog did not diminish in thickness and the boys determined to
+escape. Here was their chance, if they could be said to have one.
+
+"Here's where we make a break," said Jim to Juarez. "Guide the mule
+alongside of Tom. Then we will run for it." Jim did not say this in so
+many words, but he had ways and means of indicating to Juarez, who was
+tied directly back of him, by a sign and poke language which Juarez was
+quick to seize.
+
+It seemed at every turn that his experience with the Indians was a help
+to him. The mule was a protégé of Juarez and with a word he could guide
+it in any direction that he wished it to go. The fog was one thing that
+favored them. The Mexican could scarcely be seen and Jack Cales stalked
+along looking like a giant through the mist.
+
+He had grown somewhat lax through the long march. This was the time, if
+ever. Jim gave Juarez the signal that all was ready. A quick word to the
+mule and he trotted out from his place in the column, knocking over the
+Mexican and before Cales was fairly awake to the situation, he was
+obscured by the fog.
+
+In about two seconds he had hove alongside of the horse that the mate
+was on. Tom was foot-loose, and no sooner did he see Missouri's long
+ears through the fog, than he was ready for action.
+
+"Jump, Tom," urged Jim. It took only about two seconds for Tom to
+execute the manoeuvre.
+
+"Halt!" roared the Captain, and he tried to turn the roan to capture the
+runaways, but right here, the broncho strain in the animal showed
+itself.
+
+He began to buck and never in all his experience had the redoubtable
+Captain Broom ever been on so choppy a sea. It was hard to distinguish
+fog from whiskers. At the second hunch upward, the Captain shot into
+space. The boys did not tarry to watch for his descent. A word from
+Juarez to the mule, and Missouri turned directly south just as Jack
+Cales came rushing up.
+
+"Touch him with your foot, Tom," said Juarez, meaning the mule, not
+Cales. Tom's heel reached the right spot and up flew the mule's hind
+feet with the rapidity of a rapid fire-gun.
+
+One foot struck Cales on the shoulder with a sufficient impact to send
+him down and out. The mate had been involved in the cyclone of which
+Captain Broom was the centre. Tom's horse, considered the gentlest of
+the four, had become infected with the roan's example and he started in
+to do a little bucking on his own account. Never since the mate had
+rounded Cape Horn, had he known so much action in so short a time.
+
+The only one left was Old Pete and he came on right gallantly, but by
+dodging and turning they got away in the fog. After putting what they
+considered a safe distance between themselves and their former captors,
+Juarez persuaded Missouri to halt, and Tom went to work and with great
+difficulty first untied, then lifted, them to the ground for the boys
+were as stiff as boards from being tied hard and fast for so long a
+time.
+
+"My, but it certainly hurts," said Jo, stamping around in an endeavor to
+get the blood to circulating again. "It's just like it used to be back
+home in the winter when we would go skating and get our hands numb."
+
+"What is the matter, Juarez?" asked Jim in alarm.
+
+"Oh, I'm all right, I guess," he said in a voice that sounded faint to
+the boys and far away to himself. Then, without warning, he fell over on
+the ground and stiffened out.
+
+"It's from the blow that the greaser gave him," said Tom. "It would have
+killed him if it had struck him fair."
+
+"Wait until I get my hands on him," cried Jim, significantly.
+
+What should they do now? It was not an easy question to decide.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE RANCHERO
+
+
+They could not desert Juarez and they could not get far with him. It was
+enough to stagger them and it seemed that they had reached the end of
+their resources.
+
+"If it wasn't such an open country," said Jo, "we might hide until they
+had got out of range and then get to the nearest ranch."
+
+"If they overtake us we can stand them off," saying this Jim reached for
+his revolver. To his astonishment it was gone. Then he remembered he had
+been disarmed by Captain Broom, and they were absolutely defenseless
+unless they could depend on Missouri's heels which had furnished them
+such active protection.
+
+Finally they brought Juarez around so that he was able to sit up.
+
+"Where am I?" he asked in a sort of daze.
+
+"You will be all right in a minute, old chap," encouraged Jim, speaking
+cheerfully, but he did not feel so.
+
+"You bet I will," he assented feebly, but with invincible determination.
+"What are you holding me for, Jim? Let's get at those fellows." It was
+evident that his mind was not exactly clear yet. They got him on his
+feet and he seemed better, though still very wabbly.
+
+"There come those fellows," cried Jim, suddenly, with more of despair in
+his tone than he had ever spoken before, no matter how hard pressed they
+had been. But before there had always been something to do, but now they
+were helpless. Jim looked hastily around for some weapon. All he found
+was a small round stone.
+
+With a yell of exultation, Jack Cales and the mate dashed down upon
+them, followed by the Captain and old Pete. They had been able to follow
+the distinctive mark of the mule's shoes in the soft earth until they
+came in hearing of the boys' voices. Then they jumped upon them. They
+were out for blood this time, for they had the boys' revolvers in their
+hands, probably because they were better than their own.
+
+Missouri, finding himself free, made off. Tom halted when covered by one
+of the sailor's revolvers, but Jim dodged as the mate fired at him. The
+lug of lead spattered the mud between his feet, the next second he was
+off full speed through the fog, followed by fleet Jo.
+
+The sailors soon gave up the useless chase, for there was no trail to
+guide them, so they had to content themselves with half of their
+original capture and they started for the cove where the Sea Eagle was
+anchored as fast as they could go, though they were hampered by Juarez.
+
+"Better leave him, Captain," urged old Pete. "He is nothing but a
+nuisance."
+
+"I'll have use for that fellow yet," said the Captain. "As for the other
+lad, he won't feel so lively after a few days on shipboard."
+
+This did not have a very cheerful sound for Tom and he was in anything
+but a happy frame of mind. Still he had great confidence in Jim and did
+not give up hope of being rescued before the coast was reached. It was
+now getting towards daybreak, and the fog began to lift somewhat so that
+they could see a distance of thirty or forty yards.
+
+Captain Broom's gang had now left the region of the level pasture and
+were coming to the brush section, fringing the coast, and beyond that
+they reached the sand dunes. The nearer they came to the sea the more
+depressed Tom became. The only thing that encouraged him was the fact
+that Juarez began to seem like himself.
+
+Let us now return to Jo and Jim, who had been so fortunate as to make
+their escape. As soon as they were sure that the pursuit was at an end,
+they slowed down to a walk.
+
+"Well, they didn't give us much of a chase," remarked Jim.
+
+"Plenty to suit me. What are we going to do now?"
+
+"This fog is beginning to lift," said Jim, "and then we can take our
+bearings. I want to locate this ranch the first thing, and then we can
+get help."
+
+"Here's a wire fence," announced Jo, "I reckon it's the one the old
+geser cut."
+
+"It surely is and a straight course north is our direction," remarked
+Jim.
+
+"Here are hills that look like those we rode through," said Jo.
+
+"We will soon be there now," was Jim's cheerful comment "What's that? It
+sounds like a dog barking." They stopped, listening intently, as the
+sound came faint, but there was no mistaking it.
+
+"I suppose it's some big hound, that they usually keep on these
+ranches," said Jo, who was beginning to feel depressed from hunger and
+fatigue, "and he will jump at us because we haven't any weapons."
+
+But in spite of Jo's fear they hurried on in the direction of the sound.
+In a short time, they came to a road between two barb wire fences, which
+the reader will remember that the Captain and his crew took when they
+were coming through the Sebastian ranch. But the boys struck it higher
+up, and were soon in the pasture that sloped down from the ranch houses
+toward the road.
+
+Jim and Jo now heard the voices of men as well as the baying of the
+dogs. The men were talking excitedly about the finding of one of their
+number in the canyon tied and gagged, and it was evident that it was not
+a good time for strangers to visit the ranch of the Sebastians.
+
+But Jim and Jo were dulled to danger and did not care what risk they ran
+and so they called to the men in a friendly Spanish greeting. There was
+instantly a great hubbub, and two men charged down upon them, preceded
+by a couple of fierce-looking mongrels. These came dashing for them with
+red, gaping mouths. The boys defended themselves gallantly with two
+stout sticks that they had picked up. Then the two Mexicans took a hand.
+
+"Look out, Jo," cried Jim, who was ever on the alert. "That fellow is
+going to throw his lasso." Jo dodged just in the nick of time, but this
+gave one of the dogs a chance, and if Jim had not stunned him by a
+resounding crack on the head it would have gone hard with his brother.
+
+Just then another man appeared on the scene, attracted from the vicinity
+of the house by the noise of the encounter. He came full speed on a
+splendid sorrel. It was Juan Sebastian, a dark, handsome young man, a
+true son of Spain.
+
+"What's all this?" he cried as he rode up. "Here, Sancho, Jan, you
+brutes, come off." The dogs slunk obediently to heel.
+
+"We found those insolent Gringoes," said one of the men, "coming
+straight for the Senor's house. We undertook to stop them."
+
+"Senor," said Jim, bowing low and speaking in his best Spanish, "we are
+sorry, my brother and I, to have caused this disturbance. We are
+strangers and unfortunate, and we have heard of your hospitality,
+Senor"--Jim bowed again. He was not so simple, after all.
+
+The Senor Sebastian returned the bow with more grace than Jim could
+command.
+
+"I regret, Senor--" he hesitated.
+
+"Darlington," added Jim.
+
+"Senor Darlington, that you have been attacked in this manner, but there
+has been a party of desperadoes that have been overrunning this part of
+the country for the past two days, and they took one of my men and bound
+and gagged him and so you see, Senors," a smile and bow completed the
+Spanish gentleman's apology perfectly.
+
+"We have just escaped, not more than an hour ago, from these same
+desperadoes," said Jim. "They have taken my brother and friend with them
+towards the coast."
+
+"We will saddle and overtake them," promised the Senor, "after we have
+had breakfast."
+
+Jim was stunned by this gentle sort of procrastination.
+
+"But, Senor," he said gravely, "we will not be able to overtake them if
+we do not start immediately. Pardon my abruptness, but I cannot rest
+while there are two of my party prisoners in the hands of this gang of
+cut-throats."
+
+"It is to be perfectly understood," replied the Spaniard with no less
+gravity, "we will make haste, but first we will eat while the servants
+are getting two of the horses ready for you and your brother."
+
+This was not Jim's idea of making haste by a long shot, but he was
+enough of a traveler to recognize that the ways of men and nations
+differed and that nothing was to be gained by going against the grain
+of a national characteristic. So while fuming inwardly, he was outwardly
+quiet and composed. He argued, too, that it was not likely the pirate
+gang would retain the captured prisoners. Later, when they were
+themselves at a safe distance they would set free the others.
+
+As they went towards the house, the Spaniard dismounted and walked with
+them, giving his horse into the charge of one of the men, with
+directions to bring two other horses to the house. There was an
+unmistakable courtesy in doing this and the boys appreciated it. They
+could not help but contrast their appearance with that of the Spaniard.
+He was not gaudily dressed like a vaquero, but everything he wore was
+possessed of a certain richness and was not lacking in color. He truly
+was a Prince of the South in appearance as well as in courtesy.
+
+Jim and Jo were disreputable beyond words. Their clothes were muddy,
+torn and disheveled, their faces so grimed that it was hard to tell
+their original color, and there were blotches of blood upon their
+clothes as well as faces and hands. But, though they looked worse than
+tramps, there was something straightforward in their manner and their
+way of speech that the Spaniard was quick to recognize.
+
+As they walked along the Spaniard explained that his household had been
+unusually disturbed that morning. His mother, he said, was an invalid,
+and had escaped from her attendant. Some mental trouble, he briefly
+mentioned as the cause of the elderly lady's worriment. Evidently, he
+did not connect the tragedy in his own life, in which his father's life
+was sacrificed, with the boys' antagonist. His mother, he assured them,
+had been found and was returned to her home.
+
+The boys now had a good view of the house, as they approached it. The
+fog having lifted, they could take in the whole situation. The structure
+itself was of adobe, of the early California type, low, with broad
+verandas, and built on four sides around a court with a fountain in the
+centre, with fish in the basin, and grass around it. There were
+beautiful rose-tree bushes with gold and red clusters growing over the
+corners of the house.
+
+From the verandah there was a beautiful view looking off over the
+surrounding country. The house itself stood on a rise of ground that
+sloped gently from the plain below. Back of it rose the mountains of the
+coast range, while in the distance glittered the broad breadths of the
+Pacific, shining like an azure floor. As far as eye could see was the
+domain of this great ranch. It was, indeed, a princely estate, and one
+of which the Senor Sebastian might well be proud. Those were the days of
+romance and of charm in the land of Southern California.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+A NEW FRIEND
+
+
+The servants eyed the two boys curiously as they stepped upon the
+verandah and the brothers were not reassured by any looks of
+friendliness, though they were outwardly courteous. A withered looking
+old woman, who looked to Jim as though she had Indian blood showed the
+boys to a room, where they could wash up.
+
+"Jove! Doesn't it dazzle your eyes, Jo?" exclaimed Jim, "to see a real
+room, with a bed and a white spread, with those starched things where
+the pillows ought to be."
+
+"This room would certainly please Aunt Maria," remarked Jo. "That four
+poster bed with the canopy over it, is an old timer, I'll warrant you."
+
+"If I slept in this room," said Jim, "I would make a low bow to the bed
+and then roll up in my blanket and go to sleep on the floor."
+
+"How do I look?" asked Jo, after he had rubbed and scrubbed his face
+for a long time.
+
+"You have got off the first layer," replied Jim, "and look about the
+color of a half-breed. Let me try my hand at polishing up."
+
+"It will take you a week," remarked Jo discouragingly.
+
+It cannot be truly said that they looked ornamental even when they were
+clean, for Jim's face was badly torn, one side of it being scraped raw.
+He got this memento when he tackled the Captain and fell down into the
+canyon with him. One eye was blackened and the other cheek bruised.
+These disadvantages were not to be overcome in a short time.
+
+Jo was somewhat more presentable, but he, too, showed signs of the rough
+time that they had had with the Captain and his "merry" crew. But in
+spite of all this, there was something in their bearing, an honest
+hardihood and manliness that could not be discounted by torn clothes and
+bruised faces.
+
+"This room looks dirty, now," said Jo, "I'm ashamed to leave it like
+this."
+
+"We will go outside to brush off our clothes," proposed Jim, "and I'm
+going to empty this dirty water myself." He started out with it when he
+met one of the servants in the hall. With many explanations, numerous
+gestures and much excitement, she took the pail from Jim and disappeared
+with it.
+
+"They won't let you do anything for yourself here, Jo," reported Jim,
+returning to the room.
+
+This was correct and the boys noticed afterwards that the servants
+regarded them with odd expressions of amusement and it was evident to
+the sensitive Jo that they were being "guyed" by them, to use a modern
+expression. The boys being American lads, were self-reliant, and were
+accustomed to do everything for themselves, and, unknowingly they had
+gone counter to a custom of constant service of the Spaniards. It was to
+demean oneself, according to their code, to do any menial work.
+
+"Might as well start for the dining room," proposed Jo. "I hate leaving
+Tom and Juarez to their fate this way."
+
+"I more than hate it," protested Jim, "but as you can't hurry these
+people, we will make the best time by falling in with their way of doing
+business."
+
+Then they went out into a passageway and, taking the wrong turn, which
+was quite easy in the rambling old house, they came to a door that
+entered into the courtyard.
+
+"My, but this is beautiful," exclaimed Jo. "It makes you appreciate
+California better when you see a place like this."
+
+"That hammock looks good to me," said Jim. "I would like to stretch out
+in it right now."
+
+Just then the door opened on the verandah and a really beautiful young
+girl stepped out. She was probably seventeen years of age, dressed in
+white, with a black mantilla over her equally black hair and her dark
+cheeks glowed with color. A very romantic meeting, Messieurs, the
+gallant young Americans at one end of the verandah and the Senorita at
+the other. Then she saw Jim and Jo with their scarred and bruised faces.
+With a little shriek, and clasping her hand to her eyes, she retreated
+quickly to her room.
+
+"What did you do to scare that girl, Jo?" inquired Jim severely of his
+brother.
+
+"Nothing," declared Jo, stoutly. "It was the sight of your face. It
+would give a wooden Injun a chill." Jim felt of the said face
+reflectively.
+
+"I guess you are right, Jo," he admitted, "but you ain't so charming in
+appearance that you would do any damage."
+
+"Let's walk along this side," proposed Jo. "Perhaps we will locate the
+breakfast."
+
+"All right," agreed Jim.
+
+So they stalked along, more or less conscious that a pair of dark blue
+eyes were regarding them, and they thought they heard a trill of
+laughter, but it might have been one of the maids. They need not have
+felt embarrassed for there was the grace in their movements that goes
+with strength and youth and suppleness.
+
+They were walking under a perfect bower of flowers anyway. For this side
+was beautifully latticed and over the lattice work grew vines with
+purple and golden flowers, that would give a grateful shade when the
+California sun would drive the fog away.
+
+Under foot there was a double flagging of stone with trodden dirt on
+either side.
+
+"I don't see a broom anywhere," said Jo.
+
+Just then they heard the voice of Senor Sebastian behind them and they
+turned quickly.
+
+"I had begun to fear, Senors, that you had become lost again."
+
+"We were, partially, Senor."
+
+"Our simple breakfast is ready now if you are," he said.
+
+"We will have to brush the dirt off before we can go in," protested Jim.
+
+"Antonio bring a brush," called the Senor. In a moment a gray-haired,
+bent Mexican came with a big kitchen broom. Instantly the Senor flushed
+with anger.
+
+"Stupid one, my guests are not my horses. Have a care."
+
+A suspicion flashed through Jim's mind that the ancient servitor had
+brought the broom on purpose. It was clear that the servants did not
+have a very high opinion of their American visitors. The next time he
+returned he had gotten the right brush, and made a point of sneezing as
+the dust flew from their mud-dried clothes. This made Jim laugh in spite
+of himself.
+
+"More dust than the Sirocco brings," said Jim. The old servitor regarded
+him with a cunning eye.
+
+"Si, Senor," he said, then he was seized with a perfect convulsion of
+sneezing. This aroused his master's ire.
+
+"No more of that, Antonio," he commanded, "or it will be the lash."
+Antonio's cold was cured from that moment. Jim's mouth twitched at the
+corners with the humor of it but he did not laugh now for that would be
+discourteous to his host.
+
+Finally the brushing was finished to the regret of the servants, who had
+kept an amused eye on Antonio's performance, while pretending to be busy
+on some trivial tasks near the Patio or court. In her own room, the
+Senorita was faint with laughter as she watched Antonio dusting the two
+American lads.
+
+It was a simple breakfast that the boys found prepared for them in a
+long, low dining-room, with its dark beams and white plastered walls.
+The coffee was excellent, with a delicate aroma, and was probably the
+best that Mexico could afford. There was a large plate of meat garnished
+with peppers, and a mixed dish of vegetables that looked odd, but that
+tasted deliciously. You may be sure that Jim and Jo appreciated their
+meal, and they felt invigorated when it was finished, wishing all the
+while, however, that they were on the trail of their captured comrades.
+
+"Now, Senors, the horses are at the door. They are spirited, but I am
+sure that you ride well."
+
+This was a mere expression of courtesy on his part, for he did not
+expect any such thing and thought to see his guests fall off if the
+horses should rise on their hind legs, as they no doubt would, for there
+was not a horse on the big rancho but what was peppery and spirited. No
+sooner had the Senor spoke than Jim jumped to his feet, putting his hand
+to his head.
+
+"I have forgotten about Caliente!" he exclaimed. "It is my horse,
+Senor," he explained to his host. "He is up the canyon because the gang
+that attacked us last night were afraid of him."
+
+"I will send for him," said the Senor.
+
+"By the pool in the pocket," said Jim. "But I think I ought to get him
+myself, though I appreciate your offer, but one's horse, you know--"
+
+"I understand perfectly."
+
+"I cannot leave him without food and water," said Jim.
+
+"I will attend to that. I will send a trustworthy man," and he spoke to
+the servant who was waiting on the table. In a short time he returned
+with a tall, sinewy man, with straight black hair and dark skin. He gave
+this man the necessary instructions and with a "Si, Senor," the man went
+out.
+
+"A good reliable fellow," remarked Jim. "He looks like an Indian."
+
+"He is an Indian," replied their host, "but of the right kind. Your
+horse is in good hands."
+
+"Tell him to bring him down to the ranch," said Jim. "I'll trust
+Caliente with him." The Indian was called back and under his stolid
+demeanor was an appreciation of Jim's confidence.
+
+Breakfast over they went out on the verandah, where they could see the
+horses. They were spirited looking beasts all right. One was a bay, the
+two front legs white stockinged, very trimly built, with a flashing eye,
+that he kept rolling around. The boy who was holding him had his hands
+full, as the bay would rise on his hind legs and strike out viciously
+with his forefeet.
+
+The other animal was much heavier than the bay. A brilliant black, whose
+coat fairly shone with careful grooming. He had been standing
+comparatively quiet until the three appeared upon the verandah of the
+house, then, with a sudden surge backward, he dragged the Mexican boy
+off his feet, shaking his head viciously.
+
+"We ought to be armed, Senor," advised Jim. "If we should overtake those
+men, they will put up a desperate fight."
+
+"Certainly, Senor," he answered. "Come into this room and select your
+weapon."
+
+After both Jim and Jo were armed, they went out to the horses.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+THE PURSUIT
+
+
+All the servants seemed just now to find duties of importance in front
+of the house or near it. They had no idea of missing the chance of
+seeing these Gringoes, whom they held in contempt, thrown from their
+horses.
+
+Jim took the black and Jo was left the red, the easiest to manage even
+if he seemed the liveliest. Jo was too quick for his horse and before he
+could whirl to one side, he was in the saddle. Then his animal reared
+and plunged but Jo sat on him as easily as a cowboy does his steed.
+There was no mistaking his horsemanship. The servants were duly and
+deeply disappointed.
+
+But their hopes revived when they saw Jim tackle the black. He began
+that steady sideways movement which Jim knew so well, whenever he tried
+to put his foot in the stirrup. The servants began to smile, here would
+be some fun. The "Black Devil," as they called the horse, had been known
+to kill men, so they had pleasant anticipations. When Jim found that he
+could not mount by the stirrup, he made a quick, powerful leap and was
+in the saddle.
+
+"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian, but he knew that the fight had just
+begun.
+
+Jo looked on with interest and perfect confidence in brother Jim's
+ability. The black stood perfectly stunned for a moment or two at being
+so suddenly mounted, then he sprang into action. With his back in a hump
+he shot into the air and came down stiff-legged.
+
+Without loss of a second he went into the air again, higher than before.
+From the corral the Mexican cowboys were looking at the duel between the
+horse and the boy with lively interest.
+
+"The Diablo will kill him," said one nonchalantly, blowing a puff of
+smoke from his cigarette.
+
+"Five dollars that the Gringo stays on," said a second. The wager was
+made and others followed, for the Mexicans are inveterate gamblers. The
+third time the horse pitched into the air, Jim swaying with the animal's
+every motion as the trained cowboy does. Finding that he could not
+dislodge his rider that way, the black rose on his hind legs to a
+perpendicular position.
+
+Jim knew the trick of old, and was prepared for it. As the horse started
+to fall backwards, Jim who had been sticking like a leech, leaped
+lightly to the ground and with all his strength, pulling upon the
+bridle, slammed him to the ground. No sooner was the horse upon his feet
+again than Jim was in the saddle.
+
+Once more he tried that falling back trick and this time Jim brought him
+down upon the damp earth with a thud that jarred things. The black devil
+had had enough. He stood quivering and sweating, but for the time being
+subdued.
+
+"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian again, and he shook his guest by the
+hand warmly. "You are a true horseman. Now we shall go. We shall eat up
+the miles."
+
+The crowd of cowboys swung their hats in a salute to the Gringo, who
+could conquer the black devil, while the house servants, disappointed at
+the stranger's triumph, went back to their different tasks.
+
+The three horsemen galloped away down the sloping pasture, the Spaniard
+in advance as he knew the country and the most direct way to the coast.
+His horse was a splendid sorrel, somewhat taller than the horse that Jim
+rode. And he was a gallant figure in his leather riding suit and peaked
+sombrero with a brilliant colored band around it.
+
+Jim and Jo rode few yards behind the Spaniard and side by side. Jim felt
+a certain exultation in his victory over the Black before people who
+would have liked to have seen him defeated. It was exhilarating, too,
+this plunging gallop ahead with a chance to rescue Tom and Juarez and to
+get even with Captain Broom and his gang, who had taken away their
+valuables and had given the boys such a cruel defeat.
+
+"This is a fine horse," said Jim, "though he hasn't the stride of
+Caliente."
+
+"He is a beauty, when it comes to bucking," Jo commented. "There is
+nothing the matter with this bay but my black can beat him for speed."
+
+So they flew on, the speed of their steeds blowing back their horses'
+manes, and the fresh air from the sea bringing a feeling of hope to
+their hearts, that they would yet be able to overtake the pirates, and
+rescue their comrades in distress. Their horses' feet were devouring the
+miles.
+
+"We stand a chance to get 'em at this rate," shouted Jim.
+
+"Won't it be fine if we can all sit down to dinner tonight?" replied Jo.
+"I bet that Tom and Juarez would enjoy a square meal with the Senor at
+the ranch house. Ifs kind of nice to be civilized once in a while."
+
+"You're right, it is," declared Jim emphatically.
+
+"I wonder if there isn't a store around here where we could buy some
+clothes," inquired Jo, anxiously. "We look too disreputable to appear in
+polite society."
+
+"Thinking about that girl, I suppose?" remarked Jim with brotherly
+intuition.
+
+"I wouldn't be so sure if I were you," replied Jo evasively. "How about
+the Senorita down in Mexico who threw you the rose at the castle?" This
+reference to the Senorita Cordova whom the Frontier Boys had rescued in
+Mexico, checked Jim from getting too gay for he still had a tender place
+in his memory for her.
+
+The fog by this time was entirely dissipated, and they could see by
+certain white or rather light spots in the clouds where the sun was
+going to break through and an absolutely clear day would result. The
+three riders had now reached the brush region that began a few miles
+from the coast and they were compelled to go more slowly.
+
+But if they had only known what was going on not more than two miles
+away from where they were, they would not have slackened speed no
+matter what risk they ran. For Captain Broom and his crew with the two
+captives had arrived at the cove and old Pete and Jack Cales were going
+into the cave for the boat.
+
+There was a chance, but the Senor and his companions must hurry. Some
+mishap to the pirates' expedition just at this point and the frontier
+boys would win. Tom and Juarez might have sung the tune that they had
+often sung before in camp.
+
+          "Tramp, tramp, tramp, the boys are marching,
+            Cheer up, comrades, they will come,
+          And beneath the starry flag
+          We will breathe the air again
+            Of freedom in our own beloved home."
+
+But they did not know and they sat miserable and dejected upon the damp
+sand of the beach, not knowing that Jim and Jo were coming nearer every
+second. Then there came an accident, though a slight one, that gave the
+pursuers a chance.
+
+Old Pete was carrying one end of the boat. He was nervous, anyway, in
+regard to the cave and its grewsome contents, thought he saw some dark
+spectre coming for him out of the blackness of the cave and he dropped
+his end of the boat and scudded for the beach.
+
+The Captain was furious, giving him a blow that sent him spinning half
+way down to the water, and he and the mate rushed back to see what
+damage the boat had suffered. It was only slightly stove in, but every
+second was precious. The pursuers were only a mile away.
+
+Jim began to grow restless as they neared the coast. He seemed to feel
+that they were nearing the enemy, and at his urging, the Spaniard, who
+had an increased respect and liking for Jim ever since he had conquered
+Black Diablo, put his horse to the gallop, and away they went along the
+narrow winding path through the bushes.
+
+The branches whipt them, but they paid no attention, but on they went;
+it was evident that they made considerable racket and Captain Broom,
+with a fierce burst of energy for which he was famous, got the boat
+launched, the two prisoners in, and with himself and the mate at the
+oars, made the boat leap forward over the lazy rolling swell towards the
+graceful Sea Eagle.
+
+When they had reached a point half-way to the vessel, the horsemen came
+tearing through the last screen of brush onto the yellow sand. The enemy
+had escaped by the skin of its teeth and it was heart-rending to see Tom
+and Juarez being carried away from them at every stroke of the oars
+towards their black prison. Jim put up his hands to his mouth and
+yelled:
+
+"We will rescue you, boys. Don't give up. We'll get 'em yet."
+
+A derisive yell greeted this challenge and one of the men in the boat
+fired at the group on the shore, but the bullet fell harmlessly short.
+They did not dare to fire in return lest they hit either Tom or Juarez.
+
+"They have steam up on board," observed Jim. "But I see one chance to do
+some execution."
+
+It was this. The Sea Eagle was anchored close under a cliff on the
+northern side of the cove. So Jim slipped off his horse, for the way on
+that side was impracticable except on foot. It was hard going at that,
+especially as there were a good many cacti with their wretched thorns.
+
+Jim stepped gingerly along over the rocks, gliding through the bushes
+until at last he reached a point above the vessel where he could almost
+look down upon her decks. The boat from the shore had just come
+alongside and the prisoners were hustled into the cabin and the door
+locked. Tom and Juarez were a dejected-looking pair and it made Jim's
+heart ache to see them.
+
+The Captain went upon the quarter-deck and gave an order to the man at
+the wheel. The anchor had already been weighed. Slowly and gracefully
+the Sea Eagle turned, and there stood Captain Broom, as big as life upon
+the bridge. Why did not Jim fire? Because he had come to a certain wise
+conclusion.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE
+
+
+As Jim had raised his revolver to fire, a sudden idea came to him. In
+the first place he rebelled instinctively from shooting a man down in
+cold blood from ambush, even if he was as desperate and crime-stained a
+character as Captain Bill Broom, besides it would not save Tom and
+Juarez and only make their captivity harder to endure, if any injury was
+done the Captain.
+
+Another thing, Jim was sure that if he began the attack that his two
+comrades would be used as shields to protect the man at the wheel, so
+that the Sea Eagle could be navigated safely out of the cove. He saw
+with interest the narrow place between two lines of foam above hidden
+ledges where the boat must pass in order to reach the open sea. He
+marvelled at the temerity of Captain Broom in daring to bring his ship
+through such a place.
+
+Then a brilliant thought came to him, a sudden stroke that might turn
+defeat into victory. The Sea Eagle was now making straight for the
+narrow channel. Jim slipped back for a short distance an ran as rapidly
+as he could to a point a little to the west of where he had first
+hidden. He did not have long to wait. The Sea Eagle was almost directly
+opposite his place of ambush, and was just sticking her nose into the
+narrow passage.
+
+Jim raised his revolver and took careful aim and fired. The man at the
+wheel gave a yell and clapped his hand to the shoulder, letting go the
+wheel and the nose of the little steamer swung toward the rock. A swell
+lifted her bow clear by a few inches, and the Captain caught the steamer
+by the wheel and brought her to a course.
+
+"Bring those boys up on deck and shoot them if that black-haired devil,"
+(meaning Jim) "fires another shot," he called to the mate.
+
+That worthy was not slow to obey the order, he had them on deck in full
+sight in a jiffy and held a pistol at Tom's head. Jim had raised his arm
+to fire at the Captain when he heard his order and it was as if he had
+been paralyzed. He knew that Tom and Juarez would have been killed to a
+certainty if he fired another shot.
+
+Luck had broken against him again, for that was all that had kept the
+Sea Eagle from going on the reef, where if she had not been wrecked,
+she and her crew would have been at the mercy of the men on shore. Just
+the lifting of the wave had saved the vessel by a few inches, that, and
+Captain Broom's quick and skillful action.
+
+The second round of the contest had gone in favor of the pirate and his
+crew, but only by a shade as it were. But it would not surprise me a bit
+if Jim evened up matters in the third and final round. Let us hope so,
+at least, for that will give a silver lining to the black cloud that had
+rolled over the boys' fortunes at this particular time.
+
+Jim made his way slowly back to where Jo and the Senor were waiting for
+him on the beach. He was despondent over the failure of his plans by so
+close a margin, and the sight of Tom and Juarez helpless on the deck in
+the hands of these sea-coast pirates, was always before his eyes.
+
+"What were you trying to do, Jim?" inquired Jo, "Sink the ship?" Before
+Jim could reply, the Spaniard gave a cry of warning.
+
+"Look out, they are going to shoot."
+
+Glancing toward the Sea Eagle, which was now a half mile from shore,
+they saw a puff of smoke, and then a shell struck into the beach below
+them and exploding, sent a shower of sand over them and the horses. The
+latter, frightened, reared and plunged, but the boys soon got their
+animals under control, as they quickly tired of acting up in the heavy
+sand. Jim shook his fist in the direction of the Sea Eagle.
+
+"Curse your insolence!" he yelled. "I'll make every one of you eat crow,
+you miserable hounds!"
+
+Jim looked ugly, his eyes glared with concentrated fury and the veins on
+his temple were swollen and throbbing. Unthinkingly, he pulled back hard
+upon the bit, sending his horse up in the air.
+
+"Easy, boy," he said, soothingly. "Easy. It was my fault for yanking
+you."
+
+When the horse was quieted, Jim was cooled down to his normal
+temperature, and he told his comrades of his attack upon the Sea Eagle
+and how it had turned out.
+
+"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard impressively, "I will take off my
+hat to you. You are a natural General. Take my advice, my friend, and go
+to Spain. There you might head a revolution and in time rise to high
+mark."
+
+"I appreciate your praise deeply, Senor Sebastian," responded Jim, "but
+my own country, Senor, I could not leave it for another."
+
+"Right, Senor," replied the Spaniard, "you have the true spirit."
+
+"Which way will she turn, do you suppose?" asked Jo, pointing to the
+vessel that was moving steadily out on the Pacific in a straight line
+from the shore.
+
+"To the North, doubtless," replied the Spaniard.
+
+"Wherever she goes we must find her out," said Jim, with grim
+determination.
+
+"I wish we could follow them," sighed Jo. "If we could only hire a
+boat."
+
+"They have our money," replied Jim, briefly.
+
+"I had forgotten that," said Jo, and his face showed his disappointment.
+
+"Permit me to help you," said the Spaniard, "I am to blame for detaining
+you at breakfast."
+
+"That is generous of you, Senor," replied Jim, "but I do not favor going
+to the expense of chartering a steamer. Even if it were possible, my
+plan would be to follow along the coast on horseback and see what can be
+done when they make a landing."
+
+"As you are the General," replied the Spaniard, "we will allow you to
+make the plans."
+
+"Look!" exclaimed Jo, "they are turning South instead of North."
+
+"Impossible!" cried the Spaniard. "There is only one port within two
+hundred miles. I do not understand. Yes, they are surely going South."
+
+"Perhaps they have a secret landing place," hazarded Jim.
+
+"Not so," replied the Spaniard. "Not a harbor where they could land save
+one and there they would not dare to go."
+
+The three watchers on horseback gazed until there was little to be seen
+other than a smudge of smoke upon the horizon. It was no use, the Sea
+Eagle was holding to her southerly course to some mysterious port. The
+sun had now come out and was shining with sheer brilliance upon the
+sparkling ocean.
+
+"We must return now," said the Spaniard. "There is nothing more for us
+to do at present."
+
+"I think that my brother and I will start this afternoon and take the
+trail to the south," announced Jim, "wherever those fellows set foot, I
+want to be waiting for them."
+
+"I fear it is impossible to start so soon," replied the Spaniard, "I
+must go with you as I know the country to the South, every foot of it."
+
+"The Senor is right, Jim," put in Jo, quickly, as he saw a frown on
+Jim's face and was afraid that he was going to say something abruptly.
+"You will want to give Caliente a good rest, so that when we start, we
+will make the distance without delay. Then we have to make some
+preparations ourselves."
+
+Jim looked at his brother with a moment's dark suspicion, but it was
+evident that Jo was perfectly sincere in what he said.
+
+"I will promise, Senor," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile, "that
+when we start which will be early tomorrow morning, that we will travel
+far and fast enough to suit you and your horse." There was a challenge
+in his voice that Jim met smilingly.
+
+"So be it, Senor," he said, "I will try to be in sight at the finish."
+
+"My horse is a remarkable animal for speed and endurance, I must tell
+you frankly," said the Senor gravely. "He has no equal in this country
+of California. He has proved it more than once and against all comers."
+
+"He is certainly a fine horse," admitted Jim, looking at the sorrel with
+admiring eyes. "He has a splendid stride."
+
+"Ah, no, Senor," laughed the Spaniard with a gleam of his white teeth,
+"I did not mean him," patting the horse on the neck, "a good animal,
+indeed, but more for my little sister to ride than for me. Wait, my
+friend, until I introduce you to Don Fernando and then you will see a
+horse for the first time."
+
+"I should be very much pleased to see him," said Jim, frankly curious
+and interested.
+
+"Tomorrow," said the Spaniard.
+
+They had now turned into the narrow trail among the bushes and had only
+ridden a few steps when Jo called a sudden halt.
+
+"What do you think, Jim, there's my horse and Tom's tied in that
+thicket."
+
+Sure enough there they were, utterly worn out, but with spirit enough to
+recognize their old comrades Jim and Jo, and if ever horses expressed a
+welcome these two did when they first caught sight of their two friends.
+
+"They have cut the saddles to pieces, the brutes," exclaimed Jo.
+
+"I'm glad to get the horses," said Jim, "I am surprised that they didn't
+cut their throats."
+
+"They will follow us all right," said Jo, in reply to the Spaniard's
+suggestion that they would have to be led, and they trotted along behind
+Jo, who was the last one in line.
+
+"Do you know of any place where we could buy things?" asked Jim. "We
+need a new outfit."
+
+"But we have no money," put in Jo quickly.
+
+"I will get the money or its equivalent today," said Jim. "If there is a
+store where the Senor can get me credit."
+
+"Yes, there is a store where a Portugee sells about everything that we
+need in this country," replied the Spaniard. "It is some distance to the
+north. We will ride there before we return to the ranch. There will be
+no difficulty about the credit," he concluded, with a bow to Jim.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE
+
+
+"You do not know my ability to spend," said Jim, "I may have to plunge
+to the extent of several hundred dollars. You see my brother has very
+expensive tastes. It will cost quite a small fortune when I buy him a
+complete trousseau including diamonds."
+
+"I will pledge my lands if necessary to get the young Senor diamonds,"
+said the Spaniard laughingly.
+
+In about an hour's time they came to a large one story frame building
+painted a rather light blue, which color had weathered a good deal. It
+had a square, false front with a sign on it that read, "Mr. Gonsalves,
+General Trader."
+
+They hitched their horses to some well graveled posts, and went inside
+leaving Jo's and Tom's horses free to graze at will around, or to stand
+under the shelter of some drooping pepper tree across the road. The
+proprietor, a short, thick-set Portugee with a close trimmed black
+beard, and a gray slouch hat which he always wore, apparently, received
+them graciously. The contents of the store were entirely at their
+service,--if they paid for them.
+
+"We will miss poor Tom here," said Jo, "he was always our purchasing
+agent."
+
+"And a mighty good one," added Jim. "Not even a Connecticut Yankee could
+get the best of him in a bargain."
+
+The Spaniard sat in a round armed wooden chair, gracefully smoking a
+cigarette, while his guests busied themselves making purchases. First
+the boys bought some new clothes, which they retired behind a counter to
+put on, and emerged in proper apparel for the plains.
+
+Blue flannel shirts, and pants of the same color, held up by leather
+belts, with much glitter of silver on them, then they bought a sombrero
+apiece, not after the Mexican style, but of the American type. Jim had a
+red band around his and Jo had a blue.
+
+"Now we want some handkerchiefs to tie around our necks," said Jo.
+
+"Of course," remarked Jim with a wink, "something that will catch the
+eyes of the ladies."
+
+So M. Gonsalves brought out a brilliant assortment of handkerchiefs.
+
+"Here's a very fine article, gents," he said holding out a red silk
+handkerchief, clustered with white horseshoes.
+
+"Nothing the matter with that," admitted Jim admiringly, with a droll
+look at Jo. "But this plain red one will suit me. My brother would
+probably like the horseshoe one." But Jo also declined.
+
+"I will take the dark blue one," he said, "it matches my costume
+better."
+
+"Gee! but you will look like a color scheme," laughed Jim, "blue eyes,
+blue pants, shirt, tie and socks, and hat band, you ought to be a sailor
+on the blue Pacific."
+
+"The next things are boots," remarked Jo.
+
+"Not for me," said Jim briefly, "I want moccasins. Worn 'em all my life,
+and I am not going to change to boots now."
+
+"Fine line of moccasins," said the accommodating Mr. Gonsalves in his
+best trade manner. You see he had been in business in San Francisco and
+knew something of the ways of customers.
+
+"But it gives us more style to wear boots. You notice that all the
+inhabitants wear them, we can buy moccasins too. You wear them all the
+time and they will set you down for an Indian."
+
+"When a fellow once gets the idea of style in his head," said Jim
+resignedly, "nothing this side of matrimony is going to stop him. So lay
+on MacDuff and cursed be he who first cries hold, enough."
+
+"I feel like I was anchored," commented Jim, stepping across the floor
+with heavy tread. "I should like to stalk a deer or an Indian in these
+things. He could tell you were arriving before you got above the
+horizon."
+
+"But you look fine in 'em," said Jo.
+
+It was true that he made a striking figure in his blue togs. The lithe
+powerful physique, and the strong, resolute face.
+
+"Better look out, Jo," grinned Jim. "No Senorita would look at you, when
+they see me dashing over the landscape."
+
+"I'm a pretty stylish looking guy myself," responded Jo, confidently. He
+did make a good appearance, there was no doubt of that. Though slighter
+than his brother he was well set up, and his frame was well muscled. He
+was handsomer than Jim. But there was no nonsense about either of the
+two boys and they never gave an unnecessary thought to their appearance.
+
+"Now, Mr. Gonsalves," said Jim, "we would like to look at some of your
+man-killers."
+
+"Revolvers?" he questioned, "just step this way. I can fit you out all
+right."
+
+He did have a fine collection and Jim examined the different ones
+carefully, noting their action and how easily they worked.
+
+"I see you are no tenderfoot," complimented the proprietor. "You have
+handled shooting irons before."
+
+"I'll be a tenderfoot before long, if I wear these condemned boots you
+sold me," said Jim gruffly ignoring the compliment. He did not care
+especially for M. Gonsalves' style. "Now let's have a look at your
+rifles." The proprietor actually took off his hat and bowed.
+
+It was evident that the distinguished gentlemen from nowhere in
+particular were going to buy out his entire stock.
+
+"Would you be so gracious as to step this way?" he said, "I have the
+rifles in the back of the store."
+
+They were so gracious, and after due examination they selected a couple
+of well balanced guns and purchased enough ammunition to stand off a few
+Indian raids. All the stuff besides what they had on their backs they
+packed upon Tom's horse, as Tom was not present to resent the indignity.
+
+"Now the last things are some saddles," said Jim, "seeing that our kind
+friends, the pirates, cut up those we owned."
+
+"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard coming forward and touching Jim
+lightly on the arm, "Do not speak of buying saddles. I will see to
+that." Jim did not know exactly what their host meant but he thanked him
+and deferred to his request.
+
+Now behold the frontier boys in complete costume, with glittering
+revolvers at their hips and rifles swung across their backs, upon their
+hands were fringed buckskin gloves. They had gone the whole hog as Jim
+said.
+
+"I'll take the shine off this costume in about one day," said Jim
+grimly, "when I get in the open, I would rather break a broncho, than a
+new suit of clothes." There was no doubt about his impressive
+appearance, as the sun flashed on the metal of the accoutrements and he
+swung himself into the saddle. Even their host seemed to hold them in
+higher regard. Different people, different manners.
+
+When they reached the house ranch the first thing Jim did was to find
+Caliente. He was in the long adobe stable that was a half-mile from the
+house, at the beginning of a wide mountain valley, where the air drew
+through from the sea.
+
+"How are you, Caliente old fellow," cried Jim, as he opened the box
+stall and went in to shake hands with his old comrade. But the horse
+leaped to one side, and then reared up as if to strike Jim.
+
+"He don't know you," cried Jo who was on the outside of the stall. "Take
+off your hat."
+
+Jim whirled it out of the stall, and a change came over Caliente. He
+recognized his master, and nickering in recognition he rubbed his head
+against Jim's shoulder, and took playful nips at his fine new shirt,
+while Jim fairly hugged him, and gave him resounding whacks with his
+open hand upon his splendid sides and shoulders.
+
+"A magnificent animal, Senor Darlington," said Senor Sebastian to Jim,
+"I congratulate you."
+
+It was a true word. Caliente with his proud neck, small but shapely
+head, powerful but not too heavy frame, and color of mottled gray was
+magnificent.
+
+All that afternoon Jim busied himself grooming his horse until his coat
+fairly glistened. He looked carefully to his feed, and saw to his
+watering. For Jim was determined that his horse should not be beaten by
+the Spaniard's. He knew that the latter's horse must be an unusual
+animal. It was not a short race, instead, one of two hundred miles that
+lay before them on the morrow.
+
+That evening the American boys presented a better appearance than they
+did at breakfast. It was a pretty scene that evening in the long dining
+room. The snowy table lit by light of candles and set with ancient
+silver brought from Spain. The young Senorita was seated at her
+brother's right, and on the other side were James Darlington and his
+brother Joseph. As to the impression she made upon them, we will say
+nothing, as this is not a romance, but they had a merry and delightful
+evening.
+
+Their host and the young Senorita were much interested in hearing of the
+adventures of the boys in Mexico, especially that part that referred to
+the rescue of the Senorita Cordova from the hands of Cal Jenkins and his
+gang. I do not know that The Frontier Boys told it with any less fervor
+because the eyes of the young girl, seated opposite, were fixed intently
+upon them. It appeared that their host knew of the Senor Cordova, who
+was a man of prominence in his country, though he had not actually met
+him. So there was one more bond of sympathy between the Senor Sebastian
+and James and Jo Darlington.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE
+
+
+Let us now turn our interest and attention for a time to the cruise of
+the Sea Eagle, under the guidance of that redoubtable free-booter,
+Captain Broom. It was a mystery to the three who watched the ship turn
+to the South, what her port could be. We will soon be in a position to
+solve that problem.
+
+No sooner had the Sea Eagle cleared the cove than Captain Broom went to
+his cabin to go over his spoils which he had taken from the frontier
+boys. He placed all the belts upon the table, took up one, and with a
+keen knife slit the first pouch. A large heavy Spanish coin rolled out
+and then clinked down upon the table.
+
+The Captain's eyes glistened. "By Gosh!" he exclaimed, "it was worth
+while rounding up those fellows. They must have struck it rich down in
+Mexico. I bet the boys will be tickled to death to get their share." For
+whatever crimes and shortcomings Captain Broom could be charged with,
+at least he always divided fairly with his crew. Thereby he held their
+loyalty. It was not all policy, either, for there was a sterling streak
+in the bad old fellow.
+
+Out of the next pouch there glittered upon the table several diamonds
+and a small palm full of rubies, with their rich color and radiance.
+"The boys will have enough to start a jewelry store," commented the
+Captain. "But I am not surprised at this haul. I know something about
+the hidden treasures myself, and they do say Mexico is the the place for
+them."
+
+Out of another belt he got some ingots of gold and a girdle that caused
+the Captain to open his eyes. At first he did not know what to make of
+it. When he held it up he saw that it was formed of golden disks linked
+with strings of rubies and sapphires. In the third belt was a necklace
+that might have been worn by some Princess of the Incas. It was oddly,
+almost weirdly beautiful.
+
+The fourth belt that he picked up chanced to belong to Jim.
+
+"This seems lighter than the others," remarked the Captain. "Three of
+the pouches are empty." His face got black with rage. For instantly his
+mind leaped to the suspicion that one of his men had rifled it. If such
+had been the case, the guilty party would have got short shift at the
+end of a rope from the yard arm.
+
+But the second examination showed that the cut was an old one.
+
+"So!" he cried, "one of the boys has cached part of his share. I bet it
+was that long-legged, black-haired guy. That fellow would give the best
+of us trouble. I wish I had him to train. Maybe, I can make something of
+the Injun boy," meaning Juarez.
+
+As to the belts, the shrewd old fellow, to make sure, measured them to
+see where the worn holes of the leather came, and the partially empty
+belt had been worn two inches longer than any of the others.
+
+"It was the big fellow's," said the Captain.
+
+Then he went upon deck and called the crew forward.
+
+"Now, lads, choose your man to get your share of the goods," he said.
+
+"It's Jack Cales, sir," they said, knowing that they would be called
+upon to select a man to take their share.
+
+"All right! Come, lad," said the Captain, and led the way to his cabin.
+When Jack Cales saw the treasures on the table, he opened his eyes and
+mouth in astonishment.
+
+"Why, Sir," he exclaimed, "we haven't seen anything like this since the
+day two years ago when--" he stopped suddenly, seeing from a look in the
+Captain's eyes that no reminiscences were desired.
+
+"This is your share, lad," said the Captain, gruffly.
+
+"Thank you, sir," responded Cales, as he swept the small pile of gold
+and jewels into the palm of his big hands.
+
+"And mind ye, lad," warned the Captain, "I don't want any quarreling
+among yourselves or ye will hear from me."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor and backed out of the cabin.
+
+There was an interesting gathering in the forecastle when Jack Cales
+deposited his handful of treasures on the top of a sea chest that had
+been hauled out for the purpose.
+
+For once it was not necessary to have the lantern lit, for a broad band
+of sunshine shone down the steep ladder and cut a golden swath through
+the dingy gloom and fell athwart the chest and illuminated the group:
+the tall and swaggering Cales, the rugged, grizzled Pete, and the other
+sailormen; a typical group and not to be matched for picturesqueness
+anywhere; with their faces intent upon the center of the old black sea
+chest, where glowed and glittered the gold and jewels in the band of
+light that shone upon some of the faces of the intent group, while
+others were in the shadow. It was a scene such as Rembrandt--pardon,
+kind reader, I forgot for a moment, this is a simple narrative of
+Adventure.
+
+"Pete," said Cales, "how the ladies will love you when they see a chain
+of glittering diamonds around your throat."
+
+"One thing is certain, lad," replied the grizzled Pete, "I won't be
+givin' none of my diamonds away to the ladies. I'll keep the stones safe
+in my jeans."
+
+"You'll have to be keerful, Pete," rallied another, "they'll be marrying
+you for your ill-gotten wealth, when they find out that you are an
+heiress. You can't help yourself, Pete. It won't make any difference
+because you are a pirate, that won't scare 'em. Not when they see them
+jewels."
+
+"What's the use of you boys a talkin' to me," he said with a wise wink,
+"you're only kittens. I'm sixty year old and I'm a free man yit."
+
+"Here's a pill for you, Pop," said Cales, dropping a diamond into his
+horny hand.
+
+"Gee! I'm just as well pleased to get this as I was to get a bunch of
+popcorn when I was a kid back in New England, off the Christmas tree."
+
+"Better have it sot in one of your front teeth, Pop," said Jack. This
+produced a roar of laughter, for Pete's front teeth were conspicuous by
+their absence.
+
+So the distribution went on without any bickering at first, only jovial
+jokes, but at last there came a bone of contention over the last
+diamond. And in a jiffy Jack Cales and a short, stocky sailor were all
+tangled up in a fierce encounter. Their comrades, none too gently,
+hoisted them up on deck. There they continued their fight.
+
+No sooner did Captain Broom see them than he cluttered down from the
+bridge at a furious rate. The two combatants ought to have taken warning
+but they were deaf to everything except their own struggle. He was livid
+with anger, and his wrath was in a large measure justified.
+
+"I'll larn you!" he yelled, grabbing each by the back of the neck. "You
+won't fight any more this trip."
+
+They were like children in his hands. He had not only the arms of a
+gorilla, but the strength of one when he was aroused and it was a
+caution the way he slammed them around, flaying the deck with them, and
+dashing their heads together. It seemed as if every bone in their bodies
+would be broken. Finally he flung them unconscious on the deck.
+
+"Put them in the Sagenette," he ordered the mate.
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," he replied, and with the aid of one of the sailors,
+they were chained in a narrow cell.
+
+Here was where Juarez and Tom came in. As the two fighters were knocked
+out and locked up, it made the crew short and they were ordered out on
+deck from the cabin where they had been kept. Almost famished though
+they were, they had to jump in and work like nailers, not to say,
+sailors.
+
+Fortunately for them, they had experienced a hard schooling in many
+different ways since they came west and were practical masters of
+several lines of industry, but this was their first experience
+sailoring. It was a hard school, but they learned more in a few days,
+than they would have under months of more gentle tuition. This was to
+stand them in good stead when they started on their cruise to Hawaii.
+
+"I'll get even with those fellows," growled Tom as he passed near Juarez
+who was busy polishing some brass work. "Yes, if it takes the rest of my
+life."
+
+"What do you mean, stopping and gabbing, you little shrimp?" roared the
+mate who chanced to see Tom stop.
+
+And he rushed up and grabbing Tom by the back of the neck, shook him
+ferociously, landing him a couple of kicks at the same time. This was
+too much for Juarez, who poised a stone that he was using and was about
+to brain the mate with it when the Captain's iron grip fell on his arm.
+He didn't throw that brick.
+
+"Easy, lad," said the Captain. "No more fighting on board this ship, or
+I'll take a hand again and don't you two lads pass the time of day
+either. You won't be killed if you work hard and keep cheerful." Then he
+gave the mate a look, which that worthy understood and Tom was allowed
+to go about his work without further molestation.
+
+But this was a new and hard doctrine that the Captain had laid down that
+the boys had to take hard usage and unceasing work and keep cheerful
+about it. They soon found that the Skipper meant what he said. It was a
+bitter lesson, but perhaps they were the manlier for learning it so
+young. For it's something that life hands out to everyone sooner or
+later.
+
+Often the boys looked longingly over the rail towards the faint, far
+outline of the California coast. The Skipper was keeping his ship far
+out from the land for reasons best known to himself. One thing was
+favorable in that the sea air had braced up Juarez so that he felt more
+like himself though his head was queer at times. And no wonder for that
+blow the Mexican dwarf had given him was sufficient to have stunned an
+ox.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+A DAY AT SEA
+
+
+The Sea Eagle was steaming steadily South to her mysterious harbor. The
+day was a brilliant one and as the afternoon wore on the wind from the
+Northwest began to blow with fresher force and the white caps began to
+jump, here, there and everywhere over the broad surface of the ocean,
+and then slide down on the back of the waves.
+
+There was a good deal of motion on the part of the Sea Eagle now, as she
+plunged into the waves and threw the spray back over her decks. Both
+Juarez and Tom proved themselves good sailors, which was just as well
+for if they had been sea sick together with their other miseries they
+might have succumbed.
+
+Finally the long afternoon wore away and the time came for supper. The
+boys being neither flesh, fish or fowl, were not allowed to eat with the
+crew, and they did not mind in the least. When their rations did arrive,
+or rather when they went to the ship's galley and got their share, they
+found the fare not lacking in quality and abundance. There was a heaping
+plate of Mexican beans, a big hunk of bread and a bowl of hot tea. After
+the boys had stowed this below in their hatches they felt a hundred per
+cent better and more fit to meet any fate that might await them.
+
+An hour before sunset a heavy bank of fog began to roll up from the
+West, soon covering the whole sky with its gracious softness, and
+decided restfulness, after the glittering blue-diamond beauty of the
+day.
+
+It is the fogs alone that make the climate of California, especially in
+the Southern part endurable. Too much sunshine becomes as unbearable as
+too much cloudiness.
+
+The sea went down, when the fog came up and the waters took on a steely
+color under their blanket of gray, rolling on, in that monotonous
+meditation that holds the mystery of forgotten ages in its brooding.
+
+"Here's where you will sleep, boys," said Old Pete, who had been
+appointed by the Captain to have special charge over their education.
+"The men won't have you in the fo'castle, and it's pretty crowded there
+anyway."
+
+"This will suit us, sir," replied Juarez. He did not call him Pop, as
+he would have on the land. This was the sea and had its own rules and
+customs, therefore Old Pete received his due of respect. But in his
+rough way he was not unfriendly towards the boys, for he remembered that
+they had given him friendly advice, when he was aboard that strange
+craft, a horse, the night before.
+
+The place where the boys were to sleep was a sort of cubby hole in the
+bow of the boat, that was roofed over and where anchor chains and other
+junk was sometimes kept. It was not over four feet high, five in width
+at the broadest and narrowing to the bow.
+
+A rude place to sleep in, but what did the Frontier Boys care for that?
+They could scarcely count the nights that they had slept out on the
+ground, and in bad weather too. They had a blanket apiece, and a
+tarpaulin to pull over them.
+
+The blankets they had spread out on the floor of the cubby hole and they
+found that the tarpaulin made a mighty warm protective covering, keeping
+out the damp sea air in fine style.
+
+"Where do you suppose we are heading for, Juarez?" inquired Tom.
+
+"Maybe a port in Mexico or South America and then again we may head for
+Hawaii before we intend to."
+
+"We are going South now, though," said Tom.
+
+"If we run in close to the coast, we'll jump overboard, and swim for
+it," said Juarez.
+
+"We could do it if we get within a mile," said Tom, "if it is not too
+rough."
+
+Just then Juarez put his hand over Tom's mouth, he felt sure that
+someone was listening or was preparing to. Juarez ran his fingers
+carefully over the boards until he found where a hole had been bored
+through the planking a little back of their heads. It was just as he had
+suspected, someone was listening to hear what plans they would make.
+
+With the noiselessness characteristic of him when scouting, Juarez crept
+out partially and cautiously raised his head until he caught sight of
+the sole of a man's boot. Then he crept back to his place and gave Tom a
+nudge. Forthwith they began talking in rather loud tones.
+
+"Say Tom, do you know I rather like this ship. These fellows are rough
+in their way but that is to be expected."
+
+"Of course," said Tom, in an equally loud voice, "but we might as well
+make the best of it. There is no chance for the boys to find us."
+
+"You're right there, Tom."
+
+Then in a short time they appeared to fall into a deep and sonorous
+sleep. This was no fake on the part of Tom who was actually and
+thoroughly tired. But Juarez was more of a veteran and he kept his eyes
+open and he was rewarded in a few minutes by seeing a man's feet hanging
+over the edge of their bunk house and then he saw the figure of the mate
+slouch aft.
+
+"You sly old rascal, you," remarked Juarez. "We will 'larn' you to try
+and be too smart with the Frontier Boys. We may be young but we are not
+fools."
+
+Nothing happened for a while and the gentle plunge of the Sea Eagle into
+the long rolling swell soon lulled the tired Juarez into a sound sleep,
+so that neither he nor Tom were aware that the ship had suddenly changed
+her course.
+
+By and by however, Juarez waked with a start. Something had happened, he
+knew not what. He sat up and struck his head upon the planking overhead.
+Fortunately however he did not hit the place where the Mexican had
+struck him but at the best his head was a tender place with him and the
+blow stunned him, but as he was now more his rugged self, he soon
+recovered.
+
+He found what had wakened him was the stopping of the ship. He saw
+several dark forms moving aft and he crept out to see what was afoot. He
+had to move very carefully but managed to reach the hood of the
+forecastle, where he crouched looking and listening.
+
+He saw that they were lying to, close in to shore and could see the
+white splash of the breakers as they rolled towards the shore and could
+hear their monotonous thunder upon the beach. Here perhaps was their
+chance. Just then he heard the heavy voice of the Captain from the
+bridge.
+
+"Lower away there." Then the starboard boat slid noiselessly down from
+the davits into the water.
+
+Juarez got up and glided back into the cubby hole to tell Tom the good
+news. It was their opportunity to escape and seemingly a good one. The
+sea was smooth and the night was dark. They could slip over the side of
+the vessel and pull for the shore, and not a soul on the Sea Eagle would
+be the wiser until they looked into their nest in the morning to find it
+empty.
+
+Once they got to the shore it would be an easy matter to make their way
+North until they met Jim and Jo.
+
+The anticipation of the escape had already thrilled through every nerve
+in Juarez's body. But he had just started to wake Tom, when something
+made him look down the deck. There was the tall figure of one of the
+sailors coming directly towards the bow.
+
+Juarez lay down quickly as though asleep. Then the man reached down and
+caught hold of Tom's foot and Juarez's and gave them a rough yank. "So
+you are here, you young brats. You had better make a move or the Cap'n
+will finish you."
+
+Juarez was fairly sizzling with rage especially as Tom was really
+frightened by being wakened in such rough fashion and after all Tom was
+but a boy and it pained Juarez to see him so scared, but he was
+helpless, and all he could do was to add one more black mark to the
+score he was charging up to the free-booters.
+
+Instead of moving away, the man sat on a capstan a few feet distant from
+the boys' den, watching for the slightest move on their part, a marlin
+spike dangling playfully in his hands. Juarez had not taken the crafty
+and keen sighted Captain Broom into account.
+
+From the Bridge, that worthy, although he was watching the launching of
+the boat, had chanced to catch sight out of the tail of his eye of a
+dark shadow flitting back to the forecastle. He was not sure it was one
+of the boys, but he was taking no chances, for he had a real respect for
+their prowess and audacity as he might well have.
+
+So he had sent one of his crew to guard this young lions' den, while the
+ship was so close in shore. He did not intend to stay longer than was
+necessary right at this point, and he waited with some anxiety for the
+return of the mate and Pete in the boat.
+
+It was now two o'clock in the morning and Captain Broom wanted to be out
+at sea a good safe distance before the light broke. The mate's boat had
+now been gone over a half-hour, and the Captain stood at the end of the
+Bridge looking towards the shore. There was not a light upon the vessel
+to show her position. She lay silent and black upon the dark waters.
+
+Then the Captain straightened up. He saw a moving body approaching the
+ship and heard the slight dip of oars. Then the boat was alongside and
+instead of two men, there were three in the boat. The Captain went down
+to the main deck to meet them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+THE PASSENGER
+
+
+They met without any formality. The new passenger was a tall, slightly
+stooped man, with long hair falling down to his shoulders. Juarez was
+exceedingly anxious to see him, but could make out only a dark form
+moving along the deck.
+
+"Come to the cabin, Jeems," called the Captain. "I've got something to
+tell ye."
+
+They were soon seated in the Captain's cabin. This was a good-sized
+room, panelled in light wood and very neatly kept. There was quite a
+broad table of the same wood as the walls and a swivel chair in front of
+it. The Captain seated himself in this chair and whirled to talk to the
+visitor from the shore.
+
+It was evident that he was not a temporary visitor for scarcely had they
+seated themselves in the cabin than the Sea Eagle slowly and gently
+turned and they felt the pulsation of her engines as she headed once
+more for sea. The man was seated on a sea chest opposite the Captain.
+
+He wore long cowhide boots, with jeans pants thrust into their tops,
+flannel shirt of a nondescript color and a corduroy jacket. His hat was
+of a battered gray. The face was smooth-shaven, deeply lined and burnt
+to a dull brown. The hair which came down to his shoulders had that
+peculiar sun-burnt weathered tinge that comes from continual exposure to
+the weather. He was not an old man, probably on the sunny side of forty.
+
+"Well, Jeems, what is your news?" inquired the Captain.
+
+"The government boat is in the harbor, that's all." The Captain gave a
+low, peculiar whistle.
+
+"When did she show up?" he asked.
+
+"Two days ago, Cap'n," he replied.
+
+"Come from the South?"
+
+"Yes," replied the man. "Put in for coal, I reckon."
+
+"Then put out for us," said the Captain briefly.
+
+"Any 'baccy, Cap'n? Been out two days," remarked Jeems.
+
+"Lift your lanky frame off that chest," replied the Captain, "and I'll
+git you some."
+
+The man sprang up with remarkable alacrity, and as he unfolded length
+after length of his long figure, it seemed as if his head would touch
+the ceiling of the cabin. In fact, he did not miss it by many inches.
+It was a comical contrast between the short stooping figure of the
+Captain and the tall stranger.
+
+"Waal, Jeems, I wouldn't advise you to grow any more, or I'll have to
+raise the roof of my cabin."
+
+"That's what, Cap'n," replied Jeems imperturbably. "That's what happens
+when you grow up in Californy. You grow all the year around, and not
+like in New England where the winters makes you stubby."
+
+Then the native philosopher seated himself on the chest again and took
+long and delightful pulls at his recently staked pipe.
+
+"Hum!" he said. "This tastes right. Did yer ever know what it war to be
+starved for yer 'baccy, Cap'n?"
+
+"No," replied the Captain, "I can't say that I ever did."
+
+"Well, I want to tell you, Cap'n, that it is worse than going without
+water and I know what that is. Been on a desert till my tongue was as
+thick as a cow's, and hung out between my teeth, black."
+
+"How long have you been away?" inquired the Captain.
+
+"Three weeks, Cap'n."
+
+"How are the sheep lookin'?"
+
+"Pretty fair, Cap'n," he replied. "I think that they had a whiff of rain
+over there a few days ago."
+
+"It won't be long till we git the rains," suggested the Captain.
+
+"I don't know, Cap'n," remarked the lanky one. "The climate of Californy
+is a curious proposition. It's built on the bias down at this end."
+
+"How's that?" asked the Captain curiously. He had a certain interest in
+this particular courier's theories, however he might laugh at their
+peculiarities. For there was apt to be a basis of reason in them.
+
+"Well, it's this way, Cap'n," said James Howell, to give him his correct
+name, thrusting one lanky hand deep into his jeans pocket and bending
+forward awkwardly. "It's this way. You see the storms come down from the
+North to the Tehatchipei mountains, where there isn't any way for them
+to get through to the south. Then the clouds shift around to Arizony,
+and if the wind is right they are blown through the passes of the Sierra
+Madre into Southern Californy, then we get the rain. That's why I said,
+Cap'n, that this dazzling climate is built on the bias."
+
+"Waal, Jeems, as a weather prophet you can't be beat," said the
+Skipper.
+
+"In my business I get plenty of time to think, Cap'n," he remarked, "and
+as they ain't much to see except climate I think about that."
+
+"Waal, I have a good sight more than that to consider," replied the
+Skipper. "I'm thinking right now about that government boat. I'm going
+on deck. You can turn in."
+
+The Captain showed him to an empty cabin and the lanky stranger
+proceeded to make himself comfortable for the balance of the night,
+while the Captain went up on the Bridge.
+
+"Where are you heading this boat to?" he asked gruffly of the man at the
+wheel.
+
+Then he took the helm himself and immediately the Sea Eagle's prow
+pointed to the Westward as if she were heading directly for Japan.
+However, she held this course for only an hour and a half when the
+Skipper swung her bow once more to the South.
+
+Long before the morning broke, Tom and Juarez, hauled out of their
+resting place, were set to scrubbing the decks and rubbing them down
+with holy-stone. They waited eagerly for the first break of day to see
+where they were.
+
+Then the light came slowly through the fog-covered sky, showing a glossy
+sea with a slight swell and not a sign of land anywhere. The boys'
+hearts sank within them and they felt sure that they would not see their
+native land again.
+
+Once in a while they would glance up at the Bridge where stood the
+Captain with his powerful stooped figure. He was evidently on the
+lookout, for with his eye at a long glass, he kept scanning the sky-line
+to the east. What was he looking for? Juarez knew instinctively that he
+was afraid of pursuit.
+
+If only they could be overtaken and captured, his heart thrilled at the
+thought and he watched the Captain eagerly for the first sign of
+excitement. About ten o'clock he saw by the Skipper's actions that
+something of interest had come under his observation.
+
+There were a number of quick, sharp orders given and Juarez noticed the
+increased volume of smoke pouring from the stack. The Sea Eagle began to
+show the speed that was in her trim, black form. Juarez worked around
+the port side of the boat as rapidly as he dared, and his heart leaped
+with hope.
+
+He saw low upon the eastern horizon a smudge of black smoke. If he only
+had known what the Skipper knew, his hopes would have risen still
+higher. Certain preparations were going on upon deck. The three cannon,
+one in the stern, that had fired the salute to the group on the shore,
+one on either side of the quarter-deck, were divested of their canvas
+jackets.
+
+They certainly gleamed bravely in their polished brass. Then the
+ammunition was got ready beside each separate gun. It begin to look like
+business. The Sea Eagle began to justify her name and fly through the
+water. Still the spot upon the horizon grew bigger.
+
+Then Juarez began to have a paralyzing feeling of doubt. The steamer,
+though coming up fast, did not seem to be steering the proper course to
+head the Sea Eagle, bearing on her port-quarter instead of across her
+bows as would have been the natural course if she wished to intercept
+her.
+
+Then the doubt in his mind was changed to disappointed certainty for the
+Skipper waved his hand to the mate, who was busy on the deck below. It
+was after he had taken a pull at the spyglass, which this time seemed to
+have an intoxicating effect upon the Captain.
+
+"It's all right, Bill," he yelled, "It's nothing but a steamer bound for
+'Frisco. It looks like the Panama."
+
+Juarez and Tom resumed their work doggedly. That was all that was left
+for them to do. They scarcely glanced at the big steamer as she
+appeared, growing constantly larger above the horizon, and then
+diminishing as she steamed North towards San Francisco.
+
+Juarez was scrubbing the deck near a cabin door when it suddenly opened,
+and a tall, long-legged figure stepped out and fairly over him. He came
+to the conclusion that it was the man who had come aboard the night
+before.
+
+He took in the tall, gaunt man with the smooth-shaven face and long hair
+at two glances--one not being sufficient to his height.
+
+"Well, who are you?" he inquired lounging on the rail and regarding
+Juarez with mild-eyed interest.
+
+"I'm Juarez Hopkins, deck scrubber. Who are you?"
+
+"I'm James Howell, sheep farmer. I'll add you two lambs to my flock," he
+replied, whimsically, glancing at Tom who was down the deck a way.
+
+"You are more apt to find us wolves in lamb's hide," retorted Juarez.
+"Where's your farm?"
+
+"There," said the stranger, pointing with a long, bony finger on the
+port-quarter, "that nigh island."
+
+Then Juarez saw to his surprise, two islands that seemed to have sprung
+like magic upon the South-eastern horizon. The further one lay long and
+low and dark but distant beneath the fog-lined sky, the "nigh one" was
+more short and dumpy in appearance.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+TO THE RESCUE
+
+
+During the afternoon, everything had been made ready for the journey of
+the morrow. There was not a great deal to be done for the three rescuers
+would travel light. There would be no need of a pack animal, because the
+Senor had assured the boys that they would find hospitality on the way.
+
+Jo however was in mourning because when he gave his black a trial
+gallop, it was discovered that he was badly lamed in the right knee. It
+would not have been safe for any of the pirate gang to come within range
+of Jo's wrath.
+
+"The cursed brutes stove him up for fair," he declared grinding his
+teeth.
+
+"I'm afraid it will take a month's rest before he will be fit,"
+determined Jim.
+
+"Then I'm out of it," exclaimed Jo sorrowfully.
+
+"Not so, my friend," interrupted the Spaniard. "Take the bay. He is not
+as good a horse as yours, but he has great endurance. He is yours to use
+as long as you wish."
+
+Jo thanked the Spaniard heartily for his kindness and generosity. Then
+he spoke in a low voice to his brother. "How about that money, Jim?
+Don't forget to pay the Spaniard for those goods we bought at the
+store." Jim spoke up.
+
+"Senor, I wish to show you a little something of interest."
+
+Then Jim got his heavy saddle, on which he had ridden so many hundred
+miles. And the Senor regarded it with interest, because of the carved
+leather workmanship which was of the finest and he was a connoisseur of
+such matters.
+
+"How much would you give for it, Senor Sebastian," inquired Jim, "if it
+were put up for purchase?"
+
+"It is a beautiful saddle. I would be willing to give a hundred dollars.
+It is worth it."
+
+"That saddle is worth several thousand, Senor," replied Jim confidently.
+
+"I do not understand," replied the Spaniard. "It is the personal value,
+I suppose."
+
+"I will show you," said Jim.
+
+Then he took from his hip pocket a heavy bone handled knife which he had
+bought at the store and pulled back the hoof cleaner, an instrument
+attached to the knife that was used to get a pebble or anything that had
+got into the horse's hoof.
+
+With this he worked at the leather that covered the high and rather
+thick horn of the saddle. Finally he pried the top leather flap off.
+There was a heavy piece fitted into the top of the horn. With some
+difficulty Jim got this out disclosing a hollow, in which was concealed
+most of the jewels he had found in Mexico.
+
+"Hold your hands, Jo. Tight now." And with the word he emptied the
+contents of the horn into Jo's palms. Diamonds, rubies, turquoises and
+some heavy gold pieces.
+
+"That is what you might call a horn of plenty," said Jim jocosely.
+
+"But!" cried the Spaniard in amazement, "where did you get these?"
+
+"In Mexico," replied Jim. "This was what the Pirates were after. And
+they got all but this. Sometime I will tell you the story of its
+discovery. Now take this to reimburse you, Senor, for the money we spent
+at the store." And he held out the diamond.
+
+"That is far too much. That stone is worth five hundred dollars at
+least," said the Spaniard. "These three rubies would be more exact and I
+will take them."
+
+Jim, handing over the three stones selected, said, "Now, Senor, you
+shall take the diamond as a token of good will from my brother and
+myself."
+
+"We insist upon it," chimed in Jo.
+
+Finally the Spaniard accepted the gifts with many protestations of
+obligation and appreciation. Jo was about to urge him to accept a jewel
+for his sister, but Jim stopped him, knowing that the proud Spaniard
+would not hear to such a present.
+
+The next morning they were up an hour before daylight and ate a hearty
+breakfast by the light of the candles. Veterans though they were, the
+boys felt a thrill go through their pulses as they thought of the
+expedition that lay before them. Outside they could hear the pawing of
+the impatient horses.
+
+"To the success of our expedition and the rescue of our friends!" was
+the toast the Spaniard proposed as they rose from the table. The
+Frontier Boys drank it, but not in wine. They felt just a little foolish
+too, but such is the reward that often comes with doing what is right.
+But they were sturdy in their determination to stick to their
+principles.
+
+If they had only known it, down in his heart the Spaniard respected them
+the more, even though it seemed odd to him.
+
+Then they went out on the verandah, fully armed and ready to take their
+departure. Two oil lamps near the door and fastened to the wall, backed
+by shining reflectors sent a strong light across the verandah and into
+the darkness outside.
+
+There stood the three horses, eager to be off, each one held by a
+Mexican groom. Caliente we already know, and the horse that Jo is to
+ride also. So let us take a glance at the third animal, Don Fernando. He
+evidently justified all the enthusiasm of his master, a truly splendid
+creature.
+
+A dark chestnut, as large as Caliente and built on something the same
+lines. They were beautifully matched except in color. It was with a
+thrill of pleasure that Jim swung himself into the saddle. His mount was
+in fine fettle and ready for the long pull ahead.
+
+They started from the home ranch with a thunder of hoofs in unison, the
+riders checking their horses to a slow gallop with a heavy hand.
+Together they pressed through the waning darkness. There was a wonderful
+exhilaration, as they leaped forward, the horses powerful and fresh.
+
+Instead of following in the direction of the morning before, the
+Spaniard turned to the East until they came near the foot of the range.
+In a short time they came to a gate, which seemed to open mysteriously
+as they approached, but the motive power proved to be a small Mexican
+boy, whom the Senor had sent on ahead.
+
+Now they were on a turf road with bushes on either side and down this
+they thundered, Caliente the gray, and Don Fernando the dark, matching
+stride for stride, with Jo well in the rear. For he found if he rode
+close up he was blinded and stung by sods and stones thrown back from
+the flying hoofs of the two horses in the front.
+
+It was a bit lonely for Jo and he wished that one of the other boys was
+here to keep him company. As they rode, the bushes seemed to fly by as
+they do when you look from a railroad train and Jo was afraid lest his
+horse would be unable to keep the pace indefinitely. One thing in Jo's
+favor was that he was the lightest of the three and what is more to the
+purpose a very light rider.
+
+So like the good horseman he was, he determined to save his horse all he
+could and make him last out. For eight miles or more they rode without a
+stop until they came to another gate. This the Spaniard unfastened and
+swung open without dismounting, then closed it after Jo.
+
+The morning light was now distinct, although the fog was over the sky.
+Before them stretched a long level plain that broke into sand dunes near
+the sea. They could see the ocean lying dark in its monotonous level of
+color, to the Western horizon.
+
+"We have just left the Sebastian ranch," called the Spaniard.
+
+"It is immense," commented Jim. "May I ask how many acres it embraces?"
+
+"It was immense in the old days," replied the Spaniard. "Before your
+people took possession of the land. It was held by no fences then. But
+your laws were not ours and we lost many square miles. Now there are
+fifty thousand acres under fence."
+
+"Fifty thousand acres!" exclaimed Jo.
+
+"Ah, but it was double that before the Americans came," replied the
+Spaniard. Then he glanced critically at Caliente. "Your horse looks as
+cool as though he had been standing in the stable. The pace does not
+affect his wind either. Splendid condition!"
+
+"Caliente is as hard as nails," said Jim proudly. "But your horse has
+wonderful speed."
+
+The chestnut seemed more on edge than the old warrior, Caliente, and
+tossed the foam from his bit, until his dark coat was speckled with it.
+
+"He is high strung," said the Spaniard, "but I would back him against
+any horse flesh in California. We can let them out here for a half dozen
+miles."
+
+"Let her go, Senor. I won't let you lose me."
+
+At the word the Spaniard gave his chafing horse his head and away the
+chestnut sprang in the lead. It was slightly down grade for a mile,
+then there was a gulch twelve feet wide and of considerable depth. It
+was a good jump and to make it saved a little distance. Going at top
+speed the chestnut took the jump in fine style. His rider half turned in
+his saddle to watch Jim's effort. Caliente had faced worse leaps than
+that, he rose to it and swept over it as gracefully as a bird.
+
+"Good fellow!" exclaimed Jim patting him affectionately on the neck.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+THE BANDITS
+
+
+When Jo saw the gulch ahead, he decided that discretion was the better
+part of valor as he did not know his mount well enough to risk the leap,
+so he galloped a few hundred feet below, where the gulch narrowed and
+then he took the jump nicely, and scampered after the other two riders
+who were quite a way ahead.
+
+Jim purposely held Caliente in check, keeping a hundred yards in the
+rear of the Spaniard. Ahead a few miles, there was a perfect sea of
+yellow where the tall mustard covered the plain for a great distance.
+Into this they charged full tilt, the mustard reaching as high as their
+heads.
+
+There was a swish of its blossoms in their faces as the powerful horses
+charged into it and in spite of their strength they began to tire after
+going some distance.
+
+"Where is Jo?" inquired Jim suddenly after they had slowed down, "I
+don't see a sign of him." And he rose in his stirrups looking over the
+level lake of mustard.
+
+"Hello, Jo," he yelled at the top of his voice. No answer came. Could he
+be drowned in this lake? There was not a motion to indicate his
+whereabouts, no waving of the yellow tops.
+
+"It is very strange," said the Spaniard. "Did he cross the gully all
+right?"
+
+"Yes, I saw him take the jump below us a ways." Then Jim raised his
+revolver above his head and fired.
+
+"That ought to fetch him," he said. Then they listened intently.
+Suddenly about a quarter of a mile ahead of them they saw a sombrero
+rise like a gray mushroom above the yellow surface of the mustard, and
+Jo's voice came back to them.
+
+They both gave their horses the rein, this time Jim did nothing to hold
+Caliente back, and with their powerful speed the two great horses tore
+forward, on even terms until in the last hundred yards Caliente forged
+ahead by half a length.
+
+"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. There was Jo sitting quietly on
+his horse.
+
+"That's how you beat us," exclaimed Jim, pointing to a cow trail running
+diagonally through the growth of mustard.
+
+"Yes," laughed Jo, "I struck it further down after I jumped the gully.
+Otherwise you fellows would have lost me."
+
+"Good work, Jo," said Jim. "Now we will have it easier going."
+
+So in single file they galloped along the path, until they found
+themselves by noon, at the foot of a spur of mountains that extended
+from the main coast range to the ocean. Jim regarded this barrier in
+their way with a practised eye.
+
+"This will slow us down, Senor," he said. "It looks like a pass below
+there, about two miles."
+
+"Yes," said the Senor, "we can get through there all right, but it is
+pretty rough going."
+
+They had to advance more slowly now, as the ground was broken into stony
+ravines, and there was a good deal of brush. In this kind of country
+Jo's horse more than held its own with the bigger animals, for he was as
+nimble as a goat.
+
+"I hope we will find water, Senor," remarked Jim. "Our horses are pretty
+dry now."
+
+"Yes," replied the Spaniard, "there is a good spring at the foot of the
+Pass."
+
+They found it all right, in the entrance to the Pass, where there was a
+small green cove, surrounded with bushes, and on one side was a sheep
+herder's shanty. Jo investigated this immediately and found nothing in
+it but the charred remnants of a fire and a pair of discarded overalls.
+
+Jim, who had himself been looking around, made a more important find.
+
+"There has been somebody here recently," he announced. "Here are some
+tracks around the spring and not over twelve hours old."
+
+"Yes, I have no doubt," said the Spaniard carelessly puffing at his
+cigarette. "This Pass is used occasionally by ranchmen and herders."
+
+"There have been five or six horses here," said Jim, whose experiences
+had made him suspicious.
+
+"There are no Indians," said Jo, "in this section, at least none who are
+on the warpath."
+
+"I suppose you do have cattle rustlers, Senor?" inquired Jim.
+
+"Yes, there is a band of outlaws," replied the Spaniard, "that raids
+from as far north as our ranch, south to San Diego, but we have seen no
+trace of them for many months."
+
+"Then, Senor," remarked Jim, "it is about time that they paid you
+another visit."
+
+"Ah, Senor Darlington," exclaimed the Spaniard. "We Castilians do not
+reason so. We say that there is no trouble today, why worry about
+tomorrow. Perhaps these bandits may have starved to death, or been hung,
+or the good Padres may have persuaded them by the fear of Hell, to
+become quiet, sheep raising citizens. God knows."
+
+"I fear that they are raising sheep in their old style," grinned Jo. The
+pun glanced off the Spaniard harmlessly.
+
+"The theory that they may be hung, sounds plausible, Senor," admitted
+Jim. "But before we advance into the Pass, I will scout a little."
+
+"If the Senor pleases," responded the Spaniard courteously.
+
+"Do you chance to know of a small, hunchbacked Mexican who is more or
+less in this section of the country, Senor?" Jim suddenly inquired.
+
+The Spaniard flushed with red anger and spit emphatically on the ground.
+
+"You give him into my hands and I will reward you well," cried the
+Spaniard.
+
+Jim made no immediate reply but gazed thoughtfully at the ground. He was
+considering the case. This was not the time to turn aside in a chase for
+even so desperate a criminal as the hunchbacked greaser. So he made no
+definite reply to the Spaniard.
+
+After the horses were fed, and watered, and while Jo was looking after
+the coffee, Jim started off, to do a little scouting up the Pass. The
+first thing that he did was to slip off his heavy riding boots, which
+the stylish Jo had forced him to buy, and to put on his noiseless footed
+moccasins.
+
+Then with his revolver loaded and ready to his hand, he went swiftly and
+silently up the trail that followed through thick brush, gradually
+working up the side of the mountain. It was no difficult task to follow
+the tracks of the horses. In a half hour's swift climbing he came to the
+top of a stony ridge, over which the trail curved, and dipped down the
+other side.
+
+Jim now saw that the Pass was an irregular one with recurrent spurs,
+thrusting out from the mountains on either side, at quite frequent
+intervals. There were innumerable chances for ambuscades. Jim did not
+stand in the trail but to one side partially hidden in a thicket.
+
+All the time his keen eyes were taking in the canyon below, not however
+admiring the scenery. In fact there was nothing particularly beautiful,
+or interesting in the view. In the Rockies and further South too he had
+seen canyons incomparable to the rather ordinary ones that he had seen
+in California.
+
+Jim was watching for some slight movement of a living creature in the
+canyon. Finally he gave it up, and was about to turn away, then he gave
+a start, he saw one, two, three, men crouch across the trail, a quarter
+of a mile below, and disappear into the thick brush. He was almost
+certain that the first one was the hunchback.
+
+That was all that Jim wanted to see. He noiselessly took the back trail,
+thinking over the best course to pursue. He would have liked nothing
+better under ordinary circumstances than to fight it out with the
+outlaws and to capture the hunchback. But their first object must be the
+rescue of Tom and Juarez.
+
+Was there not some way by which they could get to the South without
+going through this bandit infested Pass?
+
+"Well brother, what didst thou find?" inquired Jo, who was at times
+pleased to be dramatic.
+
+"Very few specimens in the way of bandits," replied Jim.
+
+"As I said, Senor," remarked the Spaniard, "they have become good
+citizens."
+
+"Not yet, I am sure, because they are alive."
+
+"That is a good one, Jim," remarked Jo, appreciatively, but the Spaniard
+was politely mystified. "Same as Indians."
+
+"I found one thing out," said the diplomatic Jim, "and that is, that the
+Pass is a hard one on horses. Are you sure, Senor, that there is no
+easier way than this to get through?"
+
+"Positive," briefly responded the Spaniard.
+
+Jim who was seated on a rock digging his heel into the soft earth,
+looked up as a sudden idea struck him,--but without knocking him out.
+
+"How far is it from here to the sea, Senor?" he asked.
+
+"Not over five miles."
+
+"Can we not get around that way?" Jim inquired eagerly.
+
+"Why, yes," replied the Spaniard slowly, "if the tide is not coming in.
+In that case we should be drowned." Jim glanced hastily at his watch.
+
+"We can try for it and make it, if we do not waste any time," he said.
+"The horses have had a good rest."
+
+"Very well, Senor," said the Spaniard resignedly. He regarded Jim as an
+amiable hurricane whom it was not worth while battering to resist. Jim
+hastily swallowed his coffee and a hunk of bread and in five minutes the
+three musketeers were in the saddle again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+RACE WITH THE TIDE
+
+
+In spite of the rough going, they made good time for the five miles,
+spurred on by the constant anxiety lest they should not reach the beach
+before the tide began coming in. There were several gathered to see them
+off when they left the mouth of the Pass, but not to give them a send
+off.
+
+A short explanation will prove this. It is not to be supposed that the
+hunchbacked Mexican and the bandits did not know that the three horsemen
+were coming over the plain of the mustard growth. Indeed, their scout,
+the Mexican dwarf, saw Jim, Jo and the Spaniard when they first landed
+in the entrance to the canyon.
+
+He had gone back to report to the bandits their coming, and after Jim
+had returned, they had prepared the nicest trap imaginable near where
+Jim had been hiding. They had had numerous experiences in that line and
+were perfectly qualified experts. The spider and the fly was nothing to
+the arrangements they had made to receive their supposably unsuspicious
+guests.
+
+You can imagine the surprise and disgust of the bandits and their scout
+when they saw the three horsemen ride in an entirely different direction
+than that they had looked for. Talk about convulsions, you should have
+seen these desperadoes express their disappointment. It was terrific.
+Not a saint in the long calendar was left unscathed.
+
+How Jim would have enjoyed the performance. But entirely oblivious to
+this, Jo, Jim and the Spaniard were riding rapidly towards the sea.
+Before an hour had passed, they had ridden between the rounded sand
+dunes and then out upon the hard, smooth sand of the beach.
+
+"This is splendid going, Senor Sebastian," exclaimed Jim.
+
+"It is all right," he replied, "if the sea does not get hungry too
+soon." But the sea appeared to be in a very pleasant mood and the white
+breakers had withdrawn as far out as it was possible to get. It was such
+a smooth smiling sea with the laugh of its little sparkling waves that
+it seemed that there could be no possible harm in it.
+
+"I never saw a road that was better than this!" exclaimed Jo in
+delight. "It is perfectly springy and no dust or mud."
+
+It deserved all of Jo's praises, this broad, firm California beach. The
+brown sand, that had been pounded down by the force of the great rollers
+some hours before, showed scarcely a sign of the shoes of the horses.
+
+There was plenty of width and the three horses pressed on abreast, the
+powerful sweep of the gray Caliente and the chestnut Don Fernando, and
+the snappy, nervous leaps of the little bay that Jo was riding. With the
+bracing sea air and the exhilarating speed, the three musketeers were
+invigorated.
+
+The Spaniard hummed a gay ballad, while at times Jim's heavy bass and
+Jo's lighter treble were joined in a rollicking American song. They
+laughed without reason, for the simple joy of being alive and on the
+move; but as pride sometimes goes before destruction, so happiness often
+goes before disaster.
+
+It was a small matter too, but it made for trouble. The Spaniard's horse
+stepped between two small rocks that were close together and wrenched
+one of his hind shoes nearly off. Jim and Senor Sebastian hastily
+dismounted. Of course they carried with them the necessary things to
+fix the shoe on again, but even then it was a question of a number of
+minutes.
+
+"You had better ride ahead, Jo," urged Jim. "Your horse is beginning to
+tire and we will overtake you, when we once get started."
+
+"It is a good idea," joined in the Spaniard.
+
+"All right," acquiesced Jo readily enough, and he gave his bay the rein,
+riding slowly down the beach.
+
+Then the two began operations on Don Fernando's hind foot. Here they
+found their first real delay. At the point where the accident happened,
+the mountains came down quite close to the sea, so that they were
+crowded in much closer than they had been. The nearness of the water
+made the big chestnut restless and hard to handle.
+
+The Spaniard had great difficulty in getting near enough to his horse to
+get hold of his hind foot. When he did succeed in doing this, and was
+just starting to peg the shoe on, an extra big wave slapped down upon
+the beach, though at a safe distance and caused the big chestnut to jump
+and hurl his master to a distance of a dozen feet.
+
+"This won't do," cried Jim. "I'll take my horse around to the sea side
+of yours and close up. Perhaps that will give your animal confidence."
+
+It worked like a charm, for though Caliente was high-spirited, he was
+not flighty and he steadied his comrade so that the two workers were
+able to fasten the shoe.
+
+"We have lost a good half hour," said Jim, looking at his watch with a
+grave face.
+
+"Perhaps we shall have to turn back," remarked the Spaniard with
+gravity. "We may not escape the incoming tide if we go on."
+
+"Don't you believe it," cried Jim, impetuously. "I've got business ahead
+and must go."
+
+"Have it your way," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile. He knew
+what dangers lay ahead with a rising tide and Jim did not or he probably
+would not have been so insistent.
+
+"I see no sign of Jo," remarked Jim, as they swung into the saddles.
+
+"Ah, we will not catch him. He is safe," replied the Spaniard.
+
+Then with tremendous speed, they swept down the beach, the splendid
+horses responding to the crisis. It was their fleetness against the
+steadily rising rush of the inexorable sea. They actually gained ten
+minutes on the first two miles and a half. Then Jim saw ahead the dark
+form of a headland thrusting out towards the sea.
+
+Already the rush of a long wave would send the water lapping around
+their horses' feet. Jim recognized the danger. They must get around that
+promontory or give up beaten. Then he gave Caliente a touch with a spur,
+the first that day. With a snort, the spirited animal sprang forward
+faster than before and at his shoulder was the chestnut with flaming
+nostril.
+
+None too soon had they reached the headland, for the recurrent waves
+were beginning to surge against it, with full force and gnawing foam. In
+the fierce fury of their charge, they sent their horses against the sea.
+It was at the long withdrawal that made bare the scattered black rocks,
+that they rounded the headland.
+
+But too soon a great thundering wave with the force of the Pacific
+behind it came roaring in and swelled to the horses' throats, almost
+submerging the riders. But the animals held against its withdrawing
+power and before the ocean could return to the attack, they had got
+beyond the headland to a safe place on the beach.
+
+The horses were trembling and quivering with their exertions and with
+the fear of the sea which is the most terrible and paralyzing of all
+fears. Jim drew a long breath of relief and looked ahead to see if there
+was any sign of Jo. Then to his consternation he saw that the beach
+curved inland and at the further end of the curve was another frowning
+headland thrusting itself out somewhat further than the one they had but
+just rounded.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+THE ENCHANTED ISLE
+
+
+Let us now return to the Sea Eagle, and find out what is happening
+there.
+
+You recollect that Juarez had just discovered two islands lying on the
+South-eastern horizon, the one, long and low, the other comparatively
+short and dumpy. He had been conversing with the tall shepherd of the
+island, who seemed to take an interest in Juarez. But because of his
+isolated life during a greater part of the year, he would have taken an
+interest in a stone idol, if he had chanced to discover one.
+
+"Which of these islands are we making for?" inquired Juarez.
+
+"The one where we land," replied the sheep farmer oracularly. "I might
+ask the Cap'n, only I never pester him with questions. You aren't a
+Yankee, are you?"
+
+"No," replied Juarez, "I'm not. My folks live in Western Kansas."
+
+"I'm glad to hear it, son. But what are you doing here?" he asked.
+
+"You aren't a Yankee, are you?" inquired Juarez, quizzically. The man
+laughed softly to himself.
+
+"You've got me there, lad," he said. "It looks to me," he continued,
+"that the old man is going to steer for the further island."
+
+"Then you will have to swim for your home," remarked Juarez.
+
+"I can wade," he replied whimsically, looking down at his long legs.
+
+"You are a humorist," said Juarez.
+
+"No, you can put me down for a philosopher, that is to say, a man who
+has much time to think and nothing to do."
+
+"I should like to be one," said Juarez. "Suppose you holy-stone these
+decks while I try it."
+
+"No, my friend," replied the shepherd, "I am too much of a philosopher
+to make any such swap."
+
+"Is Captain Broom one?" asked Juarez.
+
+"Well, he is a sort of a philosopher till he gets mad, then he becomes a
+living active volcano, belching out a lava of hot language and scorching
+things generally. I guess that I had better be moving along. I see that
+he is eyeing me from the Bridge, and he is likely to get active any
+moment if I keep you from working." With this the lanky shepherd
+strolled forward and seating himself upon the top of the boys' sleeping
+place in the bow, smoked his pipe in meditative comfort.
+
+His estimate in regard to the destination of the Sea Eagle proved to be
+correct. For in the early afternoon the ship passed under the lee of the
+long island and was steaming up the channel between it and the mainland,
+which was distant some thirty-five miles.
+
+The fog had cleared by noon, and there was that complete transition to
+brilliant, sunny weather. There was a sort of a white haze along the
+distant coast and beyond far inland, rose the faint summits of the high
+mountains.
+
+Fortunately Juarez and Tom had a chance to observe their new
+surroundings for they had been set to work sewing on a small sail that
+was to be used in one of the boats. They sat upon the top of one of the
+hatches, under the watchful eyes of old Pete and the philosophic gaze of
+the shepherd. Sewing was one of the accomplishments of the Frontier
+Boys. They had been obliged to learn.
+
+"What is that particular bronze looking weed, floating in these waters?"
+asked Tom. It was as Tom phrased it, bronze and a most beautiful color.
+
+It was indeed a giant among weeds; just such as the garden of the ocean
+would grow. The stems were fifty to eighty feet long, with peculiar
+colored leaves eight to ten inches in length, growing on little boughs
+from the parent stem. The whole structure was held up by small bronze
+buoys, of a round shape.
+
+"Well as ye seem likely boys and want to learn, I'll tell you about this
+plant," said the shepherd. "The scientific fellows call it Algae. When
+the world was first made this algae covered the whole surface of the
+ocean."
+
+"How did you learn this?" asked Juarez.
+
+"You know that the Captain is quite a collector, and in his travels has
+gotten together among many other things some interesting books. He gives
+them to me when convenient." The face of the lanky shepherd was
+perfectly grave when he spoke of Captain Broom as a collector.
+
+"What makes the water so clear around here?" asked Juarez. "I never saw
+anything like it."
+
+"Well, you see," replied their mentor, "this island is placed
+peculiarly, I mean this side of it. You see how quiet the water is?"
+
+"It is certainly smooth and blue," said Juarez. "More like a lake than
+the ocean."
+
+"That's only true of this side," resumed the shepherd, "the other is
+rough enough, but you see the prevailing winds are from the Northwest
+and this shore is never disturbed. So on the beaches you will find not
+sand, but smooth round pebbles, because there is no action of the water,
+no breakers or waves to grind them into sand."
+
+About four o'clock the Sea Eagle came into a perfectly beautiful little
+harbor, at the South-eastern end of the island. There was a small level
+plot back from the beach and on all sides rose steep hills and back of
+them the mountains. It was the most picturesque scene the boys had ever
+beheld in all their travels.
+
+What would they not have given to have been free to roam that island,
+hunting inland, or fishing or bathing along those quiet, enchanted
+shores. But this was no pleasure excursion. Far from it. Captain Broom
+had his own ideas, and he did not intend to make a landing at all.
+
+"Get the whale boat ready, lads!" he ordered. "And put her over, we've
+got no time to lose."
+
+They lost no time either, under Captain Broom's commanding eye.
+
+What was necessary for the cruise was already in the boat. Two casks of
+water, several guns, and a lot of provisions. Then the boat was hove
+overboard into the quiet bay. The captain was ready with a much battered
+satchel in his hand. Not for one second did he entrust it to any one
+else.
+
+"Now over with you, you two lads," he commanded and Juarez and Tom,
+with a sinking of the heart, got into the boat. This was the last leg of
+their mysterious journey, and it boded them no good they felt sure of
+that. The mate they noticed stayed aboard in charge of the ship.
+
+They were put in the stern where old Pete had the steering oar. Near
+them sat the shepherd on one of the casks of water, his long legs
+getting uncertain accommodation. The captain had his position in the bow
+and two powerful sailors were at the oars, one on either side. They did
+not sit down, but stood up to their work.
+
+Without any loss of time the boat got under way proceeding seaward from
+the shelter of the beautiful little harbor. In spite of their
+depression, the two boys could not help being interested in the
+absolutely clear water in which they could look down for eighty feet.
+
+They could see the straight slender columns of the Algae rising to the
+surface, starting from where they were rooted in the bottom of the bay
+and swaying to the slow pulsation of the tide. These strange plants of
+this marine garden were marvels indeed. Between their stalks and among
+the encrusted rocks swam in absolute unconsciousness of being watched,
+many beautiful, and strange fishes.
+
+Some were small of golden hue, with little spots of a marvelous blue
+(poetry) that flashed like keen electric dew, (that will do). Others
+were like gold fishes, a foot in length and of corresponding breadth.
+There were long mackerel, and innumerable minnows, and over the rocks a
+peculiar little fish crawled or rather walked on thin rat-like feet.
+
+Before they had time to observe further the boat had got out of the
+harbor where the water sunk away to blue unfathomed depth. When clear of
+the harbor, they turned to the South, passing near a cove with a
+symmetrical pebbly beach, built up for five feet, above the level of the
+water. The ocean was perfectly smooth, with not a ripple upon its
+surface. They were evidently making to round the Southern extremity of
+the Island.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+IN THE WHITE BOAT
+
+
+Ahead of them was a rock rising fifty or sixty feet out of the water. It
+was evident that the rock was inhabited for there could be seen dark
+forms moving around upon it. Nothing had been said since they started,
+for the Captain was not in a talkative mood. Jeems Howell, the shepherd,
+had sat silently smoking his pipe in philosophic contentment.
+
+"What are those things on that rock?" inquired Tom, his curiosity
+getting the best of his reserve.
+
+"Two yankees in this boat," commented the shepherd. "Those are seals,
+son. Didn't you ever see any before?"
+
+"No!" admitted Tom.
+
+"You didn't know that seals, next to humans, are the smartest animals,
+in the world."
+
+"Is that so?" inquired Juarez. "They certainly are sleek."
+
+"They have got the most brain room, that's a fact."
+
+The boys regarded the seals with peculiar interest as the boat passed
+near the rock. They were moving about awkwardly by means of their
+flippers, moving their sinuous necks this way and that and regarding the
+strange boat with their soft brown eyes. Then they dived headlong into
+the sea, swimming about with a peculiar grace.
+
+"Queer animals," remarked Tom, "belong half to the sea and half to the
+land."
+
+"Something like sailors," remarked the shepherd.
+
+"What's the Captain going to do with us?" asked Juarez in a low voice.
+The shepherd's face took on a solemn expression, but before he could
+reply the Captain's voice roared.
+
+"None of that, you'll find out soon enough. You can talk about the flory
+and fauny, with long shanks, but don't let me hear anything else out of
+you," such was the Captain's ultimatum.
+
+But soon matters grew so interesting that they lost all inclination for
+talking. When they got near the Southern end of the island they began to
+notice white caps to the Southward, dotting the darkness of the sea.
+
+"You lads will have to hold tight now in a few minutes," remarked
+Howell. "Do you get seasick?"
+
+"No," replied the boys.
+
+"Well, you will have a chance soon, and if it don't fetch you, nothing
+will."
+
+So far they had been rowing under the sheltering lee of the island whose
+huge rocky bulk had shouldered off the charge of the wind-driven seas.
+Now before they had fairly rounded the island the character of the water
+began to change. The boat began to toss on the great rollers. Then as
+they cleared the land for good and were in the channel, a fresh gust of
+wind struck them, drenching the occupants of the boat with spray.
+
+The Captain stood up in the bow of the boat and steadying himself took
+in the conditions of the sea and wind. There was nothing in his grim
+weatherbeaten face to show what he felt. The men at the oars now made
+hard work of it against the headwind and the running sea.
+
+They would climb up a steep wave and then with a sickening slide, go
+down into the hollow, then with a lusty pull the sailors would bring the
+heavy boat over the toppling crest of wave to find another rushing to
+meet them. No rest, this was what made it such heart breaking work.
+
+The early fog had come, covering the sea with gloom, and the waves did
+not go down perceptibly. At times, they shipped a good deal of water and
+Tom and Juarez were kept busy bailing out. After an hour's hard
+struggle the sailors were about all in and seemed hardly able to hold
+their own against the sea and wind. The Captain was quick to notice
+this.
+
+"Can you row, lad?" he inquired of Juarez. Now the latter's experience
+had been confined to his work going down the Grand Canyon of Colorado,
+on the raft-boat that the Frontier Boys had built.
+
+Even the old ocean itself could not show anything worse than some of the
+rapids that the boys had run. As for rocks, nothing could beat the
+canyon for them.
+
+"I'll try, sir," he replied, "I've never rowed on the ocean."
+
+"Humph!" grunted the Captain, "take the starboard. And you, you lazy
+long shanks, you take the other oar."
+
+"All right, sir," replied cheerfully, the one addressed.
+
+"Get out of here, Pete," he cried, giving that worthy a lift with his
+foot that landed him on top of Tom, "I'll do the steering. You boys will
+only have to pull, that's all. I'll keep her headed up right."
+
+Fortunately Juarez was in fine condition, or he could never have stood
+the gruelling work ahead. He weighed one hundred and sixty pounds and
+there was not an ounce of fat on him. Likewise he had had a sound
+night's sleep and three square meals so that he was fortified for what
+was ahead.
+
+Juarez buckled to the task with all his strength, and he was glad of the
+chance to get his blood in circulation for he was chilled to the bone by
+the flying spray, and then too, anything was better than thinking of the
+fate ahead. He was surprised to find out that the shepherd who appeared
+rather frail in physique was able to keep up the pace.
+
+But he had that sinewy length of muscles that counts for more than mere
+bunchy thickness. Juarez was crafty enough not to spend all of his
+strength in the first fifteen minutes of work. He liked this, fighting
+the sea and standing on his feet he was able to put the whole leverage
+of his body into the stroke.
+
+The change in speed was noticeable right away, and the boat began to
+pull ahead steadily. The two sailors who had been laid off from
+exhaustion, had watched Juarez with a sneering grin as he took the oar.
+They were sure that the first wave that came along would wrench the oar
+out of his hand. Great was their surprise when they saw him buckle to
+the oar, rising and pulling at the right time to meet the toppling,
+rustling seas.
+
+"That little shrimp will last about ten minutes," said one of them to
+his mate.
+
+"Sure, Bill," replied the other.
+
+Juarez choked back a hot reply, for he knew that it would not be good
+for him to say anything to them. They were in the majority and would get
+him if he did, besides making it bad for Tom. The ten minutes passed and
+Juarez was just beginning to warm to his work. This took the wind out of
+their sails completely.
+
+The powerful hand of the Skipper at the steering oar was a great help,
+for now all that the two men at the oars had to do was to pull and not
+to worry about keeping her headed right. Juarez kept steadily at it for
+an hour and then darkness began to fall over the channel but not until
+the island that they were approaching had begun to loom up, dead ahead.
+
+They were now getting in the lee of the strange island and the sea was
+moderating perceptibly. At this juncture the two sailors who had become
+thoroughly rested took the oars from Juarez and his co-worker and pulled
+steadily through the gathering gloom. In a short time the bulk of the
+island loomed above them in the darkness.
+
+Not a word was said, only the swish of the sea was heard and the
+groaning of the oars in the locks. Tom and Juarez were deeply depressed
+and gloomy. They felt exactly as though they were being taken to prison
+and could sympathize with sailors who had been marooned on lonely and
+desolate islands.
+
+"Easy now, lads," called the Captain, as he brought the boat's head
+squarely around towards the shore.
+
+"Two strokes," he yelled, "and let her run."
+
+With great force they pulled the oars in succession, then they shipped
+them in a hurry. Juarez could see the dashing of foam on either side of
+the boat where the waves smote the rocks. There was a roar in his ears
+as the boat rushed toward seeming sure destruction. It was going with
+great speed from the impetus of the sailors' strokes.
+
+The Captain was standing taut at the steering oars, his eyes piercing
+the darkness ahead, then the foam of the breakers dashed in their faces,
+there was a quick sliding past of dark rocks and before they could draw
+breath again the boat was in quiet water, under some black cliffs. At
+last they had reached the mysterious goal of their mysterious journey.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+IN PERIL
+
+
+We must now go back in our narrative to where we left Jim Darlington and
+the Spaniard, Senor Sebastian, in a position of extreme peril, between
+the cliffs and the deep sea, with the white-fanged tide coming in like a
+devouring monster eager for its prey.
+
+"Is there a chance, Senor?" cried Jim as soon as his horse gained his
+footing.
+
+"It is the fatal day, I fear," replied the Spaniard with resigned
+hopelessness. "The sea is hungry."
+
+"As for that, so am I," declared Jim coolly. "So let us try to get
+around the headland and after that, supper."
+
+"As you please," acquiesced the Spaniard quietly.
+
+Then Jim turned Caliente's head and with a quick touch of the spur sent
+him full stride along the curving beach, followed closely by the
+Spaniard. Already the heavy waves were licking far up the slant of the
+sand. Even the veteran Caliente seemed nervous at its approach, while
+Don Fernando would jump and shy as the hissing water crept around his
+feet.
+
+In about two minutes the two horsemen reached the base of the rocky
+headland that barred their way. It was a desperate moment, there was but
+one thing to do and that was to take the chance.
+
+"Better be drowned quick, Caliente, old boy," cried Jim, "than slowly,
+but we'll beat you yet," and he shook his clenched fist at the ocean,
+and whirled his horse to meet a wave that struck Caliente breast high.
+So for a moment, the two, boy and horse, stood facing their powerful
+enemy, The Sea, that came with the recurring charge, its evenly
+separated files robed in blue with white crests. Thus they stood getting
+a full free breath before they leaped into the ranks of the foe.
+
+Jim's strained, keen gaze took in every detail of the situation, noting
+the position of the rocks that a receding wave left bare, so that he
+might find a clear path or trail in his dash for life. Nor did his gaze
+flinch as he saw the advancing wave break against the front of the
+cliff.
+
+"Now, Caliente," yelled Jim, with a sense of fierce determination and
+exultation that communicated itself to his horse, and lifting his feet
+free from the stirrups so that he would not be entangled, if Caliente
+should fall, he headed him seaward, galloping fast down the beach upon
+the heels of the withdrawing wave.
+
+Meeting a smaller inrush of water and dashing through its foaming crest,
+his gallant horse swam until he got a foothold upon the rocks at the
+base of the cliff. Now was the crucial moment. With absolute
+recklessness, Jim urged his powerful horse over the foam-covered rocks,
+striving to get around the prow of the headland before the charge of the
+next wave. Not one look did Jim give seaward, all his energies were bent
+upon using every precious second, and Caliente was filled with his
+rider's indomitable spirit.
+
+Then above them towered the fatal wave, and with a confused roar, it
+broke over them in sweltering foam and they were swept towards the black
+front of the cliff. Then came the impact against the rock and the next
+moment, stunned and bruised, Jim holding to the pommel of the saddle,
+with a death-grip, was carried out to sea with Caliente in the grasp of
+the retreating wave.
+
+It was all over, as like pieces of drift, horse and rider were swept
+away, but fortune does sometime favor the brave and, being caught in a
+powerful current, Caliente was carried South of the headland and his
+progress towards the sea was stayed by a rock that rose high, an
+outer-guard of the headland. So then the next great wave bore them
+toward the beach, and once Caliente got his feet upon the sandy bottom
+he braced himself against the fierce pull of the retreating sea,
+striving to drag him back again.
+
+Though almost unconscious, Jim clung to the saddle with his body
+half-drooping over the pommel. Then Caliente plunged blindly forward
+until he stood with head bent down and nose almost touching the sand,
+his great sides heaving, but safe at last.
+
+In the distance, a horseman could be seen coming at full gallop along
+the straight line of the beach. It was Jo, who finally had become
+frightened by the non-appearance of his two comrades and had turned
+back. His fright had been increased by seeing a horse and rider coming
+apparently out of the sea.
+
+When he came up, he found his brother Jim sitting on the sand still half
+dazed but slowly coming to himself.
+
+"Where's the Senor, Jim?" cried Jo. This question served to bring Jim
+completely to himself. He got up, looking pale, with one side of his
+face bruised to a real blackness, and the flesh of his left hand badly
+torn, where it had struck the cliff, but he was not thinking of these
+matters.
+
+"Why, Jo, the Senor came after me. Where is he?" Then it came over him
+all at once, that his companion was even now caught between the jaws of
+the black cliff.
+
+"We must get to him, Jo," he cried.
+
+"But how did you ever get around that cliff?" asked Jo.
+
+Already it was an awesome sight as the waves crashed in foam against its
+front and rushed shoreward along its black sides. It seemed impossible
+that only fifteen minutes before Jim had actually come around that
+foaming headland.
+
+In reply to Jo's question, Jim threw his arms around Caliente's neck
+with warm affection.
+
+"This is the old fellow that pulled me through," he cried. "But we must
+go to the help of our Spanish friend."
+
+"How can we?" inquired Jo. "We can't get around the headland unless we
+become fishes."
+
+Jim considered the problem carefully. One thing he was determined on and
+that was not to leave the Spaniard who had been so hospitable and
+helpful to them.
+
+"No, we can't go around by the headland," he determined, "but we might
+be able to find a way over the rocks and down on the other side."
+
+"All right, I'm ready."
+
+"Let's find a place for Caliente first," advised his owner. Back a short
+distance from the beach there were some trees on a lower spur of the
+mountain. Here Jim brought Caliente and took off the saddle and bridle.
+
+"Now make yourself comfortable," said Jim.
+
+Caliente, in seeming recognition of what was said, took immediate
+advantage of the invitation and rolled heartily in a dry and dusty spot.
+
+"Get your lasso, Jo," urged Jim, "and we will start."
+
+So together they made for the steep rock and soon reached the base of
+it, and now began a hard climb, but no more difficult than they had
+encountered before in their travels.
+
+"Do you recollect, Jim," inquired Jo, "that day you got stalled in our
+first canyon in Colorado, when you tried to imitate an eagle and fly up
+a precipitous cliff and we had to get you down?"
+
+"Oh, yes, I remember," replied Jim, "and how I scared you and Tom by
+pretending that an Injun was after me, when I went down to the creek for
+water."
+
+"Poor Tom," said Jo sadly, "I wonder when we will see him again."
+
+"In a couple of days," stoutly declared the optimistic Jim.
+
+They were now going up the face of the cliff, the lariats over their
+shoulders, and searching with careful feet for a foothold, while their
+hands clutched some piece of projecting rock.
+
+"Lucky this rock isn't rotten," cried Jo, "or we would find ourselves
+stuck headfirst in the sand below."
+
+"Like an ostrich," said Jim. "We couldn't do much in a place like this
+without our moccasins, that's certain."
+
+The moccasins did make them nimble as goats, and they not only made
+possible a secure hold, but they protected as well the feet. At first
+they were not in any grave danger of a fall because the drifted sand at
+the bottom of the cliff would have made a soft landing. But after a
+while they were forced to work their way out over the rushing water,
+then if they had slipped and fallen it would have been all up with them.
+
+It seemed as if the sea, furious at having lost Jim a short while ago,
+was making fierce efforts to get at them now. The great waves foamed
+against the cliff and the spray dashed over the boys, making the
+surface of the rock treacherous and slippery.
+
+"I can't bear to look down," said Jo. "It makes me dizzy."
+
+"Look up, then," Jim called back.
+
+"That's almost as bad," replied Jo.
+
+"Keep 'em shut then," was Jim's command.
+
+Finally they came to a place that stopped Jo entirely. Jim was able to
+get over it, because of his superior height and reach, and he attained a
+point of safety above Jo.
+
+"What am I going to do now?" cried Jo. "I can't go any higher and it is
+impossible for me to go back."
+
+"You wait," urged Jim, "till I get a secure foothold above here."
+
+"Oh, I'll wait," said Jo grimly, "you don't observe any anxiety on my
+part to move, do you?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+TWO LASSOES
+
+
+Finally Jim reached a broad ledge, that gave him an excellent foothold,
+and he got his lariat ready and dangled the loop under Jo's nose.
+
+"What are you going to hang me for?" inquired Jo.
+
+"For a horse thief, I reckon," replied Jim, "that bay don't belong to
+you does it, Mister?"
+
+"Meaning this ocean bay?" queried Jo.
+
+"I certainly will hang you for that," retorted Jim, "Now get the loop
+under your armpits."
+
+"All ready," cried Jo.
+
+Then Jim, bracing himself, kept a taut line on his brother, and with
+this help he was able quite easily to get over the slippery, bare belt
+of rock, and in a few moments was safe with Jim on the ledge.
+
+"It won't take us long now," said Jo, "to get to the other side."
+
+"Let's give him a yell," suggested Jim, "to let him know that we are
+coming."
+
+Then Jim put his hands to his lips and cried:
+
+"Senor, ahoy." They listened breathlessly and in a few moments came a
+faint reply. This put renewed energy into the boys and as the way was
+now easier, they leaped ahead, agile as goats, and had soon reached the
+top of the cliff. They looked eagerly down.
+
+There was the deep short semi-circle of the little bay with the waves
+heaving in against the cliffs and at the point midway between the two
+head-lands, where the beach was highest, they saw the Spaniard on Don
+Fernando. Already the encroaching waves were gnawing at them.
+
+It was only a question of minutes now, and horse and rider would be
+carried out to sea. The Spaniard sat like a statute. It was seemingly
+possible for him to have made his escape up the cliffs, which were not
+overly precipitous, like those Jim and Jo had just scaled, but he was a
+fatalist and believed that his day had come. Perhaps he did not want to
+abandon his horse, in which his pride was centered.
+
+"Cheer up, Senor, we'll be there," yelled Jim.
+
+Then followed by Jo, he sprang forward, leaping from rock to rock, and
+from jutting point to opportune foothold. It was dangerous and daring
+work, but the life of their friend was at stake and the boys were not
+the kind to consider their own safety at such a time.
+
+It was only their sure-footedness and varied experience in climbing that
+saved them from broken limbs or possible death. In a remarkably short
+time, they stood upon a ledge above the Spaniard.
+
+"Here, Senor," yelled Jim, "catch the rope."
+
+He did as ordered but called up, "Is there no way to save my horse?"
+
+Jim considered a moment, then shouted: "All right, yes, we will save
+your horse, too. Tie the ends of the lasso to the iron rings at the ends
+of the front cinch." This was a broad, strong band, which would furnish
+a good purchase, when Jim tossed down the lariat. The Spaniard caught it
+and made it fast as ordered.
+
+"Now, fasten this under your arms," ordered Jim, as he cast down the
+second lariat, which belonged to Jo. They then drew up the Spaniard to
+safety and he appeared to be pleased in a quiet way but not at all
+enthusiastic.
+
+"I am your eternal debtor, Senors," he said with a courteous bow.
+
+"How was it you did not follow me, Senor?" questioned Jim, "when I
+sailed around the headland?"
+
+"Don Fernando balked," replied the Senor. "I thought, too, that you had
+been drowned."
+
+"Came near it," replied Jim. "I would, too, if it had not been for
+Caliente."
+
+"But my poor Fernando, he will be drowned," cried the Spaniard, now much
+more excited about the safety of his steed than he had been for his own.
+It did look rather bad for the big chestnut, as a large wave swelling
+in, almost took him off his feet. He began to neigh wildly.
+
+"Don't worry, Don, old boy," cried Jim to the frightened horse. "If you
+will help yourself." There was something in his voice that seemed to
+reassure the animal.
+
+"Now, Jo, we will let you down by the lariat and get the bridle reins
+over his head and help him get a foothold on that ledge below us. He
+will be safe enough there, even if he does get somewhat damp."
+
+"Let me go. It is my risk for my horse," urged the Spaniard.
+
+"It is no risk, Senor," replied Jim. "You are heavier than my brother
+and stronger and can do more good on this ledge with me."
+
+"The commands of the General!" said the Spaniard with a low bow. "I see
+your plan is good."
+
+"We will tie this end of the lasso to the tree," said Jim, "so you will
+feel perfectly safe, Jo."
+
+The tree referred to was a sturdy, gnarled cedar, growing on the ledge.
+Then Jim swung his brother off and with every confidence in the strength
+of the lariat to hold, Jo made his way quickly and safely down, while if
+he had been without the rope he would have doubtless fallen into the
+water below.
+
+A wave surged in, submerging him, and then started triumphantly to carry
+him out to sea, but when the lariat pulled taut Jo struggled safely back
+on the rock, while the wave went grumbling back.
+
+"Catch the bridle now, Jo," urged Jim. "Don't waste any more time
+swimming."
+
+Thus adjured, Jo grabbed the bridle reins and pulled them over Don
+Fernando's head, and braced himself on the rock above. All was ready
+now, and the two above held the loop of the lasso that had been tied at
+the cinch, with both hands, and they pulled together. Again a big wave
+swelled in towards the cliff, which gave the frightened horse a big
+boost.
+
+Then, with Jim and the Spaniard pulling mightily from the ledge above,
+and Jo giving the big chestnut a purchase by a steady pull upon his
+bridle, the horse scrambled with a mighty clatter and all his frightened
+energy up the sloping rock. The lariat and Jo's work helped a whole lot.
+Without the three, he would never have made it.
+
+Before the next wave swept in, Don Fernando stood, trembling and
+dripping, but safe, upon the lower ledge. He seemed above the danger
+point now, though an unusually big wave welled up around the horse's
+fetlocks and the spray was continually dashing upwards.
+
+"He is all right now," cried Jim, "better come up, Jo, where it is
+dryer."
+
+"Haul in then," replied Jo, and then he was landed safely on the ledge.
+
+"Caught a speckled trout," exclaimed Jim in happy humor again.
+
+"Referring to my freckles, I suppose," grinned Jo. "If I'm a fish, I
+reckon Don Fernando is a whale."
+
+"Do you suppose he is safe?" inquired the Spaniard anxiously.
+
+"Who, Jo?"
+
+"Ah, no," said the Spaniard smilingly. "I mean the Don. The water seems
+to be rising."
+
+"You may rest assured that he is safe," replied Jim. "It is the turn of
+the tide now, and it is only a westerly wind that makes it appear
+higher. All we will have to do now is to wait."
+
+"It is a great pity, this delay," said the Spaniard warmly. "You are
+anxious to be on to the rescue of your brother and his friend. Anyway, I
+hope you will succeed as well in their case as you did in mine."
+
+"In another hour we will be able to start," said Jim, "the tide will
+then commence to run out."
+
+"Where shall we stop tonight?" inquired Jo.
+
+"Camp in the open as usual," replied Jim.
+
+"I hope we will get up above the sea so high that it won't come within a
+mile of us," said Jo, fervently.
+
+"As to a place to stop, I will see to that," said the Spaniard. "Do not
+give yourselves any uneasiness on that score."
+
+"It's getting kind of chilly roosting up here," remarked Jo,
+plaintively, "especially as the fog is coming in."
+
+"I'll warm you," said Jim. "Put up your Dukes."
+
+"You'll take the counts if I put up my Dukes," said Jo, who was an
+inveterate punnist.
+
+"Shut up," yelled Jim, giving his brother a hearty chug in the chest.
+Then they went at it hammer and tongs, giving and receiving good hard
+blows, and after ten minutes of whaling at each other, both were plenty
+warm. The Spaniard looked on in mild wonder.
+
+"You Americans love the hard exercise," he said. "I should think you
+would have great pleasure in resting awhile."
+
+"I got the best of the bout," declared Jo. "See how black and blue your
+face is on this side."
+
+"You didn't do that," protested Jim. "That was a wallop that old Neptune
+handed me when he bumped my head against yonder cliff."
+
+"Neptune! Yonder cliff!" jeered Jo. "You ought to be a story writer and
+use fine words."
+
+"Me a story writer!" growled Jim. "I ain't got so low as that, not so
+long as I have got two hands to steal chickens with."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+ANOTHER FRIEND
+
+
+"Do you not think, Senor Darlington, that it is now safe to start?"
+inquired the Spaniard, who was fearful of bloodshed, not quite
+understanding the boys.
+
+"Certainly," responded Jim, "we will get Don Fernando down from his
+perch and proceed."
+
+This proved to be an easier task than getting him up. His master lowered
+by the rope to his side, one scrambling leap and the horse was on the
+firm wet sand of the beach, almost knocking his master over in his
+eagerness to be on safe footing again. Don Sebastian now showed the gay
+side of his nature, as he vaulted into the saddle.
+
+He swung his hat wildly, the blood mounting to his face, and the horse
+seemed to feel the sting and excitement of his master's mood, as he
+pranced, danced and caracoled upon the sand and ended up by bowing in
+unison with his master to the two American lads, who were looking on
+with interest and amusement.
+
+Then the party made their way quickly along the curve of the beach and
+went around the fateful headland with perfect safety, while quite a
+distance out among the hidden rocks snarled the defeated ocean. Then
+Caliente heard them coming and he quickly raised his head, neighing in
+welcome to Jim and his comrade, Don Fernando.
+
+Jim gave him a vigorous hug for more than ever he was fond of his
+faithful horse. In a few minutes he had him saddled and away the three
+horsemen thudded in a swift gallop down the beach. The horses fairly
+flew, the wind of their speed tossing their manes back. It was cool
+beneath the fog laden sky and the refreshing sea air seemed to give the
+horses tireless endurance.
+
+Soon three miles had spun backwards under their hoofs and the boys were
+filled with the joyous excitement of the run. It seemed now that every
+stride of the horses was bringing them nearer to the hoped-for rescue of
+Tom and Juarez. And this was an incentive to their energy.
+
+"Here, friends, is where we branch off from the beach," cried the
+Spaniard.
+
+Then he turned his horse to the left and headed straight for a wooded
+spur that extended from the range to the shore. In a short time the
+three came to a well-traveled trail and were soon riding through the
+semi-dusk of the woods. For two miles they went up a steady grade.
+
+Then they rounded the summit of the wooded ridge and saw stretching far
+below them in the indistinct dusk, a wide plain bounded on the West by
+the blue darkness of the level sea with its rim of yellow sand.
+
+"We will soon be at the home of my friend, Senor Valdez," said the
+Spaniard, "where we will spend the night."
+
+"I'm a lovely looking object to present itself in a civilized home,"
+protested Jim, "I look like a tough who has been in a bar-room rush."
+
+"You are my brave friend," said Senor Sebastian, quietly, "and will be
+welcome."
+
+Jim blushed, at least one side of his face did, the other was already
+too deeply colored to show any emotion, and he grinned sheepishly.
+Before he had time to reply they swept into an open driveway, carefully
+sanded, and drew rein in front of a long, low white adobe house, that
+from its mountain terrace looked over Plain and Sea.
+
+Out came Senor Valdez to receive them, a stately Spaniard, who furnished
+the boys with an ideal of perfect courtesy ever after. To the end of
+their days they remembered their first visit to the home of Senor
+Valdez. How they did enjoy their dinner that evening in the long,
+pleasantly lighted dining-room.
+
+It was an excellent meal, with delicious soup, a salad garnished with
+peppers of the Spanish style, and garlic. Jim and Jo had never tasted
+anything equal to it. Besides there were frijoles and lamb, while the
+dessert was some slight and delicate confection of jelly and cream, made
+by the hands of the Senora Valdez.
+
+"I feel wicked sitting here and eating this fine meal," said Jo,
+addressing Jim in a low voice, "when Tom and Juarez are being ill used
+and probably starved."
+
+"Well," replied Jim, who was always practical, "I think it is better to
+eat, and to keep my strength up."
+
+"I guess it won't fail," commented Jo slyly.
+
+The boys bore themselves well, and without any diffidence though Jim had
+a whimsical recollection of his bruised side face and blackened eye, and
+he tried to keep it turned from the Senora Valdez, the fragile little
+woman who sat at the end of the table opposite her husband. She had snow
+white hair, parted low over her ears and the pallid face was lined with
+years. Very gentle was the Senora Valdez, but she had in her time beheld
+scenes of carnage and terror, so Jim need not have worried about his
+bruised face. But the wise old lady noticed his solicitude and
+understanding, was the more gracious to the young Americano because of
+it.
+
+That evening they sat on the piazza, that looked out towards the sea,
+the Spaniards smoking and Jim and Jo enjoying the music of a guitar
+played by a Mexican in a dim corner of the verandah and the boys heard a
+bit of important news.
+
+"There was a mysterious ship put into shore several miles South of here,
+late last night, Senor," said their host, "one of my shepherds brought
+me word."
+
+"The first scent of the trail," cried Jim eagerly. Then the Senor
+Sebastian explained to his friend more fully the objects of their
+search. Immediately the listener was deeply interested. Then he sent for
+an Indian, one of his trusted men, to come to him, and gave him minute
+instructions about some matters. Without a word the Indian turned and
+disappeared in the darkness, and in a short time there came the sound of
+a horse galloping full speed down the road.
+
+"Tomorrow, Senor Darlington, this Indian will meet you at a point near
+the Puebla de los Angeles, which my friend knows and he will have all
+the information there is obtainable as to the location of this ship and
+its crew," thus spoke the Senor Valdez. Jim thanked him with deep fervor
+for his unusual kindness, but the Spaniard made light of it.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+A TALE OF YORE
+
+
+As they sat there in the dusk of the verandah, Jim would have liked to
+ask his host to relate some of his experiences in southern California
+for he felt sure that the Senor Valdez had known something of adventure
+not only because those early days were full of marvels of interest, but
+there was something in the bearing of the old Spaniard that spoke of
+former days of romance and of stirring incidents.
+
+Then, too, there was something in the after-dinner content and quiet,
+following the perilous adventure which they had been through that
+predisposed the boys to listen to a good story of adventure. Their
+friend, the Senor Sebastian, seemed to divine what was passing through
+Jim's mind, for he suddenly spoke, breaking the meditative spell that
+had fallen upon the group on the piazza.
+
+"It just occurred to me, Senor Valdez, that our friends here might like
+to hear something of the early days in this part of the country, for you
+of all men know it thoroughly and I am sure it would interest them."
+
+"Indeed, it would, Senor," cried Jim enthusiastically, "it was in my
+mind to ask Senor Valdez to tell us of the early days but I was afraid
+to impose upon him."
+
+"I feel greatly honored to think that you young men would care to hear
+anything my poor tongue could relate. It would hardly be worth your
+distinguished attention." Jim made due allowance for the courteous
+exaggeration characteristic of the Spaniard.
+
+"Try us, Senor," he said briefly, "we would want nothing better."
+
+"I will have the coffee brought first," replied the Senor, "that may
+serve to stimulate my dull imagination."
+
+In a short time a softly moving servant brought out a tray of coffee
+cups, and placed one before each guest on a small wicker table. Jim
+noticed these cups with immediate interest. They were certainly
+beautiful and he had never seen anything like them before. They were of
+a wonderful blue, each one, and had a coat of arms in gold with raised
+figures on it; a scroll above with a Latin motto, and beneath the
+representation of a wild animal couchant. The Senor Valdez was quick to
+see Jim's interest and respond to it. "That is the coat of arms of my
+family," he explained.
+
+"I am not a scholar, Senor," said Jim, "and all I can make of the motto
+is that it has something to do with a lion."
+
+"You are quite right," the ghost of a smile hovered around the
+white-fringed lips of the Spaniard, at Jim's innate boyishness.
+
+"That figure does not look exactly like a lion," remarked Jo frankly.
+
+"Not like an African lion certainly," replied the Spaniard, "but a lion
+nevertheless, such as one finds yet in the mountain fastnesses of Spain,
+something like a panther only larger and much more fierce."
+
+"The lion seems to have a rope or chain around his neck," commented Jim,
+"and fastened to a collar."
+
+"Quite so," responded the Spaniard, "likewise the motto translated
+reads, 'Gentle as a Lion.'"
+
+"Rather strange way of putting it," said Jim curiously.
+
+"I will explain, for you would naturally be puzzled by the phrase,
+'Gentle as a Lion,' as it seems to contradict common knowledge," said
+Senor Valdez. "You see my family has the distinction, if such it can be
+called, in these modern days, the distinction of being old. This
+coat-of-arms dates back to the eleventh century."
+
+Jo was about to give a prolonged whistle of surprise when Jim gripped
+his knee to enforce silence, for though Jo might mean all right, the
+Spaniard might not understand.
+
+"The founder of the family who flourished at that time was a rather
+rugged character, and I am afraid would regard the family
+representatives of this day as very puny and unworthy specimens. This
+Rodriquez de Valdez had his castle in a rugged mountainous part of
+Spain, where there were plenty of wild animals and of wilder and fiercer
+men, bandits and free-booters without number.
+
+"His castle was a very powerful one, not only in construction but
+likewise in location, as it was built on a shelf of rock above a deep
+chasm, with precipitous cliffs behind it. However, Rodriquez de Valdez
+spent but very little time behind the protection of its powerful walls.
+It would take the forces of some strong Duke from the lowland to cause
+him to seek the shelter of his castle and to raise his war banner of
+crimson with a blue cross upon it, above the turret.
+
+"He spent his days hunting among the mountains for wild beasts or for
+marauding bands of lawless men. Rodriquez was a man of wonderful
+strength, even for those days, when there were giants in the land. In
+stature six feet five and powerful in proportion and likewise very fleet
+of foot. If I should tell you of some of the legends of his strength and
+swiftness, you would probably laugh.
+
+"But the one that has to do with the coat-of-arms of my family I will
+tell you. It chanced one day that he was out in the wilds of the
+mountains and quite alone. Intent upon the trail of a deer that he was
+following along a shelving mountain side, he did not see a lion half
+grown, but nevertheless very dangerous, which was crouching on the
+branch of a tree ready to spring upon him when he got beneath it.
+
+"When he had passed by under the tree a pace or two, the lion sprang
+with distended claws. Some instinct of danger made Rodriquez turn and he
+was just in time to grapple with the brute, clutching it by the throat.
+The lion had some advantage in weight but not a great deal, for my brave
+ancestor was probably three hundred pounds of sinew, bone and muscle. So
+that the struggle was not such an unequal one, but it was terrific while
+it did last. Finally, though torn and bleeding, the man subdued the
+beast, and had it in abject fear of him.
+
+"Then instead of killing the lion as one would naturally expect,
+Rodriquez took a strange humorous notion into his head. He would make a
+pet of this same lion and it should be his dog to follow obediently at
+its master's heels wherever he went. This idea he carried out and he
+even had a heavy brass collar placed upon its neck, and it followed him
+on all his trips, slouching with padded tread at his heel, or behind his
+war horse as he rode abroad, like a powerful yellow dog.
+
+"I do not imagine that the beast ever had any great amount of affection
+for his master, but he no doubt was in great fear of him, which seemed
+to answer the purpose quite as well. So, my friends, you have a full and
+complete explanation of the coat-of-arms of my family. My only fear is
+that I have wearied you with what could not have the same interest for
+you as it does for me."
+
+"Indeed, you have not wearied us, Senor," exclaimed Jo enthusiastically.
+
+"That is one of the most interesting accounts that I have ever listened
+to," said Jim. "I only wish I could have lived in those days when there
+was plenty of adventure."
+
+"I do not think that you have any reason to complain," remarked the
+Spaniard laughingly. "Perhaps your descendants in future years will be
+pointing out your daring deeds as emblazoned on their coat-of-arms."
+
+"No danger of that, I guess," laughed Jim, "though they might have a
+picture of Jo and me tied to a mule. That was the way old Captain Broom
+treated us." The Spaniard joined in the merriment at this unheroic
+representation of Jo and Jim.
+
+"Now, Senor Valdez, you have told us a tale of old Spain, tell us
+something of new Spain here in California," urged Jo.
+
+"It seems to me that it is now someone else's turn," said the Senor. "I
+would not do all the talking. A host should sometimes listen. Perhaps
+Senor Darlington will tell us of some of his experiences. They will be
+much more stirring than any musty tales of mine." But Jim shook his head
+firmly, not to say obstinately.
+
+"I would not think of telling our adventures," he replied. "Perhaps
+after we have travelled more, we will have something worth while
+relating."
+
+"That's right," said Jo, "we would much rather listen to you, Senor."
+
+The Senor Valdez sipped slowly at his coffee, looking out into the
+semi-darkness beyond the verandah, where over the plain below stretched
+the gray blanket of the fog-clouds. Then he rolled another cigarette,
+lit it and took a few meditative puffs. The Senor now began his next
+story at a peculiar angle, and did not commence with the stereotyped
+form of "once upon a time," so dear to the days of one's childhood.
+
+"I see you do not take cream in your coffee," he said addressing Jim.
+
+"No, but I like some sugar, not too much."
+
+"It has seemed to me," said the Spaniard, "that the seasoning of coffee
+is in a way an indication of character."
+
+"Where the party uses milk in his coffee that indicates weakness, does
+it not, Senor?" inquired Jim with a sly look at Jo, but the subtle
+Spaniard was not to be trapped.
+
+"Not necessarily," he replied, "only mildness."
+
+"And when it is taken straight and black that means a strong character,"
+remarked Jo.
+
+"You have stated it," replied the Spaniard.
+
+"But I would like to know how I would be sized up?" questioned Jim, "you
+see I use a little sugar."
+
+"My friend," said the Spaniard with playful earnestness, putting his
+hand lightly on Jim's knee, "that shows a character of great strength,
+tempered with mercy and human kindness. All of which leads one to speak
+of a man who was once famous in this part of the country, but not
+popular. He always had the reputation for taking a strong liquor in his
+coffee, Fernet, if I remember right. His name was Alverado, but I judge
+that you are not acquainted with it."
+
+"No," replied Jim, "but I should say that he was a very fierce
+character."
+
+"He was. He was a bandit."
+
+"I thought so," agreed Jim.
+
+"This Don Alverado came from a well known Spanish family, of ancient
+lineage, but impoverished fortune. He was such a wild and unruly blade
+that his family were decidedly relieved when he left Spain and came to
+the new world to mend his fortune, if not his ways. He landed first in
+Mexico, and after a series of more or less remarkable adventures, he
+came to this part of California. I knew him, or rather I knew of his
+family in Spain, and for their sake I made him welcome here at my home.
+
+"He was really a charming fellow in manner and appearance, tall, slight,
+with dark eyes and hair, a typical cavalier. But the graces of his
+manner did not reach down to his heart, and after a disagreeable episode
+which I need not revive here, he left my rancho never to return except
+as an enemy. I heard nothing further of him after his departure for
+some six months. My next introduction to him was an unpleasant one.
+
+"It consisted in the loss of a band of horses and a herd of cattle which
+were driven off by a gang of raiders, thirteen in number, at the head of
+which was this fellow Alverado. His depredations went on for years among
+the ranchmen in this part of California. So resourceful and crafty was
+this desperado that he evaded trap after trap laid for his capture.
+
+"He had several very close calls and there were numerous battles between
+the outlaws and the ranch owners, but though some of his men were shot,
+he seemed to bear a charmed life. I remember one running fight over the
+plain yonder, when, believing me to be absent from home, as I had been,
+but returned unexpectedly from the north, this Alverado and his gang
+made a bold dash to capture some horses from a field directly below the
+house.
+
+"It did not take long to get my men together and I gave the bandits a
+surprise indeed. Nothing but the speed of Alverado's horse, a splendid
+black stallion, saved him from capture. We got several of his men
+however. At last there came the turning of the lane. Through the
+treachery of one of the band we found that their rendezvous was at the
+head of a small canyon in a range of foot-hills several miles south of
+here.
+
+"You will go through it tomorrow on your way south, if you carry out
+your speed schedule, which with your remarkable horses you ought to be
+able to. We came upon the gang about noon, where they were resting after
+a long chase. In a corral near by were a number of stolen stock. They
+were not expecting trouble of any kind. Some were playing cards, a few
+cooking, most, however, were enjoying the siesta, their leader among the
+number lay under the shadow of a tree, his head resting on a saddle,
+sound asleep.
+
+"There were fifty of us, and we had them surrounded, so that there was
+no chance of escape. Alverado himself made a desperate dash, but the
+cordon was too strong. The rest surrendered. That afternoon we took the
+bunch to the lower end of the canyon, where there was a giant sycamore
+tree. There we hanged the whole thirteen, and by them no more were
+troubled not even by their ghosts."
+
+Jim and Jo expressed their appreciation of their host's kindness in
+entertaining them as he truly had done in relating his tales. Then they
+said good night and went to their room.
+
+That night the boys slept in a comfortable bed in a quaint old bedroom
+with roses nodding in at the half open casement windows. By the light of
+the candles they could see the strange old and carved furniture and
+tired as they were how they did sleep.
+
+The next morning they started hours before daylight. "I will be prepared
+to welcome more of you in a few days," said the Senor Valdez, and the
+boys thanked him heartily. Promising to return soon they galloped away
+through the darkness.
+
+All day they rode, hardly drawing rein at all. At first through the
+foot-hills and then over the wide plains. Jo had a fresh horse, a
+powerful black, as his other mount could not stand the strain of the
+long trip that meant three score and ten of miles before evening.
+
+Early in the afternoon they left the plain and rode into the deep and
+rugged gorges of a mountain chain, running East and West. Thence into a
+broad valley leading South-easterly, and about four P. M. they turned
+directly South entering a Pass in the Southern side of the valley, from
+which they emerged on a plain. Where the trail left the Pass stood a
+large sycamore tree, when they reached it, the Indian messenger rose
+from its shelter.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+A WONDERFUL LEAP
+
+
+Now without hesitation we must take up the fortunes or rather
+misfortunes of Tom and Juarez as they landed in the darkness upon the
+mysterious island, for our narrative presses to its conclusion. Never
+did they feel more hopeless than on this occasion, when they were going
+to a dubious and uncertain fate.
+
+"You boys come with me," called the Captain gruffly.
+
+"How about me, Cap'n?" asked Jeems Howell, the lanky shepherd.
+
+"What's your business?" inquired Captain Broom briefly.
+
+"Looking after the sheeps."
+
+"Then attend to it," said the Captain grimly.
+
+"Certainly, Cap'n," replied the shepherd, who was incapable of taking
+offense.
+
+"You come, Jake," called the Captain, to one of the sailors, "and be
+quick about it, we haven't much time." Tom shivered, for in the gloom
+and tired as he was he felt that his time too was short.
+
+Then with the Captain in the lead, carrying a lantern, which was muffled
+in his great coat, they started, the sailor bringing up the rear.
+
+"Look out sharp, that these lads don't spring something on you, Jake.
+They are a bad lot."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor, "they'll have to be quick to get
+the jump on me, sir."
+
+"It's the Injun one's the worst. Don't let him scalp you," warned the
+Captain jocosely.
+
+"I'm no Indian," said Juarez, hoarsely and utterly reckless of his fate,
+"I'm an American, and was proud of it, till I found you were one, you
+cursed yankee barnacle."
+
+"Ho, ho, lad!" roared the Captain, "you won't talk so tall in a few
+minutes. Nothing like a slow fire for stewing the nonsense out of a
+fresh kid."
+
+"How far is this cave of yours, you are taking us to, old salt horse?"
+said Juarez insolently, and utterly unwise.
+
+This was too much for Captain Broom, and with an imprecation he turned
+to strike Juarez. This was what Juarez was looking for and as the
+furious Skipper whirled facing him, Juarez dodged his huge fist, and
+sent a fierce hook to the Captain's jaw. There was anger, desperation
+and strength behind that blow and the Captain fell, striking his head on
+a rock. That time the Frontier Boys scored.
+
+"Follow me, Tom," yelled Juarez, and he sprang away through the
+darkness. It seemed like a hopeless undertaking to make an escape with
+the sea on one side and the cliffs on the other, and a desperate enemy
+near at hand. But Juarez thought it was best to take a chance. Anything
+was better than captivity, that was seemingly just ahead of them.
+
+One thing he was determined on and that was, that he would not be taken
+alive. He ran splashing through the water, leaping rocks, with the two
+sailors in fast pursuit. Not far ahead to the right was the white dash
+of the breakers that shut off escape in that direction, to the left was
+the cliffs.
+
+Then before him rose a steep but not precipitous rock that had been
+divided from the main cliff by the action of the water. Instantly Juarez
+abandoned his desperate plan of plunging into the sea, and without
+lessening his speed, he sprang up the rock, in his moccasined feet.
+
+The sailor who was following most closely, got up ten feet when he
+slipped and rolled violently to the bottom, knocking down the one who
+came after. Once Juarez came near falling but he caught himself, and
+kept going up, driven by a desperation that seemed to carry him over
+every obstacle.
+
+"We've got yer, ye little shrimp," exultantly cried the sailors at the
+base of the rock, "Ye can't get away unless you fly."
+
+"Shoot the blasted little varmint," roared the Captain, who, still
+dizzy, had struggled to his feet. In obedience to the order a flash
+punctured the darkness and there was a roar like artillery echoing among
+the hollow cliffs. A slug of lead whistled past Juarez's head.
+
+The boy had now reached the top of the rock and was at the crisis of his
+fate, a distance of ten feet separated him from the main cliff, not an
+impossible jump but the foothold was precarious and uncertain, and fifty
+feet or more below were the jagged rocks, and enemies equally as hard,
+but Juarez did not hesitate.
+
+He dodged down just as the sailors fired another shot, then he sprang to
+the narrow pinnacle of the rock and bending slightly forward with bent
+knees and swinging hand, poised for the leap.
+
+"The condemned fool is going to jump," roared the Captain. "Shoot him on
+the wing."
+
+But the sailors were not ready and the skipper ran between the rock and
+the cliff to be at hand to stamp the life out of Juarez when he should
+fall as he knew he would. Then he leaped, a dark object flying through
+space, his hands caught the edge of the cliff, the roots of a small bush
+held him for a moment, then he slipped. Below him was certain death.
+
+Two strong hands caught his arms, and he was drawn in safety to the
+cliff above. The Captain and the two sailors watched in open mouthed
+wonder, all they could see was the dim figure of Juarez crawl in safety
+over the top of the cliff, but they could not determine the means of his
+escape.
+
+It struck a superstitious chord in their natures and the skipper became
+moody and silent.
+
+Juarez breathlessly followed the lanky figure of the shepherd through
+the darkness, for it was no other who had extended the rescuing hand.
+Hardly a word was spoken, and they started off. After going a
+considerable distance they came to a slab hut built at the foot of a
+high range of hills that formed the backbone of the island.
+
+Two shepherd dogs rushed forth and gave their master a boisterous
+welcome, and were soon good friends with Juarez. Everything in the hut
+was neat; with Indian rugs on the floor which gave a warm touch of
+color to the interior and one side of the hut was lined with books.
+
+"What am I thinking of," suddenly cried Juarez in dismay, "to leave Tom
+in the hands of that crew? My head is wrong." With that, he grew pale
+and slid unconscious to the floor. He had evidently not recovered from
+the blow that the Mexican had dealt him a few days before, and the
+strain he had been under brought on a relapse. The shepherd worked over
+him a long time before he finally brought him around.
+
+Meanwhile what had become of Tom? He had not been quick enough to make
+his escape, and his fate was in the balance when the Skipper came up to
+him just after Juarez had disappeared over the cliff.
+
+"You don't get away, I promise you that, lad," growled the Captain.
+Roughly seizing the boy by the shoulder he dragged him toward the cliff.
+Then the two disappeared into the entrance of a cave, the Captain still
+holding in one hand his battered leather satchel.
+
+The sailor who stood on guard at the entrance, saw just then the lights
+of a steamer that was just entering the channel and he rushed into the
+cave, called to the Captain, and in a few minutes that worthy appeared.
+If he felt any alarm he showed none, but without any loss of time he
+assembled his crew, got his boat free of land and rowed silently out to
+sea. Whatever he had intended to do with Tom, evidently passed from his
+mind, now awakened to the solution of some other problem.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+IN THE STRAIT
+
+
+As Juarez and Tom were under the kindly escort of Captain Broom and his
+sailors in the whale boat on their cruise to the mysterious island, Jo,
+Jim and the Spaniard had stopped at an old sycamore tree, where, as had
+been promised, the Indian messenger was awaiting their coming.
+
+"What news, Yaquis?" asked the Spaniard, who knew the Indian well.
+
+"I saw the boat by my own eyes," he replied, "heading for the Big
+Island," pointing to the South. "By her smoke she stopped in the Bow
+Harbor near the lower end." So spoke the Indian, standing straight and
+tall. He was a picturesque sight with his coarse, black hair cut square
+and long.
+
+"The trail is getting warm," exclaimed Jim eagerly. "Where can we get a
+boat?"
+
+"There is a small boat at the Harbor of San Pedro," replied the
+Spaniard, "that is the property of a friend of mine. I doubt not we can
+have the use of it."
+
+"It is now a little after six," said Jim. "How far is it to the Harbor?"
+
+"A dozen miles," replied the Indian.
+
+"Is your horse too tired, Senor Sebastian, to make it by eight?" The
+Spaniard's eyes flashed.
+
+"Senor, Don Fernando is never tired. Let us start."
+
+"We are ready," replied Jim. "Which is the shortest cut?"
+
+"I will guide you," was the Indian's response.
+
+"He knows this country like the foot does the shoe," assured the
+Spaniard.
+
+Without more ado, the new guide took the lead and they rode at a rapid
+gait in single file. At first they went down a gentle grade for several
+miles until they came to a perfectly level plain that stretched in three
+directions to the sea. At the end of the land was a perfectly rounded
+rise like a huge long bolster.
+
+The party of rescuers left the Puebla de los Angeles several miles to
+the East, taking the shortest way to the harbor. There was no let-up to
+the speed, if anything, they seemed to be going faster, with sweaty
+sides and shoulders, but with unaffected stamina. The going was fine,
+over a springy turf and sometimes they tore through wide belts of tall
+mustard.
+
+Jo and Jim were in fine fettle as the end of the journey came in sight
+and there was promise of their coming to close quarters with the pirates
+and possibly rescuing their oppressed brothers from captivity. Then,
+too, the passage of the strait in an open boat appealed to their sense
+of adventure.
+
+About eight o'clock, they came to a ranch two miles from the harbor,
+where Senor Sebastian had a short talk with a man who owned the small
+boat that had been referred to. He was perfectly willing to lend them
+the boat and also sent a Mexican servant to bring back their horses and
+put them up in his stables. Not forgetting to thank him for his great
+kindness to them, the boys turned their horses' heads for the harbor,
+the last lap of their long journey had begun.
+
+In a half hour, they stood on the shore of a long, narrow inlet, at a
+point where a craft was moored. From a small boat-house, they got the
+oars, the mast and the sail to be used if the wind was right. Then they
+were ready to get aboard. Jim looked at his watch. "It lacks ten minutes
+of nine," he said.
+
+Then they embarked. The boat was not a mere row-boat, but was found to
+be of good size and about equal to a whale boat. It was staunch, too,
+and sea worthy. The mooring was cast off. Jim was at the bow oar, and Jo
+at the one back of him on the other side, while the Indian, Yaquis,
+steered. The tide favored them as they glided quickly between the banks,
+and they were not long in reaching the channel.
+
+At first, there was a slow, heavy swell, while in the lee of the land,
+that did not bother the boys but within a half hour they were in a
+choppy sea with breaking crests, and now the real work for Jo and Jim
+began. Fortunately, the Indian was a most skillful oar, and he kept them
+from being swamped. As yet there was no breeze to help them.
+
+"This is almost as good as running the Rapids in the Grand Canyon,"
+cried Jim joyously.
+
+The boys were in fine fettle for their work, notwithstanding their long
+day in the saddle, and they buckled to it with a will, although wet
+through with flying spray. They had enjoyed a good rest the night before
+and after their long ride they were glad to get the kinks out of their
+muscles. They really made remarkably good headway against the sea and
+the stoical Indian grunted approval of their work. Ah, but it was fine,
+battling with the waves through the darkness, while the boat thrashed
+and beat its way ahead.
+
+The boys stood to their oars and put all the strength of their lithe
+young bodies into the stroke and they seemed tireless. The Spaniard had
+made himself comfortable in the bow, where, sheltered by a short
+overhead deck, he was soon fast asleep.
+
+"Wake me when it is time to be drowned," he said. "I know it is my
+fate." Jim remembered the Spaniard's melancholy of the day before, and
+laughed heartily, as he promised.
+
+"There are the lights of a vessel," cried Yaquis, who, though silent,
+was ever on the watch. "Ahead of us to the Southwest."
+
+"You are right," said Jim. The lights were like two faint, moving stars,
+one aloft and the other below.
+
+"That isn't the Pirate ship," declared Jo. "She wouldn't be showing any
+light." After a while, the lights of the vessel were suddenly eclipsed,
+but by the dull light of the moon, now risen, the vessel's bulk could
+still be made out.
+
+"She has gone into the further straits," said Yaquis, "between the two
+islands."
+
+A gentle breeze sprang up, but blowing directly toward them, it lent no
+aid. Before midnight, the westerly breeze had died absolutely down, and
+in a not very long time, the sea followed suit, leaving a long swell and
+the rowing became much easier. Nothing occurred to break the monotony
+for a while. There was the steady grinding of the oars in the row-locks
+and the lapping of the waves in the gloom, for the moon was now obscured
+by clouds. Then, of a sudden, the Indian called a halt.
+
+"Do you hear footsteps?" inquired Jim, jocosely.
+
+"A steamer coming, I hear her, no lights. Pull hard." In a minute, even
+the boys could hear the beat of her engines and saw the occasional flare
+from her stacks, then a dark form took shape through the night. They
+pulled lustily for they knew their danger and who it was. How quickly
+they would be run down, if discovered, and left to drown in the wide
+strait, when Captain Broom found out their identity. No wonder they
+pulled.
+
+"Stop now, draw in your oars. Lie down," warned the Indian.
+
+Not a hundred yards to the Eastward came The Sea Eagle and she was on an
+even line with the boat that lay a black patch on the dark water. If
+Captain Broom was not on the Bridge they would be safe.
+
+"Boat ahoy," boomed out his voice.
+
+"Indian fishermen," cried Yaquis. "Stop, take me ashore."
+
+With a growl, the Captain sent his ship ahead, paying no attention to
+the "Indian fisherman" in distress. There was a gleam of white teeth as
+the Indian smiled at the hearty congratulations of the boys and their
+glee at his stratagem. Then the Spaniard and Yaquis took the oars while
+Jim steered and Jo slept.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+CONCLUSION
+
+
+When morning came, they were but a few miles from the Northern end of
+the longer Island and the fog was over the whole sky. The sea was glassy
+with a sullen glaze. Nowhere was there sign of any steamer or ship. The
+Sea Eagle had made good her escape.
+
+"I wish we had a stiff breeze to help us along," said the Spaniard, who
+loved not manual labor, as did the boys.
+
+"It will come, the strong breeze, soon," said the Indian.
+
+"When we make the Island, what are we to do?" asked Jo.
+
+"Who can tell, maybe Tom and Juarez have been taken along with the
+Skipper, instead of being marooned."
+
+"That's so," replied Jo, and gloom settled down upon his spirits,
+heavier than the fog upon the sea.
+
+"We will keep after them," said the never despondent Jim, "even if we
+have to chase them around the world."
+
+The boat seemed to crawl so slowly along, and the boys began to fret in
+their eagerness to find out whether their comrades were on the island or
+not, but they were not yet close enough to make out any object upon its
+surface. Then from the West there came a breeze rippling the glassy
+water.
+
+"Up with the sail," cried Jim. "Here's where we fly."
+
+As the breeze strengthened to a wind, they went towards the island at a
+clipping gait. When they got within a half mile of the shore, they began
+to look eagerly for some sign of a living being and they were
+disappointed at first, but they drove their boat along as near the shore
+as they dared.
+
+"Say, did you hear that?" cried Jim in excitement. "That was a rifle
+shot, or my name is Dennis."
+
+"Three men on the shore," said the Indian, imperturbably.
+
+"I see them," cried Jo, "on that beach yonder. I believe it is Tom and
+Juarez. Hurrah for the Frontier Boys."
+
+"It is they," declared Jim as they drew closer, "but how Tom has grown.
+He looks over six feet."
+
+"That isn't Tom," said Jo. "It's some one else. The short one is Tom."
+Then he saw Jim grin and realized that he had been kidded.
+
+"If this wasn't my busy day," said Jo, "I'd give you a punching for
+being so smart."
+
+Five minutes later, the boat had grounded on the pebbly beach and The
+Frontier Boys were again united. There was a great jubilee for a while
+with the Spaniard, the Indian, and the lanky shepherd on the outskirts
+of the family celebration, but in a short time they were all good
+friends, each according to his different nature; the Spaniard, suave and
+courteous, the Indian stolid, but with his share in the general
+good-will, and Jeems Howell, the shepherd, lankily humorous.
+
+"We met our old friend Captain Broom in the channel, boys," said Jim,
+"steaming along like the Devil was after him."
+
+"I'll give him reason to think so," growled Juarez sullenly, "if I ever
+get on his trail."
+
+The Indian, Yaquis, grunted approval, for there seemed to be a bond of
+sympathy between him and Juarez, as the reader can well understand.
+
+"How far is that cave, Tom, where the old codger left you?" inquired
+Jo.
+
+"Just around the bend," said Tom. "Here's the rock where Juarez made his
+famous jump."
+
+"How did you ever get up there?" asked Jo in wonder, looking up at the
+pinnacle of rock.
+
+"You'd a done the same if those fellows had been chasing you," replied
+Juarez, "but if it hadn't been for Jeems here catching me when I jumped
+they would have got me after all."
+
+"I was afeard you might have fallen on the Skipper and a hurt him. He's
+a kind of a tender plant you know." The Shepherd made this remark with a
+perfectly sober face, in no wise disturbed by the hilarity of the boys,
+over the idea of the tenderness of the Skipper.
+
+"Here's the cave," said Juarez, and he led the way through an arched
+opening in the wall of the cliff. Picking up a lantern, he went ahead as
+guide.
+
+"This is certainly a dry cave," said Jim.
+
+"It ought to be," said Jeems Howell. "It don't rain on this Island more
+than twice a year, but I feel it in my bones that it is coming on to
+storm today."
+
+"I hope you don't feel it in _all_ your bones," remarked Jim,
+quizzically, "because it is liable to be a long drawn out storm if you
+do."
+
+The lanky Shepherd gave himself over to spasms of silent mirth at Jim's
+queer humor.
+
+"Here's where we found Tom," said Juarez. "Just discovered him a couple
+of hours before you discovered us."
+
+When the Captain had made his sudden change of plans, Tom made himself
+as comfortable as he could for the night, intending to search for Juarez
+in the morning.
+
+"Sometime I hope that this wretched Captain will be captured and
+imprisoned right here," said the Spaniard with a cold, vindictiveness.
+
+"If he comes snooping around here again, that is what will happen to
+him," remarked Jim quietly. "I suppose, Tom, that he hid some of the
+loot he took from us in this cave somewhere. I bet this is his safe
+deposit vault, all right."
+
+"He went back in there with his small satchel," said Tom, indicating the
+depths of the cave as yet unexplored.
+
+"It will keep," said Jim, "but before I leave this island for Hawaii, I
+am going to search every corner of this cave and see if I cannot find
+our property."
+
+"We discovered it in a cave and perhaps we will lose our treasure in a
+cave," said Juarez, who was something of a fatalist.
+
+"Don't you believe that we won't find it," declared Jim stoutly, "but no
+work for me for a while. I'm going to take a good rest."
+
+"So say we all of us," chanted the boys.
+
+"Gentlemen," said Jeems Howell oracularly, "If it pleases you, and
+Christopher Columbus," with a wave of his hand toward Jim, "who
+discovered this savage group, we will now adjourn to my castle on the
+distant hillside."
+
+"We are with you," declared those assembled in unison, and in a short
+time they were making their way up the slope towards the "castle" on the
+hillside, where they made themselves at home.
+
+All the new arrivals at the island were soon fast asleep.
+
+Later after several hours of rest, they occupied themselves according to
+their different ideas of comfort.
+
+The Spaniard amused himself thrumming on a guitar, that belonged to one
+of the Mexican herders on the island. Tom got a book, and stretched out
+on a rug forgetful of all his recent troubles, while Jim and Juarez
+borrowed a couple of guns and went for an hour's hunting, in the woods
+which at that time covered the mountain ridges of the island.
+
+That evening they were all gathered in the cabin before the blazing fire
+on the stone hearth, while outside raged the Easterly storm that Jeems
+Howell had predicted, with rush of wind and sweep of rain. But the slab
+cabin was storm proof and comfortable. It is a good place to leave the
+boys after their days of trial and bitter hardship. In our next book we
+will meet "The Frontier Boys in Hawaii, or The mystery of The Hollow
+Mountain." There, I feel confident they will cope with adventures as
+unusual and as remarkable as they have heretofore encountered. I am sure
+that the Reader will be anxious to accompany them on their journey. But
+we must permit the Frontier Boys to have the last word, in this volume.
+
+"Do you think that Captain Broom, will return here, before we get away
+for Hawaii, Jim?" inquired brother Jo.
+
+"I certainly do," replied Jim, "and we will be right here, to give him a
+warm and hearty Welcome, you can rest assured of that."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Transcriber's Notes:
+
+Obvious punctuation errors repaired.
+
+Page 9, "hearn" changed to "heard" (I heard the mate)
+
+Page 136, "wierdly" changed to "weirdly" (almost weirdly beautiful)
+
+Page 148, "ever" changed to "over" (hanging over the)
+
+Page 158, "besiide" changed to "beside" (got ready beside)
+
+Page 170, text was both missing and repeated in the original. The
+original read:
+
+          on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-
+          iente forged ahead by half a length.
+
+          "Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. +"Don't
+          on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-
+          horses up.+ There was Jo sitting quietly on his horse.
+
+The words between the ++ were removed to try to improve readability.
+
+Page 172, "supose" changed to "suppose" (I suppose you do)
+
+Page 213, "aint" changed to "ain't" (I ain't got)
+
+Page 231, "scycamore" changed to "sycamore" (sycamore tree, when)
+
+Page 232, "hestitation" changed to "hestitation" (without hesitation we)
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST ***
+
+***** This file should be named 25473-8.txt or 25473-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/4/7/25473/
+
+Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/25473-8.zip b/25473-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..956438c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473-8.zip
diff --git a/25473-h.zip b/25473-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5906a48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473-h.zip
diff --git a/25473-h/25473-h.htm b/25473-h/25473-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0a39f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473-h/25473-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8081 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {margin-top: .75em;
+       text-align: justify;
+       text-indent: 1.25em;
+       margin-bottom: .75em;
+        }
+    img {border: 0;}
+    .tnote      {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em;
+                  padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;}
+    ins {text-decoration:none;  border-bottom: thin dotted gray;}
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+                position: absolute;
+                left: 92%;
+                font-size: smaller;
+                text-align: right;
+              } /* page numbers */
+
+    .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%; text-align: justify;}
+
+    .bbox     {border: solid 2px; margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em;
+                  padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;}
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+    .figleft     {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top:
+                 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;}
+
+    .figright    {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;
+                 margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;}
+
+    .unindent {margin-top: .75em;
+       text-align: justify;
+       margin-bottom: .75em;
+        }
+    .right    {text-align: right;}
+    .poem      {margin-left: 30%; margin-right: 10%; text-align: left;}
+    .poem2   {margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 10%; text-align: left;}
+    .sig    {margin-right: 10%; text-align: right;}
+    .hang1 {text-indent: -3em; margin-left: 3em;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Frontier Boys on the Coast
+       or in the Pirate's Power
+
+Author: Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+Release Date: May 15, 2008 [EBook #25473]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Title and frontispiece">
+<tr><td align='left'><h1>FRONTIER BOYS<br />
+ON THE COAST</h1>
+
+<h3>OR</h3>
+
+<h3><i>IN THE PIRATE'S POWER</i></h3>
+
+<h3>BY</h3>
+<h2>CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT<br /><br /><br /><br /></h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 53px;">
+<img src="images/002.png" width="53" height="75" alt="Emblem" title="Emblem" />
+</div>
+<div class='center'><br /><br /><br />
+<small>NEW YORK</small><br />
+HURST &amp; COMPANY<br />
+<small>PUBLISHERS</small><br />
+</div>
+</td><td align='left'><div class="figcenter" style="width: 301px;">
+<img src="images/illo-frontise.jpg" width="301" height="400" alt="&quot;THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF.&quot;&mdash;P. 204. Frontier Boys on the Coast." title="&quot;THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF.&quot;&mdash;P. 204. Frontier Boys on the Coast" />
+<span class="caption">&quot;THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF.&quot;&mdash;P. 204. Frontier Boys on the Coast.</span>
+</div></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><div class='bbox'>
+<h2>THE FRONTIER BOYS</h2>
+
+<h3>By CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT</h3>
+
+
+<p>This series tells the adventures of Jim, Joe, and
+Tom Darlington, first in their camp wagon as they
+follow the trail to the great West in the early days.
+They are real American boys, resourceful, humorous,
+and&mdash;but you must meet them. You will find them
+interesting company. They meet with thrilling adventures
+and encounters, and stirring incidents are
+the rule, not exception.</p>
+
+<p>Historically, these books present a true picture of
+a period in our history as important as it was picturesque,
+when the nation set its face toward this vast
+unknown West, and conquered it.</p>
+
+
+
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Frontier Boys Books">
+<tr><td align='right'>1.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys on Overland Trail</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>2.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Colorado</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>3.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Rockies</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>4.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Grand Canyon</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>5.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Mexico</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>6.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys on the Coast</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>7.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Hawaii</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>8.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Sierras</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>9.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Saddle</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>10.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Frisco.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>11.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the South Seas</td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+
+<div class='center'>
+<i>Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth</i><br />
+<i>Price per Volume, 50 Cents</i><br />
+</div></div>
+<div class='center'>
+<span class="smcap">Copyright, 1909, by<br />
+The Platt &amp; Peck Co.</span><br />
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+
+
+
+
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents">
+<tr><td align='left' colspan='2'><small>CHAPTER</small></td><td align='center'><small>PAGE</small></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Captain Bill Broom</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_9">9</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Cove and the Cave</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Barbed Wire</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Pete's Yarn</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_30">30</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Four Boys</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Hunchback</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Farmer Broom</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Camp in the Pocket</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_60">60</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Attack</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">"Haul In"</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Missouri's Man&#339;uvre</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_82">82</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Ranchero</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A New Friend</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XIV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Pursuit</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_109">109</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Jim and the Sea Eagle</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_118">118</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XVI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Boys Put on Style</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_127">127</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XVII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">On Board the Sea Eagle</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XVIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Day at Sea</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XIX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Passenger</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">To the Rescue</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_161">161</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Bandits</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_169">169</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Race with the Tide</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_177">177</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Enchanted Isle</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_184">184</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXIV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">In the White Boat</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_191">191</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">In Peril</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_198">198</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXVI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Two Lassoes</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_206">206</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXVII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Another Friend</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_214">214</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXVIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Tale of Yore</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_220">220</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXIX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Wonderful Leap</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_232">232</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">In the Strait</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_239">239</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XXXI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Conclusion</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_246">246</a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>FRONTIER BOYS ON THE<br />
+COAST</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+<h3>CAPTAIN BILL BROOM</h3>
+
+
+<p>"What devilment has old Bill got on for tonight,
+Pete?"</p>
+
+<p>The speaker was seated on an old scarred sea
+chest in a dimly lighted forecastle.</p>
+
+<p>"I dunno," replied Pete, "maybe he's lookin' fer a
+wreck."</p>
+
+<p>"I <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'hearn'">heard</ins> the mate say somethin' about a passel of
+four boys," put in a third man who was laying back
+in his bunk, "that the skipper was a-lookin' for."</p>
+
+<p>"Kidnapping, eh?" said Cales, the first speaker.
+"Hold 'em for ransom, I suppose. Well, the old
+man has been in worse games than that. I reckon
+the kids' parents are rich and are willin' to pay a
+high price for their darlings."</p>
+
+<p>"You're on the wrong tack, matey," said the man<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span>
+in the bunk. "Cap'n Brinks, who landed in San
+Diego from a Mexican port put the old man wise.
+He told him that those fellars had considerable
+money and a raft of jewels with 'em that they
+picked up in Mexico."</p>
+
+<p>"Ho, Ho, that's the game, is it," cried Cales,
+thumping his knee with a gnarled fist, "that ought to
+be easy then."</p>
+
+<p>"Looks so, but it ain't," replied the other, "those
+four boys have got somethin' of a reputation in the
+southwest. Hard fighters and good shots and their
+leader is a husky lad and about as crafty as a red
+Injun."</p>
+
+<p>"He ain't met the Old Man yet," said Cales significantly.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see where you get all your news from,
+Jake," growled Pete from his seat on the chest,
+"you ought to be a reporter."</p>
+
+<p>"I keep my eyes open and my mouth shet," replied
+Jake, "any man can get larned if he will do
+that."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like to have a picter of you with your mouth
+shet," remarked Pete. "It's open even when you
+are asleep." He dodged just in time to avoid a
+heavy shoe flung from Jake's ready hand that
+crashed against the wall.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't do that agin," he warned, a red light<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span>
+showing in his eyes. "I'll larn you boys that I
+ain't as old as I looks to be."</p>
+
+<p>Jake laughed harshly.</p>
+
+<p>"You mustn't keep your own mouth open so wide,
+Pop, cause you'll have to swallow your own words
+if you do."</p>
+
+<p>"I guess I'll never git choked," replied Pete,
+truculently. "Kin you tell me what the skipper
+means snooping down this coast with no lights
+showing when it's plumb dark? We are liable to
+sink ourselves or Californey all of a suddint."</p>
+
+<p>"Why don't you ask the Cap'n what he is up to?"
+inquired Cales, "that is, if you want some real useful
+information, Pop."</p>
+
+<p>Pop raised himself up and glared at the speaker.</p>
+
+<p>"I ain't done living," he replied.</p>
+
+<p>"We are navigating pretty careful," remarked
+Jake. "You can hardly feel the Sea Eagle moving."</p>
+
+<p>"Running for the cove, I reckon," suggested
+Cales, "I'm mighty pleased not to be the man at the
+wheel. Well, I'm goin' to turn in for a snooze."</p>
+
+<p>In a brief time the two men were snoring loudly,
+while old Pete sat smoking his pipe, as stolid as a
+wooden Indian and the forecastle was fogged with
+the smoke, through which the swinging lantern
+shone dimly. The air is stifling so let us go up on
+deck where we can breathe the salt ozone and inci<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span>dentally
+get acquainted with Captain Bill Broom,
+who is to occupy such a prominent place in this
+narrative.</p>
+
+<p>He is well worth meeting, not only as the opponent
+of our old friend, Jim Darlington, but because of
+his own unworthy but interesting character. In
+those days Skipper Bill Broom was known all up
+and down the coast and beyond. His fame, such
+as it was, comes down even to this recent day.</p>
+
+<p>On deck it is muffling dark, with the stars
+obscured in some dim way by mist or fog. There
+is a breeze blowing steadily from the broad wastes
+of the ocean. The bulk of the California coast
+looms dimly on the port bow. Not more than a
+half mile distant can be seen the white rushing
+forward of the breakers towards the rocky coast.</p>
+
+<p>Dangerous work this, navigating the Sea Eagle
+through the thick gloom of the night but the old
+man knew his business. He was on the bridge
+pacing back and forth like some strange animal and
+giving hoarse directions to the man at the wheel.
+He knew every inch of that coast, the sunken reefs
+and dangerous rocks.</p>
+
+<p>"Starboard your helm," he growled.</p>
+
+<p>The sailor spun the wheel obediently. And the
+captain resumed his pacing back and forth upon the
+bridge. Not much could be seen of him, except<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span>
+that he was a powerful man, with a peculiar crouching
+stoop, as if he and the sea were engaged in a
+mysterious game. One striving to get a dangerous
+death-hold upon the other, both wary and using
+unceasing watchfulness.</p>
+
+<p>There was a strange softness in Captain Broom's
+tread like that of a padding panther, but his arms
+had the loose forward powerful swing of a gorilla's.
+Once he stepped into the chart house to
+look at something and the light of the lamp will
+give us a square look at him.</p>
+
+<p>"That man a pirate!" you exclaim at the first
+glance; one who carried the blackest name along
+the coast as a smuggler and wrecker, who had
+brought cargoes of wretched slaves from Africa in
+the days before the Civil War and who had had
+more marvelous escapes than any man in the history
+of piracy with the exception of Black Jack
+Morgan! Impossible!</p>
+
+<p>"Why that man is nothing but an old farmer,"
+you exclaim in disappointment, when you see him.
+"He ought to be peddling vegetables on market
+day." But just wait.</p>
+
+<p>True, Skipper Broom had come from a long line
+of New England farmers, hard, close-fisted, close-mouthed
+men. Young Broom had broken away from
+the farm and followed his bent for sea-faring, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span>
+to the end of his days, he kept his farmerlike appearance
+and he affected many of the traits of the
+yeoman which he found to be on more than one occasion
+a most useful disguise.</p>
+
+<p>Let's look at him. That heavy winter cap pulled
+down on his grizzled head gives him a most "Reuben"
+like appearance. Jeans pants are thrust into
+heavy cowhide boots. The deadly gray eyes soft
+as granite have become red rimmed from fits of
+fury and hard through many scenes of coldly calculated
+cruelty. A most dangerous customer and
+I for one, and I ought to know, consider that he
+will have the better of Jim Darlington in their approaching
+encounter&mdash;and yet Jim is never beaten
+until the last shot is fired and so it is impossible for
+me to foretell how this contest of wit and daring
+will come out.</p>
+
+<p>After examining his chart closely, Captain Broom
+crouched out through the door and on to the deck.
+He took one keen look towards the shore, then he
+approached the helmsman. "Git below, Bill. I'll
+fetch her in."</p>
+
+<p>The helmsman relinquished the wheel gladly
+enough and under the Captain's masterful hand the
+Sea Eagle swung slowly around and pointed
+in towards the curving shore.</p>
+
+<p>The dark form of the mate could be seen on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span>
+deck below waiting for the order that he knew must
+come soon. The crew of the Sea Eagle though
+subordinate enough were necessarily partners in
+Captain Broom's wicked enterprises so that the
+discipline was somewhat different than in ordinary
+vessels.</p>
+
+<p>"Call 'em up, Mr. Haffen," roared the skipper to
+the mate. "It's chore time."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, aye, sir," replied Mr. Haffen.</p>
+
+<p>The watch was called on deck and the dark forms
+of the men could be seen in the bow. The pulsing
+of the Sea Eagle had stopped and with scarcely a
+sound the anchor was dropped into the water.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+<h3>THE COVE AND CAVE</h3>
+
+
+<p>The starboard boat was lowered into the water.
+First the mate, then Captain Broom and two men
+got in. The latter were Cales and Pete who pulled
+noiselessly at the oars. The boat glided quietly
+through the silent darkness towards the shore.
+The Captain was seated in the stern, his great bulk
+crouched forward, but there was nothing inert in
+his posture. His big hands clasped either side of
+the craft.</p>
+
+<p>In a few minutes the boat grounded softly on
+the sand of the beach and all hands got ashore.
+Scarcely a word was spoken, though the cove was
+so hidden that there seemed to be no possible chance
+that the landing of the free-booters would be observed.
+However, Captain Bill Broom took no
+risk of being discovered. He had many enemies
+upon the coast and inland as well. Besides, the
+State of California had set a price upon his head.</p>
+
+<p>Two thousand dollars was the reward for his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span>
+capture, and so profitable an investment was apt to
+be realized on sooner or later by some enterprising
+citizen. So Captain Broom took due care whenever
+he went abroad not to attract undue attention.</p>
+
+<p>This cove was a favorite lurking place of his
+when close pressed, where he would take refuge
+after some daring adventure upon the high seas, until
+such a time as the hubbub along the coast had
+died down. Sometimes he lay in hiding there, with
+the Sea Eagle screened behind the encircling cliffs,
+waiting like a black spider to rush out and capture
+some unsuspecting craft.</p>
+
+<p>"Pick her up, boys," said the Captain, "you know
+where she belongs," pointing to the boat.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, aye, sir," they replied, and putting it on
+their shoulders they carried the boat along a narrow
+path that divided the thick undergrowth; until, after
+going several hundred yards, they reached a thick
+screen of brush through which they shoved, and
+came to a cave.</p>
+
+<p>Although so well hidden, the entrance to the
+cavern was quite high, so that the men gained admission
+without stooping, and going a short distance
+into the dark interior, they placed the boat
+gently down against the wall. There was a constant<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span>
+and heavy drip of water, so that there was no
+chance for the boat to warp, as it would have surely
+done if placed outside in the dry California air.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't like this yere cave," remarked Pete,
+when left alone with Cales.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter with it? It's dark and damp,
+but that is the nature of caves."</p>
+
+<p>"It makes me feel creepy, that's all," replied Pete,
+"and it takes considerable to do that."</p>
+
+<p>"Whatever happened?" inquired Cales, grinning,
+"something terrible, I reckon, to make your thick
+hide chilly."</p>
+
+<p>"It were before your time," replied Pete somewhat
+reluctantly, "we raided a ranch back thar
+agin the mountings. Senor Sebastian owned it
+and it was said that he could ride all day and never
+git off his place, and that he had more sheep and
+cattle than thar is folks in Frisco."</p>
+
+<p>"The Captain shanghied him, I reckon," cut in
+Cales.</p>
+
+<p>"You hold your windlass," commanded the old
+man in a querulous tone, "I'm telling this yarn."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, Pop," said Cales in a conciliating
+manner, "have it yer own way." He was really
+anxious to hear the story the old man had referred
+to.</p>
+
+<p>"Young fry is always flapping," the older speaker<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span>
+mumbled,&mdash;then he took up the course of his narrative.
+"Waal, as I was telling ye, this Senor had
+lots of money and the Cap'n being short of funds
+thought that he could use some of it. So one night
+we ran into the cove, it was blacker even than this.
+I don't see how the old man ever got the craft past
+the sharks' teeth at the entrance but he did."</p>
+
+<p>"He could have brought her in with his eyes
+shut," declared Cales. "I never have seen his equal
+for navigating."</p>
+
+<p>"Waal, we made camp here that night, and the
+next day, the Cap'n with some of the gang, left for
+the ranch and I stayed to look after things. Nothing
+happened that day, and I was dozing by the fire
+about midnight when I heard them coming back.
+They had the Senor, a fine-looking old man with a
+gray mustache and as cold and proud-looking as
+they make them.</p>
+
+<p>"The Cap'n was furious because he had not been
+able to lay his hand on the coin, and he swore that
+he would make the old Senor tell where his money
+was or there would be trouble. He took him into
+this cave and I don't know what happened there,
+and I don't want to know. All I'm sure of is that
+I never saw him come out.</p>
+
+<p>"The Cap'n sent me to the ship to get some
+chains on the second day and he took 'em into the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span>
+cave. We sailed a couple of days later, but not a
+sign did I see of the Senor. That's why this cave
+makes me creepy, Cales."</p>
+
+<p>They were standing near the entrance, when there
+came a distinct low moan from the interior. It
+was not a ghostly sound, either. There was no
+mistaking it.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you hear that, Cales?" asked old Pete in a
+quavering voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Cales, "I heard it all right. It
+can't be the Senor?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Pete. "He has been dead these
+years."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's find out," said his comrade.</p>
+
+<p>"There's nothing in this world could make me go
+in thar," declared Pete solemnly, "besides, it's agin
+the Captain's orders."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'm going," said Cales either more brave
+or less experienced than the other. "It sounds to
+me like a woman's voice."</p>
+
+<p>"And I'm goin' to git," declared old Pete, tottering
+towards the path.</p>
+
+<p>"You're a brave old pirate," said Cales contemptuously,
+and with that he went slowly back into the
+cave. He had to go cautiously, for beyond a certain
+point he was not acquainted with the interior.
+He could feel the moist ground under foot<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span>
+and he kept his hand stretched out, not knowing
+what he might run against in the dense damp darkness.</p>
+
+<p>Then, suddenly, his hand struck a stone wall.
+Groping his way, he turned a sharp corner and followed
+along a low narrow passageway that obliged
+him to stoop. Then came the sound of the moaning
+just ahead. Jack Cales was a brave man but
+it was all that he could do, to keep from turning
+and running in panic for the mouth of the cave.
+But though his determination had received a severe
+shock, it did not turn to flight.</p>
+
+<p>He saw a faint light ahead, spreading a glow at
+the end of the passage as he came nearer. Then he
+saw something that held him stone still with a
+clutch of weird fear. He had reached the end of
+the narrow passage, and dimly made out a domed
+room in the rock, white with translucent encrustation.</p>
+
+<p>He struck a match. About him, before, to the
+right and to the left he could see forms all of
+ghostly white, some crouching, others standing.
+Hardly had the light flared up than it sizzled out.
+Some drops of water falling from the roof had extinguished
+the blaze. Then was repeated that
+awful sound of distress.</p>
+
+<p>Cales groped around almost in a frenzy of terror.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span>
+Where was the exit from that awful room? Round
+and round he went, and all the time there were
+strange whisperings in his ears, and unseen hands
+seemed to clutch his clothes. Once he slipped and
+was trembling so that he was hardly able to get to
+his feet. Just as he did so, something swept past
+him like a breath of wind. Rendered desperate he
+made another dash, and this time if he had not
+found a passageway, he felt that he could have
+knocked a hole through the wall. Then he stood
+at the mouth of the cave.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+<h3>THE BARBED WIRE</h3>
+
+
+<p>Just at that moment was heard the hoarse voice
+of Captain Broom booming through the darkness
+outside.</p>
+
+<p>As Cales turned about, some furry animal sprang
+past him dashing between his legs and nearly upsetting
+him.</p>
+
+<p>"On deck, you scoundrel, come out of there,"
+called the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, aye, sir," came the reply of Cales in a
+strangely weak tone, though he was now more concerned
+by the possible penalty to be meted out by
+the Captain for disobedience of orders, than by
+thought of the undetermined occupants of the cave.
+If it were a cat it was certainly a good joke on old
+Pete. This was, had they but known it, the swift
+solution of the mystery.</p>
+
+<p>Oddly enough the Captain said not another word,
+a fact suggestive to Cales that there was something
+amiss in the cave and the little company at once
+took up their line of march. Captain Broom was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span>
+in the lead, followed by the mate, then Cales, with
+old Pete bringing up the rear. Just as they started
+Captain Broom extinguished the lantern and they
+took up the trail in total darkness. Every precaution
+would now be necessary for they would soon
+be in a region where the very name of Broom was
+execrated with bitter hatred, and every bush would
+grow a poniard if his whereabouts were known.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that the skipper was as good a
+guide on land as he was a pilot at sea, for he led
+his little party at a steady gait by a winding cow-path
+through the thick undergrowth. He doubtless
+knew this region thoroughly, for he had made
+more than one raid in this locality.</p>
+
+<p>It was soon to be determined, however, that they
+were not the only ones abroad that night.</p>
+
+<p>They had walked in silence for some time, well
+on to two hours, when they came to an open space,
+with the irregular form of a live oak on the southeast
+corner. Then Captain Broom stopped suddenly,
+his keen eyesight which no darkness could
+baffle had discerned some object moving out from
+the shelter of the oak tree.</p>
+
+<p>It came slowly with uplifted black arms and
+white hair falling around its face. There was a
+terrible intensity in its advance across the open<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span>
+space, withal that it moved so slowly. The figure
+stopped directly in front of Captain Broom.</p>
+
+<p>"Get out of my way, you hag," he roared, but for
+the first time in his life a certain tremor crept into
+his voice. Perhaps he was growing old. He drew
+back his arm as though to strike the woman in his
+path.</p>
+
+<p>As he did so Jack Cales stooped and picked up a
+round rock at his feet, intending to hurl it, not at
+the woman but at the skipper, for he alone of the
+party divined the possible cause of this poor
+woman's dementia. But his interference was not
+necessary for it seemed as though the Captain's
+arm was paralyzed. He declared afterwards that
+some invisible hand had seized his arm.</p>
+
+<p>Then, in a loud, wailing voice the woman put a
+curse upon the slayer of her husband, for this spectre
+was none other than the Senora Sebastian. It
+was terrible to hear her and it must have sent a
+shiver into the soul of the hardy skipper.</p>
+
+<p>When she had finished, the woman moved past
+them and vanished in the direction of the ranch.
+For a full minute the line of men stood without
+moving a step and in absolute silence, Captain
+Broom with his arm upraised as he had lifted it to
+strike.</p>
+
+<p>Then, without saying a word, he took the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span>
+forward step and the others followed him through
+the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>"Say, Cales," growled Pete in a low voice, "what
+was it you found in that cave? My old timbers are
+shaking yet."</p>
+
+<p>"Keep your old jaws shut," yelled the Captain,
+who had wonderfully keen hearing, when anything
+was spoken that concerned him.</p>
+
+<p>"How do you suppose the old man heard me?"
+mumbled Pete to himself. He dropped back a pace
+or two, then whispered, "The old man must be crazy.
+He is making direct for the Sebastian ranch."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you reckon that these four boys he is looking
+after, are located there?" asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>"I dunno," replied Pete, "you can calkerlate on
+one thing though and that is that the skipper knows
+pretty nigh where those lads are. One of his messengers,
+a one-eyed, twisted greaser, came aboard
+the other day, and was gabbling in the Captain's
+cabin. Then the next thing I knew we was under
+sail, and came kiting down to the cove."</p>
+
+<p>Just then the party halted at the confines of a four
+strand barbed wire fence. This was the first indication
+that they were entering the great ranch property
+that formerly belonged to the Senor Sebastian,
+the elderly man the Captain had made captive,
+and which was now the property of his only son.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Now, lads," said the leader of the expedition,
+"Here's a chance to make yourself small. This yere
+barb is like a devil fish if it once gits a holt of your
+panties&mdash;it won't let go."</p>
+
+<p>"That's so, Captain," said the mate, a generally
+silent and saturnine man.</p>
+
+<p>"I reckon you know, mate," said the Captain.
+"The last time we was through these parts, and that
+some considerable years ago, this same fence got
+a holt of yer pants and wouldn't let go. I never
+heard you talk so much and so earnestly in my life
+before. You want to be more keerful this time."</p>
+
+<p>The mate simply grunted by way of reply and,
+lying close to the ground, he very gingerly and
+carefully worked his way under the wire and thus
+escaped his mentioned former unpleasant detention.
+He then held the lower wire up as high as he
+could until his chief had wiggled under.</p>
+
+<p>Pete was the only one of the party who was seriously
+detained, for Jack Cales had slid under as
+slick as an eel. But Pete's joints were old and
+rusty and the venomous wire got a clutch on his
+coat and his pants.</p>
+
+<p>"What's keeping you back?" inquired the Captain,
+gruffly, as Cales and his comrade did not put
+in an immediate appearance.</p>
+
+<p>"Pete has got caught, sir," said Jack.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What are you doing there, you old barnacle?"
+inquired the Captain as he came back to the fence.</p>
+
+<p>There was a certain odd comradeship between the
+skipper and the old salt who had been with him
+since his African days. Both were New Englanders
+and had come from neighboring homesteads.</p>
+
+<p>"Just resting, sir," replied the captive.</p>
+
+<p>It certainly did have something of that appearance,
+for Pete had kept a decisive grip on his old
+black pipe with his stubby teeth and was puffing at
+it in apparent peace and resignation.</p>
+
+<p>"Want me to git you a piller?" inquired the
+skipper, sarcastically.</p>
+
+<p>"Thank ye, sir," replied Pete imperturbably.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the mate had been at work with deft
+fingers and he finally succeeded in extricating the
+old man and putting him upon his pins.</p>
+
+<p>"Now if ye are sufficiently rested," proposed the
+skipper, "we will hike along."</p>
+
+<p>This they did. Their way now lay between two
+stretches of fence that enclosed a road not much
+traveled for there were only faint traces of wheels
+in the turf. It was probably not a public highway
+but belonged to the great ranch.</p>
+
+<p>Everything seemed smooth sailing now, as there
+was no more barbed wire to be immediately met but
+Pete soon made himself prominent again. He was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span>
+rolling along with that gait peculiar to a sailor when
+aboard land, when he gave a sudden spring and
+clutched Cales convulsively in the back, giving that
+individual a big scare.</p>
+
+<p>"Dad burn it, boys. I've stepped on a rattler."
+An investigation was made very carefully and Captain
+Broom quickly picked up a short piece of rope.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll rattle you," he cried, touching up the old
+man with the rope's end.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+<h3>PETE'S YARN</h3>
+
+
+<p>They went along steadily through the darkness
+in an almost directly easterly direction. Being now
+clear of the brush they could make good time on the
+springy turf.</p>
+
+<p>"How far are we now from the ranch, Pete?" inquired
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>"Too durn close to suit me," replied Pete. "I
+can't tell exactly for these ranches are as big as all
+outside creation, but I guess we must be as close as
+a mile to the buildings."</p>
+
+<p>"I reckon the Captain is going to walk up to the
+front door and ask for accommodations."</p>
+
+<p>"Wouldn't s'prise me a bit, if he done that," replied
+Pete querulously. "The old man ain't lacking
+in nerve. Back thar was the first time I ever seen
+him hang back in my long experience with him."</p>
+
+<p>"When the old lady was speaking her piece?
+Suppose I ask him how much he made when he
+captured the Senor," suggested Cales, who had recovered
+his flippant humor.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I wouldn't git gay, lad," said old Pete, warningly.
+"She is just as liable to haunt you in your
+black spells."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't have 'em, uncle," replied Cales.</p>
+
+<p>"You collect the material for 'em when you are
+young," said the old man wisely, "and they come
+out of your bones like rheumatiz when you git old."</p>
+
+<p>"Somebody is coming back of us," suddenly whispered
+Cales.</p>
+
+<p>"Take to cover, lads," ordered the skipper, who
+was as quick to hear as the younger man. The only
+cover was a high and thick growth of wild mustard
+growing alongside the fences.</p>
+
+<p>Quickly they stepped from the open road into the
+shelter of the tall mustard. They had not long to
+wait. There was the jingle of spurs and the thud
+of horses' feet walking slowly along. Next came
+the voices of men talking.</p>
+
+<p>"It is useless, Senor, to try and find her, I fear,"
+replied one man to the other.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems so," replied the other sadly. "My
+mother always seems to be worse when the time of
+the year approaches that my father disappeared.
+In spite of all our care she will escape."</p>
+
+<p>They had now arrived at a point opposite where
+the free-booters were hidden. The man who had
+last spoken struck a light and lit a cigarette; the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span>
+instantaneous glare showed the dark handsome face
+of the Spanish type. There was the high-peaked
+sombrero, the striking clothes, the intent face and
+then the light died suddenly out.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, Manuel," said the young man to his companion,
+"if I could only once lay hands on that
+cursed Gringo," and he ground his teeth in fury,
+unable to express himself.</p>
+
+<p>"Humph, Gringo," grunted the Captain, disdainfully.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you hear anything, Senor?" asked Manuel.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing."</p>
+
+<p>"I was sure I heard something," asserted his
+companion. They had reined in their horses and
+sat listening quietly for a few seconds.</p>
+
+<p>"It was probably nothing but a calf by the roadside,"
+said the Senor.</p>
+
+<p>The other shook his head doubtfully, then they
+turned and rode on towards the rancho.</p>
+
+<p>When they were safely out of range, the party
+of pirates took up their line of march once more.</p>
+
+<p>"So the greaser took me for a calf," remarked
+Captain Broom. "If it had been you, Jack Cales,
+there might be some excuse fer such a mistake."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, sir," replied Cales, glumly.</p>
+
+<p>"Getting kind of close to the ranch, ain't you,
+Cap'n?" ventured old Pete.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I thought of leaving you there, Pete, while the
+rest of us corralled those kids. You are getting too
+old for these long tramps."</p>
+
+<p>No more remarks were heard coming from the
+direction of Pete, for he was not at all sure but
+that the Captain might, in a moment of irresponsible
+humor, do just as he threatened without
+regard to the consequences.</p>
+
+<p>After they had gone on for a mile from the
+point where the two men had overtaken them, Captain
+Broom led his party away from the road in a
+southerly direction, once more undergoing the harrowing
+experience of getting through the barbed
+wire fence. But this time Jack Cales was especially
+detailed by the Captain to get old Pete through so
+there would not be any unnecessary delay.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that they were getting into a different
+section, a short time after they left the road, for
+they began going up and winding among little
+rocky hills. At last they came to a stopping place.
+They climbed up an elevation and sat on some rocks
+among a group of dark trees.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, lads, take it easy," said the Captain, "ye
+have had quite a footin' and when morning comes,
+there will be some more ahead and at a faster gait."</p>
+
+<p>"Gosh, Cap'n," declared old Pete, "It's the most
+walking we've done together since the time we cor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span>ralled
+the last bunch of niggers on the west coast of
+Africa."</p>
+
+<p>"We certainly made money that trip when we sold
+that cargo of coons to the traders on that Palmetto
+Island below Charleston. But we will clean up
+about as much money when we round up those four
+boys and twice as easy. Tell the two lads about
+that trip, Pete."</p>
+
+<p>The old sailor sat on a rock, and taking out his
+bag of tobacco filled his short black pipe with one
+thorny thumb, then he commenced his narrative,
+with the glow of his pipe lighting up his weatherbeaten
+face.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, orders is orders, and the Cap'n wants me
+to tell this yarn. I might just as well begin it,
+lads. I never knew any good to come to sailormen
+cruising around on dry land any more than on this
+trip." He cast a wary eye at Captain Broom, but
+that worthy merely grunted and Pete resumed his
+story.</p>
+
+<p>"Our clipper lay at anchor in a wide bay with
+only a couple of men on board and the Captain,
+myself and six men trailing inland for to find a
+village of naygurs that our guides had told us of.</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly was hot and steamy going through
+the jungles and every once in a while a big snake as
+large as my leg would crawl across our path and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span>
+rustle away into the undergrowth. Once I felt one
+of 'em a-twisting and rolling under my foot like a
+big log that had came to life. I guess I must have
+jumped twice as high as my own head and I lit on
+the back of one of the naygurs that was guiding us.</p>
+
+<p>"He didn't know what struck him; probably
+thought it was a tiger for I sunk my hooks into his
+hide. He let out a yell and went ripping and snorting
+through that jungle and me not having sense
+enough to let go, until a grape vine about as thick
+as a manilla rope chucked me under the chin and I
+fell flat on my back and I guess that naygur is still
+running."</p>
+
+<p>Here the captain who was evidently enjoying the
+narrative hugely, burst into a volcanic roar of
+laughter.</p>
+
+<p>"I can see yer yet, Pete, on that bounding buck
+of a nigger, and him a-hiking through the jungle
+and a-yelling like a wild Injun."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember you got out of the way mighty
+quick," said Pete, "when you heard us a-coming behind
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly was a curious spectacle," said the
+Captain, "but go on with your yarn, Pete."</p>
+
+<p>"The further we went into the jungle the worse
+it got. The mosquitoes fairly ate us alive and they
+wern't the only cannibals in those woods by any<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span>
+means. There was a tribe of man-eaters beyond the
+Big River and we didn't try to capture any of them.
+They wern't our stripe of bacon.</p>
+
+<p>"We went on for six days, with the monkeys chattering
+over our heads all day and the mosquitoes
+serenading us at night. Talk about birds, there
+was a whole menagerie of them and their colors
+beat the handkerchiefs that these greasers wear
+around their throats and you can't get ahead of that
+for color.</p>
+
+<p>"One night we got in range of the village we
+were after and there was a great pow-wow going
+on. There was a big fire in the circle of the grass
+huts and some big black bucks were doing a dance
+around it. Just then I saw&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on, Pete," said the Captain in a low, gruff
+voice, "somebody is coming our way."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+<h3>THE FOUR BOYS</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Hey, Jim, where are we going to make camp?"
+It was his brother Jo's genial voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Not until we can strike water," replied Jim.
+"No more dry camps for me."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think much of the coast range, or the
+Sierras, either." It was Juarez Hoskins' well-remembered
+voice, with its rather low, deep tones.</p>
+
+<p>"Give me the Rockies every time."</p>
+
+<p>Juarez was nothing if not loyal to his mountains.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think any of the mountains are much to
+brag of."</p>
+
+<p>It is hardly necessary to say that it is Tom Darlington
+who is now speaking, for the discerning
+reader is pretty well acquainted with his style by
+this time.</p>
+
+<p>"There's always something to look out for," continued
+Tom, "if it isn't Indians it's rattlesnakes,
+and you have got to choose between a cloudburst or
+no water at all. Give me the East every time."</p>
+
+<p>"You make me exhausted talking about the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span>
+East," said Jim. "Why didn't you stay there when
+you were there? I had just as soon take a chance
+with a rattlesnake as with an ice cream soda."</p>
+
+<p>"Tom would like to <i>play</i> Indian," cut in Jo,
+"with turkey feathers sticking up from a red flannel
+band around his head. And creeping upon a flock
+of sheep pretending that they are antelope and that
+cows are real live bears."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jim, "you have lined it out all right,
+Jo. Then when they were tired of playing Injun,
+Tom and his little playmates could pretend that
+they were Daniel Boone's men with wildskin panties
+on."</p>
+
+<p>"Shut up, boys," said Juarez, coming to Tom's
+rescue. "What's the use in rubbing it in? The
+East is all right for some folks and if the boys back
+there can't have real adventures they have to do the
+best they can. After all, Jim, you are an Eastern
+boy. You can't get away from that." Jim writhed
+under the implication but replied good humoredly.</p>
+
+<p>"You're right, Juarez, old chap, but I can't help
+stirring up Tom once in a while. It is good for him
+too. It keeps his liver active, so he won't get
+bilious."</p>
+
+<p>"Juarez has got more sense than you two put together,"
+said Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Forget all about it now, Tommy," urged Juarez<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span>
+good-naturedly, getting the aforesaid Tommy by
+the nape of the neck with one vigorous brown hand
+and giving him a shake.</p>
+
+<p>Thus under Juarez's straightforward management
+the family quarrel was abated.</p>
+
+<p>"We might just as well ride now, boys," said
+Jim. "The horses are good and rested and we will
+soon be going down grade instead of up."</p>
+
+<p>The horses had been following in single file back
+of the four boys. They were to be trusted not to
+cut up any shindigs or to wander from the narrow
+mountain trail. The boys had had them a long time
+and together they had gone through the numerous
+hardships and adventures. They were as perfectly
+trained as Uncle Sam's cavalry horses.</p>
+
+<p>The horses halted as the boys dropped back to
+their sides, and they swung into the saddle simultaneously.
+Jim rode in the lead on a splendid gray,
+with a powerful arching neck, strong shoulders and
+hindquarters made for speed. Him, he called
+Caliente. Next rode Tom on a pretty bay. Then
+Jo on a black of medium size but finely built for
+speed and endurance. Juarez brought up the rear
+on his roan, a sinewy animal with a broncho strain
+in him which was liable to crop out at unexpected
+moments.</p>
+
+<p>It is to be noticed that there was a certain forma<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span>tion
+in the way the column rode. Jim, the strong and
+resourceful in front, and Tom, the less experienced
+and capable, following, forming the first division.
+The second division was composed of Jo and Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez having an equally important position with
+the leader, for he was rear guard, a more trying
+position sometimes than being in front for in their
+travels through dangerous regions, it was the man
+in the rear who was more apt to be cut off by the
+wily Indians. But the cool and crafty Juarez was
+not likely to be caught napping.</p>
+
+<p>Even now you notice as they ride along through
+the comparatively safe region of the coast range
+that Jim and Juarez are ever on the alert, glancing
+this way and that, halting to examine some peculiar
+mark on the trail, and not a motion of tree or
+bush upon either mountain slope escapes their
+attention. They had lived too long in the midst
+of treacherous enemies, Indians and outlaws, to be
+taken off their guard. They had been in Mexico
+on a venture the outcome of which was all their
+fondest dreams could wish for. Their expedition
+over, Tom was for going home, to at least deposit
+the treasure they had gained, but the others had
+outvoted him, and now the long pleasure trip to
+Hawaii was their object.</p>
+
+<p>Now, if they but had known it, they were riding<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span>
+to meet the most deadly danger that they had yet
+encountered. For as you know, Captain Broom
+and his party were advancing to meet them. In an
+open or running fight, we know perfectly well that
+the boys could take care of themselves, but in the
+skipper of the Sea Eagle, they were to meet a far
+more dangerous opponent than in Eagle Feather,
+described in "The Frontier Boys in Colorado" or
+Cal Jenkins in Kansas and in Mexico as detailed in
+"Overland Trail" and in "Mexico." In compliance
+with a determined plan, they were now on their way
+to Hawaii.</p>
+
+<p>Not only had Captain Broom the craftiness and
+cruelty of the Indian, but the cool, hard judgment
+of the New England Yankee, coupled with a knowledge
+of their possessions, supposedly limited to
+themselves alone. The Mexican spy, who had reported
+the route the boys were going to take, had
+given the game into his master's hands.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder what has become of our one-eyed
+greaser friend," said Jim, "we haven't seen any
+sign of him since he gave us the shake a week ago
+at the hunting camp. I kind of thought we might
+run across him again."</p>
+
+<p>"It's good riddance to bad rubbish," said Juarez
+in a surly tone. "If I had my way I'd hang him to
+the first oak tree on general principles and on ac<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span>count
+of his personal appearance. I bet he is a
+treacherous little rat."</p>
+
+<p>"He isn't very pretty, that's a fact," admitted Jim,
+"but he is a useful little beast about the camp and
+can do a lot of chores."</p>
+
+<p>"I kind of like to hear him play his guitar," put
+in Jo, "and sing those Mexican tunes. They certainly
+sound pretty."</p>
+
+<p>"He's a picturesque beggar too," remarked Tom.
+"Just the kind that in the old days would have been
+made a king's jester. They dressed 'em up in a
+blazing bright style then. That hump would have
+made his fortune."</p>
+
+<p>Tom, as you remember, was an authority on
+Romance, and as pertaining to which he always
+carried two favorite volumes, much worn by hard
+travel and frequent usage, but which no amount of
+ridicule by his brothers could make him give up.</p>
+
+<p>"Have it your own way," acceded Juarez, "but
+he is not the sort of animal that I would recommend
+for a household pet."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, he is gone," said Jim, "so we don't need
+to worry about him."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know but that I would a little rather have
+him in sight," said Juarez. "Then you know where
+he is."</p>
+
+<p>Jim laughed good-naturedly at the prejudice that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span>
+Juarez showed against the little greaser and put it
+down to his darkly suspicious nature acquired by his
+life among the Indians. It would have been better
+if Jim had taken more stock in his comrade's suspicions.
+Now, Jim was not to be caught napping
+when once an enemy had declared himself, but it
+was his nature to be open-minded and unsuspicious.</p>
+
+<p>The four Frontier Boys were riding up a winding
+trail through a narrow mountain valley, having
+reached a point almost level with the summits,
+which rose several thousand feet above the eastern
+plain. It had been a hard, all day climb, and the
+horses were tired and the gray dust was caked upon
+their sweaty riders.</p>
+
+<p>Let us take a look at our old acquaintances, Jim,
+Tom, Jo and Juarez, to see if they have changed
+any since we saw them last. They are dressed
+about as we have always known them. In gray
+flannel shirts and pants of the same color, moccasins
+on their feet and on their heads battered sombreros
+with the flaps turned back.</p>
+
+<p>Their coats are tied back of the saddles, and their
+shirts open at the throat for the air is hot and dry
+in that California mountain valley. Their rifles are
+swung across their shoulders held by straps, revolvers
+in the holsters at their hips.</p>
+
+<p>Jim sits in the saddle tall and sinewy, grown<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span>
+somewhat thinner by constant exercise and by the
+drying effect of the desert air. His skin is baked
+to an absolute brown. Juarez, too, is black as an
+Indian and he rather looks like one with his hair
+quite long and of a coarse black fibre. The boys
+look a little fine-drawn but sinewy and strong and
+fit for any adventure.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE HUNCHBACK</h3>
+
+
+<p>The shadows were already falling on that side of
+the range as the boys rode slowly into a narrow
+pass. The shade was a decided relief from the
+glare of the California sun that they had encountered
+all day.</p>
+
+<p>"Gosh, but I should like to have a cool breath
+from the Rockies," declared Juarez with emphasis,
+"This sort of a climate makes me tired. Nothing
+but the sun staring at you all the time. It goes
+down clear and comes up with the same kind of a
+grin on its face."</p>
+
+<p>"It will be cooler when we get on the other side,"
+said Jim, encouragingly, "and it won't be long
+now."</p>
+
+<p>"I hope we will strike water on the other side,"
+remarked Jo. "I'm tired of looking at that bald-headed
+stream down there," indicating the dry
+blistered bed of a former water-course.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing more was said until of a sudden they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span>
+rode to the top of the Pass, and saw a new landscape
+spread out before them.</p>
+
+<p>It was a broad and beautiful view, with the sun
+striking the wide Pacific, with a blazing glare of
+silver and below the wooded slope of the mountains,
+stretched an apparently level plain, where roamed
+countless cattle, and innumerable sheep. It had all
+the breadth characteristic of the Californian landscape.</p>
+
+<p>"That's a pretty good looking view," remarked
+Jim admiringly. He would have been still more interested
+if he could have seen a trim-looking black
+vessel in a small cove directly west but a good many
+miles distant.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if it isn't going to rain," said Tom.
+"See those clouds rolling in over the ocean."</p>
+
+<p>"Rain!" ejaculated Jim with superior wisdom,
+a wisdom that appertains particularly to older
+brothers, "I guess not. Those are fog clouds.
+That's a sure sign in this country that it won't
+rain."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'm glad to see them, anyway," said
+Juarez. "It looks sort of stormy even if it isn't."</p>
+
+<p>It was restful, there was no question about that,
+the change from the constant glare of a white sun
+in a blue sky, to the soft damp grayness of the fog.
+It was already rolling over the level plain towards<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span>
+the mountains and, in a short time, a high fog was
+spread over the whole sky.</p>
+
+<p>The boys had ridden down the western side of
+the range for a distance of a half mile, when Jim
+suddenly waved his hand backward in a sign of caution
+for the column to halt. He leaned forward,
+looking intently in a northwesterly direction to a
+point on the opposite side of the mountain valley.
+Juarez followed the direction of the leader's look
+with a keen gaze.</p>
+
+<p>"I was sure that I saw some one slipping through
+the undergrowth on the opposite side over there,"
+Jim finally said, "but I could not make sure whether
+it was a man or some sort of animal."</p>
+
+<p>"I noticed the bushes shaking," said Juarez, "but
+I did not see anything."</p>
+
+<p>"Might have been a brown bear," hazarded Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"They do have them in this range," put in Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps it is the bear that we hunted for two
+days on the other slope," said Juarez, "and he has
+come to give himself up."</p>
+
+<p>"We had better keep our eyes open," advised
+Jim, though he did not take the trouble to unsling
+his rifle. "Jo, you and Tom watch the upper side,
+Juarez will take care of the trail in front."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, boss," said Juarez, cheerfully.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"How much reward, captain, for the first glimpse
+of the lost child?" inquired Jo.</p>
+
+<p>Jim paid no attention to this sally, but kept his
+eye on the trail ahead. The trees were quite thick
+on either side of the trail and as dusk was coming
+on, it was difficult to make out any object clearly.</p>
+
+<p>Just as Jim rode around a turn in the trail,
+Caliente reared and leaped to one side and a less
+skillful rider would have been thrown.</p>
+
+<p>"Easy, old boy," said the rider, patting his horse's
+neck. Caliente stood trembling and snorting and
+watching a curious object that was struggling up
+the bank towards the trail.</p>
+
+<p>It was hard to tell what it was, whether man or
+beast and the dusk only served to make it more obscure.
+Then the object scrambled up on to the
+trail and Jim at once recognized the dwarf Mexican
+with his high-crowned sombrero and his velvet
+suit richly slashed. With his crooked back and one
+eye, he was anything but a prepossessing-looking
+creature. Caliente, when he, too, recognized who
+it was, put back his ears and rushed with bared
+teeth for the Mexican.</p>
+
+<p>Spitting out a curse, the greaser jumped to one
+side with a marked agility, and Jim succeeded after
+a struggle in bringing his furious steed to terms,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span>
+but he had his hands full and there were not very
+many men who could manage Caliente when he got
+into one of his rages.</p>
+
+<p>"Hi! Manuel," (every Mexican was Manuel to
+the boys), cried Jim, "look out for my Tiger, he
+wants to eat that velvet suit of yours."</p>
+
+<p>"Si, Senor," called Manuel from a safe station
+on a granite rock. "He is a tiger as your Honor
+says."</p>
+
+<p>One would have expected to hear the crooked
+little greaser speak in a harsh croaking voice, but
+instead it had a rich sonorous quality.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know where there is any water in this
+country?" asked Jo. "We are as dry as a desert."</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly, Senor, I will show you," replied
+Manuel. (It was true that Manuel spoke in Spanish
+of which language the boys had a working
+knowledge, due to their sojourn in the southwest.
+But I shall put his words in English.) "Where is
+Senor Juarez?" inquired the dwarf. "I do not see
+him."</p>
+
+<p>"The Senor is still with us," replied Jim, gravely,
+"but you cannot see him on account of the dusk,
+but you might hear him," he added in a lower
+tone.</p>
+
+<p>It was true that Juarez was growling to himself
+about the greaser for whom you know he had a cor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span>dial
+antipathy, a feeling which was reciprocated by
+the Mexican.</p>
+
+<p>"Lead on, Manuel," urged Jim, "we want to
+make camp before morning."</p>
+
+<p>"But, Senor, the tiger will eat me up," objected
+the Mexican.</p>
+
+<p>"I will take care of Caliente. He won't bite you.
+Go ahead."</p>
+
+<p>"Si, Senor," assented Manuel.</p>
+
+<p>Then he jumped down from the rock and took
+the trail at a discreet distance ahead of Jim's
+horse, who was held in check by his rider though his
+temper seemed in no wise abated. There was
+something sinister in the figure of the Mexican as
+he led the way down the trail.</p>
+
+<p>All in black, except the gray of his hat with its
+golden cord and the tinsel of his clothes. There
+was something malignant in his make-up and even
+the unimaginative Jim was affected by the presence
+of the Mexican, while Juarez was very uneasy, and
+asked Jo and Tom to allow him to move up next
+to the Captain. This they did, though it left Jo as
+rear guard on that rocky trail.</p>
+
+<p>He seemed quite isolated but he had become sufficiently
+enured to danger and though he kept a
+wary eye, he was not nervous. The boys had unholstered
+their pistols and Juarez kept a straight<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span>
+eye on the moving shadow in the darkness ahead.
+At the first sign of attack or treachery, he was
+going to get that particular Manuel.</p>
+
+<p>"I've got my eye on the little varmint," said
+Juarez in a low voice to Jim. "He may be leading
+us into an ambush."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I guess not," said Jim, with a note of hesitation
+in his voice. "We have got to find water anyway.
+The horses are suffering for it, and this
+beggar can show us where we can locate it."</p>
+
+<p>Just then Manuel threw up his hand with a shrill
+whistle that had every malignant intention in it.
+Juarez raised his pistol just ready to fire, when
+the Mexican laughed shrilly.</p>
+
+<p>"Senor Juarez very nervous. I just stretch and
+whistle a little and he want to shoot."</p>
+
+<p>A peculiar smile came over Juarez's face, but he
+said nothing. All the stolid Indian in his nature
+came to the surface. He merely grunted contemptuously
+at the Mexican's remark and this made
+the volatile Manuel uneasy in his turn, for he
+wanted to realize that his malice had struck home,
+but Juarez did not give him that satisfaction.
+There was a sort of hidden duel between these two,
+the subtle Mexican and the crafty Indian nature of
+Juarez. It remained to be seen who would win.</p>
+
+<p>The four Frontier Boys went silently along down<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span>
+the dark canyon, each one occupied with his own
+thoughts and the ill-omened Mexican guide in the
+lead. Juarez kept a sharp lookout on either side
+of the trail expecting an ambush. His horse seemed
+to feel something of the strain his rider was under,
+as a horse will. Once he shied at something he saw
+in a clump of bushes, and nearly went off the trail.
+It was only with the aid of Juarez's horsemanship
+that he clawed his way back to safety. The Mexican
+was much amused at this incident, and Jim
+gave him a sharp call down.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+<h3>FARMER BROOM</h3>
+
+
+<p>We must now return to Captain Broom and his
+escort, whom we left sitting on a hill covered with
+trees near the Sebastian rancho. Old Pete's story
+had been interrupted by the skipper's warning,&mdash;"Somebody
+is coming our way."</p>
+
+<p>There was no question about that, they could
+hear the someone coming towards the hill whistling
+cheerfully. Then the form of a man could be seen,
+coming up the slope of the elevation.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder where those altogether blessed cows
+are," he was heard saying in Spanish, but of course,
+this is a free and not a literal translation.</p>
+
+<p>"They are generally hiding under these trees,"
+he continued. The sailors kept absolutely still and
+old Pete covered the bowl of his pipe with his hand
+so that its light might not discover them.</p>
+
+<p>"Carambe!" cried the Mexican as he stopped
+about three feet from the recumbent Captain, "I
+fear my good master's cows have been smoking,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span>
+not like nice Mexican cows, a cigarette, but a pipe
+like a vile gringo. Come, get up, you black
+brute," noticing the big bulk of the Captain for the
+first time, and he hauled off and gave the skipper a
+hearty kick on the haunch.</p>
+
+<p>Never was there a more surprised greaser in the
+whole ungainly length of California for this apparently
+gentle cow that he kicked, (not for the first
+time either) suddenly turned and grabbed him with
+a powerful hand before he could yell, though he
+was so frightened that he probably could not utter
+a squeak. Another hand got him by the throat.</p>
+
+<p>"Take me for a cow, did you, you bespangled
+Manuello?" roared the Captain, and he waved the
+aforesaid Manuello about in his great grip as
+though he had been a rag.</p>
+
+<p>"No use killing the beggar, Captain," said the
+mate. "Maybe he can tell us something." The
+Captain let the Mexican drop and he lay on the
+ground perfectly inert.</p>
+
+<p>"He won't be able to say much right away," said
+the Skipper.</p>
+
+<p>It was now getting light, the first signs of dawn
+showing above the mountains. As the darkness
+was drawn away, they could see their position more
+clearly and there came the sounds of the morning
+from the direction of the ranch houses. The bark<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span>ing
+of dogs, the crowing of roosters, and the call
+of human voices.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess, lads, it's about time for us to have
+something to eat," said the Captain, "because we
+have got to do some tall climbing today and I want
+to get an early start."</p>
+
+<p>An expression of disgust showed itself on old
+Pete's face at the idea of more walking, which the
+Captain was quick to note.</p>
+
+<p>"How would you like to stay here, Old Bones,
+and look after Manuello?" said the skipper. But
+Pete shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll stay by the ship, Cap'n," said the old fellow
+stoutly.</p>
+
+<p>"Durn my buttons," said the Captain, whose
+oaths were as mild as his actions were vicious,
+"if you ain't a good old barnacle, Pete. I
+wouldn't think of leaving you in such company as
+this," and he gave the prostrate Mexican a shove
+with his foot. Manuello looked up at the Captain
+with an evil eye and a muttered curse.</p>
+
+<p>This roused the fury of Captain Broom and he
+held him off from the ground as if he had been
+a rat, his jaws working ominously and a look in his
+eyes that made the Mexican shrivel.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing was said, not even by the Skipper, and
+the others watched him fascinated as he glared at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span>
+his victim, and even the iron composure of the
+saturnine mate seemed to be moved partially aside.
+The Mexican began to whimper and moan as his
+eyes shifted to avoid the terrible ones of the Captain.
+He was not suffering any special violence,
+but a strange tremor filled the soul of the Mexican,
+in the grip of the grizzled giant.</p>
+
+<p>As the greaser began to cry, the Captain gave a
+roar of laughter and threw him aside upon the
+ground, about all the humanity he had shriveled
+out of him. He lay there absolutely without any
+power of motion in his body.</p>
+
+<p>Just then the crew of the Sea Eagle became
+aware of the fact that a horned animal with big
+brown eyes was looking at them. All the farmer
+in the nature of Captain Broom came to the surface.</p>
+
+<p>"By Gum," he exclaimed, "if here ain't a bovine
+cow looking at us. I ain't milked one for forty
+years, but I'm not afeard to try. 'Member, Pete,
+when we used to milk the cows back in old Connecticut
+on the farm. After working in the hay all
+day, I'd go down in the side hill pasture, that was
+so steep that you had to hold on with your toes and
+your teeth to keep from sliding down to the
+brook."</p>
+
+<p>"You bring it back to me just like it was a liv<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span>ing
+picture," said Pete, his hard face softening under
+the gentle showers of memory.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I'd drive the black and white one that
+was breechy, and the red mooley, the yaller and
+white that gave the richest milk. I'd drive them
+into the stanchions in the old barn, with the ground
+floor stoned up on the side, where it was sunk into
+the hill."</p>
+
+<p>"But it was winter, Cap'n," said Pete, "that it was
+interesting doing the chores," and he blew reminiscently
+on his fingers, "snow two feet on the level
+and the sun a piece of blue ice in the sky. A condemned
+sight better place than Californey, where
+you don't feel no more alive than a enbalmed
+corpse."</p>
+
+<p>The Captain began now a series of man&#339;uvres to
+get within range of one of the cows so that they
+might have fresh milk for breakfast. He managed
+it finally, and he certainly looked like a peaceful
+old farmer as with his gray head against a fat red
+cow's flank, he milked into a large tin cup. Pete selected
+a black mooley and soothed by the man's
+persuasive manner, she consented finally to give
+down a thin blue stream. But the saturnine mate
+was less successful as he knew much more about
+navigating a ship than he did about cows.</p>
+
+<p>Finally after much awkward man&#339;uvring, he got<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span>
+a cow cornered and began operations upon the left
+side with the result that the cow landed upon him
+with her hoof and sent him sprawling on his back
+to the great delight of the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"Hurt bad, Bill?" inquired the Skipper with mock
+sympathy, "I'm afeard that you will never make a
+farmer."</p>
+
+<p>"I never calkerlated to," replied the mate. "It
+ain't my line of business."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't tell me that," said the Captain, "I can see
+that for myself. Come up here and I'll give you a
+drink."</p>
+
+<p>They had scarcely finished their simple breakfast
+when Jack Cales gave a sudden alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"Cap'n," he cried, "I see two men legging it our
+way. They are making straight for the hill."</p>
+
+<p>"I guess they are coming to see why Manuello
+doesn't show up with the cows," remarked the Captain,
+"we don't want to stir up this hen roost as
+we've got other chicken to fry. So we'll git."</p>
+
+<p>"Take the greaser?" inquired Jack.</p>
+
+<p>"You and the mate fetch him," said the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>Just as the two men were mounting the hill, the
+Captain and his crew made a swift sneak down the
+opposite slope, and were soon making their way
+through the bush towards the foot-hills. In a minute
+they heard the cries of the two men as they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span>
+drove the herd of cows towards the home ranch for
+the morning milking. The sun had now risen
+above the eastern range just in front of them and
+was blazing down upon the plain and the sea
+beyond. There was something exhilarating in the
+air in spite of the heat.</p>
+
+<p>"We don't need the company of that greaser any
+further," said Captain Broom, after they had made
+some headway up a canyon back of the ranch buildings.
+So they took some rope grass, tough as
+manilla, and tied him firmly, and, after having
+gagged him, they left him to be found later by
+some of his countrymen.</p>
+
+<p>Then they toiled steadily up the trail of the
+canyon, until about noon they reached a pocket in
+the canyon where there was a pool of clear water
+fed by an invisible spring. Coming to meet them
+were four boys riding up the trail on the other
+side of the range.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE CAMP IN THE POCKET</h3>
+
+
+<p>Under the guidance of the Mexican dwarf, the
+four boys came at last to a halt. It seemed as if
+the canyon down which they had been riding had
+come to an end for there was a wall of rock directly
+in front of them.</p>
+
+<p>"Down there, Senor, is a pool of clear water,"
+announced the Mexican.</p>
+
+<p>"Glad to hear it, Manuel," said Jim heartily.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you ever see a picture, Jim," put in Juarez
+significantly, "of a pool where the thirsty animals
+have to come to drink and before they get their
+noses in the water the hunter shoots them?"</p>
+
+<p>But nothing of this dire nature happened and in
+a few minutes the famished animals were pumping
+the delicious water down their long, baked
+throats.</p>
+
+<p>"My Gracious, but that tastes good!" cried Tom,
+drawing in a long, gasping breath, after he had
+been drinking steadily for about a minute. "It
+makes my head swim."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I should think it would," said Jo, sarcastically,
+"considering the amount you have drunk."</p>
+
+<p>"You weren't far behind," grumbled Tom. "I
+thought that you were not going to leave enough
+for the horses."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't especially like this place to camp in,"
+said Jim. "We are not accustomed to get in a
+pocket like this. But it is too late to pull out tonight
+and the horses need a rest, so we will keep
+guard."</p>
+
+<p>"Better drown the brown rat first," remarked
+Juarez to Jim. But the latter only shook his head
+and laughed.</p>
+
+<p>The camp was made about twenty feet east of
+the spring in a small grove of slender trees backed
+by a high wall of steep granite, down which poured
+a waterfall in the rainy season.</p>
+
+<p>The fire was built upon a flat rock in the centre
+of the grove where there was no danger of it catching
+in the grass and bushes which were dry as tinder.
+If once a mountain fire was started at the end
+of the dry season there would be no stopping it
+until it had devastated the whole country.</p>
+
+<p>The light of the fire showed the usual cheery and
+active scene that goes with making camp. How
+many times the Frontier Boys had gone through
+these preparations it is impossible to say. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span>
+had camped on the plains of Kansas, in the mountains
+of Colorado, on the Mesas of New Mexico,
+the banks of the Colorado river, and the Pampas
+of Mexico. Now we find them in the coast range
+of California.</p>
+
+<p>It was not an especially dangerous country in
+which they were camped, nothing to compare with
+parts of Colorado and Mexico, but never were they
+in greater danger than at the present moment and
+this camp promised to be their last together, except
+they had unusual luck.</p>
+
+<p>There was a traitor in the company, and even
+now four pairs of hostile eyes were watching them
+as they moved in the light of the fire. The Captain
+of the Sea Eagle and his three trusty men were
+hidden in some bushes at the top of the pocket on
+the western side.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez and Jim busied themselves first in looking
+after their horses. Removing the saddles they
+rubbed down each animal thoroughly, clear to the
+fetlocks and then gave them a good feed of grain.
+Jo and Tom were on the supper committee and busying
+themselves making preparations for a square
+meal. Manuello, who had been with the boys on
+the other side of the range and was accustomed to
+help in odd chores about camp, now offered to aid
+in getting the supper.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I will make the coffee with your permission,
+Senor Jo," he proposed.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you savvy it all right, Manuello?" inquired
+Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, yes, Senor. I can make such coffee as the
+Holy Father would be pleased to drink," he replied
+with fervor.</p>
+
+<p>"Not too strong because it keeps me awake," protested
+Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"No, no, Senor Thomas," replied Manuello
+with a sweeping bow, "the coffee I make is very
+soothing. It will give you a long, soft sleep."
+There was an undertone of subtle irony that was
+entirely lost upon the two straightforward boys.</p>
+
+<p>"That's a good fellow, Manuello," said Jo, cordially,
+and he handed the coffee pot filled with
+water to the Mexican, who went about the preparation
+of it with a deftness that showed that he knew
+what he was about. Not one of the boys saw him
+slip a white powder into the coffee pot. It quickly
+dissolved and the coffee began to bubble innocently
+enough under the eyes of the hunchback Manuello.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez and Jim just then came back from looking
+after the horses which were fastened near the wall
+of rock. As soon as Juarez saw the Mexican
+watching over the coffee pot, his eyes narrowed
+with suspicion.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Who made the coffee?" he asked Jo, bluntly.</p>
+
+<p>"Manuello," replied Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"The Senor will find the coffee truly delicious,"
+said the hunchback with a bow, "only the Mexican
+knows how to keep its aroma when boiling it."</p>
+
+<p>"Humph," grunted Juarez, and he went deliberately
+to the fire and lifted the coffee pot off and
+poured its contents on the ground.</p>
+
+<p>"The American does not care for the aroma of
+your Mexican coffee," he said coolly.</p>
+
+<p>The Mexican merely gave a peculiar hitch to his
+shoulder, spat on the ground and turned away apparently
+mortally offended as he, no doubt, was.
+That part of his scheme had been blocked by the
+craftiness of Juarez, but the Captain might make
+good where his spy had failed.</p>
+
+<p>The Mexican sat back in the shadow on a rock
+smoking a cigarette, while the boys ate their
+supper of beans, meat, bread and coffee. He was
+the skeleton at the feast as it were, not only his
+malignant humor made itself felt, but there was a
+sense of depression that they could not shake off,
+try as they would.</p>
+
+<p>This was so unusual that they could not account
+for it. As a rule, they were jolly and even when
+danger was impending, they felt a certain confidence
+and assurance, but not so tonight.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What makes us feel so on the bum tonight, do
+you suppose?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe this canyon is haunted," proposed Jo,
+who had an imaginative streak in him.</p>
+
+<p>"I tell you the way I figure it," said Jim. "We
+are not used to camping in a hollow like this, for
+before this we have always selected a place that
+we could defend, and though there is no particular
+danger from outlaws or Indians in these mountains,
+we can't shake off our old habits."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe there is something in that," acquiesced
+Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"It's that rat over there," said Juarez loudly.</p>
+
+<p>The Mexican laughed coolly and insolently, and
+lighted another cigarette. This would have maddened
+an excitable person, but Juarez was in a
+stoical mood and he contented himself with flinging
+a bone that he had been gnawing at, carelessly
+over his shoulder, almost striking the Mexican in
+the face.</p>
+
+<p>This set that peppery individual wild and he tore
+around considerably, tearing his hair, stamping his
+feet and sputtering with maledictions at the insult
+that had been offered him.</p>
+
+<p>"I am no dog that you can throw a bone to,"
+and he sizzled off into a string of unpleasant remarks.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Here you, Manuello," roared Jim, rising to his
+feet and standing over the Mexican, "not another
+yelp out of you."</p>
+
+<p>Manuello had a respect for this big American
+lad much as he despised his simplicity and he
+sobered down. Besides he had not finished his
+work for the night. He had failed to get the sleeping
+drug to the boys in the coffee and now he must
+be ready to help his master, Captain Broom of the
+Sea Eagle, in some other way.</p>
+
+<p>There was a person whom he feared and admired
+absolutely and he had been a most useful spy and
+agent for the Skipper in certain nefarious plots.
+It was well for the little hunchback that no one
+knew of his share in the betraying of old Juan Sebastian
+some years before.</p>
+
+<p>"You will have the first watch, Jo," ordered Jim.
+"It is now nine o'clock. I will relieve you at
+eleven and stand guard until two. Juarez from
+two until five and Tom can have the short watch."</p>
+
+<p>According to this arrangement, Jim and Juarez
+would be on guard during the danger hours.</p>
+
+<p>How many times in the past had the boys stood
+guard over their camp. Was this to be the last
+guard? There were the old Kansas days, when
+they had to be on the watch against horse thieves.
+Then came the dangerous crisis in their Colorado<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span>
+experiences, when they had to guard against the
+wiles of the Indians. And most exciting of all,
+perhaps, the night in old Mexico when they camped
+on the trail of the outlaws. I wonder if Jo, the
+first on duty, thought of these old times that night.
+Probably not, his mind being fully occupied with
+the business in hand.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+<h3>THE ATTACK</h3>
+
+
+<p>So the three boys rolled into their blankets with
+the saddles for pillows and dropped immediately to
+sleep as they were very tired from the long, hard
+ride. They lay at different points around the fire,
+which was allowed to die down as the fog seemed
+like a warm gray blanket over the whole landscape.</p>
+
+<p>Jo sat on a log by the slowly dying fire, with his
+rifle on his knees looking into the darkness and not
+far from him lay the Mexican a mere dark lump
+on the ground, apparently asleep, but keeping a
+wary eye on all around. Imperceptibly he crept
+nearer to where Jo was sitting, but he did not have
+the weapon he would have preferred in his hand,
+the stiletto, which was as natural to him as the
+fangs to a rattlesnake.</p>
+
+<p>But it did not suit the long-headed Captain
+Broom to have the boys killed. He wanted their
+life as well as their money, but in a different sense
+than the adage has it. From what he had heard of
+them, they were boys of unusual mettle and varied<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span>
+acquirements. If caught young, he could train
+them to good purpose. If they proved worthless,
+he would hold them for ransom.</p>
+
+<p>So Captain Broom had told Manuello briefly and
+to the point that there was to be no rib-sticking and
+the Mexican would have thought as soon of disobeying
+the commands of the Evil One as of going
+contrary to the instructions of the Captain. So as
+he crept towards Jo, he held not a poniard in his
+clenched hand, but a heavy weapon like a black-jack,
+made of leather with a weight at the end.</p>
+
+<p>Jo, however, spoiled his first attempt, for when
+the greaser had got within striking distance, Jo got
+up and went down to the pool to get a drink. If it
+had not been so dark, when they arrived, the boys
+would have seen tracks around the pool that would
+have aroused their suspicions. But everything
+seemed to work against them this time.</p>
+
+<p>Jo stooped down at the brink and scarcely put
+his thirsty lips to the water when some instinct of
+warning made him look quickly around and he saw
+a small dark object directly back of him.</p>
+
+<p>"Pardon, Senor, for startling you;" it was the
+voice of the dwarf, "but I, too, was very thirsty. It
+is in the air."</p>
+
+<p>"You needn't have been so quiet about it," said
+Jo, crossly. This little rat always had a way of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span>
+baffling and irritating him, because he did not have
+Jim's force, which could beat down the dwarf when
+occasion demanded it, or the stoicism of Juarez,
+which blocked the hunchback.</p>
+
+<p>"I came softly, Senor," said the Mexican, imperturbably,
+"because I did not wish to disturb the
+slumbers of the Senors who are resting."</p>
+
+<p>"Get down and drink, then," said Jo, who,
+though he realized that the Mexican was up to
+some hidden deviltry, did not know how to meet
+him. Jim and Juarez would have knocked him out
+of the camp if they had discovered him trailing
+them, with a warning that he would be shot if he
+put in an appearance again.</p>
+
+<p>While the Mexican was pretending to drink, Jo
+satisfied his thirst at a point of the pool where he
+would be safe from a sudden attack by the hunchback.
+For Jo was not a fool by any means. Then
+he got to his feet and with the Mexican ahead of
+him, he saw to that, he made his way back to the
+camp.</p>
+
+<p>Scarcely had Jo seated himself upon the rock
+again than he heard a stick snap upon the mountain
+side above the horses, so he got to his feet to investigate.</p>
+
+<p>"You can stay where you are, Manuello," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span>
+Jo. "I don't need your company this time." The
+Mexican laughed softly to himself.</p>
+
+<p>"I hope the Senor Americano will not get lonesome,"
+he said.</p>
+
+<p>Jo made a careful search in the direction of the
+sound but found no sign of a human being lurking
+among the trees. Though he felt exceedingly
+nervous, he was unable to account therefor or give
+a reason.</p>
+
+<p>Very quietly he went the rounds, so as not to
+awake the boys, who, however, were sleeping heavily.
+He found the horses all right standing with
+drooping heads as though dozing, Jo's black with
+his neck over Tom's bay, as these horses were
+great chums. But Caliente and Juarez's roan were
+not sociable and kept strictly to themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jo returned to the rock where he had been
+sitting. He stirred the dying fire so that it sent up
+a feeble spurt of flame by the aid of which he
+looked at his watch. It lacked a few minutes of
+ten. The Mexican had taken up his old place on
+the ground watching for his chance. He was
+anxious that the attack should take place during
+Jo's watch for he had his doubts in regard to
+Juarez or the redoubtable Jim proving easy victims.</p>
+
+<p>All this time, Captain Bill Broom and his crew
+had been keeping watch upon their intended victims<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span>
+from the top of the cliff above the pool. They
+could see every move from the time the Frontier
+Boys had arrived until they lay down near the
+smouldering fire.</p>
+
+<p>"They are a husky lot," was the Captain's first
+comment. "That tall fellar, I guess, is a horse
+tamer and Injun fighter."</p>
+
+<p>Some time later when the altercation occurred
+about the coffee and Juarez expressed his opinion
+about the Mexican, the Captain could scarcely keep
+from haw-hawing right out.</p>
+
+<p>"Them fellars have got some dis'pline," commented
+the saturnine mate.</p>
+
+<p>"You're right they hev," said the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"That lad don't know how to handle my pet
+rattlesnake," was the Captain's comment when the
+Mexican trailed Jo to the drinking pool. After
+Jo had returned from making his rounds and had
+resumed his guard again, the Captain decided that
+the time had come for action.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, lads," he ordered, "pull off your shoes
+and the first man that makes a sound will get his
+neck cracked. Knock 'em out, if necessary, but
+no killing this time."</p>
+
+<p>Then they started, the Captain in the lead, and
+old Pete bringing up the rear. They had had a
+good many hours in that vicinity and had made a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span>
+path from their hiding place to the soft dust trail.
+So they moved in their sock feet without a sound.
+There was an oppressive stillness in that dark canyon
+under the heavy blanket of fog.</p>
+
+<p>Already it had began to lower and as the sailors
+advanced with snail-like slowness the heavy white
+fog settled down, filling the canyon with its white
+opaqueness. You could not see five feet in front,
+and the moisture beaded itself upon the eyebrows
+and mustaches of the men.</p>
+
+<p>This dense fog was a great help to the attacking
+party. They had now crawled half way down
+the main trail, when Pete came near putting all the
+fat in the fire, for his eyesight was not overly keen,
+and the fog made it more difficult for him. He did
+not see a round stone poised on the edge of the
+trail until it rolled down towards the pool.</p>
+
+<p>Although every sound was deadened by the fog,
+still the watchful Jo heard it distinctly. He got
+quickly to his feet and, with soft moccasined tread
+he went in the direction of the sound, his pistol in
+his hand.</p>
+
+<p>No sooner had the stone fallen than the Captain
+motioned the mate to halt. This signal was repeated
+to Jack Cales, who was so hidden by the
+fog that he could not see the Captain. He stopped<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span>
+suddenly so that old Pete tumbled over him, making
+some noise.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain almost had a fit of apoplexy because
+he did not dare express himself at this interesting
+juncture. Jo had heard the noise on the trail and
+his suspicions centered in that direction. Noiselessly
+he went up with slight footprints in the
+damp dust of the trail. The Captain waited his
+coming, crouched behind a bend in the trail.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jo saw a huge figure rising suddenly out
+of the fog in front of him and, before he could fire,
+a great hand gripped for his throat, but if he could
+not shoot in defense, at least he could give his comrades
+warning. He fired one shot, and then he was
+overpowered.</p>
+
+<p>Jim and Juarez heard it instantly. Then Manuello
+got in some of his work. Before Juarez
+could rise, he struck him a vicious blow upon the
+head that stunned him, rendering him unconscious.
+Cold with fury, Jim picked up the rat of a Mexican
+before he could land a blow upon him, whirled
+him over his head and dashed him upon the ground.</p>
+
+<p>Then he sprang through the fog in the direction
+of the shot. He heard Jo groan as the ruffians
+overpowered him and he leaped up the trail blind
+with a fighting rage. The Captain had just got up<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span>
+from the struggle with Jo, who lay as good as dead
+in the trail.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jim hurled himself upon him. Powerful
+though he was, the Captain could not withstand the
+sinewy lurch of that sudden attack and together
+boy and man crashed from the trail over rocks
+and through brush until with a fearful impact they
+struck the trunk of a pine tree.</p>
+
+<p>The mate sprang swiftly down to the rescue of
+his fallen master. He was a strong, sinewy man
+and knew how to act in an emergency.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+<h3>"HAUL IN"</h3>
+
+
+<p>The jar of the fall had knocked out the Captain
+partially and Jim had risen to give him the coup
+de grace, when he heard the rush of the mate coming
+down through the fog. It was a strange sensation
+hearing your enemy but not able to see him.</p>
+
+<p>Then the mate plunged into view, a dark ball
+through the opaqueness. He could not have
+stopped if he had so desired and it was evident that
+he did not wish to. For, with lowered head, he
+came for Jim as he would for an ugly sailor.</p>
+
+<p>Jim stopped him with his shoulder and ripped in
+a right uppercut with his keen hard fist that would
+have stopped the heart action of an ordinary man,
+and it sent the seasoned mate back upon his
+haunches, partially dazed. Feeling the Captain
+squirming back to life, he planted a back blow with
+his heel in the latter's stomach that took the wind
+out of the Captain's sails for the time being. The
+mate, a really hardy individual, had made good use<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span>
+of the brief respite and, picking up a heavy stick,
+came for Jim with it.</p>
+
+<p>The latter dodged the blow aimed at his head
+and it glanced off his shoulder. Then he closed
+with the sailor, struggling to put him out. Three
+seconds more and Jim would have landed the
+proper blow, had not Jack Cales arrived upon the
+scene under cover of the m&ecirc;l&eacute;e. Before Jim could
+turn to meet this new assailant, a stone crashed
+against his head&mdash;and the frontier boys had lost.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain had now recovered sufficiently to
+get on his feet, and the fallen Jim was kicked until
+the Captain himself called a halt.</p>
+
+<p>"Wait till we get him on board ship, lads," he
+said, "and we will finish this job."</p>
+
+<p>"Better get the other two, Cap'n," advised the
+mate.</p>
+
+<p>So they dragged the prostrate Jim to the foot of
+the trail near where the drinking pool was and went
+to look for Juarez and Tom. They saw a small
+black object crawling towards them through the
+fog.</p>
+
+<p>"What's this a coming?" asked Jack Cales.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, it's my Mexican ferret," said the Captain.
+"What's the matter, Manuello?" he asked as he
+turned him over none too gently with his foot.</p>
+
+<p>"The big Senor throw me over his head and on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span>
+the ground. I think I crack the world open," he
+explained. The Captain roared with laughter.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is the rest of this dangerous gang?" he
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"I will show you," he said, struggling to his feet.
+The presence of his master gave him strength and
+confidence. "This way, Senor Captain."</p>
+
+<p>He brought them to where Juarez lay upon the
+ground, partially held up by Tom, who had been
+crying and endeavoring to bring his comrade back
+to consciousness from the ugly blow that the Mexican
+had given him. I am sure that none could
+blame Tom for tears upon this occasion for it was
+calculated to try the heart of the stoutest.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, this boy looks like an Indian," said the
+Captain regarding Juarez closely.</p>
+
+<p>"He lived with the Indians when a boy, Senor
+Captain," volunteered the dwarf, who by subtle
+means of his own had become possessed of the
+history of the four boys.</p>
+
+<p>"He don't seem to be much more than a boy,
+now," said the Captain. They had not paid much
+attention to Tom because he seemed a mere kid,
+but the hunchback was not to be caught napping,
+for he had worked around back of Tom, and as
+the latter aimed his revolver at the Captain, having
+worked it cautiously out of his holster, the dwarf<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span>
+grabbed him in the nick of time else the expedition
+would have lost its head.</p>
+
+<p>Instead of being infuriated as one might have
+expected, the Captain was decidedly amused at the
+temerity of the youngster, for that is all Tom
+appeared to him, and, therefore, he did not hand
+him a beating.</p>
+
+<p>"The nerve of the little rooster," guffawed the
+Captain. "I'll make a real pirate out of you."</p>
+
+<p>Tom struggled wildly, but it was no use, as
+Jack Cales and the mate disarmed him. Just then
+there came a loud yell from up the trail.</p>
+
+<p>"Haul in, Cap'n!" It was Old Pete's well known
+and melodious voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Jack, go and see what the old cuss wants," ordered
+the Captain. "I expect that the lad up there
+is trying to kidnap Pete."</p>
+
+<p>When Jack arrived on the scene, he found that
+the Skipper had guessed right. For Jo had been
+playing possum and was not nearly so badly hurt
+as he had appeared to be.</p>
+
+<p>He came near escaping from his keeper and it
+was only by a quick forward lunge that Pete had
+grabbed him and then occurred a short struggle
+in which Pete had called for help and just as Jo
+had wrestled himself loose, Cales appeared and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span>
+grabbed him. It took both Pete and Cales quite a
+while to subdue him.</p>
+
+<p>Finally it was accomplished and they made him
+go down the trail, one on either side. At the foot
+of the incline he saw the bruised and battered form
+of Jim lying on the ground and a big lump came
+into his throat.</p>
+
+<p>"You fellows will pay for this," he said, rendered
+desperate by the sight of Jim. But his captors
+only laughed, not realizing that the Frontier Boys
+were apt to keep their word.</p>
+
+<p>Then they joined the main gang and Jo saw to
+his dismay that Tom and Juarez were in the coils
+as well as himself and that Juarez, too, had been
+laid out and appeared dazed and only partially
+conscious of what was going on. Thus there was
+little hope of escape with the two leaders, Jim and
+Juarez, done for.</p>
+
+<p>"Better search these beggars for their money,
+Captain," suggested the mate.</p>
+
+<p>"It hadn't slipped my mind," replied the Skipper.</p>
+
+<p>Now the money and the jewels that the boys
+had found in Mexico were in leather belts around
+their bodies. These were soon in the possession
+of the Captain, but the crew knew full well that
+they would receive their share and thus it was that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span>
+the Skipper gave promise of living to a ripe old
+age instead of being murdered for his money.</p>
+
+<p>"It's about time to make a start, Cap'n," announced
+the mate, and the Captain consulted his
+watch by the light of a lantern. He found that
+it was half-past eleven.</p>
+
+<p>"We won't be so long going back," he said.
+"We will use their horses."</p>
+
+<p>This was easier said than done, for when any of
+the crew approached Caliente, that noble animal
+became transformed into a tiger and as he came
+for them with bared teeth or whirled and kicked
+out with his heels, they decided that discretion
+was the better part of valor and they left him alone.
+Sailors at best are not very clever horsemen.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me have a chance and I'll quiet him for
+you," volunteered Jim gruffly. "I don't want to
+see you poor fellows eaten alive."</p>
+
+<p>"My lad," said the Skipper solemnly, "I'm no
+spring chicken and you can't catch me with any
+such chaff."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+<h3>MISSOURI'S MAN&#338;UVRE</h3>
+
+
+<p>The other three horses proved more tractable than
+Caliente, and after some skirmishing they managed
+to get their new ships rigged up with the saddles
+and other tackle. Now as soon as they got their
+cargo aboard, they would be prepared to set sail
+and to cruise over the plains. (I must use this
+nautical language out of respect for Captain
+Broom and his crew.)</p>
+
+<p>As I have said before, sailors are poor horsemen
+and when it came to making fast the double
+cinches, they were quite at sea, where sailors should
+be, perhaps. Old Pete came near getting his head
+kicked off by pulling the back cinch too tight, but
+he and Captain Broom profited by their youthful
+experience on a New England farm, so the horses
+were finally all saddled and bridled and ready for a
+flight&mdash;except Caliente. He was to be left marooned
+in the lonely canyon.</p>
+
+<p>It was surprising to Jim and his comrades how
+quietly Juarez's roan took matters, but there is no
+relying on a broncho, because he always does the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span>
+unexpected, and the Captain was so pleased with
+his behavior that he decided to ride the animal
+himself.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, that's what I call a well broken hoss,"
+he said. "I ain't so sure of the black so I will let
+you cruise on him, Jack, being the most active.
+I don't know what I shall do for Pete, unless I
+can find him a rocking-horse."</p>
+
+<p>"What are you going to do with the boys?"
+inquired the mate. "Have 'em walk?"</p>
+
+<p>"They can ride their pack mule," said the Captain
+grimly.</p>
+
+<p>So Jo, Juarez and Jim were securely fastened
+on the patient mule, while Tom rode behind the
+mate upon his own horse, but no longer as master.
+Then the queer procession started up the trail
+through the dense fog. The Captain was in the lead,
+followed by the mate with Tom, then the mule with
+Pete and the Mexican dwarf guarding the animal
+and its cargo, while the active Jack Cales was the
+rear guard. It was exactly twelve o'clock when
+they weighed anchor and sailed from the harbor
+or cove in the mountain canyon.</p>
+
+<p>The three boys said little to each other. They
+did not waste their breath with threats of what
+they would do to their captors later on, but accepted
+the situation with true western stoicism. But you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span>
+may be sure that their minds were active even if
+their tongues said little.</p>
+
+<p>They were so securely tied that there was no
+chance for them to make a move as their arms
+were corded tight to their bodies and their feet
+were tied under the belly of the mule. Unless they
+had been experienced riders they would have had
+a difficult time of it. But it was terribly humiliating,
+especially under the insolence of the malignant
+Mexican. But he did not dare do them any actual
+injury, because the Skipper had given him a warning
+which he did not dare to disregard. Finally,
+old Pete put an end to his slurring remarks to the
+prisoners, so he had to content himself with ugly
+looks and frequent expectoration wherewith to
+express his disgust.</p>
+
+<p>Before they reached the foot of the trail, Jack
+Cales changed with Pete, though the latter demurred
+at first, at boarding the strange black craft
+with four legs, but finally consented under the urging
+of Jack and the warm recommendation of the
+boys, who had taken somewhat of a fancy to the
+old sailor, since he had shut up the Mexican in
+their behalf.</p>
+
+<p>"He won't hurt you, Pop," said Jim, "he is a
+good horse. Any lady could ride him."</p>
+
+<p>"I ain't no lady," replied the old fellow suspi<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span>ciously,
+as he slowly and stiffly mounted, while
+Jack held his head, that is to say, the horse's
+head, not Pete's.</p>
+
+<p>"What did he do that for?" inquired Pete,
+anxiously, preparing to dismount.</p>
+
+<p>"Stay on, you old Barnacle," roared the Captain
+from the head of the procession, for though he
+could not see anything in the rear, still he seemed
+able to keep an instinctive tab on his old comrade
+Pete.</p>
+
+<p>"That horse is all right, Pop," said Jo, "and I
+ought to know. I've ridden him a good many
+hundred miles. Don't tickle him with your heels,
+that's all."</p>
+
+<p>"I guess that's what I've done," admitted Pete.</p>
+
+<p>Then the procession resumed its march with
+Pete as rear guard, riding with due caution and
+circumspection as though his craft was loaded with
+dynamite and liable to explode at any time. Jack
+Cales tried to quiz the prisoners on the mule in a
+friendly way, but they would not relax in their
+attitude of grim, if not sullen, defiance towards
+their captors.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Broom need not think that his prisoners
+would ever accept any conditions from him.
+Doubtless, he thought that these boys might be
+trained to help him in his business for he appre<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span>ciated
+their courage and fighting ability, but he did
+not fully understand what stuff the frontier boys
+were made of.</p>
+
+<p>The procession of pirates and their prisoners had
+now reached the foot of the range and were in close
+proximity to the ranch, but everything favored the
+plans of the Skipper of the Sea Eagle. The fog
+became denser when they reached the level plain
+so that it was scarcely possible for the rider to see
+the ears of his horse.</p>
+
+<p>Every sound was deadened, so that they could
+have gone directly past the ranch houses and not
+even the dogs would have heard them. But the
+Captain was determined to take no chances, and
+as soon as the party were free of the canyon, he
+bore off toward the south, making quite a circuit.</p>
+
+<p>Anybody but an experienced navigator would
+have been lost in the fog upon the plain, but you
+could not lose Captain Broom either on the high
+seas or the low plains. They passed between two
+wooded hills, which the reader will have to take
+on faith as he cannot see them. Then across a
+gully, on the other side of which they came to a
+barb wire fence.</p>
+
+<p>This did not stop them long, as the Captain cut
+it and they rode through. From the footing which
+was about all that could be observed, they appeared<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span>
+to be in a pasture land with a gentle slope towards
+the sea. The fog did not diminish in thickness and
+the boys determined to escape. Here was their
+chance, if they could be said to have one.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's where we make a break," said Jim to
+Juarez. "Guide the mule alongside of Tom. Then
+we will run for it." Jim did not say this in so many
+words, but he had ways and means of indicating to
+Juarez, who was tied directly back of him, by a sign
+and poke language which Juarez was quick to seize.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed at every turn that his experience with
+the Indians was a help to him. The mule was a
+prot&eacute;g&eacute; of Juarez and with a word he could guide
+it in any direction that he wished it to go. The
+fog was one thing that favored them. The Mexican
+could scarcely be seen and Jack Cales stalked
+along looking like a giant through the mist.</p>
+
+<p>He had grown somewhat lax through the long
+march. This was the time, if ever. Jim gave
+Juarez the signal that all was ready. A quick word
+to the mule and he trotted out from his place in
+the column, knocking over the Mexican and before
+Cales was fairly awake to the situation, he was
+obscured by the fog.</p>
+
+<p>In about two seconds he had hove alongside of
+the horse that the mate was on. Tom was foot-loose,
+and no sooner did he see Missouri's long<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span>
+ears through the fog, than he was ready for action.</p>
+
+<p>"Jump, Tom," urged Jim. It took only about
+two seconds for Tom to execute the man&#339;uvre.</p>
+
+<p>"Halt!" roared the Captain, and he tried to turn
+the roan to capture the runaways, but right here,
+the broncho strain in the animal showed itself.</p>
+
+<p>He began to buck and never in all his experience
+had the redoubtable Captain Broom ever been on
+so choppy a sea. It was hard to distinguish fog
+from whiskers. At the second hunch upward, the
+Captain shot into space. The boys did not tarry to
+watch for his descent. A word from Juarez to the
+mule, and Missouri turned directly south just as
+Jack Cales came rushing up.</p>
+
+<p>"Touch him with your foot, Tom," said Juarez,
+meaning the mule, not Cales. Tom's heel reached
+the right spot and up flew the mule's hind feet with
+the rapidity of a rapid fire-gun.</p>
+
+<p>One foot struck Cales on the shoulder with a
+sufficient impact to send him down and out. The
+mate had been involved in the cyclone of which
+Captain Broom was the centre. Tom's horse, considered
+the gentlest of the four, had become infected
+with the roan's example and he started in
+to do a little bucking on his own account. Never
+since the mate had rounded Cape Horn, had he
+known so much action in so short a time.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The only one left was Old Pete and he came on
+right gallantly, but by dodging and turning they
+got away in the fog. After putting what they considered
+a safe distance between themselves and
+their former captors, Juarez persuaded Missouri
+to halt, and Tom went to work and with great
+difficulty first untied, then lifted, them to the
+ground for the boys were as stiff as boards from
+being tied hard and fast for so long a time.</p>
+
+<p>"My, but it certainly hurts," said Jo, stamping
+around in an endeavor to get the blood to circulating
+again. "It's just like it used to be back home
+in the winter when we would go skating and get
+our hands numb."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter, Juarez?" asked Jim in
+alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I'm all right, I guess," he said in a voice
+that sounded faint to the boys and far away to himself.
+Then, without warning, he fell over on the
+ground and stiffened out.</p>
+
+<p>"It's from the blow that the greaser gave him,"
+said Tom. "It would have killed him if it had
+struck him fair."</p>
+
+<p>"Wait until I get my hands on him," cried Jim,
+significantly.</p>
+
+<p>What should they do now? It was not an easy
+question to decide.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE RANCHERO</h3>
+
+
+<p>They could not desert Juarez and they could not
+get far with him. It was enough to stagger them
+and it seemed that they had reached the end of their
+resources.</p>
+
+<p>"If it wasn't such an open country," said Jo,
+"we might hide until they had got out of range and
+then get to the nearest ranch."</p>
+
+<p>"If they overtake us we can stand them off,"
+saying this Jim reached for his revolver. To his
+astonishment it was gone. Then he remembered
+he had been disarmed by Captain Broom, and they
+were absolutely defenseless unless they could depend
+on Missouri's heels which had furnished them
+such active protection.</p>
+
+<p>Finally they brought Juarez around so that he
+was able to sit up.</p>
+
+<p>"Where am I?" he asked in a sort of daze.</p>
+
+<p>"You will be all right in a minute, old chap," encouraged
+Jim, speaking cheerfully, but he did not
+feel so.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You bet I will," he assented feebly, but with
+invincible determination. "What are you holding
+me for, Jim? Let's get at those fellows." It was
+evident that his mind was not exactly clear yet.
+They got him on his feet and he seemed better,
+though still very wabbly.</p>
+
+<p>"There come those fellows," cried Jim, suddenly,
+with more of despair in his tone than he had
+ever spoken before, no matter how hard pressed
+they had been. But before there had always been
+something to do, but now they were helpless. Jim
+looked hastily around for some weapon. All he
+found was a small round stone.</p>
+
+<p>With a yell of exultation, Jack Cales and the
+mate dashed down upon them, followed by the Captain
+and old Pete. They had been able to follow
+the distinctive mark of the mule's shoes in the soft
+earth until they came in hearing of the boys' voices.
+Then they jumped upon them. They were out for
+blood this time, for they had the boys' revolvers in
+their hands, probably because they were better than
+their own.</p>
+
+<p>Missouri, finding himself free, made off. Tom
+halted when covered by one of the sailor's revolvers,
+but Jim dodged as the mate fired at him. The
+lug of lead spattered the mud between his feet, the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span>
+next second he was off full speed through the fog,
+followed by fleet Jo.</p>
+
+<p>The sailors soon gave up the useless chase, for
+there was no trail to guide them, so they had to
+content themselves with half of their original capture
+and they started for the cove where the Sea
+Eagle was anchored as fast as they could go,
+though they were hampered by Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"Better leave him, Captain," urged old Pete.
+"He is nothing but a nuisance."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll have use for that fellow yet," said the Captain.
+"As for the other lad, he won't feel so lively
+after a few days on shipboard."</p>
+
+<p>This did not have a very cheerful sound for Tom
+and he was in anything but a happy frame of mind.
+Still he had great confidence in Jim and did not
+give up hope of being rescued before the coast was
+reached. It was now getting towards daybreak,
+and the fog began to lift somewhat so that they
+could see a distance of thirty or forty yards.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Broom's gang had now left the region
+of the level pasture and were coming to the brush
+section, fringing the coast, and beyond that they
+reached the sand dunes. The nearer they came to
+the sea the more depressed Tom became. The only
+thing that encouraged him was the fact that Juarez
+began to seem like himself.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Let us now return to Jo and Jim, who had been
+so fortunate as to make their escape. As soon as
+they were sure that the pursuit was at an end, they
+slowed down to a walk.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, they didn't give us much of a chase,"
+remarked Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Plenty to suit me. What are we going to do
+now?"</p>
+
+<p>"This fog is beginning to lift," said Jim, "and
+then we can take our bearings. I want to locate
+this ranch the first thing, and then we can get
+help."</p>
+
+<p>"Here's a wire fence," announced Jo, "I reckon
+it's the one the old geser cut."</p>
+
+<p>"It surely is and a straight course north is our
+direction," remarked Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Here are hills that look like those we rode
+through," said Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"We will soon be there now," was Jim's cheerful
+comment "What's that? It sounds like a dog
+barking." They stopped, listening intently, as the
+sound came faint, but there was no mistaking it.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose it's some big hound, that they usually
+keep on these ranches," said Jo, who was beginning
+to feel depressed from hunger and fatigue, "and
+he will jump at us because we haven't any
+weapons."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But in spite of Jo's fear they hurried on in the
+direction of the sound. In a short time, they came
+to a road between two barb wire fences, which the
+reader will remember that the Captain and his crew
+took when they were coming through the Sebastian
+ranch. But the boys struck it higher up, and were
+soon in the pasture that sloped down from the ranch
+houses toward the road.</p>
+
+<p>Jim and Jo now heard the voices of men as well
+as the baying of the dogs. The men were talking
+excitedly about the finding of one of their number
+in the canyon tied and gagged, and it was evident
+that it was not a good time for strangers to
+visit the ranch of the Sebastians.</p>
+
+<p>But Jim and Jo were dulled to danger and did
+not care what risk they ran and so they called to the
+men in a friendly Spanish greeting. There was
+instantly a great hubbub, and two men charged
+down upon them, preceded by a couple of fierce-looking
+mongrels. These came dashing for them
+with red, gaping mouths. The boys defended
+themselves gallantly with two stout sticks that they
+had picked up. Then the two Mexicans took a
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Look out, Jo," cried Jim, who was ever on the
+alert. "That fellow is going to throw his lasso."
+Jo dodged just in the nick of time, but this gave<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span>
+one of the dogs a chance, and if Jim had not
+stunned him by a resounding crack on the head it
+would have gone hard with his brother.</p>
+
+<p>Just then another man appeared on the scene, attracted
+from the vicinity of the house by the noise
+of the encounter. He came full speed on a splendid
+sorrel. It was Juan Sebastian, a dark, handsome
+young man, a true son of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>"What's all this?" he cried as he rode up. "Here,
+Sancho, Jan, you brutes, come off." The dogs
+slunk obediently to heel.</p>
+
+<p>"We found those insolent Gringoes," said one of
+the men, "coming straight for the Senor's house.
+We undertook to stop them."</p>
+
+<p>"Senor," said Jim, bowing low and speaking in
+his best Spanish, "we are sorry, my brother and I,
+to have caused this disturbance. We are strangers
+and unfortunate, and we have heard of your
+hospitality, Senor"&mdash;Jim bowed again. He was
+not so simple, after all.</p>
+
+<p>The Senor Sebastian returned the bow with
+more grace than Jim could command.</p>
+
+<p>"I regret, Senor&mdash;" he hesitated.</p>
+
+<p>"Darlington," added Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Senor Darlington, that you have been attacked
+in this manner, but there has been a party
+of desperadoes that have been overrunning this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span>
+part of the country for the past two days, and
+they took one of my men and bound and gagged
+him and so you see, Senors," a smile and bow
+completed the Spanish gentleman's apology perfectly.</p>
+
+<p>"We have just escaped, not more than an hour
+ago, from these same desperadoes," said Jim.
+"They have taken my brother and friend with
+them towards the coast."</p>
+
+<p>"We will saddle and overtake them," promised
+the Senor, "after we have had breakfast."</p>
+
+<p>Jim was stunned by this gentle sort of procrastination.</p>
+
+<p>"But, Senor," he said gravely, "we will not be
+able to overtake them if we do not start immediately.
+Pardon my abruptness, but I cannot rest
+while there are two of my party prisoners in the
+hands of this gang of cut-throats."</p>
+
+<p>"It is to be perfectly understood," replied the
+Spaniard with no less gravity, "we will make
+haste, but first we will eat while the servants are
+getting two of the horses ready for you and your
+brother."</p>
+
+<p>This was not Jim's idea of making haste by a
+long shot, but he was enough of a traveler to
+recognize that the ways of men and nations differed
+and that nothing was to be gained by going<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span>
+against the grain of a national characteristic. So
+while fuming inwardly, he was outwardly quiet
+and composed. He argued, too, that it was not
+likely the pirate gang would retain the captured
+prisoners. Later, when they were themselves at
+a safe distance they would set free the others.</p>
+
+<p>As they went towards the house, the Spaniard
+dismounted and walked with them, giving his
+horse into the charge of one of the men, with directions
+to bring two other horses to the house.
+There was an unmistakable courtesy in doing this
+and the boys appreciated it. They could not help
+but contrast their appearance with that of the
+Spaniard. He was not gaudily dressed like a
+vaquero, but everything he wore was possessed
+of a certain richness and was not lacking in color.
+He truly was a Prince of the South in appearance
+as well as in courtesy.</p>
+
+<p>Jim and Jo were disreputable beyond words.
+Their clothes were muddy, torn and disheveled,
+their faces so grimed that it was hard to tell their
+original color, and there were blotches of blood
+upon their clothes as well as faces and hands.
+But, though they looked worse than tramps, there
+was something straightforward in their manner
+and their way of speech that the Spaniard was
+quick to recognize.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>As they walked along the Spaniard explained
+that his household had been unusually disturbed
+that morning. His mother, he said, was an invalid,
+and had escaped from her attendant. Some
+mental trouble, he briefly mentioned as the cause
+of the elderly lady's worriment. Evidently, he did
+not connect the tragedy in his own life, in which
+his father's life was sacrificed, with the boys' antagonist.
+His mother, he assured them, had been
+found and was returned to her home.</p>
+
+<p>The boys now had a good view of the house,
+as they approached it. The fog having lifted,
+they could take in the whole situation. The structure
+itself was of adobe, of the early California
+type, low, with broad verandas, and built on four
+sides around a court with a fountain in the centre,
+with fish in the basin, and grass around it.
+There were beautiful rose-tree bushes with gold
+and red clusters growing over the corners of the
+house.</p>
+
+<p>From the verandah there was a beautiful view
+looking off over the surrounding country. The
+house itself stood on a rise of ground that sloped
+gently from the plain below. Back of it rose the
+mountains of the coast range, while in the distance
+glittered the broad breadths of the Pacific, shining<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span>
+like an azure floor. As far as eye could see was
+the domain of this great ranch. It was, indeed, a
+princely estate, and one of which the Senor Sebastian
+might well be proud. Those were the days
+of romance and of charm in the land of Southern
+California.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+<h3>A NEW FRIEND</h3>
+
+
+<p>The servants eyed the two boys curiously as
+they stepped upon the verandah and the brothers
+were not reassured by any looks of friendliness,
+though they were outwardly courteous. A withered
+looking old woman, who looked to Jim as
+though she had Indian blood showed the boys to
+a room, where they could wash up.</p>
+
+<p>"Jove! Doesn't it dazzle your eyes, Jo?" exclaimed
+Jim, "to see a real room, with a bed and
+a white spread, with those starched things where
+the pillows ought to be."</p>
+
+<p>"This room would certainly please Aunt
+Maria," remarked Jo. "That four poster bed
+with the canopy over it, is an old timer, I'll warrant
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"If I slept in this room," said Jim, "I would
+make a low bow to the bed and then roll up in my
+blanket and go to sleep on the floor."</p>
+
+<p>"How do I look?" asked Jo, after he had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span>
+rubbed and scrubbed his face for a long time.</p>
+
+<p>"You have got off the first layer," replied Jim,
+"and look about the color of a half-breed. Let
+me try my hand at polishing up."</p>
+
+<p>"It will take you a week," remarked Jo discouragingly.</p>
+
+<p>It cannot be truly said that they looked ornamental
+even when they were clean, for Jim's face
+was badly torn, one side of it being scraped raw.
+He got this memento when he tackled the Captain
+and fell down into the canyon with him. One
+eye was blackened and the other cheek bruised.
+These disadvantages were not to be overcome in
+a short time.</p>
+
+<p>Jo was somewhat more presentable, but he, too,
+showed signs of the rough time that they had had
+with the Captain and his "merry" crew. But in
+spite of all this, there was something in their bearing,
+an honest hardihood and manliness that could
+not be discounted by torn clothes and bruised
+faces.</p>
+
+<p>"This room looks dirty, now," said Jo, "I'm
+ashamed to leave it like this."</p>
+
+<p>"We will go outside to brush off our clothes,"
+proposed Jim, "and I'm going to empty this dirty
+water myself." He started out with it when he
+met one of the servants in the hall. With many<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span>
+explanations, numerous gestures and much excitement,
+she took the pail from Jim and disappeared
+with it.</p>
+
+<p>"They won't let you do anything for yourself
+here, Jo," reported Jim, returning to the room.</p>
+
+<p>This was correct and the boys noticed afterwards
+that the servants regarded them with odd
+expressions of amusement and it was evident to
+the sensitive Jo that they were being "guyed" by
+them, to use a modern expression. The boys
+being American lads, were self-reliant, and were
+accustomed to do everything for themselves, and,
+unknowingly they had gone counter to a custom
+of constant service of the Spaniards. It was to
+demean oneself, according to their code, to do any
+menial work.</p>
+
+<p>"Might as well start for the dining room," proposed
+Jo. "I hate leaving Tom and Juarez to
+their fate this way."</p>
+
+<p>"I more than hate it," protested Jim, "but as
+you can't hurry these people, we will make the
+best time by falling in with their way of doing
+business."</p>
+
+<p>Then they went out into a passageway and, taking
+the wrong turn, which was quite easy in the
+rambling old house, they came to a door that entered
+into the courtyard.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"My, but this is beautiful," exclaimed Jo. "It
+makes you appreciate California better when you
+see a place like this."</p>
+
+<p>"That hammock looks good to me," said Jim.
+"I would like to stretch out in it right now."</p>
+
+<p>Just then the door opened on the verandah and a
+really beautiful young girl stepped out. She was
+probably seventeen years of age, dressed in white,
+with a black mantilla over her equally black hair
+and her dark cheeks glowed with color. A very
+romantic meeting, Messieurs, the gallant young
+Americans at one end of the verandah and the
+Senorita at the other. Then she saw Jim and
+Jo with their scarred and bruised faces. With a
+little shriek, and clasping her hand to her eyes,
+she retreated quickly to her room.</p>
+
+<p>"What did you do to scare that girl, Jo?" inquired
+Jim severely of his brother.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing," declared Jo, stoutly. "It was the
+sight of your face. It would give a wooden Injun
+a chill." Jim felt of the said face reflectively.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess you are right, Jo," he admitted, "but
+you ain't so charming in appearance that you
+would do any damage."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's walk along this side," proposed Jo.
+"Perhaps we will locate the breakfast."</p>
+
+<p>"All right," agreed Jim.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So they stalked along, more or less conscious
+that a pair of dark blue eyes were regarding them,
+and they thought they heard a trill of
+laughter, but it might have been one of the maids.
+They need not have felt embarrassed for there
+was the grace in their movements that goes with
+strength and youth and suppleness.</p>
+
+<p>They were walking under a perfect bower of
+flowers anyway. For this side was beautifully latticed
+and over the lattice work grew vines with
+purple and golden flowers, that would give a
+grateful shade when the California sun would
+drive the fog away.</p>
+
+<p>Under foot there was a double flagging of
+stone with trodden dirt on either side.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see a broom anywhere," said Jo.</p>
+
+<p>Just then they heard the voice of Senor Sebastian
+behind them and they turned quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"I had begun to fear, Senors, that you had become
+lost again."</p>
+
+<p>"We were, partially, Senor."</p>
+
+<p>"Our simple breakfast is ready now if you are,"
+he said.</p>
+
+<p>"We will have to brush the dirt off before we
+can go in," protested Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Antonio bring a brush," called the Senor. In
+a moment a gray-haired, bent Mexican came with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span>
+a big kitchen broom. Instantly the Senor flushed
+with anger.</p>
+
+<p>"Stupid one, my guests are not my horses.
+Have a care."</p>
+
+<p>A suspicion flashed through Jim's mind that
+the ancient servitor had brought the broom on
+purpose. It was clear that the servants did not
+have a very high opinion of their American visitors.
+The next time he returned he had gotten
+the right brush, and made a point of sneezing as
+the dust flew from their mud-dried clothes. This
+made Jim laugh in spite of himself.</p>
+
+<p>"More dust than the Sirocco brings," said Jim.
+The old servitor regarded him with a cunning eye.</p>
+
+<p>"Si, Senor," he said, then he was seized with a
+perfect convulsion of sneezing. This aroused his
+master's ire.</p>
+
+<p>"No more of that, Antonio," he commanded,
+"or it will be the lash." Antonio's cold was cured
+from that moment. Jim's mouth twitched at the
+corners with the humor of it but he did not laugh
+now for that would be discourteous to his host.</p>
+
+<p>Finally the brushing was finished to the regret
+of the servants, who had kept an amused eye on
+Antonio's performance, while pretending to be
+busy on some trivial tasks near the Patio or
+court. In her own room, the Senorita was faint<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span>
+with laughter as she watched Antonio dusting the
+two American lads.</p>
+
+<p>It was a simple breakfast that the boys found
+prepared for them in a long, low dining-room,
+with its dark beams and white plastered walls.
+The coffee was excellent, with a delicate aroma,
+and was probably the best that Mexico could
+afford. There was a large plate of meat garnished
+with peppers, and a mixed dish of vegetables
+that looked odd, but that tasted deliciously.
+You may be sure that Jim and Jo appreciated their
+meal, and they felt invigorated when it was finished,
+wishing all the while, however, that they
+were on the trail of their captured comrades.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Senors, the horses are at the door. They
+are spirited, but I am sure that you ride well."</p>
+
+<p>This was a mere expression of courtesy on his
+part, for he did not expect any such thing and
+thought to see his guests fall off if the horses
+should rise on their hind legs, as they no doubt
+would, for there was not a horse on the big rancho
+but what was peppery and spirited. No sooner
+had the Senor spoke than Jim jumped to his feet,
+putting his hand to his head.</p>
+
+<p>"I have forgotten about Caliente!" he exclaimed.
+"It is my horse, Senor," he explained to his host.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span>
+"He is up the canyon because the gang that attacked
+us last night were afraid of him."</p>
+
+<p>"I will send for him," said the Senor.</p>
+
+<p>"By the pool in the pocket," said Jim. "But I
+think I ought to get him myself, though I appreciate
+your offer, but one's horse, you know&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"I understand perfectly."</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot leave him without food and water,"
+said Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"I will attend to that. I will send a trustworthy
+man," and he spoke to the servant who was waiting
+on the table. In a short time he returned
+with a tall, sinewy man, with straight black hair
+and dark skin. He gave this man the necessary
+instructions and with a "Si, Senor," the man went
+out.</p>
+
+<p>"A good reliable fellow," remarked Jim. "He
+looks like an Indian."</p>
+
+<p>"He is an Indian," replied their host, "but of
+the right kind. Your horse is in good hands."</p>
+
+<p>"Tell him to bring him down to the ranch," said
+Jim. "I'll trust Caliente with him." The Indian
+was called back and under his stolid demeanor
+was an appreciation of Jim's confidence.</p>
+
+<p>Breakfast over they went out on the verandah,
+where they could see the horses. They were spirited
+looking beasts all right. One was a bay, the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span>
+two front legs white stockinged, very trimly built,
+with a flashing eye, that he kept rolling around.
+The boy who was holding him had his hands full,
+as the bay would rise on his hind legs and strike
+out viciously with his forefeet.</p>
+
+<p>The other animal was much heavier than the
+bay. A brilliant black, whose coat fairly shone
+with careful grooming. He had been standing
+comparatively quiet until the three appeared upon
+the verandah of the house, then, with a sudden
+surge backward, he dragged the Mexican boy off
+his feet, shaking his head viciously.</p>
+
+<p>"We ought to be armed, Senor," advised Jim.
+"If we should overtake those men, they will put
+up a desperate fight."</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly, Senor," he answered. "Come into
+this room and select your weapon."</p>
+
+<p>After both Jim and Jo were armed, they went
+out to the horses.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XIV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE PURSUIT</h3>
+
+
+<p>All the servants seemed just now to find duties
+of importance in front of the house or near it.
+They had no idea of missing the chance of seeing
+these Gringoes, whom they held in contempt,
+thrown from their horses.</p>
+
+<p>Jim took the black and Jo was left the red, the
+easiest to manage even if he seemed the liveliest.
+Jo was too quick for his horse and before he
+could whirl to one side, he was in the saddle.
+Then his animal reared and plunged but Jo sat
+on him as easily as a cowboy does his steed. There
+was no mistaking his horsemanship. The servants
+were duly and deeply disappointed.</p>
+
+<p>But their hopes revived when they saw Jim
+tackle the black. He began that steady sideways
+movement which Jim knew so well, whenever he
+tried to put his foot in the stirrup. The servants
+began to smile, here would be some fun. The
+"Black Devil," as they called the horse, had been
+known to kill men, so they had pleasant anticipa<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span>tions.
+When Jim found that he could not mount
+by the stirrup, he made a quick, powerful leap
+and was in the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian, but he
+knew that the fight had just begun.</p>
+
+<p>Jo looked on with interest and perfect confidence
+in brother Jim's ability. The black stood
+perfectly stunned for a moment or two at being
+so suddenly mounted, then he sprang into action.
+With his back in a hump he shot into the air and
+came down stiff-legged.</p>
+
+<p>Without loss of a second he went into the air
+again, higher than before. From the corral the
+Mexican cowboys were looking at the duel between
+the horse and the boy with lively interest.</p>
+
+<p>"The Diablo will kill him," said one nonchalantly,
+blowing a puff of smoke from his cigarette.</p>
+
+<p>"Five dollars that the Gringo stays on," said a
+second. The wager was made and others followed,
+for the Mexicans are inveterate gamblers.
+The third time the horse pitched into the air,
+Jim swaying with the animal's every motion as the
+trained cowboy does. Finding that he could not
+dislodge his rider that way, the black rose on his
+hind legs to a perpendicular position.</p>
+
+<p>Jim knew the trick of old, and was prepared for
+it. As the horse started to fall backwards, Jim<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span>
+who had been sticking like a leech, leaped lightly
+to the ground and with all his strength, pulling
+upon the bridle, slammed him to the ground. No
+sooner was the horse upon his feet again than Jim
+was in the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>Once more he tried that falling back trick and
+this time Jim brought him down upon the damp
+earth with a thud that jarred things. The black
+devil had had enough. He stood quivering and
+sweating, but for the time being subdued.</p>
+
+<p>"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian again, and
+he shook his guest by the hand warmly. "You
+are a true horseman. Now we shall go. We
+shall eat up the miles."</p>
+
+<p>The crowd of cowboys swung their hats in a
+salute to the Gringo, who could conquer the black
+devil, while the house servants, disappointed at
+the stranger's triumph, went back to their different
+tasks.</p>
+
+<p>The three horsemen galloped away down the
+sloping pasture, the Spaniard in advance as he
+knew the country and the most direct way to the
+coast. His horse was a splendid sorrel, somewhat
+taller than the horse that Jim rode. And he was
+a gallant figure in his leather riding suit and
+peaked sombrero with a brilliant colored band
+around it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Jim and Jo rode few yards behind the Spaniard
+and side by side. Jim felt a certain exultation
+in his victory over the Black before people
+who would have liked to have seen him defeated.
+It was exhilarating, too, this plunging gallop
+ahead with a chance to rescue Tom and Juarez
+and to get even with Captain Broom and his gang,
+who had taken away their valuables and had given
+the boys such a cruel defeat.</p>
+
+<p>"This is a fine horse," said Jim, "though he
+hasn't the stride of Caliente."</p>
+
+<p>"He is a beauty, when it comes to bucking,"
+Jo commented. "There is nothing the matter
+with this bay but my black can beat him for
+speed."</p>
+
+<p>So they flew on, the speed of their steeds blowing
+back their horses' manes, and the fresh air from
+the sea bringing a feeling of hope to their
+hearts, that they would yet be able to overtake
+the pirates, and rescue their comrades in distress.
+Their horses' feet were devouring the
+miles.</p>
+
+<p>"We stand a chance to get 'em at this rate,"
+shouted Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Won't it be fine if we can all sit down to
+dinner tonight?" replied Jo. "I bet that Tom and
+Juarez would enjoy a square meal with the Senor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span>
+at the ranch house. Ifs kind of nice to be civilized
+once in a while."</p>
+
+<p>"You're right, it is," declared Jim emphatically.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if there isn't a store around here
+where we could buy some clothes," inquired Jo,
+anxiously. "We look too disreputable to appear
+in polite society."</p>
+
+<p>"Thinking about that girl, I suppose?" remarked
+Jim with brotherly intuition.</p>
+
+<p>"I wouldn't be so sure if I were you," replied
+Jo evasively. "How about the Senorita down
+in Mexico who threw you the rose at the castle?"
+This reference to the Senorita Cordova whom
+the Frontier Boys had rescued in Mexico, checked
+Jim from getting too gay for he still had a tender
+place in his memory for her.</p>
+
+<p>The fog by this time was entirely dissipated,
+and they could see by certain white or rather light
+spots in the clouds where the sun was going to
+break through and an absolutely clear day would
+result. The three riders had now reached the
+brush region that began a few miles from the
+coast and they were compelled to go more
+slowly.</p>
+
+<p>But if they had only known what was going on
+not more than two miles away from where they
+were, they would not have slackened speed no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span>
+matter what risk they ran. For Captain Broom
+and his crew with the two captives had arrived at
+the cove and old Pete and Jack Cales were going
+into the cave for the boat.</p>
+
+<p>There was a chance, but the Senor and his companions
+must hurry. Some mishap to the pirates'
+expedition just at this point and the frontier boys
+would win. Tom and Juarez might have sung the
+tune that they had often sung before in camp.</p>
+
+<div class='poem'>
+"Tramp, tramp, tramp, the boys are marching,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Cheer up, comrades, they will come,</span><br />
+And beneath the starry flag<br />
+We will breathe the air again<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Of freedom in our own beloved home."</span><br />
+</div>
+
+<p>But they did not know and they sat miserable
+and dejected upon the damp sand of the beach,
+not knowing that Jim and Jo were coming nearer
+every second. Then there came an accident,
+though a slight one, that gave the pursuers a
+chance.</p>
+
+<p>Old Pete was carrying one end of the boat. He
+was nervous, anyway, in regard to the cave and
+its grewsome contents, thought he saw some dark
+spectre coming for him out of the blackness of the
+cave and he dropped his end of the boat and
+scudded for the beach.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Captain was furious, giving him a blow
+that sent him spinning half way down to the
+water, and he and the mate rushed back to see
+what damage the boat had suffered. It was only
+slightly stove in, but every second was precious.
+The pursuers were only a mile away.</p>
+
+<p>Jim began to grow restless as they neared the
+coast. He seemed to feel that they were nearing
+the enemy, and at his urging, the Spaniard, who
+had an increased respect and liking for Jim ever
+since he had conquered Black Diablo, put his horse
+to the gallop, and away they went along the narrow
+winding path through the bushes.</p>
+
+<p>The branches whipt them, but they paid no attention,
+but on they went; it was evident that they
+made considerable racket and Captain Broom,
+with a fierce burst of energy for which he was
+famous, got the boat launched, the two prisoners
+in, and with himself and the mate at the oars,
+made the boat leap forward over the lazy rolling
+swell towards the graceful Sea Eagle.</p>
+
+<p>When they had reached a point half-way to the
+vessel, the horsemen came tearing through the
+last screen of brush onto the yellow sand. The
+enemy had escaped by the skin of its teeth and it
+was heart-rending to see Tom and Juarez being<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span>
+carried away from them at every stroke of the
+oars towards their black prison. Jim put up his
+hands to his mouth and yelled:</p>
+
+<p>"We will rescue you, boys. Don't give up.
+We'll get 'em yet."</p>
+
+<p>A derisive yell greeted this challenge and one of
+the men in the boat fired at the group on the
+shore, but the bullet fell harmlessly short. They
+did not dare to fire in return lest they hit either
+Tom or Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"They have steam up on board," observed Jim.
+"But I see one chance to do some execution."</p>
+
+<p>It was this. The Sea Eagle was anchored close
+under a cliff on the northern side of the cove. So
+Jim slipped off his horse, for the way on that side
+was impracticable except on foot. It was hard
+going at that, especially as there were a good
+many cacti with their wretched thorns.</p>
+
+<p>Jim stepped gingerly along over the rocks, gliding
+through the bushes until at last he reached
+a point above the vessel where he could almost
+look down upon her decks. The boat from the
+shore had just come alongside and the prisoners
+were hustled into the cabin and the door locked.
+Tom and Juarez were a dejected-looking pair and
+it made Jim's heart ache to see them.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain went upon the quarter-deck and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span>
+gave an order to the man at the wheel. The
+anchor had already been weighed. Slowly and
+gracefully the Sea Eagle turned, and there stood
+Captain Broom, as big as life upon the bridge.
+Why did not Jim fire? Because he had come to
+a certain wise conclusion.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XV</h2>
+
+<h3>JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE</h3>
+
+
+<p>As Jim had raised his revolver to fire, a sudden
+idea came to him. In the first place he rebelled
+instinctively from shooting a man down in cold
+blood from ambush, even if he was as desperate
+and crime-stained a character as Captain Bill
+Broom, besides it would not save Tom and Juarez
+and only make their captivity harder to endure,
+if any injury was done the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>Another thing, Jim was sure that if he began
+the attack that his two comrades would be used
+as shields to protect the man at the wheel, so that
+the Sea Eagle could be navigated safely out of the
+cove. He saw with interest the narrow place between
+two lines of foam above hidden ledges
+where the boat must pass in order to reach the
+open sea. He marvelled at the temerity of Captain
+Broom in daring to bring his ship through
+such a place.</p>
+
+<p>Then a brilliant thought came to him, a sudden
+stroke that might turn defeat into victory. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span>
+Sea Eagle was now making straight for the narrow
+channel. Jim slipped back for a short distance
+an ran as rapidly as he could to a point
+a little to the west of where he had first hidden.
+He did not have long to wait. The Sea Eagle
+was almost directly opposite his place of ambush,
+and was just sticking her nose into the narrow
+passage.</p>
+
+<p>Jim raised his revolver and took careful aim
+and fired. The man at the wheel gave a yell and
+clapped his hand to the shoulder, letting go the
+wheel and the nose of the little steamer swung
+toward the rock. A swell lifted her bow clear
+by a few inches, and the Captain caught the
+steamer by the wheel and brought her to a course.</p>
+
+<p>"Bring those boys up on deck and shoot them
+if that black-haired devil," (meaning Jim) "fires
+another shot," he called to the mate.</p>
+
+<p>That worthy was not slow to obey the order,
+he had them on deck in full sight in a jiffy and
+held a pistol at Tom's head. Jim had raised his
+arm to fire at the Captain when he heard his order
+and it was as if he had been paralyzed. He knew
+that Tom and Juarez would have been killed to a
+certainty if he fired another shot.</p>
+
+<p>Luck had broken against him again, for that
+was all that had kept the Sea Eagle from going on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span>
+the reef, where if she had not been wrecked, she
+and her crew would have been at the mercy of the
+men on shore. Just the lifting of the wave had
+saved the vessel by a few inches, that, and Captain
+Broom's quick and skillful action.</p>
+
+<p>The second round of the contest had gone in
+favor of the pirate and his crew, but only by a
+shade as it were. But it would not surprise me a
+bit if Jim evened up matters in the third and final
+round. Let us hope so, at least, for that will give
+a silver lining to the black cloud that had rolled
+over the boys' fortunes at this particular time.</p>
+
+<p>Jim made his way slowly back to where Jo and
+the Senor were waiting for him on the beach. He
+was despondent over the failure of his plans by so
+close a margin, and the sight of Tom and Juarez
+helpless on the deck in the hands of these sea-coast
+pirates, was always before his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>"What were you trying to do, Jim?" inquired
+Jo, "Sink the ship?" Before Jim could reply, the
+Spaniard gave a cry of warning.</p>
+
+<p>"Look out, they are going to shoot."</p>
+
+<p>Glancing toward the Sea Eagle, which was now
+a half mile from shore, they saw a puff of smoke,
+and then a shell struck into the beach below them
+and exploding, sent a shower of sand over them
+and the horses. The latter, frightened, reared and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span>
+plunged, but the boys soon got their animals under
+control, as they quickly tired of acting up in the
+heavy sand. Jim shook his fist in the direction of
+the Sea Eagle.</p>
+
+<p>"Curse your insolence!" he yelled. "I'll make
+every one of you eat crow, you miserable
+hounds!"</p>
+
+<p>Jim looked ugly, his eyes glared with concentrated
+fury and the veins on his temple were swollen
+and throbbing. Unthinkingly, he pulled back
+hard upon the bit, sending his horse up in the air.</p>
+
+<p>"Easy, boy," he said, soothingly. "Easy. It
+was my fault for yanking you."</p>
+
+<p>When the horse was quieted, Jim was cooled
+down to his normal temperature, and he told his
+comrades of his attack upon the Sea Eagle and
+how it had turned out.</p>
+
+<p>"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard impressively,
+"I will take off my hat to you. You are a
+natural General. Take my advice, my friend,
+and go to Spain. There you might head a revolution
+and in time rise to high mark."</p>
+
+<p>"I appreciate your praise deeply, Senor Sebastian,"
+responded Jim, "but my own country,
+Senor, I could not leave it for another."</p>
+
+<p>"Right, Senor," replied the Spaniard, "you have
+the true spirit."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Which way will she turn, do you suppose?"
+asked Jo, pointing to the vessel that was moving
+steadily out on the Pacific in a straight line from
+the shore.</p>
+
+<p>"To the North, doubtless," replied the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"Wherever she goes we must find her out,"
+said Jim, with grim determination.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish we could follow them," sighed Jo. "If
+we could only hire a boat."</p>
+
+<p>"They have our money," replied Jim, briefly.</p>
+
+<p>"I had forgotten that," said Jo, and his face
+showed his disappointment.</p>
+
+<p>"Permit me to help you," said the Spaniard, "I
+am to blame for detaining you at breakfast."</p>
+
+<p>"That is generous of you, Senor," replied Jim,
+"but I do not favor going to the expense of chartering
+a steamer. Even if it were possible, my
+plan would be to follow along the coast on horseback
+and see what can be done when they make a
+landing."</p>
+
+<p>"As you are the General," replied the Spaniard,
+"we will allow you to make the plans."</p>
+
+<p>"Look!" exclaimed Jo, "they are turning South
+instead of North."</p>
+
+<p>"Impossible!" cried the Spaniard. "There is
+only one port within two hundred miles. I do<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span>
+not understand. Yes, they are surely going
+South."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps they have a secret landing place,"
+hazarded Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Not so," replied the Spaniard. "Not a harbor
+where they could land save one and there they
+would not dare to go."</p>
+
+<p>The three watchers on horseback gazed until
+there was little to be seen other than a smudge of
+smoke upon the horizon. It was no use, the Sea
+Eagle was holding to her southerly course to some
+mysterious port. The sun had now come out and
+was shining with sheer brilliance upon the sparkling
+ocean.</p>
+
+<p>"We must return now," said the Spaniard.
+"There is nothing more for us to do at present."</p>
+
+<p>"I think that my brother and I will start this
+afternoon and take the trail to the south," announced
+Jim, "wherever those fellows set foot, I
+want to be waiting for them."</p>
+
+<p>"I fear it is impossible to start so soon," replied
+the Spaniard, "I must go with you as I know the
+country to the South, every foot of it."</p>
+
+<p>"The Senor is right, Jim," put in Jo, quickly,
+as he saw a frown on Jim's face and was afraid
+that he was going to say something abruptly.
+"You will want to give Caliente a good rest, so<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span>
+that when we start, we will make the distance
+without delay. Then we have to make some preparations
+ourselves."</p>
+
+<p>Jim looked at his brother with a moment's dark
+suspicion, but it was evident that Jo was perfectly
+sincere in what he said.</p>
+
+<p>"I will promise, Senor," said the Spaniard with
+a peculiar smile, "that when we start which will
+be early tomorrow morning, that we will travel
+far and fast enough to suit you and your horse."
+There was a challenge in his voice that Jim met
+smilingly.</p>
+
+<p>"So be it, Senor," he said, "I will try to be in
+sight at the finish."</p>
+
+<p>"My horse is a remarkable animal for speed
+and endurance, I must tell you frankly," said the
+Senor gravely. "He has no equal in this country
+of California. He has proved it more than once
+and against all comers."</p>
+
+<p>"He is certainly a fine horse," admitted Jim,
+looking at the sorrel with admiring eyes. "He
+has a splendid stride."</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, no, Senor," laughed the Spaniard with a
+gleam of his white teeth, "I did not mean him,"
+patting the horse on the neck, "a good animal, indeed,
+but more for my little sister to ride than for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span>
+me. Wait, my friend, until I introduce you to
+Don Fernando and then you will see a horse for
+the first time."</p>
+
+<p>"I should be very much pleased to see him,"
+said Jim, frankly curious and interested.</p>
+
+<p>"Tomorrow," said the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>They had now turned into the narrow trail
+among the bushes and had only ridden a few steps
+when Jo called a sudden halt.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think, Jim, there's my horse and
+Tom's tied in that thicket."</p>
+
+<p>Sure enough there they were, utterly worn out,
+but with spirit enough to recognize their old comrades
+Jim and Jo, and if ever horses expressed a
+welcome these two did when they first caught
+sight of their two friends.</p>
+
+<p>"They have cut the saddles to pieces, the
+brutes," exclaimed Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm glad to get the horses," said Jim, "I am
+surprised that they didn't cut their throats."</p>
+
+<p>"They will follow us all right," said Jo, in reply
+to the Spaniard's suggestion that they would have
+to be led, and they trotted along behind Jo, who
+was the last one in line.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know of any place where we could buy
+things?" asked Jim. "We need a new outfit."</p>
+
+<p>"But we have no money," put in Jo quickly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I will get the money or its equivalent today,"
+said Jim. "If there is a store where the Senor can
+get me credit."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, there is a store where a Portugee sells
+about everything that we need in this country,"
+replied the Spaniard. "It is some distance to the
+north. We will ride there before we return to
+the ranch. There will be no difficulty about the
+credit," he concluded, with a bow to Jim.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XVI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE</h3>
+
+
+<p>"You do not know my ability to spend," said Jim,
+"I may have to plunge to the extent of several hundred
+dollars. You see my brother has very expensive
+tastes. It will cost quite a small fortune when
+I buy him a complete trousseau including diamonds."</p>
+
+<p>"I will pledge my lands if necessary to get the
+young Senor diamonds," said the Spaniard laughingly.</p>
+
+<p>In about an hour's time they came to a large one
+story frame building painted a rather light blue,
+which color had weathered a good deal. It had a
+square, false front with a sign on it that read, "Mr.
+Gonsalves, General Trader."</p>
+
+<p>They hitched their horses to some well graveled
+posts, and went inside leaving Jo's and Tom's horses
+free to graze at will around, or to stand under
+the shelter of some drooping pepper tree across the
+road. The proprietor, a short, thick-set Portugee
+with a close trimmed black beard, and a gray slouch<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span>
+hat which he always wore, apparently, received them
+graciously. The contents of the store were entirely
+at their service,&mdash;if they paid for them.</p>
+
+<p>"We will miss poor Tom here," said Jo, "he was
+always our purchasing agent."</p>
+
+<p>"And a mighty good one," added Jim. "Not even
+a Connecticut Yankee could get the best of him in a
+bargain."</p>
+
+<p>The Spaniard sat in a round armed wooden chair,
+gracefully smoking a cigarette, while his guests
+busied themselves making purchases. First the boys
+bought some new clothes, which they retired behind
+a counter to put on, and emerged in proper apparel
+for the plains.</p>
+
+<p>Blue flannel shirts, and pants of the same color,
+held up by leather belts, with much glitter of silver
+on them, then they bought a sombrero apiece,
+not after the Mexican style, but of the American
+type. Jim had a red band around his and Jo had a
+blue.</p>
+
+<p>"Now we want some handkerchiefs to tie around
+our necks," said Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course," remarked Jim with a wink, "something
+that will catch the eyes of the ladies."</p>
+
+<p>So M. Gonsalves brought out a brilliant assortment
+of handkerchiefs.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's a very fine article, gents," he said hold<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span>ing
+out a red silk handkerchief, clustered with white
+horseshoes.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing the matter with that," admitted Jim admiringly,
+with a droll look at Jo. "But this plain red
+one will suit me. My brother would probably like
+the horseshoe one." But Jo also declined.</p>
+
+<p>"I will take the dark blue one," he said, "it
+matches my costume better."</p>
+
+<p>"Gee! but you will look like a color scheme,"
+laughed Jim, "blue eyes, blue pants, shirt, tie and
+socks, and hat band, you ought to be a sailor on the
+blue Pacific."</p>
+
+<p>"The next things are boots," remarked Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Not for me," said Jim briefly, "I want moccasins.
+Worn 'em all my life, and I am not going to
+change to boots now."</p>
+
+<p>"Fine line of moccasins," said the accommodating
+Mr. Gonsalves in his best trade manner. You see he
+had been in business in San Francisco and knew
+something of the ways of customers.</p>
+
+<p>"But it gives us more style to wear boots. You
+notice that all the inhabitants wear them, we can
+buy moccasins too. You wear them all the time and
+they will set you down for an Indian."</p>
+
+<p>"When a fellow once gets the idea of style in his
+head," said Jim resignedly, "nothing this side of
+matrimony is going to stop him. So lay on Mac<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span>Duff
+and cursed be he who first cries hold, enough."</p>
+
+<p>"I feel like I was anchored," commented Jim,
+stepping across the floor with heavy tread. "I
+should like to stalk a deer or an Indian in these
+things. He could tell you were arriving before you
+got above the horizon."</p>
+
+<p>"But you look fine in 'em," said Jo.</p>
+
+<p>It was true that he made a striking figure in his
+blue togs. The lithe powerful physique, and the
+strong, resolute face.</p>
+
+<p>"Better look out, Jo," grinned Jim. "No Senorita
+would look at you, when they see me dashing
+over the landscape."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm a pretty stylish looking guy myself," responded
+Jo, confidently. He did make a good appearance,
+there was no doubt of that. Though
+slighter than his brother he was well set up, and his
+frame was well muscled. He was handsomer than
+Jim. But there was no nonsense about either of
+the two boys and they never gave an unnecessary
+thought to their appearance.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Mr. Gonsalves," said Jim, "we would like
+to look at some of your man-killers."</p>
+
+<p>"Revolvers?" he questioned, "just step this way.
+I can fit you out all right."</p>
+
+<p>He did have a fine collection and Jim examined<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span>
+the different ones carefully, noting their action and
+how easily they worked.</p>
+
+<p>"I see you are no tenderfoot," complimented the
+proprietor. "You have handled shooting irons before."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll be a tenderfoot before long, if I wear these
+condemned boots you sold me," said Jim gruffly
+ignoring the compliment. He did not care especially
+for M. Gonsalves' style. "Now let's have a look at
+your rifles." The proprietor actually took off his
+hat and bowed.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that the distinguished gentlemen
+from nowhere in particular were going to buy out
+his entire stock.</p>
+
+<p>"Would you be so gracious as to step this way?"
+he said, "I have the rifles in the back of the store."</p>
+
+<p>They were so gracious, and after due examination
+they selected a couple of well balanced guns and
+purchased enough ammunition to stand off a few
+Indian raids. All the stuff besides what they had
+on their backs they packed upon Tom's horse, as
+Tom was not present to resent the indignity.</p>
+
+<p>"Now the last things are some saddles," said
+Jim, "seeing that our kind friends, the pirates, cut
+up those we owned."</p>
+
+<p>"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard coming
+forward and touching Jim lightly on the arm, "Do<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span>
+not speak of buying saddles. I will see to that."
+Jim did not know exactly what their host meant but
+he thanked him and deferred to his request.</p>
+
+<p>Now behold the frontier boys in complete costume,
+with glittering revolvers at their hips and
+rifles swung across their backs, upon their hands
+were fringed buckskin gloves. They had gone the
+whole hog as Jim said.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll take the shine off this costume in about one
+day," said Jim grimly, "when I get in the open, I
+would rather break a broncho, than a new suit of
+clothes." There was no doubt about his impressive
+appearance, as the sun flashed on the metal of the accoutrements
+and he swung himself into the saddle.
+Even their host seemed to hold them in higher regard.
+Different people, different manners.</p>
+
+<p>When they reached the house ranch the first thing
+Jim did was to find Caliente. He was in the long
+adobe stable that was a half-mile from the house, at
+the beginning of a wide mountain valley, where the
+air drew through from the sea.</p>
+
+<p>"How are you, Caliente old fellow," cried Jim, as
+he opened the box stall and went in to shake hands
+with his old comrade. But the horse leaped to one
+side, and then reared up as if to strike Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"He don't know you," cried Jo who was on the
+outside of the stall. "Take off your hat."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Jim whirled it out of the stall, and a change came
+over Caliente. He recognized his master, and nickering
+in recognition he rubbed his head against
+Jim's shoulder, and took playful nips at his fine new
+shirt, while Jim fairly hugged him, and gave him
+resounding whacks with his open hand upon his
+splendid sides and shoulders.</p>
+
+<p>"A magnificent animal, Senor Darlington," said
+Senor Sebastian to Jim, "I congratulate you."</p>
+
+<p>It was a true word. Caliente with his proud neck,
+small but shapely head, powerful but not too heavy
+frame, and color of mottled gray was magnificent.</p>
+
+<p>All that afternoon Jim busied himself grooming
+his horse until his coat fairly glistened. He looked
+carefully to his feed, and saw to his watering. For
+Jim was determined that his horse should not be
+beaten by the Spaniard's. He knew that the latter's
+horse must be an unusual animal. It was not a short
+race, instead, one of two hundred miles that lay before
+them on the morrow.</p>
+
+<p>That evening the American boys presented a better
+appearance than they did at breakfast. It was a
+pretty scene that evening in the long dining room.
+The snowy table lit by light of candles and set with
+ancient silver brought from Spain. The young
+Senorita was seated at her brother's right, and on
+the other side were James Darlington and his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span>
+brother Joseph. As to the impression she made
+upon them, we will say nothing, as this is not a romance,
+but they had a merry and delightful evening.</p>
+
+<p>Their host and the young Senorita were much
+interested in hearing of the adventures of the boys
+in Mexico, especially that part that referred to
+the rescue of the Senorita Cordova from the hands
+of Cal Jenkins and his gang. I do not know that
+The Frontier Boys told it with any less fervor
+because the eyes of the young girl, seated opposite,
+were fixed intently upon them. It appeared
+that their host knew of the Senor Cordova, who was
+a man of prominence in his country, though he had
+not actually met him. So there was one more
+bond of sympathy between the Senor Sebastian
+and James and Jo Darlington.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XVII</h2>
+
+<h3>ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE</h3>
+
+
+<p>Let us now turn our interest and attention for
+a time to the cruise of the Sea Eagle, under the
+guidance of that redoubtable free-booter, Captain
+Broom. It was a mystery to the three who
+watched the ship turn to the South, what her port
+could be. We will soon be in a position to solve
+that problem.</p>
+
+<p>No sooner had the Sea Eagle cleared the cove
+than Captain Broom went to his cabin to go over
+his spoils which he had taken from the frontier
+boys. He placed all the belts upon the table, took
+up one, and with a keen knife slit the first pouch.
+A large heavy Spanish coin rolled out and then
+clinked down upon the table.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain's eyes glistened. "By Gosh!" he exclaimed,
+"it was worth while rounding up those
+fellows. They must have struck it rich down in
+Mexico. I bet the boys will be tickled to death
+to get their share." For whatever crimes and
+shortcomings Captain Broom could be charged<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span>
+with, at least he always divided fairly with his crew.
+Thereby he held their loyalty. It was not all
+policy, either, for there was a sterling streak in
+the bad old fellow.</p>
+
+<p>Out of the next pouch there glittered upon the
+table several diamonds and a small palm full of
+rubies, with their rich color and radiance. "The
+boys will have enough to start a jewelry store,"
+commented the Captain. "But I am not surprised
+at this haul. I know something about the hidden
+treasures myself, and they do say Mexico is the
+the place for them."</p>
+
+<p>Out of another belt he got some ingots of gold
+and a girdle that caused the Captain to open his
+eyes. At first he did not know what to make of
+it. When he held it up he saw that it was formed
+of golden disks linked with strings of rubies and
+sapphires. In the third belt was a necklace that
+might have been worn by some Princess of the
+Incas. It was oddly, almost <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'wierdly'">weirdly</ins> beautiful.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth belt that he picked up chanced to belong
+to Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"This seems lighter than the others," remarked
+the Captain. "Three of the pouches are empty."
+His face got black with rage. For instantly his
+mind leaped to the suspicion that one of his men
+had rifled it. If such had been the case, the guilty<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span>
+party would have got short shift at the end of a
+rope from the yard arm.</p>
+
+<p>But the second examination showed that the
+cut was an old one.</p>
+
+<p>"So!" he cried, "one of the boys has cached part
+of his share. I bet it was that long-legged, black-haired
+guy. That fellow would give the best of
+us trouble. I wish I had him to train. Maybe,
+I can make something of the Injun boy," meaning
+Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>As to the belts, the shrewd old fellow, to make
+sure, measured them to see where the worn holes
+of the leather came, and the partially empty belt
+had been worn two inches longer than any of the
+others.</p>
+
+<p>"It was the big fellow's," said the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>Then he went upon deck and called the crew
+forward.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, lads, choose your man to get your share
+of the goods," he said.</p>
+
+<p>"It's Jack Cales, sir," they said, knowing that
+they would be called upon to select a man to take
+their share.</p>
+
+<p>"All right! Come, lad," said the Captain, and
+led the way to his cabin. When Jack Cales saw
+the treasures on the table, he opened his eyes and
+mouth in astonishment.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Why, Sir," he exclaimed, "we haven't seen
+anything like this since the day two years ago
+when&mdash;" he stopped suddenly, seeing from a look
+in the Captain's eyes that no reminiscences were
+desired.</p>
+
+<p>"This is your share, lad," said the Captain,
+gruffly.</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you, sir," responded Cales, as he swept
+the small pile of gold and jewels into the palm of
+his big hands.</p>
+
+<p>"And mind ye, lad," warned the Captain, "I
+don't want any quarreling among yourselves or
+ye will hear from me."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor and backed
+out of the cabin.</p>
+
+<p>There was an interesting gathering in the forecastle
+when Jack Cales deposited his handful of
+treasures on the top of a sea chest that had been
+hauled out for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p>For once it was not necessary to have the lantern
+lit, for a broad band of sunshine shone down
+the steep ladder and cut a golden swath through
+the dingy gloom and fell athwart the chest and illuminated
+the group: the tall and swaggering
+Cales, the rugged, grizzled Pete, and the other
+sailormen; a typical group and not to be matched
+for picturesqueness anywhere; with their faces<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span>
+intent upon the center of the old black sea chest,
+where glowed and glittered the gold and jewels in
+the band of light that shone upon some of the
+faces of the intent group, while others were in the
+shadow. It was a scene such as Rembrandt&mdash;pardon,
+kind reader, I forgot for a moment, this
+is a simple narrative of Adventure.</p>
+
+<p>"Pete," said Cales, "how the ladies will love you
+when they see a chain of glittering diamonds
+around your throat."</p>
+
+<p>"One thing is certain, lad," replied the grizzled
+Pete, "I won't be givin' none of my diamonds
+away to the ladies. I'll keep the stones safe in my
+jeans."</p>
+
+<p>"You'll have to be keerful, Pete," rallied another,
+"they'll be marrying you for your ill-gotten
+wealth, when they find out that you are an heiress.
+You can't help yourself, Pete. It won't make any
+difference because you are a pirate, that won't
+scare 'em. Not when they see them jewels."</p>
+
+<p>"What's the use of you boys a talkin' to me,"
+he said with a wise wink, "you're only kittens. I'm
+sixty year old and I'm a free man yit."</p>
+
+<p>"Here's a pill for you, Pop," said Cales,
+dropping a diamond into his horny hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Gee! I'm just as well pleased to get this as I
+was to get a bunch of popcorn when I was a kid<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span>
+back in New England, off the Christmas tree."</p>
+
+<p>"Better have it sot in one of your front teeth,
+Pop," said Jack. This produced a roar of laughter,
+for Pete's front teeth were conspicuous by
+their absence.</p>
+
+<p>So the distribution went on without any bickering
+at first, only jovial jokes, but at last there
+came a bone of contention over the last diamond.
+And in a jiffy Jack Cales and a short, stocky sailor
+were all tangled up in a fierce encounter. Their
+comrades, none too gently, hoisted them up on
+deck. There they continued their fight.</p>
+
+<p>No sooner did Captain Broom see them than he
+cluttered down from the bridge at a furious rate.
+The two combatants ought to have taken warning
+but they were deaf to everything except their own
+struggle. He was livid with anger, and his
+wrath was in a large measure justified.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll larn you!" he yelled, grabbing each by the
+back of the neck. "You won't fight any more this
+trip."</p>
+
+<p>They were like children in his hands. He had
+not only the arms of a gorilla, but the strength of
+one when he was aroused and it was a caution the
+way he slammed them around, flaying the deck
+with them, and dashing their heads together. It
+seemed as if every bone in their bodies would be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span>
+broken. Finally he flung them unconscious on the
+deck.</p>
+
+<p>"Put them in the Sagenette," he ordered the
+mate.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, aye, sir," he replied, and with the aid of
+one of the sailors, they were chained in a narrow
+cell.</p>
+
+<p>Here was where Juarez and Tom came in. As
+the two fighters were knocked out and locked up,
+it made the crew short and they were ordered out
+on deck from the cabin where they had been kept.
+Almost famished though they were, they had to
+jump in and work like nailers, not to say, sailors.</p>
+
+<p>Fortunately for them, they had experienced a
+hard schooling in many different ways since they
+came west and were practical masters of several
+lines of industry, but this was their first experience
+sailoring. It was a hard school, but they
+learned more in a few days, than they would have
+under months of more gentle tuition. This was
+to stand them in good stead when they started on
+their cruise to Hawaii.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll get even with those fellows," growled Tom
+as he passed near Juarez who was busy polishing
+some brass work. "Yes, if it takes the rest of my
+life."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean, stopping and gabbing, you
+little shrimp?" roared the mate who chanced to see
+Tom stop.</p>
+
+<p>And he rushed up and grabbing Tom by the
+back of the neck, shook him ferociously, landing
+him a couple of kicks at the same time. This was
+too much for Juarez, who poised a stone that he
+was using and was about to brain the mate with it
+when the Captain's iron grip fell on his arm. He
+didn't throw that brick.</p>
+
+<p>"Easy, lad," said the Captain. "No more fighting
+on board this ship, or I'll take a hand again
+and don't you two lads pass the time of day either.
+You won't be killed if you work hard and keep
+cheerful." Then he gave the mate a look, which
+that worthy understood and Tom was allowed to
+go about his work without further molestation.</p>
+
+<p>But this was a new and hard doctrine that the
+Captain had laid down that the boys had to take
+hard usage and unceasing work and keep cheerful
+about it. They soon found that the Skipper
+meant what he said. It was a bitter lesson, but
+perhaps they were the manlier for learning it so
+young. For it's something that life hands out to
+everyone sooner or later.</p>
+
+<p>Often the boys looked longingly over the rail
+towards the faint, far outline of the California<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span>
+coast. The Skipper was keeping his ship far out
+from the land for reasons best known to himself.
+One thing was favorable in that the sea air had
+braced up Juarez so that he felt more like himself
+though his head was queer at times. And no
+wonder for that blow the Mexican dwarf had
+given him was sufficient to have stunned an ox.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>A DAY AT SEA</h3>
+
+
+<p>The Sea Eagle was steaming steadily South to her
+mysterious harbor. The day was a brilliant one and
+as the afternoon wore on the wind from the Northwest
+began to blow with fresher force and the white
+caps began to jump, here, there and everywhere
+over the broad surface of the ocean, and then slide
+down on the back of the waves.</p>
+
+<p>There was a good deal of motion on the part of
+the Sea Eagle now, as she plunged into the waves
+and threw the spray back over her decks. Both
+Juarez and Tom proved themselves good sailors,
+which was just as well for if they had been sea sick
+together with their other miseries they might have
+succumbed.</p>
+
+<p>Finally the long afternoon wore away and the
+time came for supper. The boys being neither
+flesh, fish or fowl, were not allowed to eat with the
+crew, and they did not mind in the least. When
+their rations did arrive, or rather when they went<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span>
+to the ship's galley and got their share, they
+found the fare not lacking in quality and abundance.
+There was a heaping plate of Mexican beans, a big
+hunk of bread and a bowl of hot tea. After the
+boys had stowed this below in their hatches they felt
+a hundred per cent better and more fit to meet any
+fate that might await them.</p>
+
+<p>An hour before sunset a heavy bank of fog began
+to roll up from the West, soon covering the
+whole sky with its gracious softness, and decided
+restfulness, after the glittering blue-diamond beauty
+of the day.</p>
+
+<p>It is the fogs alone that make the climate of California,
+especially in the Southern part endurable.
+Too much sunshine becomes as unbearable as too
+much cloudiness.</p>
+
+<p>The sea went down, when the fog came up and the
+waters took on a steely color under their blanket of
+gray, rolling on, in that monotonous meditation
+that holds the mystery of forgotten ages in its
+brooding.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's where you will sleep, boys," said Old Pete,
+who had been appointed by the Captain to have
+special charge over their education. "The men won't
+have you in the fo'castle, and it's pretty crowded
+there anyway."</p>
+
+<p>"This will suit us, sir," replied Juarez. He did<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span>
+not call him Pop, as he would have on the land. This
+was the sea and had its own rules and customs,
+therefore Old Pete received his due of respect. But
+in his rough way he was not unfriendly towards the
+boys, for he remembered that they had given him
+friendly advice, when he was aboard that strange
+craft, a horse, the night before.</p>
+
+<p>The place where the boys were to sleep was a sort
+of cubby hole in the bow of the boat, that was roofed
+over and where anchor chains and other junk was
+sometimes kept. It was not over four feet high,
+five in width at the broadest and narrowing to the
+bow.</p>
+
+<p>A rude place to sleep in, but what did the Frontier
+Boys care for that? They could scarcely count the
+nights that they had slept out on the ground, and in
+bad weather too. They had a blanket apiece, and a
+tarpaulin to pull over them.</p>
+
+<p>The blankets they had spread out on the floor of
+the cubby hole and they found that the tarpaulin
+made a mighty warm protective covering,
+keeping out the damp sea air in fine style.</p>
+
+<p>"Where do you suppose we are heading for,
+Juarez?" inquired Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe a port in Mexico or South America and
+then again we may head for Hawaii before we intend
+to."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We are going South now, though," said Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"If we run in close to the coast, we'll jump overboard,
+and swim for it," said Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"We could do it if we get within a mile," said
+Tom, "if it is not too rough."</p>
+
+<p>Just then Juarez put his hand over Tom's mouth,
+he felt sure that someone was listening or was preparing
+to. Juarez ran his fingers carefully over the
+boards until he found where a hole had been bored
+through the planking a little back of their heads. It
+was just as he had suspected, someone was listening
+to hear what plans they would make.</p>
+
+<p>With the noiselessness characteristic of him when
+scouting, Juarez crept out partially and cautiously
+raised his head until he caught sight of the sole of
+a man's boot. Then he crept back to his place and
+gave Tom a nudge. Forthwith they began talking in
+rather loud tones.</p>
+
+<p>"Say Tom, do you know I rather like this ship.
+These fellows are rough in their way but that is to
+be expected."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course," said Tom, in an equally loud voice,
+"but we might as well make the best of it. There is
+no chance for the boys to find us."</p>
+
+<p>"You're right there, Tom."</p>
+
+<p>Then in a short time they appeared to fall into a
+deep and sonorous sleep. This was no fake on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span>
+part of Tom who was actually and thoroughly
+tired. But Juarez was more of a veteran and he
+kept his eyes open and he was rewarded in a few
+minutes by seeing a man's feet hanging <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'ever'">over</ins> the
+edge of their bunk house and then he saw the figure
+of the mate slouch aft.</p>
+
+<p>"You sly old rascal, you," remarked Juarez. "We
+will 'larn' you to try and be too smart with the
+Frontier Boys. We may be young but we are not
+fools."</p>
+
+<p>Nothing happened for a while and the gentle
+plunge of the Sea Eagle into the long rolling swell
+soon lulled the tired Juarez into a sound sleep, so
+that neither he nor Tom were aware that the ship
+had suddenly changed her course.</p>
+
+<p>By and by however, Juarez waked with a start.
+Something had happened, he knew not what. He sat
+up and struck his head upon the planking overhead.
+Fortunately however he did not hit the place where
+the Mexican had struck him but at the best his head
+was a tender place with him and the blow stunned
+him, but as he was now more his rugged self, he
+soon recovered.</p>
+
+<p>He found what had wakened him was the stopping
+of the ship. He saw several dark forms moving
+aft and he crept out to see what was afoot. He
+had to move very carefully but managed to reach the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span>
+hood of the forecastle, where he crouched looking
+and listening.</p>
+
+<p>He saw that they were lying to, close in to shore
+and could see the white splash of the breakers as
+they rolled towards the shore and could hear their
+monotonous thunder upon the beach. Here perhaps
+was their chance. Just then he heard the heavy
+voice of the Captain from the bridge.</p>
+
+<p>"Lower away there." Then the starboard boat
+slid noiselessly down from the davits into the
+water.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez got up and glided back into the cubby hole
+to tell Tom the good news. It was their opportunity
+to escape and seemingly a good one. The sea was
+smooth and the night was dark. They could slip
+over the side of the vessel and pull for the shore,
+and not a soul on the Sea Eagle would be the wiser
+until they looked into their nest in the morning to
+find it empty.</p>
+
+<p>Once they got to the shore it would be an easy
+matter to make their way North until they met Jim
+and Jo.</p>
+
+<p>The anticipation of the escape had already thrilled
+through every nerve in Juarez's body. But he had
+just started to wake Tom, when something made
+him look down the deck. There was the tall figure<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span>
+of one of the sailors coming directly towards the
+bow.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez lay down quickly as though asleep. Then
+the man reached down and caught hold of Tom's
+foot and Juarez's and gave them a rough yank. "So
+you are here, you young brats. You had better
+make a move or the Cap'n will finish you."</p>
+
+<p>Juarez was fairly sizzling with rage especially as
+Tom was really frightened by being wakened in such
+rough fashion and after all Tom was but a boy and
+it pained Juarez to see him so scared, but he was
+helpless, and all he could do was to add one more
+black mark to the score he was charging up to the
+free-booters.</p>
+
+<p>Instead of moving away, the man sat on a capstan
+a few feet distant from the boys' den, watching for
+the slightest move on their part, a marlin spike dangling
+playfully in his hands. Juarez had not taken
+the crafty and keen sighted Captain Broom into account.</p>
+
+<p>From the Bridge, that worthy, although he was
+watching the launching of the boat, had chanced to
+catch sight out of the tail of his eye of a dark
+shadow flitting back to the forecastle. He was not
+sure it was one of the boys, but he was taking no
+chances, for he had a real respect for their prowess
+and audacity as he might well have.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So he had sent one of his crew to guard this
+young lions' den, while the ship was so close in
+shore. He did not intend to stay longer than was
+necessary right at this point, and he waited with
+some anxiety for the return of the mate and Pete
+in the boat.</p>
+
+<p>It was now two o'clock in the morning and Captain
+Broom wanted to be out at sea a good safe
+distance before the light broke. The mate's boat
+had now been gone over a half-hour, and the Captain
+stood at the end of the Bridge looking towards
+the shore. There was not a light upon the vessel to
+show her position. She lay silent and black upon the
+dark waters.</p>
+
+<p>Then the Captain straightened up. He saw a
+moving body approaching the ship and heard the
+slight dip of oars. Then the boat was alongside and
+instead of two men, there were three in the boat.
+The Captain went down to the main deck to meet
+them.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XIX</h2>
+
+<h3>THE PASSENGER</h3>
+
+
+<p>They met without any formality. The new
+passenger was a tall, slightly stooped man, with
+long hair falling down to his shoulders. Juarez
+was exceedingly anxious to see him, but could
+make out only a dark form moving along the deck.</p>
+
+<p>"Come to the cabin, Jeems," called the Captain.
+"I've got something to tell ye."</p>
+
+<p>They were soon seated in the Captain's cabin.
+This was a good-sized room, panelled in light
+wood and very neatly kept. There was quite a
+broad table of the same wood as the walls and a
+swivel chair in front of it. The Captain seated
+himself in this chair and whirled to talk to the
+visitor from the shore.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that he was not a temporary visitor
+for scarcely had they seated themselves in the
+cabin than the Sea Eagle slowly and gently turned
+and they felt the pulsation of her engines as she
+headed once more for sea. The man was seated
+on a sea chest opposite the Captain.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He wore long cowhide boots, with jeans pants
+thrust into their tops, flannel shirt of a nondescript
+color and a corduroy jacket. His hat was
+of a battered gray. The face was smooth-shaven,
+deeply lined and burnt to a dull brown. The hair
+which came down to his shoulders had that peculiar
+sun-burnt weathered tinge that comes from
+continual exposure to the weather. He was not
+an old man, probably on the sunny side of forty.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Jeems, what is your news?" inquired the
+Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"The government boat is in the harbor, that's
+all." The Captain gave a low, peculiar whistle.</p>
+
+<p>"When did she show up?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Two days ago, Cap'n," he replied.</p>
+
+<p>"Come from the South?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied the man. "Put in for coal, I
+reckon."</p>
+
+<p>"Then put out for us," said the Captain briefly.</p>
+
+<p>"Any 'baccy, Cap'n? Been out two days," remarked
+Jeems.</p>
+
+<p>"Lift your lanky frame off that chest," replied
+the Captain, "and I'll git you some."</p>
+
+<p>The man sprang up with remarkable alacrity,
+and as he unfolded length after length of his long
+figure, it seemed as if his head would touch the
+ceiling of the cabin. In fact, he did not miss it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span>
+by many inches. It was a comical contrast between
+the short stooping figure of the Captain and
+the tall stranger.</p>
+
+<p>"Waal, Jeems, I wouldn't advise you to grow
+any more, or I'll have to raise the roof of my
+cabin."</p>
+
+<p>"That's what, Cap'n," replied Jeems imperturbably.
+"That's what happens when you grow up in
+Californy. You grow all the year around, and not
+like in New England where the winters makes you
+stubby."</p>
+
+<p>Then the native philosopher seated himself on
+the chest again and took long and delightful pulls
+at his recently staked pipe.</p>
+
+<p>"Hum!" he said. "This tastes right. Did yer
+ever know what it war to be starved for yer
+'baccy, Cap'n?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied the Captain, "I can't say that I
+ever did."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I want to tell you, Cap'n, that it is worse
+than going without water and I know what that is.
+Been on a desert till my tongue was as thick as a
+cow's, and hung out between my teeth, black."</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been away?" inquired the
+Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"Three weeks, Cap'n."</p>
+
+<p>"How are the sheep lookin'?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Pretty fair, Cap'n," he replied. "I think that
+they had a whiff of rain over there a few days
+ago."</p>
+
+<p>"It won't be long till we git the rains," suggested
+the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know, Cap'n," remarked the lanky one.
+"The climate of Californy is a curious proposition.
+It's built on the bias down at this end."</p>
+
+<p>"How's that?" asked the Captain curiously.
+He had a certain interest in this particular courier's
+theories, however he might laugh at their peculiarities.
+For there was apt to be a basis of
+reason in them.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it's this way, Cap'n," said James Howell,
+to give him his correct name, thrusting one lanky
+hand deep into his jeans pocket and bending forward
+awkwardly. "It's this way. You see the
+storms come down from the North to the Tehatchipei
+mountains, where there isn't any way for them
+to get through to the south. Then the clouds
+shift around to Arizony, and if the wind is right
+they are blown through the passes of the Sierra
+Madre into Southern Californy, then we get the
+rain. That's why I said, Cap'n, that this dazzling
+climate is built on the bias."</p>
+
+<p>"Waal, Jeems, as a weather prophet you can't
+be beat," said the Skipper.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"In my business I get plenty of time to think,
+Cap'n," he remarked, "and as they ain't much to
+see except climate I think about that."</p>
+
+<p>"Waal, I have a good sight more than that to
+consider," replied the Skipper. "I'm thinking
+right now about that government boat. I'm going
+on deck. You can turn in."</p>
+
+<p>The Captain showed him to an empty cabin and
+the lanky stranger proceeded to make himself
+comfortable for the balance of the night, while the
+Captain went up on the Bridge.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are you heading this boat to?" he
+asked gruffly of the man at the wheel.</p>
+
+<p>Then he took the helm himself and immediately
+the Sea Eagle's prow pointed to the Westward as
+if she were heading directly for Japan. However,
+she held this course for only an hour and a
+half when the Skipper swung her bow once more
+to the South.</p>
+
+<p>Long before the morning broke, Tom and
+Juarez, hauled out of their resting place, were set
+to scrubbing the decks and rubbing them down
+with holy-stone. They waited eagerly for the first
+break of day to see where they were.</p>
+
+<p>Then the light came slowly through the fog-covered
+sky, showing a glossy sea with a slight
+swell and not a sign of land anywhere. The boys'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span>
+hearts sank within them and they felt sure that
+they would not see their native land again.</p>
+
+<p>Once in a while they would glance up at the
+Bridge where stood the Captain with his powerful
+stooped figure. He was evidently on the lookout,
+for with his eye at a long glass, he kept scanning
+the sky-line to the east. What was he looking
+for? Juarez knew instinctively that he was afraid
+of pursuit.</p>
+
+<p>If only they could be overtaken and captured,
+his heart thrilled at the thought and he watched
+the Captain eagerly for the first sign of excitement.
+About ten o'clock he saw by the Skipper's
+actions that something of interest had come under
+his observation.</p>
+
+<p>There were a number of quick, sharp orders
+given and Juarez noticed the increased volume of
+smoke pouring from the stack. The Sea Eagle
+began to show the speed that was in her trim,
+black form. Juarez worked around the port side
+of the boat as rapidly as he dared, and his heart
+leaped with hope.</p>
+
+<p>He saw low upon the eastern horizon a smudge
+of black smoke. If he only had known what the
+Skipper knew, his hopes would have risen still
+higher. Certain preparations were going on upon
+deck. The three cannon, one in the stern,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span>
+that had fired the salute to the group on the shore,
+one on either side of the quarter-deck, were divested
+of their canvas jackets.</p>
+
+<p>They certainly gleamed bravely in their polished
+brass. Then the ammunition was got ready <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'besiide'">beside</ins>
+each separate gun. It begin to look like
+business. The Sea Eagle began to justify her
+name and fly through the water. Still the spot
+upon the horizon grew bigger.</p>
+
+<p>Then Juarez began to have a paralyzing feeling
+of doubt. The steamer, though coming up
+fast, did not seem to be steering the proper course
+to head the Sea Eagle, bearing on her port-quarter
+instead of across her bows as would have been
+the natural course if she wished to intercept her.</p>
+
+<p>Then the doubt in his mind was changed to disappointed
+certainty for the Skipper waved his
+hand to the mate, who was busy on the deck below.
+It was after he had taken a pull at the spyglass,
+which this time seemed to have an intoxicating
+effect upon the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>"It's all right, Bill," he yelled, "It's nothing but
+a steamer bound for 'Frisco. It looks like the
+Panama."</p>
+
+<p>Juarez and Tom resumed their work doggedly.
+That was all that was left for them to do. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span>
+scarcely glanced at the big steamer as she appeared,
+growing constantly larger above the horizon,
+and then diminishing as she steamed North
+towards San Francisco.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez was scrubbing the deck near a cabin door
+when it suddenly opened, and a tall, long-legged
+figure stepped out and fairly over him. He came
+to the conclusion that it was the man who had
+come aboard the night before.</p>
+
+<p>He took in the tall, gaunt man with the smooth-shaven
+face and long hair at two glances&mdash;one
+not being sufficient to his height.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, who are you?" he inquired lounging on
+the rail and regarding Juarez with mild-eyed interest.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm Juarez Hopkins, deck scrubber. Who are
+you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm James Howell, sheep farmer. I'll add
+you two lambs to my flock," he replied, whimsically,
+glancing at Tom who was down the deck
+a way.</p>
+
+<p>"You are more apt to find us wolves in lamb's
+hide," retorted Juarez. "Where's your farm?"</p>
+
+<p>"There," said the stranger, pointing with a long,
+bony finger on the port-quarter, "that nigh island."</p>
+
+<p>Then Juarez saw to his surprise, two islands<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span>
+that seemed to have sprung like magic upon the
+South-eastern horizon. The further one lay long
+and low and dark but distant beneath the fog-lined
+sky, the "nigh one" was more short and dumpy in
+appearance.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XX</h2>
+
+<h3>TO THE RESCUE</h3>
+
+
+<p>During the afternoon, everything had been made
+ready for the journey of the morrow. There was
+not a great deal to be done for the three rescuers
+would travel light. There would be no need of a
+pack animal, because the Senor had assured the
+boys that they would find hospitality on the way.</p>
+
+<p>Jo however was in mourning because when he
+gave his black a trial gallop, it was discovered that
+he was badly lamed in the right knee. It would not
+have been safe for any of the pirate gang to come
+within range of Jo's wrath.</p>
+
+<p>"The cursed brutes stove him up for fair," he declared
+grinding his teeth.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid it will take a month's rest before he
+will be fit," determined Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I'm out of it," exclaimed Jo sorrowfully.</p>
+
+<p>"Not so, my friend," interrupted the Spaniard.
+"Take the bay. He is not as good a horse as yours,
+but he has great endurance. He is yours to use as
+long as you wish."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Jo thanked the Spaniard heartily for his kindness
+and generosity. Then he spoke in a low voice to his
+brother. "How about that money, Jim? Don't forget
+to pay the Spaniard for those goods we bought
+at the store." Jim spoke up.</p>
+
+<p>"Senor, I wish to show you a little something of
+interest."</p>
+
+<p>Then Jim got his heavy saddle, on which he had
+ridden so many hundred miles. And the Senor regarded
+it with interest, because of the carved leather
+workmanship which was of the finest and he was a
+connoisseur of such matters.</p>
+
+<p>"How much would you give for it, Senor Sebastian,"
+inquired Jim, "if it were put up for purchase?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is a beautiful saddle. I would be willing to
+give a hundred dollars. It is worth it."</p>
+
+<p>"That saddle is worth several thousand, Senor,"
+replied Jim confidently.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not understand," replied the Spaniard. "It
+is the personal value, I suppose."</p>
+
+<p>"I will show you," said Jim.</p>
+
+<p>Then he took from his hip pocket a heavy bone
+handled knife which he had bought at the store and
+pulled back the hoof cleaner, an instrument attached
+to the knife that was used to get a pebble or
+anything that had got into the horse's hoof.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>With this he worked at the leather that covered
+the high and rather thick horn of the saddle. Finally
+he pried the top leather flap off. There was a heavy
+piece fitted into the top of the horn. With some
+difficulty Jim got this out disclosing a hollow, in
+which was concealed most of the jewels he had
+found in Mexico.</p>
+
+<p>"Hold your hands, Jo. Tight now." And with
+the word he emptied the contents of the horn into
+Jo's palms. Diamonds, rubies, turquoises and some
+heavy gold pieces.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what you might call a horn of plenty,"
+said Jim jocosely.</p>
+
+<p>"But!" cried the Spaniard in amazement, "where
+did you get these?"</p>
+
+<p>"In Mexico," replied Jim. "This was what the
+Pirates were after. And they got all but this.
+Sometime I will tell you the story of its discovery.
+Now take this to reimburse you, Senor, for the
+money we spent at the store." And he held out the
+diamond.</p>
+
+<p>"That is far too much. That stone is worth five
+hundred dollars at least," said the Spaniard. "These
+three rubies would be more exact and I will take
+them."</p>
+
+<p>Jim, handing over the three stones selected, said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span>
+"Now, Senor, you shall take the diamond as a token
+of good will from my brother and myself."</p>
+
+<p>"We insist upon it," chimed in Jo.</p>
+
+<p>Finally the Spaniard accepted the gifts with many
+protestations of obligation and appreciation. Jo
+was about to urge him to accept a jewel for his
+sister, but Jim stopped him, knowing that the proud
+Spaniard would not hear to such a present.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning they were up an hour before
+daylight and ate a hearty breakfast by the light of
+the candles. Veterans though they were, the boys
+felt a thrill go through their pulses as they thought
+of the expedition that lay before them. Outside they
+could hear the pawing of the impatient horses.</p>
+
+<p>"To the success of our expedition and the rescue
+of our friends!" was the toast the Spaniard proposed
+as they rose from the table. The Frontier Boys
+drank it, but not in wine. They felt just a little
+foolish too, but such is the reward that often comes
+with doing what is right. But they were sturdy in
+their determination to stick to their principles.</p>
+
+<p>If they had only known it, down in his heart the
+Spaniard respected them the more, even though it
+seemed odd to him.</p>
+
+<p>Then they went out on the verandah, fully armed
+and ready to take their departure. Two oil lamps
+near the door and fastened to the wall, backed by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span>
+shining reflectors sent a strong light across the
+verandah and into the darkness outside.</p>
+
+<p>There stood the three horses, eager to be off, each
+one held by a Mexican groom. Caliente we already
+know, and the horse that Jo is to ride also. So let
+us take a glance at the third animal, Don Fernando.
+He evidently justified all the enthusiasm of his master,
+a truly splendid creature.</p>
+
+<p>A dark chestnut, as large as Caliente and built on
+something the same lines. They were beautifully
+matched except in color. It was with a thrill of
+pleasure that Jim swung himself into the saddle. His
+mount was in fine fettle and ready for the long pull
+ahead.</p>
+
+<p>They started from the home ranch with a thunder
+of hoofs in unison, the riders checking their
+horses to a slow gallop with a heavy hand. Together
+they pressed through the waning darkness. There
+was a wonderful exhilaration, as they leaped forward,
+the horses powerful and fresh.</p>
+
+<p>Instead of following in the direction of the morning
+before, the Spaniard turned to the East until
+they came near the foot of the range. In a short time
+they came to a gate, which seemed to open mysteriously
+as they approached, but the motive power
+proved to be a small Mexican boy, whom the Senor
+had sent on ahead.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Now they were on a turf road with bushes on
+either side and down this they thundered, Caliente
+the gray, and Don Fernando the dark, matching
+stride for stride, with Jo well in the rear. For he
+found if he rode close up he was blinded and stung
+by sods and stones thrown back from the flying
+hoofs of the two horses in the front.</p>
+
+<p>It was a bit lonely for Jo and he wished that one
+of the other boys was here to keep him company. As
+they rode, the bushes seemed to fly by as they do
+when you look from a railroad train and Jo was
+afraid lest his horse would be unable to keep the
+pace indefinitely. One thing in Jo's favor was that
+he was the lightest of the three and what is more to
+the purpose a very light rider.</p>
+
+<p>So like the good horseman he was, he determined
+to save his horse all he could and make him last out.
+For eight miles or more they rode without a stop
+until they came to another gate. This the Spaniard
+unfastened and swung open without dismounting,
+then closed it after Jo.</p>
+
+<p>The morning light was now distinct, although
+the fog was over the sky. Before them stretched a
+long level plain that broke into sand dunes near the
+sea. They could see the ocean lying dark in its
+monotonous level of color, to the Western horizon.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We have just left the Sebastian ranch," called
+the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"It is immense," commented Jim. "May I ask
+how many acres it embraces?"</p>
+
+<p>"It was immense in the old days," replied the
+Spaniard. "Before your people took possession of
+the land. It was held by no fences then. But your
+laws were not ours and we lost many square miles.
+Now there are fifty thousand acres under fence."</p>
+
+<p>"Fifty thousand acres!" exclaimed Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, but it was double that before the Americans
+came," replied the Spaniard. Then he glanced critically
+at Caliente. "Your horse looks as cool as
+though he had been standing in the stable. The pace
+does not affect his wind either. Splendid condition!"</p>
+
+<p>"Caliente is as hard as nails," said Jim proudly.
+"But your horse has wonderful speed."</p>
+
+<p>The chestnut seemed more on edge than the old
+warrior, Caliente, and tossed the foam from his bit,
+until his dark coat was speckled with it.</p>
+
+<p>"He is high strung," said the Spaniard, "but I
+would back him against any horse flesh in California.
+We can let them out here for a half dozen miles."</p>
+
+<p>"Let her go, Senor. I won't let you lose me."</p>
+
+<p>At the word the Spaniard gave his chafing horse
+his head and away the chestnut sprang in the lead.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span>
+It was slightly down grade for a mile, then there
+was a gulch twelve feet wide and of considerable
+depth. It was a good jump and to make it saved a
+little distance. Going at top speed the chestnut took
+the jump in fine style. His rider half turned in his
+saddle to watch Jim's effort. Caliente had faced
+worse leaps than that, he rose to it and swept over
+it as gracefully as a bird.</p>
+
+<p>"Good fellow!" exclaimed Jim patting him affectionately
+on the neck.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE BANDITS</h3>
+
+
+<p>When Jo saw the gulch ahead, he decided that
+discretion was the better part of valor as he did not
+know his mount well enough to risk the leap, so he
+galloped a few hundred feet below, where the gulch
+narrowed and then he took the jump nicely, and
+scampered after the other two riders who were quite
+a way ahead.</p>
+
+<p>Jim purposely held Caliente in check, keeping a
+hundred yards in the rear of the Spaniard. Ahead
+a few miles, there was a perfect sea of yellow where
+the tall mustard covered the plain for a great distance.
+Into this they charged full tilt, the mustard
+reaching as high as their heads.</p>
+
+<p>There was a swish of its blossoms in their faces as
+the powerful horses charged into it and in spite of
+their strength they began to tire after going some
+distance.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is Jo?" inquired Jim suddenly after they
+had slowed down, "I don't see a sign of him." And<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span>
+he rose in his stirrups looking over the level lake of
+mustard.</p>
+
+<p>"Hello, Jo," he yelled at the top of his voice. No
+answer came. Could he be drowned in this lake?
+There was not a motion to indicate his whereabouts,
+no waving of the yellow tops.</p>
+
+<p>"It is very strange," said the Spaniard. "Did he
+cross the gully all right?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I saw him take the jump below us a ways."
+Then Jim raised his revolver above his head and
+fired.</p>
+
+<p>"That ought to fetch him," he said. Then they
+listened intently. Suddenly about a quarter of a
+mile ahead of them they saw a sombrero rise like
+a gray mushroom above the yellow surface of the
+mustard, and Jo's voice came back to them.</p>
+
+<p>They both gave their horses the rein, this time Jim
+did nothing to hold Caliente back, and with their
+powerful speed the two great horses tore forward,
+on even terms until in the last hundred yards Caliente
+forged ahead by half a length.<sup>[<a name="tn" id="tn"></a><a href="#note">1</a>]</sup></p>
+
+<p>"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. There was Jo sitting
+quietly on his horse.</p>
+
+<p>"That's how you beat us," exclaimed Jim, pointing
+to a cow trail running diagonally through the
+growth of mustard.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," laughed Jo, "I struck it further down after
+I jumped the gully. Otherwise you fellows would
+have lost me."</p>
+
+<p>"Good work, Jo," said Jim. "Now we will have it
+easier going."</p>
+
+<p>So in single file they galloped along the path, until
+they found themselves by noon, at the foot of a spur
+of mountains that extended from the main coast
+range to the ocean. Jim regarded this barrier in
+their way with a practised eye.</p>
+
+<p>"This will slow us down, Senor," he said. "It
+looks like a pass below there, about two miles."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said the Senor, "we can get through there
+all right, but it is pretty rough going."</p>
+
+<p>They had to advance more slowly now, as the
+ground was broken into stony ravines, and there was
+a good deal of brush. In this kind of country Jo's
+horse more than held its own with the bigger animals,
+for he was as nimble as a goat.</p>
+
+<p>"I hope we will find water, Senor," remarked Jim.
+"Our horses are pretty dry now."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied the Spaniard, "there is a good
+spring at the foot of the Pass."</p>
+
+<p>They found it all right, in the entrance to the
+Pass, where there was a small green cove, surrounded
+with bushes, and on one side was a sheep
+herder's shanty. Jo investigated this immediately<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span>
+and found nothing in it but the charred remnants
+of a fire and a pair of discarded overalls.</p>
+
+<p>Jim, who had himself been looking around, made
+a more important find.</p>
+
+<p>"There has been somebody here recently," he announced.
+"Here are some tracks around the spring
+and not over twelve hours old."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I have no doubt," said the Spaniard carelessly
+puffing at his cigarette. "This Pass is used
+occasionally by ranchmen and herders."</p>
+
+<p>"There have been five or six horses here," said
+Jim, whose experiences had made him suspicious.</p>
+
+<p>"There are no Indians," said Jo, "in this section,
+at least none who are on the warpath."</p>
+
+<p>"I <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'supose'">suppose</ins> you do have cattle rustlers, Senor?"
+inquired Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, there is a band of outlaws," replied the
+Spaniard, "that raids from as far north as our
+ranch, south to San Diego, but we have seen no
+trace of them for many months."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, Senor," remarked Jim, "it is about time
+that they paid you another visit."</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, Senor Darlington," exclaimed the Spaniard.
+"We Castilians do not reason so. We say that there
+is no trouble today, why worry about tomorrow.
+Perhaps these bandits may have starved to death, or
+been hung, or the good Padres may have persuaded<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span>
+them by the fear of Hell, to become quiet, sheep raising
+citizens. God knows."</p>
+
+<p>"I fear that they are raising sheep in their old
+style," grinned Jo. The pun glanced off the Spaniard
+harmlessly.</p>
+
+<p>"The theory that they may be hung, sounds plausible,
+Senor," admitted Jim. "But before we advance
+into the Pass, I will scout a little."</p>
+
+<p>"If the Senor pleases," responded the Spaniard
+courteously.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you chance to know of a small, hunchbacked
+Mexican who is more or less in this section of the
+country, Senor?" Jim suddenly inquired.</p>
+
+<p>The Spaniard flushed with red anger and spit emphatically
+on the ground.</p>
+
+<p>"You give him into my hands and I will reward
+you well," cried the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>Jim made no immediate reply but gazed thoughtfully
+at the ground. He was considering the case.
+This was not the time to turn aside in a chase for
+even so desperate a criminal as the hunchbacked
+greaser. So he made no definite reply to the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>After the horses were fed, and watered, and while
+Jo was looking after the coffee, Jim started off, to
+do a little scouting up the Pass. The first thing that
+he did was to slip off his heavy riding boots, which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span>
+the stylish Jo had forced him to buy, and to put on
+his noiseless footed moccasins.</p>
+
+<p>Then with his revolver loaded and ready to his
+hand, he went swiftly and silently up the trail that
+followed through thick brush, gradually working up
+the side of the mountain. It was no difficult task to
+follow the tracks of the horses. In a half hour's
+swift climbing he came to the top of a stony ridge,
+over which the trail curved, and dipped down the
+other side.</p>
+
+<p>Jim now saw that the Pass was an irregular one
+with recurrent spurs, thrusting out from the
+mountains on either side, at quite frequent intervals.
+There were innumerable chances for ambuscades.
+Jim did not stand in the trail but to one side
+partially hidden in a thicket.</p>
+
+<p>All the time his keen eyes were taking in the canyon
+below, not however admiring the scenery. In
+fact there was nothing particularly beautiful, or interesting
+in the view. In the Rockies and further
+South too he had seen canyons incomparable to the
+rather ordinary ones that he had seen in California.</p>
+
+<p>Jim was watching for some slight movement of a
+living creature in the canyon. Finally he gave it up,
+and was about to turn away, then he gave a start,
+he saw one, two, three, men crouch across the trail,
+a quarter of a mile below, and disappear into the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span>
+thick brush. He was almost certain that the first
+one was the hunchback.</p>
+
+<p>That was all that Jim wanted to see. He noiselessly
+took the back trail, thinking over the best
+course to pursue. He would have liked nothing better
+under ordinary circumstances than to fight it out
+with the outlaws and to capture the hunchback.
+But their first object must be the rescue of Tom and
+Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>Was there not some way by which they could get
+to the South without going through this bandit infested
+Pass?</p>
+
+<p>"Well brother, what didst thou find?" inquired Jo,
+who was at times pleased to be dramatic.</p>
+
+<p>"Very few specimens in the way of bandits," replied
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"As I said, Senor," remarked the Spaniard, "they
+have become good citizens."</p>
+
+<p>"Not yet, I am sure, because they are alive."</p>
+
+<p>"That is a good one, Jim," remarked Jo, appreciatively,
+but the Spaniard was politely mystified.
+"Same as Indians."</p>
+
+<p>"I found one thing out," said the diplomatic Jim,
+"and that is, that the Pass is a hard one on horses.
+Are you sure, Senor, that there is no easier way
+than this to get through?"</p>
+
+<p>"Positive," briefly responded the Spaniard.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Jim who was seated on a rock digging his heel
+into the soft earth, looked up as a sudden idea struck
+him,&mdash;but without knocking him out.</p>
+
+<p>"How far is it from here to the sea, Senor?" he
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Not over five miles."</p>
+
+<p>"Can we not get around that way?" Jim inquired
+eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, yes," replied the Spaniard slowly, "if the
+tide is not coming in. In that case we should be
+drowned." Jim glanced hastily at his watch.</p>
+
+<p>"We can try for it and make it, if we do not
+waste any time," he said. "The horses have had a
+good rest."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well, Senor," said the Spaniard resignedly.
+He regarded Jim as an amiable hurricane whom it
+was not worth while battering to resist. Jim hastily
+swallowed his coffee and a hunk of bread and in five
+minutes the three musketeers were in the saddle
+again.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXII</h2>
+
+<h3>RACE WITH THE TIDE</h3>
+
+
+<p>In spite of the rough going, they made good
+time for the five miles, spurred on by the constant
+anxiety lest they should not reach the beach before
+the tide began coming in. There were several
+gathered to see them off when they left the mouth
+of the Pass, but not to give them a send off.</p>
+
+<p>A short explanation will prove this. It is not
+to be supposed that the hunchbacked Mexican
+and the bandits did not know that the three horsemen
+were coming over the plain of the mustard
+growth. Indeed, their scout, the Mexican dwarf,
+saw Jim, Jo and the Spaniard when they first
+landed in the entrance to the canyon.</p>
+
+<p>He had gone back to report to the bandits
+their coming, and after Jim had returned, they
+had prepared the nicest trap imaginable near
+where Jim had been hiding. They had had numerous
+experiences in that line and were perfectly
+qualified experts. The spider and the fly was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span>
+nothing to the arrangements they had made to receive
+their supposably unsuspicious guests.</p>
+
+<p>You can imagine the surprise and disgust of the
+bandits and their scout when they saw the three
+horsemen ride in an entirely different direction
+than that they had looked for. Talk about convulsions,
+you should have seen these desperadoes
+express their disappointment. It was terrific.
+Not a saint in the long calendar was left unscathed.</p>
+
+<p>How Jim would have enjoyed the performance.
+But entirely oblivious to this, Jo, Jim and the
+Spaniard were riding rapidly towards the sea.
+Before an hour had passed, they had ridden between
+the rounded sand dunes and then out upon
+the hard, smooth sand of the beach.</p>
+
+<p>"This is splendid going, Senor Sebastian," exclaimed
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"It is all right," he replied, "if the sea does not
+get hungry too soon." But the sea appeared to be
+in a very pleasant mood and the white breakers
+had withdrawn as far out as it was possible to get.
+It was such a smooth smiling sea with the laugh
+of its little sparkling waves that it seemed that
+there could be no possible harm in it.</p>
+
+<p>"I never saw a road that was better than this!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span>
+exclaimed Jo in delight. "It is perfectly springy
+and no dust or mud."</p>
+
+<p>It deserved all of Jo's praises, this broad, firm
+California beach. The brown sand, that had been
+pounded down by the force of the great rollers
+some hours before, showed scarcely a sign of the
+shoes of the horses.</p>
+
+<p>There was plenty of width and the three horses
+pressed on abreast, the powerful sweep of the
+gray Caliente and the chestnut Don Fernando,
+and the snappy, nervous leaps of the little bay that
+Jo was riding. With the bracing sea air and the
+exhilarating speed, the three musketeers were invigorated.</p>
+
+<p>The Spaniard hummed a gay ballad, while at
+times Jim's heavy bass and Jo's lighter treble
+were joined in a rollicking American song. They
+laughed without reason, for the simple joy of being
+alive and on the move; but as pride sometimes
+goes before destruction, so happiness often goes
+before disaster.</p>
+
+<p>It was a small matter too, but it made for
+trouble. The Spaniard's horse stepped between
+two small rocks that were close together and
+wrenched one of his hind shoes nearly off. Jim
+and Senor Sebastian hastily dismounted. Of
+course they carried with them the necessary things<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span>
+to fix the shoe on again, but even then it was a
+question of a number of minutes.</p>
+
+<p>"You had better ride ahead, Jo," urged Jim.
+"Your horse is beginning to tire and we will overtake
+you, when we once get started."</p>
+
+<p>"It is a good idea," joined in the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"All right," acquiesced Jo readily enough, and
+he gave his bay the rein, riding slowly down the
+beach.</p>
+
+<p>Then the two began operations on Don Fernando's
+hind foot. Here they found their first real
+delay. At the point where the accident happened,
+the mountains came down quite close to the sea,
+so that they were crowded in much closer than
+they had been. The nearness of the water made
+the big chestnut restless and hard to handle.</p>
+
+<p>The Spaniard had great difficulty in getting
+near enough to his horse to get hold of his hind
+foot. When he did succeed in doing this, and
+was just starting to peg the shoe on, an extra big
+wave slapped down upon the beach, though at a
+safe distance and caused the big chestnut to jump
+and hurl his master to a distance of a dozen feet.</p>
+
+<p>"This won't do," cried Jim. "I'll take my horse
+around to the sea side of yours and close up. Perhaps
+that will give your animal confidence."</p>
+
+<p>It worked like a charm, for though Caliente was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span>
+high-spirited, he was not flighty and he steadied
+his comrade so that the two workers were able to
+fasten the shoe.</p>
+
+<p>"We have lost a good half hour," said Jim, looking
+at his watch with a grave face.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps we shall have to turn back," remarked
+the Spaniard with gravity. "We may not escape
+the incoming tide if we go on."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you believe it," cried Jim, impetuously.
+"I've got business ahead and must go."</p>
+
+<p>"Have it your way," said the Spaniard with a
+peculiar smile. He knew what dangers lay ahead
+with a rising tide and Jim did not or he probably
+would not have been so insistent.</p>
+
+<p>"I see no sign of Jo," remarked Jim, as they
+swung into the saddles.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, we will not catch him. He is safe," replied
+the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>Then with tremendous speed, they swept down
+the beach, the splendid horses responding to the
+crisis. It was their fleetness against the steadily
+rising rush of the inexorable sea. They actually
+gained ten minutes on the first two miles and a
+half. Then Jim saw ahead the dark form of a
+headland thrusting out towards the sea.</p>
+
+<p>Already the rush of a long wave would send the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span>
+water lapping around their horses' feet. Jim
+recognized the danger. They must get around
+that promontory or give up beaten. Then he gave
+Caliente a touch with a spur, the first that day.
+With a snort, the spirited animal sprang forward
+faster than before and at his shoulder was the
+chestnut with flaming nostril.</p>
+
+<p>None too soon had they reached the headland,
+for the recurrent waves were beginning to surge
+against it, with full force and gnawing foam. In
+the fierce fury of their charge, they sent their
+horses against the sea. It was at the long withdrawal
+that made bare the scattered black rocks,
+that they rounded the headland.</p>
+
+<p>But too soon a great thundering wave with the
+force of the Pacific behind it came roaring in
+and swelled to the horses' throats, almost submerging
+the riders. But the animals held against
+its withdrawing power and before the ocean could
+return to the attack, they had got beyond the headland
+to a safe place on the beach.</p>
+
+<p>The horses were trembling and quivering with
+their exertions and with the fear of the sea
+which is the most terrible and paralyzing of
+all fears. Jim drew a long breath of relief and
+looked ahead to see if there was any sign of Jo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span>
+Then to his consternation he saw that the beach
+curved inland and at the further end of the curve
+was another frowning headland thrusting itself
+out somewhat further than the one they had but
+just rounded.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE ENCHANTED ISLE</h3>
+
+
+<p>Let us now return to the Sea Eagle, and find out
+what is happening there.</p>
+
+<p>You recollect that Juarez had just discovered two
+islands lying on the South-eastern horizon, the one,
+long and low, the other comparatively short and
+dumpy. He had been conversing with the tall shepherd
+of the island, who seemed to take an interest in
+Juarez. But because of his isolated life during a
+greater part of the year, he would have taken an
+interest in a stone idol, if he had chanced to discover
+one.</p>
+
+<p>"Which of these islands are we making for?" inquired
+Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"The one where we land," replied the sheep farmer
+oracularly. "I might ask the Cap'n, only I never
+pester him with questions. You aren't a Yankee,
+are you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Juarez, "I'm not. My folks live in
+Western Kansas."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I'm glad to hear it, son. But what are you doing
+here?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"You aren't a Yankee, are you?" inquired Juarez,
+quizzically. The man laughed softly to himself.</p>
+
+<p>"You've got me there, lad," he said. "It looks to
+me," he continued, "that the old man is going to
+steer for the further island."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you will have to swim for your home," remarked
+Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"I can wade," he replied whimsically, looking
+down at his long legs.</p>
+
+<p>"You are a humorist," said Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"No, you can put me down for a philosopher,
+that is to say, a man who has much time to think
+and nothing to do."</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to be one," said Juarez. "Suppose
+you holy-stone these decks while I try it."</p>
+
+<p>"No, my friend," replied the shepherd, "I am too
+much of a philosopher to make any such swap."</p>
+
+<p>"Is Captain Broom one?" asked Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, he is a sort of a philosopher till he gets
+mad, then he becomes a living active volcano, belching
+out a lava of hot language and scorching things
+generally. I guess that I had better be moving along.
+I see that he is eyeing me from the Bridge, and he is
+likely to get active any moment if I keep you from
+working." With this the lanky shepherd strolled<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span>
+forward and seating himself upon the top of the
+boys' sleeping place in the bow, smoked his pipe in
+meditative comfort.</p>
+
+<p>His estimate in regard to the destination of the
+Sea Eagle proved to be correct. For in the early
+afternoon the ship passed under the lee of the long
+island and was steaming up the channel between it
+and the mainland, which was distant some thirty-five
+miles.</p>
+
+<p>The fog had cleared by noon, and there was that
+complete transition to brilliant, sunny weather.
+There was a sort of a white haze along the distant
+coast and beyond far inland, rose the faint summits
+of the high mountains.</p>
+
+<p>Fortunately Juarez and Tom had a chance to
+observe their new surroundings for they had been
+set to work sewing on a small sail that was to be
+used in one of the boats. They sat upon the top of
+one of the hatches, under the watchful eyes of old
+Pete and the philosophic gaze of the shepherd.
+Sewing was one of the accomplishments of the
+Frontier Boys. They had been obliged to learn.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that particular bronze looking weed,
+floating in these waters?" asked Tom. It was as
+Tom phrased it, bronze and a most beautiful color.</p>
+
+<p>It was indeed a giant among weeds; just such as
+the garden of the ocean would grow. The stems<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span>
+were fifty to eighty feet long, with peculiar colored
+leaves eight to ten inches in length, growing on little
+boughs from the parent stem. The whole structure
+was held up by small bronze buoys, of a round shape.</p>
+
+<p>"Well as ye seem likely boys and want to learn,
+I'll tell you about this plant," said the shepherd.
+"The scientific fellows call it Algae. When the
+world was first made this algae covered the whole
+surface of the ocean."</p>
+
+<p>"How did you learn this?" asked Juarez.</p>
+
+<p>"You know that the Captain is quite a collector,
+and in his travels has gotten together among many
+other things some interesting books. He gives them
+to me when convenient." The face of the lanky
+shepherd was perfectly grave when he spoke of
+Captain Broom as a collector.</p>
+
+<p>"What makes the water so clear around here?"
+asked Juarez. "I never saw anything like it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you see," replied their mentor, "this island
+is placed peculiarly, I mean this side of it. You
+see how quiet the water is?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is certainly smooth and blue," said Juarez.
+"More like a lake than the ocean."</p>
+
+<p>"That's only true of this side," resumed the
+shepherd, "the other is rough enough, but you see
+the prevailing winds are from the Northwest and
+this shore is never disturbed. So on the beaches<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span>
+you will find not sand, but smooth round pebbles,
+because there is no action of the water, no breakers
+or waves to grind them into sand."</p>
+
+<p>About four o'clock the Sea Eagle came into a perfectly
+beautiful little harbor, at the South-eastern
+end of the island. There was a small level plot
+back from the beach and on all sides rose steep hills
+and back of them the mountains. It was the most
+picturesque scene the boys had ever beheld in all
+their travels.</p>
+
+<p>What would they not have given to have been free
+to roam that island, hunting inland, or fishing or
+bathing along those quiet, enchanted shores. But this
+was no pleasure excursion. Far from it. Captain
+Broom had his own ideas, and he did not intend
+to make a landing at all.</p>
+
+<p>"Get the whale boat ready, lads!" he ordered.
+"And put her over, we've got no time to lose."</p>
+
+<p>They lost no time either, under Captain Broom's
+commanding eye.</p>
+
+<p>What was necessary for the cruise was already in
+the boat. Two casks of water, several guns, and a
+lot of provisions. Then the boat was hove overboard
+into the quiet bay. The captain was ready
+with a much battered satchel in his hand. Not for
+one second did he entrust it to any one else.</p>
+
+<p>"Now over with you, you two lads," he com<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span>manded
+and Juarez and Tom, with a sinking of the
+heart, got into the boat. This was the last leg of their
+mysterious journey, and it boded them no good
+they felt sure of that. The mate they noticed stayed
+aboard in charge of the ship.</p>
+
+<p>They were put in the stern where old Pete had the
+steering oar. Near them sat the shepherd on one of
+the casks of water, his long legs getting uncertain
+accommodation. The captain had his position in the
+bow and two powerful sailors were at the oars, one
+on either side. They did not sit down, but stood up
+to their work.</p>
+
+<p>Without any loss of time the boat got under way
+proceeding seaward from the shelter of the beautiful
+little harbor. In spite of their depression, the two
+boys could not help being interested in the absolutely
+clear water in which they could look down for
+eighty feet.</p>
+
+<p>They could see the straight slender columns of the
+Algae rising to the surface, starting from where
+they were rooted in the bottom of the bay and swaying
+to the slow pulsation of the tide. These strange
+plants of this marine garden were marvels indeed.
+Between their stalks and among the encrusted rocks
+swam in absolute unconsciousness of being watched,
+many beautiful, and strange fishes.</p>
+
+<p>Some were small of golden hue, with little spots<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span>
+of a marvelous blue (poetry) that flashed like keen
+electric dew, (that will do). Others were like gold
+fishes, a foot in length and of corresponding
+breadth. There were long mackerel, and innumerable
+minnows, and over the rocks a peculiar little
+fish crawled or rather walked on thin rat-like feet.</p>
+
+<p>Before they had time to observe further the boat
+had got out of the harbor where the water sunk away
+to blue unfathomed depth. When clear of the harbor,
+they turned to the South, passing near a cove
+with a symmetrical pebbly beach, built up for five
+feet, above the level of the water. The ocean was
+perfectly smooth, with not a ripple upon its surface.
+They were evidently making to round the Southern
+extremity of the Island.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXIV</h2>
+
+<h3>IN THE WHITE BOAT</h3>
+
+
+<p>Ahead of them was a rock rising fifty or sixty
+feet out of the water. It was evident that the rock
+was inhabited for there could be seen dark forms
+moving around upon it. Nothing had been said
+since they started, for the Captain was not in a
+talkative mood. Jeems Howell, the shepherd, had
+sat silently smoking his pipe in philosophic contentment.</p>
+
+<p>"What are those things on that rock?" inquired
+Tom, his curiosity getting the best of his reserve.</p>
+
+<p>"Two yankees in this boat," commented the
+shepherd. "Those are seals, son. Didn't you ever
+see any before?"</p>
+
+<p>"No!" admitted Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"You didn't know that seals, next to humans, are
+the smartest animals, in the world."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that so?" inquired Juarez. "They certainly
+are sleek."</p>
+
+<p>"They have got the most brain room, that's a
+fact."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The boys regarded the seals with peculiar interest
+as the boat passed near the rock. They were moving
+about awkwardly by means of their flippers, moving
+their sinuous necks this way and that and regarding
+the strange boat with their soft brown eyes.
+Then they dived headlong into the sea, swimming
+about with a peculiar grace.</p>
+
+<p>"Queer animals," remarked Tom, "belong half to
+the sea and half to the land."</p>
+
+<p>"Something like sailors," remarked the shepherd.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the Captain going to do with us?" asked
+Juarez in a low voice. The shepherd's face took on
+a solemn expression, but before he could reply the
+Captain's voice roared.</p>
+
+<p>"None of that, you'll find out soon enough. You
+can talk about the flory and fauny, with long shanks,
+but don't let me hear anything else out of you," such
+was the Captain's ultimatum.</p>
+
+<p>But soon matters grew so interesting that they lost
+all inclination for talking. When they got near the
+Southern end of the island they began to notice
+white caps to the Southward, dotting the darkness
+of the sea.</p>
+
+<p>"You lads will have to hold tight now in a few
+minutes," remarked Howell. "Do you get seasick?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied the boys.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Well, you will have a chance soon, and if it don't
+fetch you, nothing will."</p>
+
+<p>So far they had been rowing under the sheltering
+lee of the island whose huge rocky bulk had shouldered
+off the charge of the wind-driven seas. Now
+before they had fairly rounded the island the character
+of the water began to change. The boat began to
+toss on the great rollers. Then as they cleared the
+land for good and were in the channel, a fresh gust
+of wind struck them, drenching the occupants of the
+boat with spray.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain stood up in the bow of the boat and
+steadying himself took in the conditions of the sea
+and wind. There was nothing in his grim weatherbeaten
+face to show what he felt. The men at the
+oars now made hard work of it against the headwind
+and the running sea.</p>
+
+<p>They would climb up a steep wave and then with
+a sickening slide, go down into the hollow, then with
+a lusty pull the sailors would bring the heavy boat
+over the toppling crest of wave to find another rushing
+to meet them. No rest, this was what made it
+such heart breaking work.</p>
+
+<p>The early fog had come, covering the sea with
+gloom, and the waves did not go down perceptibly.
+At times, they shipped a good deal of water and
+Tom and Juarez were kept busy bailing out. After<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span>
+an hour's hard struggle the sailors were about all
+in and seemed hardly able to hold their own against
+the sea and wind. The Captain was quick to notice
+this.</p>
+
+<p>"Can you row, lad?" he inquired of Juarez. Now
+the latter's experience had been confined to his work
+going down the Grand Canyon of Colorado, on the
+raft-boat that the Frontier Boys had built.</p>
+
+<p>Even the old ocean itself could not show anything
+worse than some of the rapids that the boys had run.
+As for rocks, nothing could beat the canyon for
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll try, sir," he replied, "I've never rowed on the
+ocean."</p>
+
+<p>"Humph!" grunted the Captain, "take the starboard.
+And you, you lazy long shanks, you take the
+other oar."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, sir," replied cheerfully, the one addressed.</p>
+
+<p>"Get out of here, Pete," he cried, giving that
+worthy a lift with his foot that landed him on top of
+Tom, "I'll do the steering. You boys will only have
+to pull, that's all. I'll keep her headed up right."</p>
+
+<p>Fortunately Juarez was in fine condition, or he
+could never have stood the gruelling work ahead.
+He weighed one hundred and sixty pounds and there
+was not an ounce of fat on him. Likewise he had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span>
+had a sound night's sleep and three square meals
+so that he was fortified for what was ahead.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez buckled to the task with all his strength,
+and he was glad of the chance to get his blood in
+circulation for he was chilled to the bone by the flying
+spray, and then too, anything was better than
+thinking of the fate ahead. He was surprised to
+find out that the shepherd who appeared rather
+frail in physique was able to keep up the pace.</p>
+
+<p>But he had that sinewy length of muscles that
+counts for more than mere bunchy thickness.
+Juarez was crafty enough not to spend all of his
+strength in the first fifteen minutes of work. He
+liked this, fighting the sea and standing on his feet
+he was able to put the whole leverage of his body into
+the stroke.</p>
+
+<p>The change in speed was noticeable right away,
+and the boat began to pull ahead steadily. The two
+sailors who had been laid off from exhaustion, had
+watched Juarez with a sneering grin as he took the
+oar. They were sure that the first wave that came
+along would wrench the oar out of his hand. Great
+was their surprise when they saw him buckle to the
+oar, rising and pulling at the right time to meet
+the toppling, rustling seas.</p>
+
+<p>"That little shrimp will last about ten minutes,"
+said one of them to his mate.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Sure, Bill," replied the other.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez choked back a hot reply, for he knew that
+it would not be good for him to say anything to them.
+They were in the majority and would get him if he
+did, besides making it bad for Tom. The ten minutes
+passed and Juarez was just beginning to warm to
+his work. This took the wind out of their sails
+completely.</p>
+
+<p>The powerful hand of the Skipper at the steering
+oar was a great help, for now all that the two men
+at the oars had to do was to pull and not to worry
+about keeping her headed right. Juarez kept
+steadily at it for an hour and then darkness began
+to fall over the channel but not until the island that
+they were approaching had begun to loom up, dead
+ahead.</p>
+
+<p>They were now getting in the lee of the strange
+island and the sea was moderating perceptibly. At
+this juncture the two sailors who had become
+thoroughly rested took the oars from Juarez and his
+co-worker and pulled steadily through the gathering
+gloom. In a short time the bulk of the island
+loomed above them in the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>Not a word was said, only the swish of the sea
+was heard and the groaning of the oars in the locks.
+Tom and Juarez were deeply depressed and gloomy.
+They felt exactly as though they were being taken<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span>
+to prison and could sympathize with sailors who had
+been marooned on lonely and desolate islands.</p>
+
+<p>"Easy now, lads," called the Captain, as he brought
+the boat's head squarely around towards the shore.</p>
+
+<p>"Two strokes," he yelled, "and let her run."</p>
+
+<p>With great force they pulled the oars in succession,
+then they shipped them in a hurry. Juarez
+could see the dashing of foam on either side of the
+boat where the waves smote the rocks. There was a
+roar in his ears as the boat rushed toward seeming
+sure destruction. It was going with great speed
+from the impetus of the sailors' strokes.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain was standing taut at the steering
+oars, his eyes piercing the darkness ahead, then the
+foam of the breakers dashed in their faces, there
+was a quick sliding past of dark rocks and before
+they could draw breath again the boat was in quiet
+water, under some black cliffs. At last they had
+reached the mysterious goal of their mysterious
+journey.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXV</h2>
+
+<h3>IN PERIL</h3>
+
+
+<p>We must now go back in our narrative to where
+we left Jim Darlington and the Spaniard, Senor
+Sebastian, in a position of extreme peril, between
+the cliffs and the deep sea, with the white-fanged
+tide coming in like a devouring monster eager for
+its prey.</p>
+
+<p>"Is there a chance, Senor?" cried Jim as soon
+as his horse gained his footing.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the fatal day, I fear," replied the Spaniard
+with resigned hopelessness. "The sea is hungry."</p>
+
+<p>"As for that, so am I," declared Jim coolly. "So
+let us try to get around the headland and after that,
+supper."</p>
+
+<p>"As you please," acquiesced the Spaniard quietly.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jim turned Caliente's head and with a
+quick touch of the spur sent him full stride along
+the curving beach, followed closely by the Spaniard.
+Already the heavy waves were licking far<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span>
+up the slant of the sand. Even the veteran Caliente
+seemed nervous at its approach, while Don
+Fernando would jump and shy as the hissing water
+crept around his feet.</p>
+
+<p>In about two minutes the two horsemen reached
+the base of the rocky headland that barred their
+way. It was a desperate moment, there was
+but one thing to do and that was to take the
+chance.</p>
+
+<p>"Better be drowned quick, Caliente, old boy,"
+cried Jim, "than slowly, but we'll beat you yet,"
+and he shook his clenched fist at the ocean, and
+whirled his horse to meet a wave that struck
+Caliente breast high. So for a moment, the two,
+boy and horse, stood facing their powerful enemy,
+The Sea, that came with the recurring charge,
+its evenly separated files robed in blue with white
+crests. Thus they stood getting a full free breath
+before they leaped into the ranks of the foe.</p>
+
+<p>Jim's strained, keen gaze took in every detail of
+the situation, noting the position of the rocks that
+a receding wave left bare, so that he might find a
+clear path or trail in his dash for life. Nor did
+his gaze flinch as he saw the advancing wave
+break against the front of the cliff.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Caliente," yelled Jim, with a sense of
+fierce determination and exultation that communi<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span>cated
+itself to his horse, and lifting his feet free
+from the stirrups so that he would not be entangled,
+if Caliente should fall, he headed him
+seaward, galloping fast down the beach upon the
+heels of the withdrawing wave.</p>
+
+<p>Meeting a smaller inrush of water and dashing
+through its foaming crest, his gallant horse swam
+until he got a foothold upon the rocks at the base
+of the cliff. Now was the crucial moment. With
+absolute recklessness, Jim urged his powerful
+horse over the foam-covered rocks, striving to
+get around the prow of the headland before the
+charge of the next wave. Not one look did Jim
+give seaward, all his energies were bent upon
+using every precious second, and Caliente was
+filled with his rider's indomitable spirit.</p>
+
+<p>Then above them towered the fatal wave, and
+with a confused roar, it broke over them in sweltering
+foam and they were swept towards the
+black front of the cliff. Then came the impact
+against the rock and the next moment, stunned
+and bruised, Jim holding to the pommel of the
+saddle, with a death-grip, was carried out to sea
+with Caliente in the grasp of the retreating wave.</p>
+
+<p>It was all over, as like pieces of drift, horse
+and rider were swept away, but fortune does
+sometime favor the brave and, being caught in a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span>
+powerful current, Caliente was carried South of
+the headland and his progress towards the sea was
+stayed by a rock that rose high, an outer-guard of
+the headland. So then the next great wave bore
+them toward the beach, and once Caliente got his
+feet upon the sandy bottom he braced himself
+against the fierce pull of the retreating sea, striving
+to drag him back again.</p>
+
+<p>Though almost unconscious, Jim clung to the
+saddle with his body half-drooping over the pommel.
+Then Caliente plunged blindly forward until
+he stood with head bent down and nose almost
+touching the sand, his great sides heaving, but
+safe at last.</p>
+
+<p>In the distance, a horseman could be seen coming
+at full gallop along the straight line of the
+beach. It was Jo, who finally had become frightened
+by the non-appearance of his two comrades
+and had turned back. His fright had been increased
+by seeing a horse and rider coming apparently
+out of the sea.</p>
+
+<p>When he came up, he found his brother Jim
+sitting on the sand still half dazed but slowly coming
+to himself.</p>
+
+<p>"Where's the Senor, Jim?" cried Jo. This
+question served to bring Jim completely to himself.
+He got up, looking pale, with one side of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span>
+his face bruised to a real blackness, and the flesh
+of his left hand badly torn, where it had struck
+the cliff, but he was not thinking of these matters.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, Jo, the Senor came after me. Where is
+he?" Then it came over him all at once, that his
+companion was even now caught between the jaws
+of the black cliff.</p>
+
+<p>"We must get to him, Jo," he cried.</p>
+
+<p>"But how did you ever get around that cliff?"
+asked Jo.</p>
+
+<p>Already it was an awesome sight as the waves
+crashed in foam against its front and rushed shoreward
+along its black sides. It seemed impossible
+that only fifteen minutes before Jim had actually
+come around that foaming headland.</p>
+
+<p>In reply to Jo's question, Jim threw his arms
+around Caliente's neck with warm affection.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the old fellow that pulled me through,"
+he cried. "But we must go to the help of our
+Spanish friend."</p>
+
+<p>"How can we?" inquired Jo. "We can't get
+around the headland unless we become fishes."</p>
+
+<p>Jim considered the problem carefully. One
+thing he was determined on and that was not to
+leave the Spaniard who had been so hospitable
+and helpful to them.</p>
+
+<p>"No, we can't go around by the headland," he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span>
+determined, "but we might be able to find a way
+over the rocks and down on the other side."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, I'm ready."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's find a place for Caliente first," advised
+his owner. Back a short distance from the beach
+there were some trees on a lower spur of the
+mountain. Here Jim brought Caliente and took
+off the saddle and bridle.</p>
+
+<p>"Now make yourself comfortable," said Jim.</p>
+
+<p>Caliente, in seeming recognition of what was
+said, took immediate advantage of the invitation
+and rolled heartily in a dry and dusty spot.</p>
+
+<p>"Get your lasso, Jo," urged Jim, "and we will
+start."</p>
+
+<p>So together they made for the steep rock and
+soon reached the base of it, and now began a hard
+climb, but no more difficult than they had encountered
+before in their travels.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you recollect, Jim," inquired Jo, "that day
+you got stalled in our first canyon in Colorado,
+when you tried to imitate an eagle and fly up
+a precipitous cliff and we had to get you
+down?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes, I remember," replied Jim, "and how
+I scared you and Tom by pretending that an Injun
+was after me, when I went down to the creek
+for water."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Poor Tom," said Jo sadly, "I wonder when we
+will see him again."</p>
+
+<p>"In a couple of days," stoutly declared the optimistic
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>They were now going up the face of the cliff,
+the lariats over their shoulders, and searching
+with careful feet for a foothold, while their hands
+clutched some piece of projecting rock.</p>
+
+<p>"Lucky this rock isn't rotten," cried Jo, "or we
+would find ourselves stuck headfirst in the sand
+below."</p>
+
+<p>"Like an ostrich," said Jim. "We couldn't do
+much in a place like this without our moccasins,
+that's certain."</p>
+
+<p>The moccasins did make them nimble as goats,
+and they not only made possible a secure hold,
+but they protected as well the feet. At first they
+were not in any grave danger of a fall because the
+drifted sand at the bottom of the cliff would have
+made a soft landing. But after a while they were
+forced to work their way out over the rushing water,
+then if they had slipped and fallen it would
+have been all up with them.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed as if the sea, furious at having lost
+Jim a short while ago, was making fierce efforts
+to get at them now. The great waves foamed
+against the cliff and the spray dashed over the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span>
+boys, making the surface of the rock treacherous
+and slippery.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't bear to look down," said Jo. "It makes
+me dizzy."</p>
+
+<p>"Look up, then," Jim called back.</p>
+
+<p>"That's almost as bad," replied Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Keep 'em shut then," was Jim's command.</p>
+
+<p>Finally they came to a place that stopped Jo entirely.
+Jim was able to get over it, because of his
+superior height and reach, and he attained a point
+of safety above Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"What am I going to do now?" cried Jo. "I
+can't go any higher and it is impossible for me to
+go back."</p>
+
+<p>"You wait," urged Jim, "till I get a secure foothold
+above here."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I'll wait," said Jo grimly, "you don't observe
+any anxiety on my part to move, do you?"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXVI</h2>
+
+<h3>TWO LASSOES</h3>
+
+
+<p>Finally Jim reached a broad ledge, that gave
+him an excellent foothold, and he got his lariat
+ready and dangled the loop under Jo's nose.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you going to hang me for?" inquired
+Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"For a horse thief, I reckon," replied Jim, "that
+bay don't belong to you does it, Mister?"</p>
+
+<p>"Meaning this ocean bay?" queried Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"I certainly will hang you for that," retorted
+Jim, "Now get the loop under your armpits."</p>
+
+<p>"All ready," cried Jo.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jim, bracing himself, kept a taut line on
+his brother, and with this help he was able quite
+easily to get over the slippery, bare belt of rock,
+and in a few moments was safe with Jim on the
+ledge.</p>
+
+<p>"It won't take us long now," said Jo, "to get
+to the other side."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's give him a yell," suggested Jim, "to let
+him know that we are coming."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Then Jim put his hands to his lips and cried:</p>
+
+<p>"Senor, ahoy." They listened breathlessly and
+in a few moments came a faint reply. This put
+renewed energy into the boys and as the way was
+now easier, they leaped ahead, agile as goats, and
+had soon reached the top of the cliff. They looked
+eagerly down.</p>
+
+<p>There was the deep short semi-circle of the
+little bay with the waves heaving in against the
+cliffs and at the point midway between the two
+head-lands, where the beach was highest, they saw
+the Spaniard on Don Fernando. Already the encroaching
+waves were gnawing at them.</p>
+
+<p>It was only a question of minutes now, and
+horse and rider would be carried out to sea. The
+Spaniard sat like a statute. It was seemingly possible
+for him to have made his escape up the cliffs,
+which were not overly precipitous, like those Jim
+and Jo had just scaled, but he was a fatalist and
+believed that his day had come. Perhaps he did
+not want to abandon his horse, in which his pride
+was centered.</p>
+
+<p>"Cheer up, Senor, we'll be there," yelled Jim.</p>
+
+<p>Then followed by Jo, he sprang forward, leaping
+from rock to rock, and from jutting point to
+opportune foothold. It was dangerous and daring
+work, but the life of their friend was at stake and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span>
+the boys were not the kind to consider their own
+safety at such a time.</p>
+
+<p>It was only their sure-footedness and varied experience
+in climbing that saved them from broken
+limbs or possible death. In a remarkably short
+time, they stood upon a ledge above the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"Here, Senor," yelled Jim, "catch the rope."</p>
+
+<p>He did as ordered but called up, "Is there no
+way to save my horse?"</p>
+
+<p>Jim considered a moment, then shouted: "All
+right, yes, we will save your horse, too. Tie the
+ends of the lasso to the iron rings at the ends of the
+front cinch." This was a broad, strong band,
+which would furnish a good purchase, when Jim
+tossed down the lariat. The Spaniard caught it
+and made it fast as ordered.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, fasten this under your arms," ordered
+Jim, as he cast down the second lariat, which belonged
+to Jo. They then drew up the Spaniard to
+safety and he appeared to be pleased in a quiet way
+but not at all enthusiastic.</p>
+
+<p>"I am your eternal debtor, Senors," he said with
+a courteous bow.</p>
+
+<p>"How was it you did not follow me, Senor?"
+questioned Jim, "when I sailed around the headland?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Don Fernando balked," replied the Senor. "I
+thought, too, that you had been drowned."</p>
+
+<p>"Came near it," replied Jim. "I would, too, if
+it had not been for Caliente."</p>
+
+<p>"But my poor Fernando, he will be drowned,"
+cried the Spaniard, now much more excited about
+the safety of his steed than he had been for his
+own. It did look rather bad for the big chestnut,
+as a large wave swelling in, almost took him off
+his feet. He began to neigh wildly.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't worry, Don, old boy," cried Jim to the
+frightened horse. "If you will help yourself."
+There was something in his voice that seemed to
+reassure the animal.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Jo, we will let you down by the lariat
+and get the bridle reins over his head and help
+him get a foothold on that ledge below us. He
+will be safe enough there, even if he does get
+somewhat damp."</p>
+
+<p>"Let me go. It is my risk for my horse," urged
+the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"It is no risk, Senor," replied Jim. "You are
+heavier than my brother and stronger and can do
+more good on this ledge with me."</p>
+
+<p>"The commands of the General!" said the Spaniard
+with a low bow. "I see your plan is good."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We will tie this end of the lasso to the tree,"
+said Jim, "so you will feel perfectly safe, Jo."</p>
+
+<p>The tree referred to was a sturdy, gnarled cedar,
+growing on the ledge. Then Jim swung his
+brother off and with every confidence in the
+strength of the lariat to hold, Jo made his way
+quickly and safely down, while if he had been
+without the rope he would have doubtless fallen
+into the water below.</p>
+
+<p>A wave surged in, submerging him, and then
+started triumphantly to carry him out to sea, but
+when the lariat pulled taut Jo struggled safely
+back on the rock, while the wave went grumbling
+back.</p>
+
+<p>"Catch the bridle now, Jo," urged Jim. "Don't
+waste any more time swimming."</p>
+
+<p>Thus adjured, Jo grabbed the bridle reins and
+pulled them over Don Fernando's head, and braced
+himself on the rock above. All was ready now,
+and the two above held the loop of the lasso that
+had been tied at the cinch, with both hands, and
+they pulled together. Again a big wave swelled
+in towards the cliff, which gave the frightened
+horse a big boost.</p>
+
+<p>Then, with Jim and the Spaniard pulling mightily
+from the ledge above, and Jo giving the big
+chestnut a purchase by a steady pull upon his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span>
+bridle, the horse scrambled with a mighty clatter
+and all his frightened energy up the sloping rock.
+The lariat and Jo's work helped a whole lot.
+Without the three, he would never have made it.</p>
+
+<p>Before the next wave swept in, Don Fernando
+stood, trembling and dripping, but safe, upon the
+lower ledge. He seemed above the danger point
+now, though an unusually big wave welled up
+around the horse's fetlocks and the spray was continually
+dashing upwards.</p>
+
+<p>"He is all right now," cried Jim, "better come
+up, Jo, where it is dryer."</p>
+
+<p>"Haul in then," replied Jo, and then he was
+landed safely on the ledge.</p>
+
+<p>"Caught a speckled trout," exclaimed Jim in
+happy humor again.</p>
+
+<p>"Referring to my freckles, I suppose," grinned
+Jo. "If I'm a fish, I reckon Don Fernando is a
+whale."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you suppose he is safe?" inquired the Spaniard
+anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"Who, Jo?"</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, no," said the Spaniard smilingly. "I mean
+the Don. The water seems to be rising."</p>
+
+<p>"You may rest assured that he is safe," replied
+Jim. "It is the turn of the tide now, and it is only<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span>
+a westerly wind that makes it appear higher. All
+we will have to do now is to wait."</p>
+
+<p>"It is a great pity, this delay," said the Spaniard
+warmly. "You are anxious to be on to the
+rescue of your brother and his friend. Anyway,
+I hope you will succeed as well in their case as
+you did in mine."</p>
+
+<p>"In another hour we will be able to start," said
+Jim, "the tide will then commence to run out."</p>
+
+<p>"Where shall we stop tonight?" inquired Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Camp in the open as usual," replied Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"I hope we will get up above the sea so high
+that it won't come within a mile of us," said Jo,
+fervently.</p>
+
+<p>"As to a place to stop, I will see to that," said
+the Spaniard. "Do not give yourselves any uneasiness
+on that score."</p>
+
+<p>"It's getting kind of chilly roosting up here,"
+remarked Jo, plaintively, "especially as the fog is
+coming in."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll warm you," said Jim. "Put up your
+Dukes."</p>
+
+<p>"You'll take the counts if I put up my Dukes,"
+said Jo, who was an inveterate punnist.</p>
+
+<p>"Shut up," yelled Jim, giving his brother a
+hearty chug in the chest. Then they went at it
+hammer and tongs, giving and receiving good<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span>
+hard blows, and after ten minutes of whaling at
+each other, both were plenty warm. The Spaniard
+looked on in mild wonder.</p>
+
+<p>"You Americans love the hard exercise," he
+said. "I should think you would have great pleasure
+in resting awhile."</p>
+
+<p>"I got the best of the bout," declared Jo. "See
+how black and blue your face is on this side."</p>
+
+<p>"You didn't do that," protested Jim. "That
+was a wallop that old Neptune handed me when he
+bumped my head against yonder cliff."</p>
+
+<p>"Neptune! Yonder cliff!" jeered Jo. "You
+ought to be a story writer and use fine words."</p>
+
+<p>"Me a story writer!" growled Jim. "I <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'aint'">ain't</ins> got
+so low as that, not so long as I have got two hands
+to steal chickens with."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXVII</h2>
+
+<h3>ANOTHER FRIEND</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Do you not think, Senor Darlington, that it is
+now safe to start?" inquired the Spaniard, who was
+fearful of bloodshed, not quite understanding the
+boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly," responded Jim, "we will get Don
+Fernando down from his perch and proceed."</p>
+
+<p>This proved to be an easier task than getting him
+up. His master lowered by the rope to his side, one
+scrambling leap and the horse was on the firm wet
+sand of the beach, almost knocking his master over
+in his eagerness to be on safe footing again. Don
+Sebastian now showed the gay side of his nature, as
+he vaulted into the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>He swung his hat wildly, the blood mounting to
+his face, and the horse seemed to feel the sting and
+excitement of his master's mood, as he pranced,
+danced and caracoled upon the sand and ended up
+by bowing in unison with his master to the two
+American lads, who were looking on with interest
+and amusement.</p>
+
+<p>Then the party made their way quickly along the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span>
+curve of the beach and went around the fateful
+headland with perfect safety, while quite a distance
+out among the hidden rocks snarled the defeated
+ocean. Then Caliente heard them coming and he
+quickly raised his head, neighing in welcome to Jim
+and his comrade, Don Fernando.</p>
+
+<p>Jim gave him a vigorous hug for more than ever
+he was fond of his faithful horse. In a few minutes
+he had him saddled and away the three horsemen
+thudded in a swift gallop down the beach. The
+horses fairly flew, the wind of their speed tossing
+their manes back. It was cool beneath the fog
+laden sky and the refreshing sea air seemed to
+give the horses tireless endurance.</p>
+
+<p>Soon three miles had spun backwards under their
+hoofs and the boys were filled with the joyous excitement
+of the run. It seemed now that every stride
+of the horses was bringing them nearer to the
+hoped-for rescue of Tom and Juarez. And this was
+an incentive to their energy.</p>
+
+<p>"Here, friends, is where we branch off from the
+beach," cried the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>Then he turned his horse to the left and headed
+straight for a wooded spur that extended from the
+range to the shore. In a short time the three came
+to a well-traveled trail and were soon riding through<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span>
+the semi-dusk of the woods. For two miles they
+went up a steady grade.</p>
+
+<p>Then they rounded the summit of the wooded
+ridge and saw stretching far below them in the indistinct
+dusk, a wide plain bounded on the West by
+the blue darkness of the level sea with its rim of
+yellow sand.</p>
+
+<p>"We will soon be at the home of my friend, Senor
+Valdez," said the Spaniard, "where we will spend
+the night."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm a lovely looking object to present itself in a
+civilized home," protested Jim, "I look like a tough
+who has been in a bar-room rush."</p>
+
+<p>"You are my brave friend," said Senor Sebastian,
+quietly, "and will be welcome."</p>
+
+<p>Jim blushed, at least one side of his face did, the
+other was already too deeply colored to show any
+emotion, and he grinned sheepishly. Before he had
+time to reply they swept into an open driveway,
+carefully sanded, and drew rein in front of a long,
+low white adobe house, that from its mountain terrace
+looked over Plain and Sea.</p>
+
+<p>Out came Senor Valdez to receive them, a stately
+Spaniard, who furnished the boys with an ideal of
+perfect courtesy ever after. To the end of their
+days they remembered their first visit to the home
+of Senor Valdez. How they did enjoy their dinner<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span>
+that evening in the long, pleasantly lighted dining-room.</p>
+
+<p>It was an excellent meal, with delicious soup, a
+salad garnished with peppers of the Spanish style,
+and garlic. Jim and Jo had never tasted anything
+equal to it. Besides there were frijoles and lamb,
+while the dessert was some slight and delicate confection
+of jelly and cream, made by the hands of
+the Senora Valdez.</p>
+
+<p>"I feel wicked sitting here and eating this fine
+meal," said Jo, addressing Jim in a low voice,
+"when Tom and Juarez are being ill used and probably
+starved."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," replied Jim, who was always practical,
+"I think it is better to eat, and to keep my strength
+up."</p>
+
+<p>"I guess it won't fail," commented Jo slyly.</p>
+
+<p>The boys bore themselves well, and without any
+diffidence though Jim had a whimsical recollection
+of his bruised side face and blackened eye, and he
+tried to keep it turned from the Senora Valdez, the
+fragile little woman who sat at the end of the table
+opposite her husband. She had snow white hair,
+parted low over her ears and the pallid face was
+lined with years. Very gentle was the Senora Valdez,
+but she had in her time beheld scenes of car<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span>nage
+and terror, so Jim need not have worried
+about his bruised face. But the wise old lady
+noticed his solicitude and understanding, was the
+more gracious to the young Americano because
+of it.</p>
+
+<p>That evening they sat on the piazza, that looked
+out towards the sea, the Spaniards smoking and
+Jim and Jo enjoying the music of a guitar played
+by a Mexican in a dim corner of the verandah and
+the boys heard a bit of important news.</p>
+
+<p>"There was a mysterious ship put into shore
+several miles South of here, late last night, Senor,"
+said their host, "one of my shepherds brought me
+word."</p>
+
+<p>"The first scent of the trail," cried Jim eagerly.
+Then the Senor Sebastian explained to his friend
+more fully the objects of their search. Immediately
+the listener was deeply interested. Then he sent for
+an Indian, one of his trusted men, to come to him,
+and gave him minute instructions about some matters.
+Without a word the Indian turned and disappeared
+in the darkness, and in a short time there
+came the sound of a horse galloping full speed down
+the road.</p>
+
+<p>"Tomorrow, Senor Darlington, this Indian will
+meet you at a point near the Puebla de los Angeles,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span>
+which my friend knows and he will have all the information
+there is obtainable as to the location of
+this ship and its crew," thus spoke the Senor Valdez.
+Jim thanked him with deep fervor for his unusual
+kindness, but the Spaniard made light of it.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>A TALE OF YORE</h3>
+
+
+<p>As they sat there in the dusk of the verandah,
+Jim would have liked to ask his host to relate
+some of his experiences in southern California
+for he felt sure that the Senor Valdez had
+known something of adventure not only because
+those early days were full of marvels of interest,
+but there was something in the bearing of the
+old Spaniard that spoke of former days of romance
+and of stirring incidents.</p>
+
+<p>Then, too, there was something in the after-dinner
+content and quiet, following the perilous
+adventure which they had been through that predisposed
+the boys to listen to a good story of adventure.
+Their friend, the Senor Sebastian, seemed
+to divine what was passing through Jim's mind,
+for he suddenly spoke, breaking the meditative
+spell that had fallen upon the group on the piazza.</p>
+
+<p>"It just occurred to me, Senor Valdez, that our
+friends here might like to hear something of the
+early days in this part of the country, for you of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span>
+all men know it thoroughly and I am sure it would
+interest them."</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed, it would, Senor," cried Jim enthusiastically,
+"it was in my mind to ask Senor Valdez to
+tell us of the early days but I was afraid to impose
+upon him."</p>
+
+<p>"I feel greatly honored to think that you young
+men would care to hear anything my poor tongue
+could relate. It would hardly be worth your distinguished
+attention." Jim made due allowance
+for the courteous exaggeration characteristic of the
+Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"Try us, Senor," he said briefly, "we would
+want nothing better."</p>
+
+<p>"I will have the coffee brought first," replied
+the Senor, "that may serve to stimulate my dull
+imagination."</p>
+
+<p>In a short time a softly moving servant brought
+out a tray of coffee cups, and placed one before
+each guest on a small wicker table. Jim noticed
+these cups with immediate interest. They were
+certainly beautiful and he had never seen anything
+like them before. They were of a wonderful
+blue, each one, and had a coat of arms
+in gold with raised figures on it; a scroll above
+with a Latin motto, and beneath the representation
+of a wild animal couchant. The Senor Valdez was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span>
+quick to see Jim's interest and respond to it. "That
+is the coat of arms of my family," he explained.</p>
+
+<p>"I am not a scholar, Senor," said Jim, "and
+all I can make of the motto is that it has something
+to do with a lion."</p>
+
+<p>"You are quite right," the ghost of a smile
+hovered around the white-fringed lips of the
+Spaniard, at Jim's innate boyishness.</p>
+
+<p>"That figure does not look exactly like a lion,"
+remarked Jo frankly.</p>
+
+<p>"Not like an African lion certainly," replied the
+Spaniard, "but a lion nevertheless, such as one finds
+yet in the mountain fastnesses of Spain, something
+like a panther only larger and much more fierce."</p>
+
+<p>"The lion seems to have a rope or chain around
+his neck," commented Jim, "and fastened to a
+collar."</p>
+
+<p>"Quite so," responded the Spaniard, "likewise
+the motto translated reads, 'Gentle as a Lion.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Rather strange way of putting it," said Jim curiously.</p>
+
+<p>"I will explain, for you would naturally be
+puzzled by the phrase, 'Gentle as a Lion,' as it
+seems to contradict common knowledge," said
+Senor Valdez. "You see my family has the distinction,
+if such it can be called, in these modern<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span>
+days, the distinction of being old. This coat-of-arms
+dates back to the eleventh century."</p>
+
+<p>Jo was about to give a prolonged whistle of surprise
+when Jim gripped his knee to enforce silence,
+for though Jo might mean all right, the Spaniard
+might not understand.</p>
+
+<p>"The founder of the family who flourished at
+that time was a rather rugged character, and I am
+afraid would regard the family representatives of
+this day as very puny and unworthy specimens.
+This Rodriquez de Valdez had his castle in a
+rugged mountainous part of Spain, where there
+were plenty of wild animals and of wilder and
+fiercer men, bandits and free-booters without number.</p>
+
+<p>"His castle was a very powerful one, not only
+in construction but likewise in location, as it was
+built on a shelf of rock above a deep chasm, with
+precipitous cliffs behind it. However, Rodriquez
+de Valdez spent but very little time behind the protection
+of its powerful walls. It would take the
+forces of some strong Duke from the lowland to
+cause him to seek the shelter of his castle and to
+raise his war banner of crimson with a blue cross
+upon it, above the turret.</p>
+
+<p>"He spent his days hunting among the mountains
+for wild beasts or for marauding bands of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span>
+lawless men. Rodriquez was a man of wonderful
+strength, even for those days, when there were
+giants in the land. In stature six feet five and
+powerful in proportion and likewise very fleet of
+foot. If I should tell you of some of the legends
+of his strength and swiftness, you would probably
+laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"But the one that has to do with the coat-of-arms
+of my family I will tell you. It chanced one day
+that he was out in the wilds of the mountains
+and quite alone. Intent upon the trail of a deer
+that he was following along a shelving mountain
+side, he did not see a lion half grown, but nevertheless
+very dangerous, which was crouching on
+the branch of a tree ready to spring upon him when
+he got beneath it.</p>
+
+<p>"When he had passed by under the tree a pace
+or two, the lion sprang with distended claws.
+Some instinct of danger made Rodriquez turn and
+he was just in time to grapple with the brute,
+clutching it by the throat. The lion had some
+advantage in weight but not a great deal, for my
+brave ancestor was probably three hundred pounds
+of sinew, bone and muscle. So that the struggle
+was not such an unequal one, but it was terrific
+while it did last. Finally, though torn and bleed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span>ing,
+the man subdued the beast, and had it in abject
+fear of him.</p>
+
+<p>"Then instead of killing the lion as one would
+naturally expect, Rodriquez took a strange humorous
+notion into his head. He would make a pet of
+this same lion and it should be his dog to follow
+obediently at its master's heels wherever he went.
+This idea he carried out and he even had a heavy
+brass collar placed upon its neck, and it followed
+him on all his trips, slouching with padded tread
+at his heel, or behind his war horse as he rode
+abroad, like a powerful yellow dog.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not imagine that the beast ever had any
+great amount of affection for his master, but he
+no doubt was in great fear of him, which seemed
+to answer the purpose quite as well. So, my
+friends, you have a full and complete explanation
+of the coat-of-arms of my family. My only fear is
+that I have wearied you with what could not have
+the same interest for you as it does for me."</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed, you have not wearied us, Senor," exclaimed
+Jo enthusiastically.</p>
+
+<p>"That is one of the most interesting accounts
+that I have ever listened to," said Jim. "I only
+wish I could have lived in those days when there
+was plenty of adventure."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not think that you have any reason to com<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span>plain,"
+remarked the Spaniard laughingly. "Perhaps
+your descendants in future years will be
+pointing out your daring deeds as emblazoned on
+their coat-of-arms."</p>
+
+<p>"No danger of that, I guess," laughed Jim,
+"though they might have a picture of Jo and me
+tied to a mule. That was the way old Captain
+Broom treated us." The Spaniard joined in the
+merriment at this unheroic representation of Jo and
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Senor Valdez, you have told us a tale
+of old Spain, tell us something of new Spain here
+in California," urged Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems to me that it is now someone else's
+turn," said the Senor. "I would not do all the
+talking. A host should sometimes listen. Perhaps
+Senor Darlington will tell us of some of his experiences.
+They will be much more stirring than
+any musty tales of mine." But Jim shook his head
+firmly, not to say obstinately.</p>
+
+<p>"I would not think of telling our adventures,"
+he replied. "Perhaps after we have travelled more,
+we will have something worth while relating."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," said Jo, "we would much rather
+listen to you, Senor."</p>
+
+<p>The Senor Valdez sipped slowly at his coffee,
+looking out into the semi-darkness beyond the ve<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span>randah,
+where over the plain below stretched the
+gray blanket of the fog-clouds. Then he rolled
+another cigarette, lit it and took a few meditative
+puffs. The Senor now began his next story at a
+peculiar angle, and did not commence with the
+stereotyped form of "once upon a time," so dear
+to the days of one's childhood.</p>
+
+<p>"I see you do not take cream in your coffee,"
+he said addressing Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"No, but I like some sugar, not too much."</p>
+
+<p>"It has seemed to me," said the Spaniard, "that
+the seasoning of coffee is in a way an indication
+of character."</p>
+
+<p>"Where the party uses milk in his coffee that
+indicates weakness, does it not, Senor?" inquired
+Jim with a sly look at Jo, but the subtle Spaniard
+was not to be trapped.</p>
+
+<p>"Not necessarily," he replied, "only mildness."</p>
+
+<p>"And when it is taken straight and black that
+means a strong character," remarked Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"You have stated it," replied the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>"But I would like to know how I would be sized
+up?" questioned Jim, "you see I use a little sugar."</p>
+
+<p>"My friend," said the Spaniard with playful
+earnestness, putting his hand lightly on Jim's knee,
+"that shows a character of great strength, tempered
+with mercy and human kindness. All of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span>
+which leads one to speak of a man who was once
+famous in this part of the country, but not popular.
+He always had the reputation for taking a strong
+liquor in his coffee, Fernet, if I remember right.
+His name was Alverado, but I judge that you are
+not acquainted with it."</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Jim, "but I should say that he was
+a very fierce character."</p>
+
+<p>"He was. He was a bandit."</p>
+
+<p>"I thought so," agreed Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"This Don Alverado came from a well known
+Spanish family, of ancient lineage, but impoverished
+fortune. He was such a wild and unruly blade
+that his family were decidedly relieved when he
+left Spain and came to the new world to mend his
+fortune, if not his ways. He landed first in Mexico,
+and after a series of more or less remarkable adventures,
+he came to this part of California. I
+knew him, or rather I knew of his family in Spain,
+and for their sake I made him welcome here at my
+home.</p>
+
+<p>"He was really a charming fellow in manner and
+appearance, tall, slight, with dark eyes and hair, a
+typical cavalier. But the graces of his manner did
+not reach down to his heart, and after a disagreeable
+episode which I need not revive here, he left
+my rancho never to return except as an enemy.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span>
+I heard nothing further of him after his departure
+for some six months. My next introduction to him
+was an unpleasant one.</p>
+
+<p>"It consisted in the loss of a band of horses and
+a herd of cattle which were driven off by a gang
+of raiders, thirteen in number, at the head of which
+was this fellow Alverado. His depredations went
+on for years among the ranchmen in this part of
+California. So resourceful and crafty was this desperado
+that he evaded trap after trap laid for his
+capture.</p>
+
+<p>"He had several very close calls and there were
+numerous battles between the outlaws and the ranch
+owners, but though some of his men were shot,
+he seemed to bear a charmed life. I remember
+one running fight over the plain yonder, when, believing
+me to be absent from home, as I had been,
+but returned unexpectedly from the north, this
+Alverado and his gang made a bold dash to capture
+some horses from a field directly below the house.</p>
+
+<p>"It did not take long to get my men together
+and I gave the bandits a surprise indeed. Nothing
+but the speed of Alverado's horse, a splendid
+black stallion, saved him from capture. We got
+several of his men however. At last there came
+the turning of the lane. Through the treachery of
+one of the band we found that their rendezvous was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span>
+at the head of a small canyon in a range of foot-hills
+several miles south of here.</p>
+
+<p>"You will go through it tomorrow on your way
+south, if you carry out your speed schedule, which
+with your remarkable horses you ought to be able
+to. We came upon the gang about noon, where
+they were resting after a long chase. In a corral
+near by were a number of stolen stock. They
+were not expecting trouble of any kind. Some
+were playing cards, a few cooking, most, however,
+were enjoying the siesta, their leader among the
+number lay under the shadow of a tree, his head
+resting on a saddle, sound asleep.</p>
+
+<p>"There were fifty of us, and we had them surrounded,
+so that there was no chance of escape.
+Alverado himself made a desperate dash, but the
+cordon was too strong. The rest surrendered.
+That afternoon we took the bunch to the lower
+end of the canyon, where there was a giant sycamore
+tree. There we hanged the whole thirteen,
+and by them no more were troubled not even by
+their ghosts."</p>
+
+<p>Jim and Jo expressed their appreciation of their
+host's kindness in entertaining them as he truly
+had done in relating his tales. Then they said
+good night and went to their room.</p>
+
+<p>That night the boys slept in a comfortable bed in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span>
+a quaint old bedroom with roses nodding in at the
+half open casement windows. By the light of the
+candles they could see the strange old and carved
+furniture and tired as they were how they did
+sleep.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning they started hours before daylight.
+"I will be prepared to welcome more of you
+in a few days," said the Senor Valdez, and the boys
+thanked him heartily. Promising to return soon
+they galloped away through the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>All day they rode, hardly drawing rein at all. At
+first through the foot-hills and then over the wide
+plains. Jo had a fresh horse, a powerful black, as
+his other mount could not stand the strain of the
+long trip that meant three score and ten of miles before
+evening.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the afternoon they left the plain and rode
+into the deep and rugged gorges of a mountain
+chain, running East and West. Thence into a broad
+valley leading South-easterly, and about four <span class="smcap">p. m.</span>
+they turned directly South entering a Pass in the
+Southern side of the valley, from which they
+emerged on a plain. Where the trail left the Pass
+stood a large <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'scycamore'">sycamore</ins> tree, when they reached it,
+the Indian messenger rose from its shelter.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXIX</h2>
+
+<h3>A WONDERFUL LEAP</h3>
+
+
+<p>Now without <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'hestitation'">hesitation</ins> we must take up the fortunes
+or rather misfortunes of Tom and Juarez as
+they landed in the darkness upon the mysterious
+island, for our narrative presses to its conclusion.
+Never did they feel more hopeless than on this occasion,
+when they were going to a dubious and uncertain
+fate.</p>
+
+<p>"You boys come with me," called the Captain
+gruffly.</p>
+
+<p>"How about me, Cap'n?" asked Jeems Howell,
+the lanky shepherd.</p>
+
+<p>"What's your business?" inquired Captain Broom
+briefly.</p>
+
+<p>"Looking after the sheeps."</p>
+
+<p>"Then attend to it," said the Captain grimly.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly, Cap'n," replied the shepherd, who was
+incapable of taking offense.</p>
+
+<p>"You come, Jake," called the Captain, to one of
+the sailors, "and be quick about it, we haven't<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span>
+much time." Tom shivered, for in the gloom and
+tired as he was he felt that his time too was
+short.</p>
+
+<p>Then with the Captain in the lead, carrying a
+lantern, which was muffled in his great coat, they
+started, the sailor bringing up the rear.</p>
+
+<p>"Look out sharp, that these lads don't spring
+something on you, Jake. They are a bad lot."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor, "they'll have to
+be quick to get the jump on me, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"It's the Injun one's the worst. Don't let him
+scalp you," warned the Captain jocosely.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm no Indian," said Juarez, hoarsely and utterly
+reckless of his fate, "I'm an American, and was
+proud of it, till I found you were one, you cursed
+yankee barnacle."</p>
+
+<p>"Ho, ho, lad!" roared the Captain, "you won't
+talk so tall in a few minutes. Nothing like a slow
+fire for stewing the nonsense out of a fresh kid."</p>
+
+<p>"How far is this cave of yours, you are taking us
+to, old salt horse?" said Juarez insolently, and utterly
+unwise.</p>
+
+<p>This was too much for Captain Broom, and with
+an imprecation he turned to strike Juarez. This
+was what Juarez was looking for and as the furious
+Skipper whirled facing him, Juarez dodged his huge
+fist, and sent a fierce hook to the Captain's jaw.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span>
+There was anger, desperation and strength behind
+that blow and the Captain fell, striking his head on
+a rock. That time the Frontier Boys scored.</p>
+
+<p>"Follow me, Tom," yelled Juarez, and he sprang
+away through the darkness. It seemed like a hopeless
+undertaking to make an escape with the sea on
+one side and the cliffs on the other, and a desperate
+enemy near at hand. But Juarez thought it
+was best to take a chance. Anything was better
+than captivity, that was seemingly just ahead of
+them.</p>
+
+<p>One thing he was determined on and that was,
+that he would not be taken alive. He ran splashing
+through the water, leaping rocks, with the two
+sailors in fast pursuit. Not far ahead to the right
+was the white dash of the breakers that shut off
+escape in that direction, to the left was the cliffs.</p>
+
+<p>Then before him rose a steep but not precipitous
+rock that had been divided from the main cliff by
+the action of the water. Instantly Juarez abandoned
+his desperate plan of plunging into the sea,
+and without lessening his speed, he sprang up the
+rock, in his moccasined feet.</p>
+
+<p>The sailor who was following most closely, got up
+ten feet when he slipped and rolled violently to the
+bottom, knocking down the one who came after.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span>
+Once Juarez came near falling but he caught himself,
+and kept going up, driven by a desperation that
+seemed to carry him over every obstacle.</p>
+
+<p>"We've got yer, ye little shrimp," exultantly
+cried the sailors at the base of the rock, "Ye can't
+get away unless you fly."</p>
+
+<p>"Shoot the blasted little varmint," roared the Captain,
+who, still dizzy, had struggled to his feet. In
+obedience to the order a flash punctured the darkness
+and there was a roar like artillery echoing
+among the hollow cliffs. A slug of lead whistled
+past Juarez's head.</p>
+
+<p>The boy had now reached the top of the rock and
+was at the crisis of his fate, a distance of ten feet
+separated him from the main cliff, not an impossible
+jump but the foothold was precarious and uncertain,
+and fifty feet or more below were the jagged rocks,
+and enemies equally as hard, but Juarez did not hesitate.</p>
+
+<p>He dodged down just as the sailors fired another
+shot, then he sprang to the narrow pinnacle of the
+rock and bending slightly forward with bent knees
+and swinging hand, poised for the leap.</p>
+
+<p>"The condemned fool is going to jump," roared
+the Captain. "Shoot him on the wing."</p>
+
+<p>But the sailors were not ready and the skipper
+ran between the rock and the cliff to be at hand to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span>
+stamp the life out of Juarez when he should fall as
+he knew he would. Then he leaped, a dark object
+flying through space, his hands caught the edge of
+the cliff, the roots of a small bush held him for a
+moment, then he slipped. Below him was certain
+death.</p>
+
+<p>Two strong hands caught his arms, and he was
+drawn in safety to the cliff above. The Captain and
+the two sailors watched in open mouthed
+wonder, all they could see was the dim figure of
+Juarez crawl in safety over the top of the cliff, but
+they could not determine the means of his escape.</p>
+
+<p>It struck a superstitious chord in their natures
+and the skipper became moody and silent.</p>
+
+<p>Juarez breathlessly followed the lanky figure of
+the shepherd through the darkness, for it was no
+other who had extended the rescuing hand. Hardly
+a word was spoken, and they started off. After going
+a considerable distance they came to a slab hut built
+at the foot of a high range of hills that formed the
+backbone of the island.</p>
+
+<p>Two shepherd dogs rushed forth and gave their
+master a boisterous welcome, and were soon good
+friends with Juarez. Everything in the hut was
+neat; with Indian rugs on the floor which gave a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span>
+warm touch of color to the interior and one side of
+the hut was lined with books.</p>
+
+<p>"What am I thinking of," suddenly cried Juarez
+in dismay, "to leave Tom in the hands of that crew?
+My head is wrong." With that, he grew pale and
+slid unconscious to the floor. He had evidently not
+recovered from the blow that the Mexican had dealt
+him a few days before, and the strain he had been
+under brought on a relapse. The shepherd worked
+over him a long time before he finally brought him
+around.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile what had become of Tom? He had
+not been quick enough to make his escape, and his
+fate was in the balance when the Skipper came up
+to him just after Juarez had disappeared over the
+cliff.</p>
+
+<p>"You don't get away, I promise you that, lad,"
+growled the Captain. Roughly seizing the boy by
+the shoulder he dragged him toward the cliff. Then
+the two disappeared into the entrance of a cave, the
+Captain still holding in one hand his battered leather
+satchel.</p>
+
+<p>The sailor who stood on guard at the entrance,
+saw just then the lights of a steamer that was just
+entering the channel and he rushed into the cave,
+called to the Captain, and in a few minutes that
+worthy appeared. If he felt any alarm he showed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span>
+none, but without any loss of time he assembled his
+crew, got his boat free of land and rowed silently
+out to sea. Whatever he had intended to do with
+Tom, evidently passed from his mind, now awakened
+to the solution of some other problem.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXX</h2>
+
+<h3>IN THE STRAIT</h3>
+
+
+<p>As Juarez and Tom were under the kindly escort
+of Captain Broom and his sailors in the whale
+boat on their cruise to the mysterious island, Jo,
+Jim and the Spaniard had stopped at an old sycamore
+tree, where, as had been promised, the Indian
+messenger was awaiting their coming.</p>
+
+<p>"What news, Yaquis?" asked the Spaniard,
+who knew the Indian well.</p>
+
+<p>"I saw the boat by my own eyes," he replied,
+"heading for the Big Island," pointing to the
+South. "By her smoke she stopped in the Bow Harbor
+near the lower end." So spoke the Indian,
+standing straight and tall. He was a picturesque
+sight with his coarse, black hair cut square and
+long.</p>
+
+<p>"The trail is getting warm," exclaimed Jim
+eagerly. "Where can we get a boat?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is a small boat at the Harbor of San
+Pedro," replied the Spaniard, "that is the property
+of a friend of mine. I doubt not we can have
+the use of it."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"It is now a little after six," said Jim. "How
+far is it to the Harbor?"</p>
+
+<p>"A dozen miles," replied the Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"Is your horse too tired, Senor Sebastian,
+to make it by eight?" The Spaniard's eyes
+flashed.</p>
+
+<p>"Senor, Don Fernando is never tired. Let us
+start."</p>
+
+<p>"We are ready," replied Jim. "Which is the
+shortest cut?"</p>
+
+<p>"I will guide you," was the Indian's response.</p>
+
+<p>"He knows this country like the foot does the
+shoe," assured the Spaniard.</p>
+
+<p>Without more ado, the new guide took the lead
+and they rode at a rapid gait in single file. At
+first they went down a gentle grade for several
+miles until they came to a perfectly level plain
+that stretched in three directions to the sea. At
+the end of the land was a perfectly rounded rise
+like a huge long bolster.</p>
+
+<p>The party of rescuers left the Puebla de los
+Angeles several miles to the East, taking the
+shortest way to the harbor. There was no let-up
+to the speed, if anything, they seemed to be
+going faster, with sweaty sides and shoulders, but
+with unaffected stamina. The going was fine,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span>
+over a springy turf and sometimes they tore
+through wide belts of tall mustard.</p>
+
+<p>Jo and Jim were in fine fettle as the end of the
+journey came in sight and there was promise of
+their coming to close quarters with the pirates and
+possibly rescuing their oppressed brothers from
+captivity. Then, too, the passage of the strait in
+an open boat appealed to their sense of adventure.</p>
+
+<p>About eight o'clock, they came to a ranch two
+miles from the harbor, where Senor Sebastian had
+a short talk with a man who owned the small boat
+that had been referred to. He was perfectly
+willing to lend them the boat and also sent a
+Mexican servant to bring back their horses and
+put them up in his stables. Not forgetting to
+thank him for his great kindness to them, the boys
+turned their horses' heads for the harbor, the last
+lap of their long journey had begun.</p>
+
+<p>In a half hour, they stood on the shore of a
+long, narrow inlet, at a point where a craft was
+moored. From a small boat-house, they got the
+oars, the mast and the sail to be used if the wind
+was right. Then they were ready to get aboard.
+Jim looked at his watch. "It lacks ten minutes of
+nine," he said.</p>
+
+<p>Then they embarked. The boat was not a
+mere row-boat, but was found to be of good size<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span>
+and about equal to a whale boat. It was staunch,
+too, and sea worthy. The mooring was cast off.
+Jim was at the bow oar, and Jo at the one back of
+him on the other side, while the Indian, Yaquis,
+steered. The tide favored them as they glided
+quickly between the banks, and they were not long
+in reaching the channel.</p>
+
+<p>At first, there was a slow, heavy swell, while in
+the lee of the land, that did not bother the boys
+but within a half hour they were in a choppy sea
+with breaking crests, and now the real work for Jo
+and Jim began. Fortunately, the Indian was a
+most skillful oar, and he kept them from being
+swamped. As yet there was no breeze to help
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"This is almost as good as running the Rapids
+in the Grand Canyon," cried Jim joyously.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were in fine fettle for their work, notwithstanding
+their long day in the saddle, and they
+buckled to it with a will, although wet through
+with flying spray. They had enjoyed a good rest
+the night before and after their long ride they
+were glad to get the kinks out of their muscles.
+They really made remarkably good headway
+against the sea and the stoical Indian grunted
+approval of their work. Ah, but it was fine, bat<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span>tling
+with the waves through the darkness, while
+the boat thrashed and beat its way ahead.</p>
+
+<p>The boys stood to their oars and put all the
+strength of their lithe young bodies into the stroke
+and they seemed tireless. The Spaniard had made
+himself comfortable in the bow, where, sheltered
+by a short overhead deck, he was soon fast asleep.</p>
+
+<p>"Wake me when it is time to be drowned," he
+said. "I know it is my fate." Jim remembered
+the Spaniard's melancholy of the day before, and
+laughed heartily, as he promised.</p>
+
+<p>"There are the lights of a vessel," cried Yaquis,
+who, though silent, was ever on the watch.
+"Ahead of us to the Southwest."</p>
+
+<p>"You are right," said Jim. The lights were like
+two faint, moving stars, one aloft and the other
+below.</p>
+
+<p>"That isn't the Pirate ship," declared Jo. "She
+wouldn't be showing any light." After a while,
+the lights of the vessel were suddenly eclipsed, but
+by the dull light of the moon, now risen, the vessel's
+bulk could still be made out.</p>
+
+<p>"She has gone into the further straits," said Yaquis,
+"between the two islands."</p>
+
+<p>A gentle breeze sprang up, but blowing directly
+toward them, it lent no aid. Before midnight,
+the westerly breeze had died absolutely<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span>
+down, and in a not very long time, the sea followed
+suit, leaving a long swell and the rowing became
+much easier. Nothing occurred to break the
+monotony for a while. There was the steady
+grinding of the oars in the row-locks and the lapping
+of the waves in the gloom, for the moon was
+now obscured by clouds. Then, of a sudden, the
+Indian called a halt.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you hear footsteps?" inquired Jim, jocosely.</p>
+
+<p>"A steamer coming, I hear her, no lights. Pull
+hard." In a minute, even the boys could hear
+the beat of her engines and saw the occasional
+flare from her stacks, then a dark form took shape
+through the night. They pulled lustily for they
+knew their danger and who it was. How quickly
+they would be run down, if discovered, and left to
+drown in the wide strait, when Captain Broom
+found out their identity. No wonder they pulled.</p>
+
+<p>"Stop now, draw in your oars. Lie down,"
+warned the Indian.</p>
+
+<p>Not a hundred yards to the Eastward came The
+Sea Eagle and she was on an even line with the
+boat that lay a black patch on the dark water. If
+Captain Broom was not on the Bridge they would
+be safe.</p>
+
+<p>"Boat ahoy," boomed out his voice.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Indian fishermen," cried Yaquis. "Stop, take
+me ashore."</p>
+
+<p>With a growl, the Captain sent his ship ahead,
+paying no attention to the "Indian fisherman" in
+distress. There was a gleam of white teeth as
+the Indian smiled at the hearty congratulations of
+the boys and their glee at his stratagem. Then
+the Spaniard and Yaquis took the oars while Jim
+steered and Jo slept.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span></p>
+<h2>CHAPTER XXXI</h2>
+
+<h3>CONCLUSION</h3>
+
+
+<p>When morning came, they were but a few miles
+from the Northern end of the longer Island and
+the fog was over the whole sky. The sea was
+glassy with a sullen glaze. Nowhere was there
+sign of any steamer or ship. The Sea Eagle
+had made good her escape.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish we had a stiff breeze to help us along,"
+said the Spaniard, who loved not manual labor, as
+did the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"It will come, the strong breeze, soon," said the
+Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"When we make the Island, what are we to do?"
+asked Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"Who can tell, maybe Tom and Juarez have been
+taken along with the Skipper, instead of being
+marooned."</p>
+
+<p>"That's so," replied Jo, and gloom settled down
+upon his spirits, heavier than the fog upon the
+sea.</p>
+
+<p>"We will keep after them," said the never de<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span>spondent
+Jim, "even if we have to chase them
+around the world."</p>
+
+<p>The boat seemed to crawl so slowly along, and
+the boys began to fret in their eagerness to find
+out whether their comrades were on the island or
+not, but they were not yet close enough to make
+out any object upon its surface. Then from the
+West there came a breeze rippling the glassy water.</p>
+
+<p>"Up with the sail," cried Jim. "Here's where
+we fly."</p>
+
+<p>As the breeze strengthened to a wind, they went
+towards the island at a clipping gait. When they
+got within a half mile of the shore, they began to
+look eagerly for some sign of a living being and
+they were disappointed at first, but they drove
+their boat along as near the shore as they dared.</p>
+
+<p>"Say, did you hear that?" cried Jim in excitement.
+"That was a rifle shot, or my name is
+Dennis."</p>
+
+<p>"Three men on the shore," said the Indian, imperturbably.</p>
+
+<p>"I see them," cried Jo, "on that beach yonder.
+I believe it is Tom and Juarez. Hurrah for the
+Frontier Boys."</p>
+
+<p>"It is they," declared Jim as they drew closer,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span>
+"but how Tom has grown. He looks over six
+feet."</p>
+
+<p>"That isn't Tom," said Jo. "It's some one else.
+The short one is Tom." Then he saw Jim grin
+and realized that he had been kidded.</p>
+
+<p>"If this wasn't my busy day," said Jo, "I'd give
+you a punching for being so smart."</p>
+
+<p>Five minutes later, the boat had grounded on
+the pebbly beach and The Frontier Boys were
+again united. There was a great jubilee for a
+while with the Spaniard, the Indian, and the
+lanky shepherd on the outskirts of the family celebration,
+but in a short time they were all good
+friends, each according to his different nature; the
+Spaniard, suave and courteous, the Indian stolid,
+but with his share in the general good-will, and
+Jeems Howell, the shepherd, lankily humorous.</p>
+
+<p>"We met our old friend Captain Broom in the
+channel, boys," said Jim, "steaming along like the
+Devil was after him."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll give him reason to think so," growled
+Juarez sullenly, "if I ever get on his trail."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian, Yaquis, grunted approval, for there
+seemed to be a bond of sympathy between him
+and Juarez, as the reader can well understand.</p>
+
+<p>"How far is that cave, Tom, where the old
+codger left you?" inquired Jo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Just around the bend," said Tom. "Here's the
+rock where Juarez made his famous jump."</p>
+
+<p>"How did you ever get up there?" asked Jo in
+wonder, looking up at the pinnacle of rock.</p>
+
+<p>"You'd a done the same if those fellows had
+been chasing you," replied Juarez, "but if it
+hadn't been for Jeems here catching me when I
+jumped they would have got me after all."</p>
+
+<p>"I was afeard you might have fallen on the
+Skipper and a hurt him. He's a kind of a tender
+plant you know." The Shepherd made this remark
+with a perfectly sober face, in no wise disturbed
+by the hilarity of the boys, over the idea
+of the tenderness of the Skipper.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's the cave," said Juarez, and he led the
+way through an arched opening in the wall of the
+cliff. Picking up a lantern, he went ahead as
+guide.</p>
+
+<p>"This is certainly a dry cave," said Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"It ought to be," said Jeems Howell. "It don't
+rain on this Island more than twice a year, but I
+feel it in my bones that it is coming on to storm
+today."</p>
+
+<p>"I hope you don't feel it in <i>all</i> your bones," remarked
+Jim, quizzically, "because it is liable to be
+a long drawn out storm if you do."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The lanky Shepherd gave himself over to
+spasms of silent mirth at Jim's queer humor.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's where we found Tom," said Juarez.
+"Just discovered him a couple of hours before you
+discovered us."</p>
+
+<p>When the Captain had made his sudden change
+of plans, Tom made himself as comfortable as he
+could for the night, intending to search for Juarez
+in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>"Sometime I hope that this wretched Captain
+will be captured and imprisoned right here," said
+the Spaniard with a cold, vindictiveness.</p>
+
+<p>"If he comes snooping around here again, that
+is what will happen to him," remarked Jim quietly.
+"I suppose, Tom, that he hid some of the loot he
+took from us in this cave somewhere. I bet this
+is his safe deposit vault, all right."</p>
+
+<p>"He went back in there with his small satchel,"
+said Tom, indicating the depths of the cave as yet
+unexplored.</p>
+
+<p>"It will keep," said Jim, "but before I leave this
+island for Hawaii, I am going to search every corner
+of this cave and see if I cannot find our property."</p>
+
+<p>"We discovered it in a cave and perhaps we will
+lose our treasure in a cave," said Juarez, who was
+something of a fatalist.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Don't you believe that we won't find it," declared
+Jim stoutly, "but no work for me for a while. I'm
+going to take a good rest."</p>
+
+<p>"So say we all of us," chanted the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Gentlemen," said Jeems Howell oracularly, "If
+it pleases you, and Christopher Columbus," with a
+wave of his hand toward Jim, "who discovered this
+savage group, we will now adjourn to my castle on
+the distant hillside."</p>
+
+<p>"We are with you," declared those assembled in
+unison, and in a short time they were making
+their way up the slope towards the "castle" on the
+hillside, where they made themselves at home.</p>
+
+<p>All the new arrivals at the island were soon fast
+asleep.</p>
+
+<p>Later after several hours of rest, they occupied
+themselves according to their different ideas of comfort.</p>
+
+<p>The Spaniard amused himself thrumming on a
+guitar, that belonged to one of the Mexican herders
+on the island. Tom got a book, and stretched out
+on a rug forgetful of all his recent troubles, while
+Jim and Juarez borrowed a couple of guns and went
+for an hour's hunting, in the woods which at that
+time covered the mountain ridges of the island.</p>
+
+<p>That evening they were all gathered in the cabin
+before the blazing fire on the stone hearth, while<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span>
+outside raged the Easterly storm that Jeems Howell
+had predicted, with rush of wind and sweep of rain.
+But the slab cabin was storm proof and comfortable.
+It is a good place to leave the boys after their days
+of trial and bitter hardship. In our next book we
+will meet "The Frontier Boys in Hawaii, or The
+mystery of The Hollow Mountain." There, I feel
+confident they will cope with adventures as unusual
+and as remarkable as they have heretofore encountered.
+I am sure that the Reader will be anxious to
+accompany them on their journey. But we must
+permit the Frontier Boys to have the last word, in
+this volume.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think that Captain Broom, will return
+here, before we get away for Hawaii, Jim?" inquired
+brother Jo.</p>
+
+<p>"I certainly do," replied Jim, "and we will be
+right here, to give him a warm and hearty Welcome,
+you can rest assured of that."</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<div class='tnote'><h3>Transcriber's Notes:</h3>
+<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired.</p>
+
+<p><a name="note" id="note"></a><a href="#tn">Page 170</a>, text was both missing and
+repeated in the original. The original read:<br /></p>
+
+<div class='blockquot'>on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-<br />
+iente forged ahead by half a length.<br />
+<br />
+<p>"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. <i>"Don't<br />
+on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-<br />
+horses up.</i> There was Jo sitting quietly on his horse.<br /></p></div>
+
+<p>The italicized text was removed to try to assist readability.</p>
+<p>The remaining corrections made are indicated by dotted lines under the corrections. Scroll the mouse over the word and the original text will <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'apprear'">appear</ins>.</p></div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST ***
+
+***** This file should be named 25473-h.htm or 25473-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/4/7/25473/
+
+Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/25473-h/images/002.png b/25473-h/images/002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53ca2c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473-h/images/002.png
diff --git a/25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg b/25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0da1df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg
diff --git a/25473.txt b/25473.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a6f1d3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6365 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Frontier Boys on the Coast
+       or in the Pirate's Power
+
+Author: Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+Release Date: May 15, 2008 [EBook #25473]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."--P. 204.
+
+_Frontier Boys on the Coast._]
+
+
+
+
+FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST
+
+OR
+
+_IN THE PIRATE'S POWER_
+
+BY CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT
+
+          NEW YORK
+          HURST & COMPANY
+          PUBLISHERS
+
+
+
+
+THE FRONTIER BOYS
+
+By CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT
+
+
+This series tells the adventures of Jim, Joe, and Tom Darlington, first
+in their camp wagon as they follow the trail to the great West in the
+early days. They are real American boys, resourceful, humorous, and--but
+you must meet them. You will find them interesting company. They meet
+with thrilling adventures and encounters, and stirring incidents are the
+rule, not exception.
+
+Historically, these books present a true picture of a period in our
+history as important as it was picturesque, when the nation set its face
+toward this vast unknown West, and conquered it.
+
+           1. Frontier Boys on Overland Trail
+           2. Frontier Boys in Colorado
+           3. Frontier Boys in the Rockies
+           4. Frontier Boys in the Grand Canyon
+           5. Frontier Boys in Mexico
+           6. Frontier Boys on the Coast
+           7. Frontier Boys in Hawaii
+           8. Frontier Boys in the Sierras
+           9. Frontier Boys in the Saddle
+          10. Frontier Boys in Frisco.
+          11. Frontier Boys in the South Seas
+
+          _Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth_
+          _Price per Volume, 50 Cents_
+
+
+          COPYRIGHT, 1909, BY
+          THE PLATT & PECK CO.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+  CHAPTER                            PAGE
+       I. CAPTAIN BILL BROOM            9
+      II. THE COVE AND THE CAVE        16
+     III. THE BARBED WIRE              23
+      IV. PETE'S YARN                  30
+       V. THE FOUR BOYS                37
+      VI. THE HUNCHBACK                45
+     VII. FARMER BROOM                 53
+    VIII. THE CAMP IN THE POCKET       60
+      IX. THE ATTACK                   68
+       X. "HAUL IN"                    76
+      XI. MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE         82
+     XII. THE RANCHERO                 90
+    XIII. A NEW FRIEND                100
+     XIV. THE PURSUIT                 109
+      XV. JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE       118
+     XVI. THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE       127
+    XVII. ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE      135
+   XVIII. A DAY AT SEA                144
+     XIX. THE PASSENGER               152
+      XX. TO THE RESCUE               161
+     XXI. THE BANDITS                 169
+    XXII. RACE WITH THE TIDE          177
+   XXIII. THE ENCHANTED ISLE          184
+    XXIV. IN THE WHITE BOAT           191
+     XXV. IN PERIL                    198
+    XXVI. TWO LASSOES                 206
+   XXVII. ANOTHER FRIEND              214
+  XXVIII. A TALE OF YORE              220
+    XXIX. A WONDERFUL LEAP            232
+     XXX. IN THE STRAIT               239
+    XXXI. CONCLUSION                  246
+
+
+
+
+FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+CAPTAIN BILL BROOM
+
+
+"What devilment has old Bill got on for tonight, Pete?"
+
+The speaker was seated on an old scarred sea chest in a dimly lighted
+forecastle.
+
+"I dunno," replied Pete, "maybe he's lookin' fer a wreck."
+
+"I heard the mate say somethin' about a passel of four boys," put in a
+third man who was laying back in his bunk, "that the skipper was
+a-lookin' for."
+
+"Kidnapping, eh?" said Cales, the first speaker. "Hold 'em for ransom, I
+suppose. Well, the old man has been in worse games than that. I reckon
+the kids' parents are rich and are willin' to pay a high price for their
+darlings."
+
+"You're on the wrong tack, matey," said the man in the bunk. "Cap'n
+Brinks, who landed in San Diego from a Mexican port put the old man
+wise. He told him that those fellars had considerable money and a raft
+of jewels with 'em that they picked up in Mexico."
+
+"Ho, Ho, that's the game, is it," cried Cales, thumping his knee with a
+gnarled fist, "that ought to be easy then."
+
+"Looks so, but it ain't," replied the other, "those four boys have got
+somethin' of a reputation in the southwest. Hard fighters and good shots
+and their leader is a husky lad and about as crafty as a red Injun."
+
+"He ain't met the Old Man yet," said Cales significantly.
+
+"I don't see where you get all your news from, Jake," growled Pete from
+his seat on the chest, "you ought to be a reporter."
+
+"I keep my eyes open and my mouth shet," replied Jake, "any man can get
+larned if he will do that."
+
+"I'd like to have a picter of you with your mouth shet," remarked Pete.
+"It's open even when you are asleep." He dodged just in time to avoid a
+heavy shoe flung from Jake's ready hand that crashed against the wall.
+
+"Don't do that agin," he warned, a red light showing in his eyes. "I'll
+larn you boys that I ain't as old as I looks to be."
+
+Jake laughed harshly.
+
+"You mustn't keep your own mouth open so wide, Pop, cause you'll have to
+swallow your own words if you do."
+
+"I guess I'll never git choked," replied Pete, truculently. "Kin you
+tell me what the skipper means snooping down this coast with no lights
+showing when it's plumb dark? We are liable to sink ourselves or
+Californey all of a suddint."
+
+"Why don't you ask the Cap'n what he is up to?" inquired Cales, "that
+is, if you want some real useful information, Pop."
+
+Pop raised himself up and glared at the speaker.
+
+"I ain't done living," he replied.
+
+"We are navigating pretty careful," remarked Jake. "You can hardly feel
+the Sea Eagle moving."
+
+"Running for the cove, I reckon," suggested Cales, "I'm mighty pleased
+not to be the man at the wheel. Well, I'm goin' to turn in for a
+snooze."
+
+In a brief time the two men were snoring loudly, while old Pete sat
+smoking his pipe, as stolid as a wooden Indian and the forecastle was
+fogged with the smoke, through which the swinging lantern shone dimly.
+The air is stifling so let us go up on deck where we can breathe the
+salt ozone and incidentally get acquainted with Captain Bill Broom, who
+is to occupy such a prominent place in this narrative.
+
+He is well worth meeting, not only as the opponent of our old friend,
+Jim Darlington, but because of his own unworthy but interesting
+character. In those days Skipper Bill Broom was known all up and down
+the coast and beyond. His fame, such as it was, comes down even to this
+recent day.
+
+On deck it is muffling dark, with the stars obscured in some dim way by
+mist or fog. There is a breeze blowing steadily from the broad wastes of
+the ocean. The bulk of the California coast looms dimly on the port bow.
+Not more than a half mile distant can be seen the white rushing forward
+of the breakers towards the rocky coast.
+
+Dangerous work this, navigating the Sea Eagle through the thick gloom of
+the night but the old man knew his business. He was on the bridge pacing
+back and forth like some strange animal and giving hoarse directions to
+the man at the wheel. He knew every inch of that coast, the sunken reefs
+and dangerous rocks.
+
+"Starboard your helm," he growled.
+
+The sailor spun the wheel obediently. And the captain resumed his pacing
+back and forth upon the bridge. Not much could be seen of him, except
+that he was a powerful man, with a peculiar crouching stoop, as if he
+and the sea were engaged in a mysterious game. One striving to get a
+dangerous death-hold upon the other, both wary and using unceasing
+watchfulness.
+
+There was a strange softness in Captain Broom's tread like that of a
+padding panther, but his arms had the loose forward powerful swing of a
+gorilla's. Once he stepped into the chart house to look at something and
+the light of the lamp will give us a square look at him.
+
+"That man a pirate!" you exclaim at the first glance; one who carried
+the blackest name along the coast as a smuggler and wrecker, who had
+brought cargoes of wretched slaves from Africa in the days before the
+Civil War and who had had more marvelous escapes than any man in the
+history of piracy with the exception of Black Jack Morgan! Impossible!
+
+"Why that man is nothing but an old farmer," you exclaim in
+disappointment, when you see him. "He ought to be peddling vegetables on
+market day." But just wait.
+
+True, Skipper Broom had come from a long line of New England farmers,
+hard, close-fisted, close-mouthed men. Young Broom had broken away from
+the farm and followed his bent for sea-faring, but to the end of his
+days, he kept his farmerlike appearance and he affected many of the
+traits of the yeoman which he found to be on more than one occasion a
+most useful disguise.
+
+Let's look at him. That heavy winter cap pulled down on his grizzled
+head gives him a most "Reuben" like appearance. Jeans pants are thrust
+into heavy cowhide boots. The deadly gray eyes soft as granite have
+become red rimmed from fits of fury and hard through many scenes of
+coldly calculated cruelty. A most dangerous customer and I for one, and
+I ought to know, consider that he will have the better of Jim Darlington
+in their approaching encounter--and yet Jim is never beaten until the
+last shot is fired and so it is impossible for me to foretell how this
+contest of wit and daring will come out.
+
+After examining his chart closely, Captain Broom crouched out through
+the door and on to the deck. He took one keen look towards the shore,
+then he approached the helmsman. "Git below, Bill. I'll fetch her in."
+
+The helmsman relinquished the wheel gladly enough and under the
+Captain's masterful hand the Sea Eagle swung slowly around and pointed
+in towards the curving shore.
+
+The dark form of the mate could be seen on the deck below waiting for
+the order that he knew must come soon. The crew of the Sea Eagle though
+subordinate enough were necessarily partners in Captain Broom's wicked
+enterprises so that the discipline was somewhat different than in
+ordinary vessels.
+
+"Call 'em up, Mr. Haffen," roared the skipper to the mate. "It's chore
+time."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," replied Mr. Haffen.
+
+The watch was called on deck and the dark forms of the men could be seen
+in the bow. The pulsing of the Sea Eagle had stopped and with scarcely a
+sound the anchor was dropped into the water.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+THE COVE AND CAVE
+
+
+The starboard boat was lowered into the water. First the mate, then
+Captain Broom and two men got in. The latter were Cales and Pete who
+pulled noiselessly at the oars. The boat glided quietly through the
+silent darkness towards the shore. The Captain was seated in the stern,
+his great bulk crouched forward, but there was nothing inert in his
+posture. His big hands clasped either side of the craft.
+
+In a few minutes the boat grounded softly on the sand of the beach and
+all hands got ashore. Scarcely a word was spoken, though the cove was so
+hidden that there seemed to be no possible chance that the landing of
+the free-booters would be observed. However, Captain Bill Broom took no
+risk of being discovered. He had many enemies upon the coast and inland
+as well. Besides, the State of California had set a price upon his head.
+
+Two thousand dollars was the reward for his capture, and so profitable
+an investment was apt to be realized on sooner or later by some
+enterprising citizen. So Captain Broom took due care whenever he went
+abroad not to attract undue attention.
+
+This cove was a favorite lurking place of his when close pressed, where
+he would take refuge after some daring adventure upon the high seas,
+until such a time as the hubbub along the coast had died down. Sometimes
+he lay in hiding there, with the Sea Eagle screened behind the
+encircling cliffs, waiting like a black spider to rush out and capture
+some unsuspecting craft.
+
+"Pick her up, boys," said the Captain, "you know where she belongs,"
+pointing to the boat.
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," they replied, and putting it on their shoulders they
+carried the boat along a narrow path that divided the thick undergrowth;
+until, after going several hundred yards, they reached a thick screen of
+brush through which they shoved, and came to a cave.
+
+Although so well hidden, the entrance to the cavern was quite high, so
+that the men gained admission without stooping, and going a short
+distance into the dark interior, they placed the boat gently down
+against the wall. There was a constant and heavy drip of water, so that
+there was no chance for the boat to warp, as it would have surely done
+if placed outside in the dry California air.
+
+"I don't like this yere cave," remarked Pete, when left alone with
+Cales.
+
+"What's the matter with it? It's dark and damp, but that is the nature
+of caves."
+
+"It makes me feel creepy, that's all," replied Pete, "and it takes
+considerable to do that."
+
+"Whatever happened?" inquired Cales, grinning, "something terrible, I
+reckon, to make your thick hide chilly."
+
+"It were before your time," replied Pete somewhat reluctantly, "we
+raided a ranch back thar agin the mountings. Senor Sebastian owned it
+and it was said that he could ride all day and never git off his place,
+and that he had more sheep and cattle than thar is folks in Frisco."
+
+"The Captain shanghied him, I reckon," cut in Cales.
+
+"You hold your windlass," commanded the old man in a querulous tone,
+"I'm telling this yarn."
+
+"All right, Pop," said Cales in a conciliating manner, "have it yer own
+way." He was really anxious to hear the story the old man had referred
+to.
+
+"Young fry is always flapping," the older speaker mumbled,--then he
+took up the course of his narrative. "Waal, as I was telling ye, this
+Senor had lots of money and the Cap'n being short of funds thought that
+he could use some of it. So one night we ran into the cove, it was
+blacker even than this. I don't see how the old man ever got the craft
+past the sharks' teeth at the entrance but he did."
+
+"He could have brought her in with his eyes shut," declared Cales. "I
+never have seen his equal for navigating."
+
+"Waal, we made camp here that night, and the next day, the Cap'n with
+some of the gang, left for the ranch and I stayed to look after things.
+Nothing happened that day, and I was dozing by the fire about midnight
+when I heard them coming back. They had the Senor, a fine-looking old
+man with a gray mustache and as cold and proud-looking as they make
+them.
+
+"The Cap'n was furious because he had not been able to lay his hand on
+the coin, and he swore that he would make the old Senor tell where his
+money was or there would be trouble. He took him into this cave and I
+don't know what happened there, and I don't want to know. All I'm sure
+of is that I never saw him come out.
+
+"The Cap'n sent me to the ship to get some chains on the second day and
+he took 'em into the cave. We sailed a couple of days later, but not a
+sign did I see of the Senor. That's why this cave makes me creepy,
+Cales."
+
+They were standing near the entrance, when there came a distinct low
+moan from the interior. It was not a ghostly sound, either. There was no
+mistaking it.
+
+"Did you hear that, Cales?" asked old Pete in a quavering voice.
+
+"Yes," replied Cales, "I heard it all right. It can't be the Senor?"
+
+"No," replied Pete. "He has been dead these years."
+
+"Let's find out," said his comrade.
+
+"There's nothing in this world could make me go in thar," declared Pete
+solemnly, "besides, it's agin the Captain's orders."
+
+"Well, I'm going," said Cales either more brave or less experienced than
+the other. "It sounds to me like a woman's voice."
+
+"And I'm goin' to git," declared old Pete, tottering towards the path.
+
+"You're a brave old pirate," said Cales contemptuously, and with that he
+went slowly back into the cave. He had to go cautiously, for beyond a
+certain point he was not acquainted with the interior. He could feel the
+moist ground under foot and he kept his hand stretched out, not knowing
+what he might run against in the dense damp darkness.
+
+Then, suddenly, his hand struck a stone wall. Groping his way, he turned
+a sharp corner and followed along a low narrow passageway that obliged
+him to stoop. Then came the sound of the moaning just ahead. Jack Cales
+was a brave man but it was all that he could do, to keep from turning
+and running in panic for the mouth of the cave. But though his
+determination had received a severe shock, it did not turn to flight.
+
+He saw a faint light ahead, spreading a glow at the end of the passage
+as he came nearer. Then he saw something that held him stone still with
+a clutch of weird fear. He had reached the end of the narrow passage,
+and dimly made out a domed room in the rock, white with translucent
+encrustation.
+
+He struck a match. About him, before, to the right and to the left he
+could see forms all of ghostly white, some crouching, others standing.
+Hardly had the light flared up than it sizzled out. Some drops of water
+falling from the roof had extinguished the blaze. Then was repeated that
+awful sound of distress.
+
+Cales groped around almost in a frenzy of terror. Where was the exit
+from that awful room? Round and round he went, and all the time there
+were strange whisperings in his ears, and unseen hands seemed to clutch
+his clothes. Once he slipped and was trembling so that he was hardly
+able to get to his feet. Just as he did so, something swept past him
+like a breath of wind. Rendered desperate he made another dash, and this
+time if he had not found a passageway, he felt that he could have
+knocked a hole through the wall. Then he stood at the mouth of the
+cave.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE BARBED WIRE
+
+
+Just at that moment was heard the hoarse voice of Captain Broom booming
+through the darkness outside.
+
+As Cales turned about, some furry animal sprang past him dashing between
+his legs and nearly upsetting him.
+
+"On deck, you scoundrel, come out of there," called the Captain.
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," came the reply of Cales in a strangely weak tone,
+though he was now more concerned by the possible penalty to be meted out
+by the Captain for disobedience of orders, than by thought of the
+undetermined occupants of the cave. If it were a cat it was certainly a
+good joke on old Pete. This was, had they but known it, the swift
+solution of the mystery.
+
+Oddly enough the Captain said not another word, a fact suggestive to
+Cales that there was something amiss in the cave and the little company
+at once took up their line of march. Captain Broom was in the lead,
+followed by the mate, then Cales, with old Pete bringing up the rear.
+Just as they started Captain Broom extinguished the lantern and they
+took up the trail in total darkness. Every precaution would now be
+necessary for they would soon be in a region where the very name of
+Broom was execrated with bitter hatred, and every bush would grow a
+poniard if his whereabouts were known.
+
+It was evident that the skipper was as good a guide on land as he was a
+pilot at sea, for he led his little party at a steady gait by a winding
+cow-path through the thick undergrowth. He doubtless knew this region
+thoroughly, for he had made more than one raid in this locality.
+
+It was soon to be determined, however, that they were not the only ones
+abroad that night.
+
+They had walked in silence for some time, well on to two hours, when
+they came to an open space, with the irregular form of a live oak on the
+southeast corner. Then Captain Broom stopped suddenly, his keen eyesight
+which no darkness could baffle had discerned some object moving out from
+the shelter of the oak tree.
+
+It came slowly with uplifted black arms and white hair falling around
+its face. There was a terrible intensity in its advance across the open
+space, withal that it moved so slowly. The figure stopped directly in
+front of Captain Broom.
+
+"Get out of my way, you hag," he roared, but for the first time in his
+life a certain tremor crept into his voice. Perhaps he was growing old.
+He drew back his arm as though to strike the woman in his path.
+
+As he did so Jack Cales stooped and picked up a round rock at his feet,
+intending to hurl it, not at the woman but at the skipper, for he alone
+of the party divined the possible cause of this poor woman's dementia.
+But his interference was not necessary for it seemed as though the
+Captain's arm was paralyzed. He declared afterwards that some invisible
+hand had seized his arm.
+
+Then, in a loud, wailing voice the woman put a curse upon the slayer of
+her husband, for this spectre was none other than the Senora Sebastian.
+It was terrible to hear her and it must have sent a shiver into the soul
+of the hardy skipper.
+
+When she had finished, the woman moved past them and vanished in the
+direction of the ranch. For a full minute the line of men stood without
+moving a step and in absolute silence, Captain Broom with his arm
+upraised as he had lifted it to strike.
+
+Then, without saying a word, he took the first forward step and the
+others followed him through the darkness.
+
+"Say, Cales," growled Pete in a low voice, "what was it you found in
+that cave? My old timbers are shaking yet."
+
+"Keep your old jaws shut," yelled the Captain, who had wonderfully keen
+hearing, when anything was spoken that concerned him.
+
+"How do you suppose the old man heard me?" mumbled Pete to himself. He
+dropped back a pace or two, then whispered, "The old man must be crazy.
+He is making direct for the Sebastian ranch."
+
+"Do you reckon that these four boys he is looking after, are located
+there?" asked Jack.
+
+"I dunno," replied Pete, "you can calkerlate on one thing though and
+that is that the skipper knows pretty nigh where those lads are. One of
+his messengers, a one-eyed, twisted greaser, came aboard the other day,
+and was gabbling in the Captain's cabin. Then the next thing I knew we
+was under sail, and came kiting down to the cove."
+
+Just then the party halted at the confines of a four strand barbed wire
+fence. This was the first indication that they were entering the great
+ranch property that formerly belonged to the Senor Sebastian, the
+elderly man the Captain had made captive, and which was now the property
+of his only son.
+
+"Now, lads," said the leader of the expedition, "Here's a chance to make
+yourself small. This yere barb is like a devil fish if it once gits a
+holt of your panties--it won't let go."
+
+"That's so, Captain," said the mate, a generally silent and saturnine
+man.
+
+"I reckon you know, mate," said the Captain. "The last time we was
+through these parts, and that some considerable years ago, this same
+fence got a holt of yer pants and wouldn't let go. I never heard you
+talk so much and so earnestly in my life before. You want to be more
+keerful this time."
+
+The mate simply grunted by way of reply and, lying close to the ground,
+he very gingerly and carefully worked his way under the wire and thus
+escaped his mentioned former unpleasant detention. He then held the
+lower wire up as high as he could until his chief had wiggled under.
+
+Pete was the only one of the party who was seriously detained, for Jack
+Cales had slid under as slick as an eel. But Pete's joints were old and
+rusty and the venomous wire got a clutch on his coat and his pants.
+
+"What's keeping you back?" inquired the Captain, gruffly, as Cales and
+his comrade did not put in an immediate appearance.
+
+"Pete has got caught, sir," said Jack.
+
+"What are you doing there, you old barnacle?" inquired the Captain as he
+came back to the fence.
+
+There was a certain odd comradeship between the skipper and the old salt
+who had been with him since his African days. Both were New Englanders
+and had come from neighboring homesteads.
+
+"Just resting, sir," replied the captive.
+
+It certainly did have something of that appearance, for Pete had kept a
+decisive grip on his old black pipe with his stubby teeth and was
+puffing at it in apparent peace and resignation.
+
+"Want me to git you a piller?" inquired the skipper, sarcastically.
+
+"Thank ye, sir," replied Pete imperturbably.
+
+Meanwhile the mate had been at work with deft fingers and he finally
+succeeded in extricating the old man and putting him upon his pins.
+
+"Now if ye are sufficiently rested," proposed the skipper, "we will hike
+along."
+
+This they did. Their way now lay between two stretches of fence that
+enclosed a road not much traveled for there were only faint traces of
+wheels in the turf. It was probably not a public highway but belonged to
+the great ranch.
+
+Everything seemed smooth sailing now, as there was no more barbed wire
+to be immediately met but Pete soon made himself prominent again. He
+was rolling along with that gait peculiar to a sailor when aboard land,
+when he gave a sudden spring and clutched Cales convulsively in the
+back, giving that individual a big scare.
+
+"Dad burn it, boys. I've stepped on a rattler." An investigation was
+made very carefully and Captain Broom quickly picked up a short piece of
+rope.
+
+"I'll rattle you," he cried, touching up the old man with the rope's
+end.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+PETE'S YARN
+
+
+They went along steadily through the darkness in an almost directly
+easterly direction. Being now clear of the brush they could make good
+time on the springy turf.
+
+"How far are we now from the ranch, Pete?" inquired Jack.
+
+"Too durn close to suit me," replied Pete. "I can't tell exactly for
+these ranches are as big as all outside creation, but I guess we must be
+as close as a mile to the buildings."
+
+"I reckon the Captain is going to walk up to the front door and ask for
+accommodations."
+
+"Wouldn't s'prise me a bit, if he done that," replied Pete querulously.
+"The old man ain't lacking in nerve. Back thar was the first time I ever
+seen him hang back in my long experience with him."
+
+"When the old lady was speaking her piece? Suppose I ask him how much he
+made when he captured the Senor," suggested Cales, who had recovered his
+flippant humor.
+
+"I wouldn't git gay, lad," said old Pete, warningly. "She is just as
+liable to haunt you in your black spells."
+
+"Don't have 'em, uncle," replied Cales.
+
+"You collect the material for 'em when you are young," said the old man
+wisely, "and they come out of your bones like rheumatiz when you git
+old."
+
+"Somebody is coming back of us," suddenly whispered Cales.
+
+"Take to cover, lads," ordered the skipper, who was as quick to hear as
+the younger man. The only cover was a high and thick growth of wild
+mustard growing alongside the fences.
+
+Quickly they stepped from the open road into the shelter of the tall
+mustard. They had not long to wait. There was the jingle of spurs and
+the thud of horses' feet walking slowly along. Next came the voices of
+men talking.
+
+"It is useless, Senor, to try and find her, I fear," replied one man to
+the other.
+
+"It seems so," replied the other sadly. "My mother always seems to be
+worse when the time of the year approaches that my father disappeared.
+In spite of all our care she will escape."
+
+They had now arrived at a point opposite where the free-booters were
+hidden. The man who had last spoken struck a light and lit a cigarette;
+the instantaneous glare showed the dark handsome face of the Spanish
+type. There was the high-peaked sombrero, the striking clothes, the
+intent face and then the light died suddenly out.
+
+"Ah, Manuel," said the young man to his companion, "if I could only once
+lay hands on that cursed Gringo," and he ground his teeth in fury,
+unable to express himself.
+
+"Humph, Gringo," grunted the Captain, disdainfully.
+
+"Did you hear anything, Senor?" asked Manuel.
+
+"Nothing."
+
+"I was sure I heard something," asserted his companion. They had reined
+in their horses and sat listening quietly for a few seconds.
+
+"It was probably nothing but a calf by the roadside," said the Senor.
+
+The other shook his head doubtfully, then they turned and rode on
+towards the rancho.
+
+When they were safely out of range, the party of pirates took up their
+line of march once more.
+
+"So the greaser took me for a calf," remarked Captain Broom. "If it had
+been you, Jack Cales, there might be some excuse fer such a mistake."
+
+"Aye, sir," replied Cales, glumly.
+
+"Getting kind of close to the ranch, ain't you, Cap'n?" ventured old
+Pete.
+
+"I thought of leaving you there, Pete, while the rest of us corralled
+those kids. You are getting too old for these long tramps."
+
+No more remarks were heard coming from the direction of Pete, for he was
+not at all sure but that the Captain might, in a moment of irresponsible
+humor, do just as he threatened without regard to the consequences.
+
+After they had gone on for a mile from the point where the two men had
+overtaken them, Captain Broom led his party away from the road in a
+southerly direction, once more undergoing the harrowing experience of
+getting through the barbed wire fence. But this time Jack Cales was
+especially detailed by the Captain to get old Pete through so there
+would not be any unnecessary delay.
+
+It was evident that they were getting into a different section, a short
+time after they left the road, for they began going up and winding among
+little rocky hills. At last they came to a stopping place. They climbed
+up an elevation and sat on some rocks among a group of dark trees.
+
+"Now, lads, take it easy," said the Captain, "ye have had quite a
+footin' and when morning comes, there will be some more ahead and at a
+faster gait."
+
+"Gosh, Cap'n," declared old Pete, "It's the most walking we've done
+together since the time we corralled the last bunch of niggers on the
+west coast of Africa."
+
+"We certainly made money that trip when we sold that cargo of coons to
+the traders on that Palmetto Island below Charleston. But we will clean
+up about as much money when we round up those four boys and twice as
+easy. Tell the two lads about that trip, Pete."
+
+The old sailor sat on a rock, and taking out his bag of tobacco filled
+his short black pipe with one thorny thumb, then he commenced his
+narrative, with the glow of his pipe lighting up his weatherbeaten face.
+
+"Well, orders is orders, and the Cap'n wants me to tell this yarn. I
+might just as well begin it, lads. I never knew any good to come to
+sailormen cruising around on dry land any more than on this trip." He
+cast a wary eye at Captain Broom, but that worthy merely grunted and
+Pete resumed his story.
+
+"Our clipper lay at anchor in a wide bay with only a couple of men on
+board and the Captain, myself and six men trailing inland for to find a
+village of naygurs that our guides had told us of.
+
+"It certainly was hot and steamy going through the jungles and every
+once in a while a big snake as large as my leg would crawl across our
+path and rustle away into the undergrowth. Once I felt one of 'em
+a-twisting and rolling under my foot like a big log that had came to
+life. I guess I must have jumped twice as high as my own head and I lit
+on the back of one of the naygurs that was guiding us.
+
+"He didn't know what struck him; probably thought it was a tiger for I
+sunk my hooks into his hide. He let out a yell and went ripping and
+snorting through that jungle and me not having sense enough to let go,
+until a grape vine about as thick as a manilla rope chucked me under the
+chin and I fell flat on my back and I guess that naygur is still
+running."
+
+Here the captain who was evidently enjoying the narrative hugely, burst
+into a volcanic roar of laughter.
+
+"I can see yer yet, Pete, on that bounding buck of a nigger, and him
+a-hiking through the jungle and a-yelling like a wild Injun."
+
+"I remember you got out of the way mighty quick," said Pete, "when you
+heard us a-coming behind you."
+
+"It certainly was a curious spectacle," said the Captain, "but go on
+with your yarn, Pete."
+
+"The further we went into the jungle the worse it got. The mosquitoes
+fairly ate us alive and they wern't the only cannibals in those woods by
+any means. There was a tribe of man-eaters beyond the Big River and we
+didn't try to capture any of them. They wern't our stripe of bacon.
+
+"We went on for six days, with the monkeys chattering over our heads all
+day and the mosquitoes serenading us at night. Talk about birds, there
+was a whole menagerie of them and their colors beat the handkerchiefs
+that these greasers wear around their throats and you can't get ahead of
+that for color.
+
+"One night we got in range of the village we were after and there was a
+great pow-wow going on. There was a big fire in the circle of the grass
+huts and some big black bucks were doing a dance around it. Just then I
+saw--"
+
+"Hold on, Pete," said the Captain in a low, gruff voice, "somebody is
+coming our way."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE FOUR BOYS
+
+
+"Hey, Jim, where are we going to make camp?" It was his brother Jo's
+genial voice.
+
+"Not until we can strike water," replied Jim. "No more dry camps for
+me."
+
+"I don't think much of the coast range, or the Sierras, either." It was
+Juarez Hoskins' well-remembered voice, with its rather low, deep tones.
+
+"Give me the Rockies every time."
+
+Juarez was nothing if not loyal to his mountains.
+
+"I don't think any of the mountains are much to brag of."
+
+It is hardly necessary to say that it is Tom Darlington who is now
+speaking, for the discerning reader is pretty well acquainted with his
+style by this time.
+
+"There's always something to look out for," continued Tom, "if it isn't
+Indians it's rattlesnakes, and you have got to choose between a
+cloudburst or no water at all. Give me the East every time."
+
+"You make me exhausted talking about the East," said Jim. "Why didn't
+you stay there when you were there? I had just as soon take a chance
+with a rattlesnake as with an ice cream soda."
+
+"Tom would like to _play_ Indian," cut in Jo, "with turkey feathers
+sticking up from a red flannel band around his head. And creeping upon a
+flock of sheep pretending that they are antelope and that cows are real
+live bears."
+
+"Yes," said Jim, "you have lined it out all right, Jo. Then when they
+were tired of playing Injun, Tom and his little playmates could pretend
+that they were Daniel Boone's men with wildskin panties on."
+
+"Shut up, boys," said Juarez, coming to Tom's rescue. "What's the use in
+rubbing it in? The East is all right for some folks and if the boys back
+there can't have real adventures they have to do the best they can.
+After all, Jim, you are an Eastern boy. You can't get away from that."
+Jim writhed under the implication but replied good humoredly.
+
+"You're right, Juarez, old chap, but I can't help stirring up Tom once
+in a while. It is good for him too. It keeps his liver active, so he
+won't get bilious."
+
+"Juarez has got more sense than you two put together," said Tom.
+
+"Forget all about it now, Tommy," urged Juarez good-naturedly, getting
+the aforesaid Tommy by the nape of the neck with one vigorous brown hand
+and giving him a shake.
+
+Thus under Juarez's straightforward management the family quarrel was
+abated.
+
+"We might just as well ride now, boys," said Jim. "The horses are good
+and rested and we will soon be going down grade instead of up."
+
+The horses had been following in single file back of the four boys. They
+were to be trusted not to cut up any shindigs or to wander from the
+narrow mountain trail. The boys had had them a long time and together
+they had gone through the numerous hardships and adventures. They were
+as perfectly trained as Uncle Sam's cavalry horses.
+
+The horses halted as the boys dropped back to their sides, and they
+swung into the saddle simultaneously. Jim rode in the lead on a splendid
+gray, with a powerful arching neck, strong shoulders and hindquarters
+made for speed. Him, he called Caliente. Next rode Tom on a pretty bay.
+Then Jo on a black of medium size but finely built for speed and
+endurance. Juarez brought up the rear on his roan, a sinewy animal with
+a broncho strain in him which was liable to crop out at unexpected
+moments.
+
+It is to be noticed that there was a certain formation in the way the
+column rode. Jim, the strong and resourceful in front, and Tom, the less
+experienced and capable, following, forming the first division. The
+second division was composed of Jo and Juarez.
+
+Juarez having an equally important position with the leader, for he was
+rear guard, a more trying position sometimes than being in front for in
+their travels through dangerous regions, it was the man in the rear who
+was more apt to be cut off by the wily Indians. But the cool and crafty
+Juarez was not likely to be caught napping.
+
+Even now you notice as they ride along through the comparatively safe
+region of the coast range that Jim and Juarez are ever on the alert,
+glancing this way and that, halting to examine some peculiar mark on the
+trail, and not a motion of tree or bush upon either mountain slope
+escapes their attention. They had lived too long in the midst of
+treacherous enemies, Indians and outlaws, to be taken off their guard.
+They had been in Mexico on a venture the outcome of which was all their
+fondest dreams could wish for. Their expedition over, Tom was for going
+home, to at least deposit the treasure they had gained, but the others
+had outvoted him, and now the long pleasure trip to Hawaii was their
+object.
+
+Now, if they but had known it, they were riding to meet the most deadly
+danger that they had yet encountered. For as you know, Captain Broom and
+his party were advancing to meet them. In an open or running fight, we
+know perfectly well that the boys could take care of themselves, but in
+the skipper of the Sea Eagle, they were to meet a far more dangerous
+opponent than in Eagle Feather, described in "The Frontier Boys in
+Colorado" or Cal Jenkins in Kansas and in Mexico as detailed in
+"Overland Trail" and in "Mexico." In compliance with a determined plan,
+they were now on their way to Hawaii.
+
+Not only had Captain Broom the craftiness and cruelty of the Indian, but
+the cool, hard judgment of the New England Yankee, coupled with a
+knowledge of their possessions, supposedly limited to themselves alone.
+The Mexican spy, who had reported the route the boys were going to take,
+had given the game into his master's hands.
+
+"I wonder what has become of our one-eyed greaser friend," said Jim, "we
+haven't seen any sign of him since he gave us the shake a week ago at
+the hunting camp. I kind of thought we might run across him again."
+
+"It's good riddance to bad rubbish," said Juarez in a surly tone. "If I
+had my way I'd hang him to the first oak tree on general principles and
+on account of his personal appearance. I bet he is a treacherous little
+rat."
+
+"He isn't very pretty, that's a fact," admitted Jim, "but he is a useful
+little beast about the camp and can do a lot of chores."
+
+"I kind of like to hear him play his guitar," put in Jo, "and sing those
+Mexican tunes. They certainly sound pretty."
+
+"He's a picturesque beggar too," remarked Tom. "Just the kind that in
+the old days would have been made a king's jester. They dressed 'em up
+in a blazing bright style then. That hump would have made his fortune."
+
+Tom, as you remember, was an authority on Romance, and as pertaining to
+which he always carried two favorite volumes, much worn by hard travel
+and frequent usage, but which no amount of ridicule by his brothers
+could make him give up.
+
+"Have it your own way," acceded Juarez, "but he is not the sort of
+animal that I would recommend for a household pet."
+
+"Well, he is gone," said Jim, "so we don't need to worry about him."
+
+"I don't know but that I would a little rather have him in sight," said
+Juarez. "Then you know where he is."
+
+Jim laughed good-naturedly at the prejudice that Juarez showed against
+the little greaser and put it down to his darkly suspicious nature
+acquired by his life among the Indians. It would have been better if Jim
+had taken more stock in his comrade's suspicions. Now, Jim was not to be
+caught napping when once an enemy had declared himself, but it was his
+nature to be open-minded and unsuspicious.
+
+The four Frontier Boys were riding up a winding trail through a narrow
+mountain valley, having reached a point almost level with the summits,
+which rose several thousand feet above the eastern plain. It had been a
+hard, all day climb, and the horses were tired and the gray dust was
+caked upon their sweaty riders.
+
+Let us take a look at our old acquaintances, Jim, Tom, Jo and Juarez, to
+see if they have changed any since we saw them last. They are dressed
+about as we have always known them. In gray flannel shirts and pants of
+the same color, moccasins on their feet and on their heads battered
+sombreros with the flaps turned back.
+
+Their coats are tied back of the saddles, and their shirts open at the
+throat for the air is hot and dry in that California mountain valley.
+Their rifles are swung across their shoulders held by straps, revolvers
+in the holsters at their hips.
+
+Jim sits in the saddle tall and sinewy, grown somewhat thinner by
+constant exercise and by the drying effect of the desert air. His skin
+is baked to an absolute brown. Juarez, too, is black as an Indian and he
+rather looks like one with his hair quite long and of a coarse black
+fibre. The boys look a little fine-drawn but sinewy and strong and fit
+for any adventure.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE HUNCHBACK
+
+
+The shadows were already falling on that side of the range as the boys
+rode slowly into a narrow pass. The shade was a decided relief from the
+glare of the California sun that they had encountered all day.
+
+"Gosh, but I should like to have a cool breath from the Rockies,"
+declared Juarez with emphasis, "This sort of a climate makes me tired.
+Nothing but the sun staring at you all the time. It goes down clear and
+comes up with the same kind of a grin on its face."
+
+"It will be cooler when we get on the other side," said Jim,
+encouragingly, "and it won't be long now."
+
+"I hope we will strike water on the other side," remarked Jo. "I'm tired
+of looking at that bald-headed stream down there," indicating the dry
+blistered bed of a former water-course.
+
+Nothing more was said until of a sudden they rode to the top of the
+Pass, and saw a new landscape spread out before them.
+
+It was a broad and beautiful view, with the sun striking the wide
+Pacific, with a blazing glare of silver and below the wooded slope of
+the mountains, stretched an apparently level plain, where roamed
+countless cattle, and innumerable sheep. It had all the breadth
+characteristic of the Californian landscape.
+
+"That's a pretty good looking view," remarked Jim admiringly. He would
+have been still more interested if he could have seen a trim-looking
+black vessel in a small cove directly west but a good many miles
+distant.
+
+"I wonder if it isn't going to rain," said Tom. "See those clouds
+rolling in over the ocean."
+
+"Rain!" ejaculated Jim with superior wisdom, a wisdom that appertains
+particularly to older brothers, "I guess not. Those are fog clouds.
+That's a sure sign in this country that it won't rain."
+
+"Well, I'm glad to see them, anyway," said Juarez. "It looks sort of
+stormy even if it isn't."
+
+It was restful, there was no question about that, the change from the
+constant glare of a white sun in a blue sky, to the soft damp grayness
+of the fog. It was already rolling over the level plain towards the
+mountains and, in a short time, a high fog was spread over the whole
+sky.
+
+The boys had ridden down the western side of the range for a distance of
+a half mile, when Jim suddenly waved his hand backward in a sign of
+caution for the column to halt. He leaned forward, looking intently in a
+northwesterly direction to a point on the opposite side of the mountain
+valley. Juarez followed the direction of the leader's look with a keen
+gaze.
+
+"I was sure that I saw some one slipping through the undergrowth on the
+opposite side over there," Jim finally said, "but I could not make sure
+whether it was a man or some sort of animal."
+
+"I noticed the bushes shaking," said Juarez, "but I did not see
+anything."
+
+"Might have been a brown bear," hazarded Jo.
+
+"They do have them in this range," put in Tom.
+
+"Perhaps it is the bear that we hunted for two days on the other slope,"
+said Juarez, "and he has come to give himself up."
+
+"We had better keep our eyes open," advised Jim, though he did not take
+the trouble to unsling his rifle. "Jo, you and Tom watch the upper side,
+Juarez will take care of the trail in front."
+
+"All right, boss," said Juarez, cheerfully.
+
+"How much reward, captain, for the first glimpse of the lost child?"
+inquired Jo.
+
+Jim paid no attention to this sally, but kept his eye on the trail
+ahead. The trees were quite thick on either side of the trail and as
+dusk was coming on, it was difficult to make out any object clearly.
+
+Just as Jim rode around a turn in the trail, Caliente reared and leaped
+to one side and a less skillful rider would have been thrown.
+
+"Easy, old boy," said the rider, patting his horse's neck. Caliente
+stood trembling and snorting and watching a curious object that was
+struggling up the bank towards the trail.
+
+It was hard to tell what it was, whether man or beast and the dusk only
+served to make it more obscure. Then the object scrambled up on to the
+trail and Jim at once recognized the dwarf Mexican with his high-crowned
+sombrero and his velvet suit richly slashed. With his crooked back and
+one eye, he was anything but a prepossessing-looking creature. Caliente,
+when he, too, recognized who it was, put back his ears and rushed with
+bared teeth for the Mexican.
+
+Spitting out a curse, the greaser jumped to one side with a marked
+agility, and Jim succeeded after a struggle in bringing his furious
+steed to terms, but he had his hands full and there were not very many
+men who could manage Caliente when he got into one of his rages.
+
+"Hi! Manuel," (every Mexican was Manuel to the boys), cried Jim, "look
+out for my Tiger, he wants to eat that velvet suit of yours."
+
+"Si, Senor," called Manuel from a safe station on a granite rock. "He is
+a tiger as your Honor says."
+
+One would have expected to hear the crooked little greaser speak in a
+harsh croaking voice, but instead it had a rich sonorous quality.
+
+"Do you know where there is any water in this country?" asked Jo. "We
+are as dry as a desert."
+
+"Certainly, Senor, I will show you," replied Manuel. (It was true that
+Manuel spoke in Spanish of which language the boys had a working
+knowledge, due to their sojourn in the southwest. But I shall put his
+words in English.) "Where is Senor Juarez?" inquired the dwarf. "I do
+not see him."
+
+"The Senor is still with us," replied Jim, gravely, "but you cannot see
+him on account of the dusk, but you might hear him," he added in a lower
+tone.
+
+It was true that Juarez was growling to himself about the greaser for
+whom you know he had a cordial antipathy, a feeling which was
+reciprocated by the Mexican.
+
+"Lead on, Manuel," urged Jim, "we want to make camp before morning."
+
+"But, Senor, the tiger will eat me up," objected the Mexican.
+
+"I will take care of Caliente. He won't bite you. Go ahead."
+
+"Si, Senor," assented Manuel.
+
+Then he jumped down from the rock and took the trail at a discreet
+distance ahead of Jim's horse, who was held in check by his rider though
+his temper seemed in no wise abated. There was something sinister in the
+figure of the Mexican as he led the way down the trail.
+
+All in black, except the gray of his hat with its golden cord and the
+tinsel of his clothes. There was something malignant in his make-up and
+even the unimaginative Jim was affected by the presence of the Mexican,
+while Juarez was very uneasy, and asked Jo and Tom to allow him to move
+up next to the Captain. This they did, though it left Jo as rear guard
+on that rocky trail.
+
+He seemed quite isolated but he had become sufficiently enured to danger
+and though he kept a wary eye, he was not nervous. The boys had
+unholstered their pistols and Juarez kept a straight eye on the moving
+shadow in the darkness ahead. At the first sign of attack or treachery,
+he was going to get that particular Manuel.
+
+"I've got my eye on the little varmint," said Juarez in a low voice to
+Jim. "He may be leading us into an ambush."
+
+"Oh, I guess not," said Jim, with a note of hesitation in his voice. "We
+have got to find water anyway. The horses are suffering for it, and this
+beggar can show us where we can locate it."
+
+Just then Manuel threw up his hand with a shrill whistle that had every
+malignant intention in it. Juarez raised his pistol just ready to fire,
+when the Mexican laughed shrilly.
+
+"Senor Juarez very nervous. I just stretch and whistle a little and he
+want to shoot."
+
+A peculiar smile came over Juarez's face, but he said nothing. All the
+stolid Indian in his nature came to the surface. He merely grunted
+contemptuously at the Mexican's remark and this made the volatile Manuel
+uneasy in his turn, for he wanted to realize that his malice had struck
+home, but Juarez did not give him that satisfaction. There was a sort of
+hidden duel between these two, the subtle Mexican and the crafty Indian
+nature of Juarez. It remained to be seen who would win.
+
+The four Frontier Boys went silently along down the dark canyon, each
+one occupied with his own thoughts and the ill-omened Mexican guide in
+the lead. Juarez kept a sharp lookout on either side of the trail
+expecting an ambush. His horse seemed to feel something of the strain
+his rider was under, as a horse will. Once he shied at something he saw
+in a clump of bushes, and nearly went off the trail. It was only with
+the aid of Juarez's horsemanship that he clawed his way back to safety.
+The Mexican was much amused at this incident, and Jim gave him a sharp
+call down.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+FARMER BROOM
+
+
+We must now return to Captain Broom and his escort, whom we left sitting
+on a hill covered with trees near the Sebastian rancho. Old Pete's story
+had been interrupted by the skipper's warning,--"Somebody is coming our
+way."
+
+There was no question about that, they could hear the someone coming
+towards the hill whistling cheerfully. Then the form of a man could be
+seen, coming up the slope of the elevation.
+
+"I wonder where those altogether blessed cows are," he was heard saying
+in Spanish, but of course, this is a free and not a literal translation.
+
+"They are generally hiding under these trees," he continued. The sailors
+kept absolutely still and old Pete covered the bowl of his pipe with his
+hand so that its light might not discover them.
+
+"Carambe!" cried the Mexican as he stopped about three feet from the
+recumbent Captain, "I fear my good master's cows have been smoking, not
+like nice Mexican cows, a cigarette, but a pipe like a vile gringo.
+Come, get up, you black brute," noticing the big bulk of the Captain for
+the first time, and he hauled off and gave the skipper a hearty kick on
+the haunch.
+
+Never was there a more surprised greaser in the whole ungainly length of
+California for this apparently gentle cow that he kicked, (not for the
+first time either) suddenly turned and grabbed him with a powerful hand
+before he could yell, though he was so frightened that he probably could
+not utter a squeak. Another hand got him by the throat.
+
+"Take me for a cow, did you, you bespangled Manuello?" roared the
+Captain, and he waved the aforesaid Manuello about in his great grip as
+though he had been a rag.
+
+"No use killing the beggar, Captain," said the mate. "Maybe he can tell
+us something." The Captain let the Mexican drop and he lay on the ground
+perfectly inert.
+
+"He won't be able to say much right away," said the Skipper.
+
+It was now getting light, the first signs of dawn showing above the
+mountains. As the darkness was drawn away, they could see their position
+more clearly and there came the sounds of the morning from the direction
+of the ranch houses. The barking of dogs, the crowing of roosters, and
+the call of human voices.
+
+"I guess, lads, it's about time for us to have something to eat," said
+the Captain, "because we have got to do some tall climbing today and I
+want to get an early start."
+
+An expression of disgust showed itself on old Pete's face at the idea of
+more walking, which the Captain was quick to note.
+
+"How would you like to stay here, Old Bones, and look after Manuello?"
+said the skipper. But Pete shook his head.
+
+"I'll stay by the ship, Cap'n," said the old fellow stoutly.
+
+"Durn my buttons," said the Captain, whose oaths were as mild as his
+actions were vicious, "if you ain't a good old barnacle, Pete. I
+wouldn't think of leaving you in such company as this," and he gave the
+prostrate Mexican a shove with his foot. Manuello looked up at the
+Captain with an evil eye and a muttered curse.
+
+This roused the fury of Captain Broom and he held him off from the
+ground as if he had been a rat, his jaws working ominously and a look in
+his eyes that made the Mexican shrivel.
+
+Nothing was said, not even by the Skipper, and the others watched him
+fascinated as he glared at his victim, and even the iron composure of
+the saturnine mate seemed to be moved partially aside. The Mexican began
+to whimper and moan as his eyes shifted to avoid the terrible ones of
+the Captain. He was not suffering any special violence, but a strange
+tremor filled the soul of the Mexican, in the grip of the grizzled
+giant.
+
+As the greaser began to cry, the Captain gave a roar of laughter and
+threw him aside upon the ground, about all the humanity he had shriveled
+out of him. He lay there absolutely without any power of motion in his
+body.
+
+Just then the crew of the Sea Eagle became aware of the fact that a
+horned animal with big brown eyes was looking at them. All the farmer in
+the nature of Captain Broom came to the surface.
+
+"By Gum," he exclaimed, "if here ain't a bovine cow looking at us. I
+ain't milked one for forty years, but I'm not afeard to try. 'Member,
+Pete, when we used to milk the cows back in old Connecticut on the farm.
+After working in the hay all day, I'd go down in the side hill pasture,
+that was so steep that you had to hold on with your toes and your teeth
+to keep from sliding down to the brook."
+
+"You bring it back to me just like it was a living picture," said Pete,
+his hard face softening under the gentle showers of memory.
+
+"Then I'd drive the black and white one that was breechy, and the red
+mooley, the yaller and white that gave the richest milk. I'd drive them
+into the stanchions in the old barn, with the ground floor stoned up on
+the side, where it was sunk into the hill."
+
+"But it was winter, Cap'n," said Pete, "that it was interesting doing
+the chores," and he blew reminiscently on his fingers, "snow two feet on
+the level and the sun a piece of blue ice in the sky. A condemned sight
+better place than Californey, where you don't feel no more alive than a
+enbalmed corpse."
+
+The Captain began now a series of manoeuvres to get within range of
+one of the cows so that they might have fresh milk for breakfast. He
+managed it finally, and he certainly looked like a peaceful old farmer
+as with his gray head against a fat red cow's flank, he milked into a
+large tin cup. Pete selected a black mooley and soothed by the man's
+persuasive manner, she consented finally to give down a thin blue
+stream. But the saturnine mate was less successful as he knew much more
+about navigating a ship than he did about cows.
+
+Finally after much awkward manoeuvring, he got a cow cornered and
+began operations upon the left side with the result that the cow landed
+upon him with her hoof and sent him sprawling on his back to the great
+delight of the Captain.
+
+"Hurt bad, Bill?" inquired the Skipper with mock sympathy, "I'm afeard
+that you will never make a farmer."
+
+"I never calkerlated to," replied the mate. "It ain't my line of
+business."
+
+"Don't tell me that," said the Captain, "I can see that for myself. Come
+up here and I'll give you a drink."
+
+They had scarcely finished their simple breakfast when Jack Cales gave a
+sudden alarm.
+
+"Cap'n," he cried, "I see two men legging it our way. They are making
+straight for the hill."
+
+"I guess they are coming to see why Manuello doesn't show up with the
+cows," remarked the Captain, "we don't want to stir up this hen roost as
+we've got other chicken to fry. So we'll git."
+
+"Take the greaser?" inquired Jack.
+
+"You and the mate fetch him," said the Captain.
+
+Just as the two men were mounting the hill, the Captain and his crew
+made a swift sneak down the opposite slope, and were soon making their
+way through the bush towards the foot-hills. In a minute they heard the
+cries of the two men as they drove the herd of cows towards the home
+ranch for the morning milking. The sun had now risen above the eastern
+range just in front of them and was blazing down upon the plain and the
+sea beyond. There was something exhilarating in the air in spite of the
+heat.
+
+"We don't need the company of that greaser any further," said Captain
+Broom, after they had made some headway up a canyon back of the ranch
+buildings. So they took some rope grass, tough as manilla, and tied him
+firmly, and, after having gagged him, they left him to be found later by
+some of his countrymen.
+
+Then they toiled steadily up the trail of the canyon, until about noon
+they reached a pocket in the canyon where there was a pool of clear
+water fed by an invisible spring. Coming to meet them were four boys
+riding up the trail on the other side of the range.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+THE CAMP IN THE POCKET
+
+
+Under the guidance of the Mexican dwarf, the four boys came at last to a
+halt. It seemed as if the canyon down which they had been riding had
+come to an end for there was a wall of rock directly in front of them.
+
+"Down there, Senor, is a pool of clear water," announced the Mexican.
+
+"Glad to hear it, Manuel," said Jim heartily.
+
+"Did you ever see a picture, Jim," put in Juarez significantly, "of a
+pool where the thirsty animals have to come to drink and before they get
+their noses in the water the hunter shoots them?"
+
+But nothing of this dire nature happened and in a few minutes the
+famished animals were pumping the delicious water down their long, baked
+throats.
+
+"My Gracious, but that tastes good!" cried Tom, drawing in a long,
+gasping breath, after he had been drinking steadily for about a minute.
+"It makes my head swim."
+
+"I should think it would," said Jo, sarcastically, "considering the
+amount you have drunk."
+
+"You weren't far behind," grumbled Tom. "I thought that you were not
+going to leave enough for the horses."
+
+"I don't especially like this place to camp in," said Jim. "We are not
+accustomed to get in a pocket like this. But it is too late to pull out
+tonight and the horses need a rest, so we will keep guard."
+
+"Better drown the brown rat first," remarked Juarez to Jim. But the
+latter only shook his head and laughed.
+
+The camp was made about twenty feet east of the spring in a small grove
+of slender trees backed by a high wall of steep granite, down which
+poured a waterfall in the rainy season.
+
+The fire was built upon a flat rock in the centre of the grove where
+there was no danger of it catching in the grass and bushes which were
+dry as tinder. If once a mountain fire was started at the end of the dry
+season there would be no stopping it until it had devastated the whole
+country.
+
+The light of the fire showed the usual cheery and active scene that goes
+with making camp. How many times the Frontier Boys had gone through
+these preparations it is impossible to say. They had camped on the
+plains of Kansas, in the mountains of Colorado, on the Mesas of New
+Mexico, the banks of the Colorado river, and the Pampas of Mexico. Now
+we find them in the coast range of California.
+
+It was not an especially dangerous country in which they were camped,
+nothing to compare with parts of Colorado and Mexico, but never were
+they in greater danger than at the present moment and this camp promised
+to be their last together, except they had unusual luck.
+
+There was a traitor in the company, and even now four pairs of hostile
+eyes were watching them as they moved in the light of the fire. The
+Captain of the Sea Eagle and his three trusty men were hidden in some
+bushes at the top of the pocket on the western side.
+
+Juarez and Jim busied themselves first in looking after their horses.
+Removing the saddles they rubbed down each animal thoroughly, clear to
+the fetlocks and then gave them a good feed of grain. Jo and Tom were on
+the supper committee and busying themselves making preparations for a
+square meal. Manuello, who had been with the boys on the other side of
+the range and was accustomed to help in odd chores about camp, now
+offered to aid in getting the supper.
+
+"I will make the coffee with your permission, Senor Jo," he proposed.
+
+"Do you savvy it all right, Manuello?" inquired Jo.
+
+"Ah, yes, Senor. I can make such coffee as the Holy Father would be
+pleased to drink," he replied with fervor.
+
+"Not too strong because it keeps me awake," protested Tom.
+
+"No, no, Senor Thomas," replied Manuello with a sweeping bow, "the
+coffee I make is very soothing. It will give you a long, soft sleep."
+There was an undertone of subtle irony that was entirely lost upon the
+two straightforward boys.
+
+"That's a good fellow, Manuello," said Jo, cordially, and he handed the
+coffee pot filled with water to the Mexican, who went about the
+preparation of it with a deftness that showed that he knew what he was
+about. Not one of the boys saw him slip a white powder into the coffee
+pot. It quickly dissolved and the coffee began to bubble innocently
+enough under the eyes of the hunchback Manuello.
+
+Juarez and Jim just then came back from looking after the horses which
+were fastened near the wall of rock. As soon as Juarez saw the Mexican
+watching over the coffee pot, his eyes narrowed with suspicion.
+
+"Who made the coffee?" he asked Jo, bluntly.
+
+"Manuello," replied Jo.
+
+"The Senor will find the coffee truly delicious," said the hunchback
+with a bow, "only the Mexican knows how to keep its aroma when boiling
+it."
+
+"Humph," grunted Juarez, and he went deliberately to the fire and lifted
+the coffee pot off and poured its contents on the ground.
+
+"The American does not care for the aroma of your Mexican coffee," he
+said coolly.
+
+The Mexican merely gave a peculiar hitch to his shoulder, spat on the
+ground and turned away apparently mortally offended as he, no doubt,
+was. That part of his scheme had been blocked by the craftiness of
+Juarez, but the Captain might make good where his spy had failed.
+
+The Mexican sat back in the shadow on a rock smoking a cigarette, while
+the boys ate their supper of beans, meat, bread and coffee. He was the
+skeleton at the feast as it were, not only his malignant humor made
+itself felt, but there was a sense of depression that they could not
+shake off, try as they would.
+
+This was so unusual that they could not account for it. As a rule, they
+were jolly and even when danger was impending, they felt a certain
+confidence and assurance, but not so tonight.
+
+"What makes us feel so on the bum tonight, do you suppose?" asked Tom.
+
+"Maybe this canyon is haunted," proposed Jo, who had an imaginative
+streak in him.
+
+"I tell you the way I figure it," said Jim. "We are not used to camping
+in a hollow like this, for before this we have always selected a place
+that we could defend, and though there is no particular danger from
+outlaws or Indians in these mountains, we can't shake off our old
+habits."
+
+"I believe there is something in that," acquiesced Jo.
+
+"It's that rat over there," said Juarez loudly.
+
+The Mexican laughed coolly and insolently, and lighted another
+cigarette. This would have maddened an excitable person, but Juarez was
+in a stoical mood and he contented himself with flinging a bone that he
+had been gnawing at, carelessly over his shoulder, almost striking the
+Mexican in the face.
+
+This set that peppery individual wild and he tore around considerably,
+tearing his hair, stamping his feet and sputtering with maledictions at
+the insult that had been offered him.
+
+"I am no dog that you can throw a bone to," and he sizzled off into a
+string of unpleasant remarks.
+
+"Here you, Manuello," roared Jim, rising to his feet and standing over
+the Mexican, "not another yelp out of you."
+
+Manuello had a respect for this big American lad much as he despised his
+simplicity and he sobered down. Besides he had not finished his work for
+the night. He had failed to get the sleeping drug to the boys in the
+coffee and now he must be ready to help his master, Captain Broom of the
+Sea Eagle, in some other way.
+
+There was a person whom he feared and admired absolutely and he had been
+a most useful spy and agent for the Skipper in certain nefarious plots.
+It was well for the little hunchback that no one knew of his share in
+the betraying of old Juan Sebastian some years before.
+
+"You will have the first watch, Jo," ordered Jim. "It is now nine
+o'clock. I will relieve you at eleven and stand guard until two. Juarez
+from two until five and Tom can have the short watch."
+
+According to this arrangement, Jim and Juarez would be on guard during
+the danger hours.
+
+How many times in the past had the boys stood guard over their camp. Was
+this to be the last guard? There were the old Kansas days, when they had
+to be on the watch against horse thieves. Then came the dangerous crisis
+in their Colorado experiences, when they had to guard against the wiles
+of the Indians. And most exciting of all, perhaps, the night in old
+Mexico when they camped on the trail of the outlaws. I wonder if Jo, the
+first on duty, thought of these old times that night. Probably not, his
+mind being fully occupied with the business in hand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE ATTACK
+
+
+So the three boys rolled into their blankets with the saddles for
+pillows and dropped immediately to sleep as they were very tired from
+the long, hard ride. They lay at different points around the fire, which
+was allowed to die down as the fog seemed like a warm gray blanket over
+the whole landscape.
+
+Jo sat on a log by the slowly dying fire, with his rifle on his knees
+looking into the darkness and not far from him lay the Mexican a mere
+dark lump on the ground, apparently asleep, but keeping a wary eye on
+all around. Imperceptibly he crept nearer to where Jo was sitting, but
+he did not have the weapon he would have preferred in his hand, the
+stiletto, which was as natural to him as the fangs to a rattlesnake.
+
+But it did not suit the long-headed Captain Broom to have the boys
+killed. He wanted their life as well as their money, but in a different
+sense than the adage has it. From what he had heard of them, they were
+boys of unusual mettle and varied acquirements. If caught young, he
+could train them to good purpose. If they proved worthless, he would
+hold them for ransom.
+
+So Captain Broom had told Manuello briefly and to the point that there
+was to be no rib-sticking and the Mexican would have thought as soon of
+disobeying the commands of the Evil One as of going contrary to the
+instructions of the Captain. So as he crept towards Jo, he held not a
+poniard in his clenched hand, but a heavy weapon like a black-jack, made
+of leather with a weight at the end.
+
+Jo, however, spoiled his first attempt, for when the greaser had got
+within striking distance, Jo got up and went down to the pool to get a
+drink. If it had not been so dark, when they arrived, the boys would
+have seen tracks around the pool that would have aroused their
+suspicions. But everything seemed to work against them this time.
+
+Jo stooped down at the brink and scarcely put his thirsty lips to the
+water when some instinct of warning made him look quickly around and he
+saw a small dark object directly back of him.
+
+"Pardon, Senor, for startling you;" it was the voice of the dwarf, "but
+I, too, was very thirsty. It is in the air."
+
+"You needn't have been so quiet about it," said Jo, crossly. This little
+rat always had a way of baffling and irritating him, because he did not
+have Jim's force, which could beat down the dwarf when occasion demanded
+it, or the stoicism of Juarez, which blocked the hunchback.
+
+"I came softly, Senor," said the Mexican, imperturbably, "because I did
+not wish to disturb the slumbers of the Senors who are resting."
+
+"Get down and drink, then," said Jo, who, though he realized that the
+Mexican was up to some hidden deviltry, did not know how to meet him.
+Jim and Juarez would have knocked him out of the camp if they had
+discovered him trailing them, with a warning that he would be shot if he
+put in an appearance again.
+
+While the Mexican was pretending to drink, Jo satisfied his thirst at a
+point of the pool where he would be safe from a sudden attack by the
+hunchback. For Jo was not a fool by any means. Then he got to his feet
+and with the Mexican ahead of him, he saw to that, he made his way back
+to the camp.
+
+Scarcely had Jo seated himself upon the rock again than he heard a stick
+snap upon the mountain side above the horses, so he got to his feet to
+investigate.
+
+"You can stay where you are, Manuello," said Jo. "I don't need your
+company this time." The Mexican laughed softly to himself.
+
+"I hope the Senor Americano will not get lonesome," he said.
+
+Jo made a careful search in the direction of the sound but found no sign
+of a human being lurking among the trees. Though he felt exceedingly
+nervous, he was unable to account therefor or give a reason.
+
+Very quietly he went the rounds, so as not to awake the boys, who,
+however, were sleeping heavily. He found the horses all right standing
+with drooping heads as though dozing, Jo's black with his neck over
+Tom's bay, as these horses were great chums. But Caliente and Juarez's
+roan were not sociable and kept strictly to themselves.
+
+Then Jo returned to the rock where he had been sitting. He stirred the
+dying fire so that it sent up a feeble spurt of flame by the aid of
+which he looked at his watch. It lacked a few minutes of ten. The
+Mexican had taken up his old place on the ground watching for his
+chance. He was anxious that the attack should take place during Jo's
+watch for he had his doubts in regard to Juarez or the redoubtable Jim
+proving easy victims.
+
+All this time, Captain Bill Broom and his crew had been keeping watch
+upon their intended victims from the top of the cliff above the pool.
+They could see every move from the time the Frontier Boys had arrived
+until they lay down near the smouldering fire.
+
+"They are a husky lot," was the Captain's first comment. "That tall
+fellar, I guess, is a horse tamer and Injun fighter."
+
+Some time later when the altercation occurred about the coffee and
+Juarez expressed his opinion about the Mexican, the Captain could
+scarcely keep from haw-hawing right out.
+
+"Them fellars have got some dis'pline," commented the saturnine mate.
+
+"You're right they hev," said the Captain.
+
+"That lad don't know how to handle my pet rattlesnake," was the
+Captain's comment when the Mexican trailed Jo to the drinking pool.
+After Jo had returned from making his rounds and had resumed his guard
+again, the Captain decided that the time had come for action.
+
+"Now, lads," he ordered, "pull off your shoes and the first man that
+makes a sound will get his neck cracked. Knock 'em out, if necessary,
+but no killing this time."
+
+Then they started, the Captain in the lead, and old Pete bringing up the
+rear. They had had a good many hours in that vicinity and had made a
+path from their hiding place to the soft dust trail. So they moved in
+their sock feet without a sound. There was an oppressive stillness in
+that dark canyon under the heavy blanket of fog.
+
+Already it had began to lower and as the sailors advanced with
+snail-like slowness the heavy white fog settled down, filling the canyon
+with its white opaqueness. You could not see five feet in front, and the
+moisture beaded itself upon the eyebrows and mustaches of the men.
+
+This dense fog was a great help to the attacking party. They had now
+crawled half way down the main trail, when Pete came near putting all
+the fat in the fire, for his eyesight was not overly keen, and the fog
+made it more difficult for him. He did not see a round stone poised on
+the edge of the trail until it rolled down towards the pool.
+
+Although every sound was deadened by the fog, still the watchful Jo
+heard it distinctly. He got quickly to his feet and, with soft
+moccasined tread he went in the direction of the sound, his pistol in
+his hand.
+
+No sooner had the stone fallen than the Captain motioned the mate to
+halt. This signal was repeated to Jack Cales, who was so hidden by the
+fog that he could not see the Captain. He stopped suddenly so that old
+Pete tumbled over him, making some noise.
+
+The Captain almost had a fit of apoplexy because he did not dare express
+himself at this interesting juncture. Jo had heard the noise on the
+trail and his suspicions centered in that direction. Noiselessly he went
+up with slight footprints in the damp dust of the trail. The Captain
+waited his coming, crouched behind a bend in the trail.
+
+Then Jo saw a huge figure rising suddenly out of the fog in front of him
+and, before he could fire, a great hand gripped for his throat, but if
+he could not shoot in defense, at least he could give his comrades
+warning. He fired one shot, and then he was overpowered.
+
+Jim and Juarez heard it instantly. Then Manuello got in some of his
+work. Before Juarez could rise, he struck him a vicious blow upon the
+head that stunned him, rendering him unconscious. Cold with fury, Jim
+picked up the rat of a Mexican before he could land a blow upon him,
+whirled him over his head and dashed him upon the ground.
+
+Then he sprang through the fog in the direction of the shot. He heard Jo
+groan as the ruffians overpowered him and he leaped up the trail blind
+with a fighting rage. The Captain had just got up from the struggle
+with Jo, who lay as good as dead in the trail.
+
+Then Jim hurled himself upon him. Powerful though he was, the Captain
+could not withstand the sinewy lurch of that sudden attack and together
+boy and man crashed from the trail over rocks and through brush until
+with a fearful impact they struck the trunk of a pine tree.
+
+The mate sprang swiftly down to the rescue of his fallen master. He was
+a strong, sinewy man and knew how to act in an emergency.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+"HAUL IN"
+
+
+The jar of the fall had knocked out the Captain partially and Jim had
+risen to give him the coup de grace, when he heard the rush of the mate
+coming down through the fog. It was a strange sensation hearing your
+enemy but not able to see him.
+
+Then the mate plunged into view, a dark ball through the opaqueness. He
+could not have stopped if he had so desired and it was evident that he
+did not wish to. For, with lowered head, he came for Jim as he would for
+an ugly sailor.
+
+Jim stopped him with his shoulder and ripped in a right uppercut with
+his keen hard fist that would have stopped the heart action of an
+ordinary man, and it sent the seasoned mate back upon his haunches,
+partially dazed. Feeling the Captain squirming back to life, he planted
+a back blow with his heel in the latter's stomach that took the wind out
+of the Captain's sails for the time being. The mate, a really hardy
+individual, had made good use of the brief respite and, picking up a
+heavy stick, came for Jim with it.
+
+The latter dodged the blow aimed at his head and it glanced off his
+shoulder. Then he closed with the sailor, struggling to put him out.
+Three seconds more and Jim would have landed the proper blow, had not
+Jack Cales arrived upon the scene under cover of the melee. Before Jim
+could turn to meet this new assailant, a stone crashed against his
+head--and the frontier boys had lost.
+
+The Captain had now recovered sufficiently to get on his feet, and the
+fallen Jim was kicked until the Captain himself called a halt.
+
+"Wait till we get him on board ship, lads," he said, "and we will finish
+this job."
+
+"Better get the other two, Cap'n," advised the mate.
+
+So they dragged the prostrate Jim to the foot of the trail near where
+the drinking pool was and went to look for Juarez and Tom. They saw a
+small black object crawling towards them through the fog.
+
+"What's this a coming?" asked Jack Cales.
+
+"Why, it's my Mexican ferret," said the Captain. "What's the matter,
+Manuello?" he asked as he turned him over none too gently with his foot.
+
+"The big Senor throw me over his head and on the ground. I think I
+crack the world open," he explained. The Captain roared with laughter.
+
+"Where is the rest of this dangerous gang?" he asked.
+
+"I will show you," he said, struggling to his feet. The presence of his
+master gave him strength and confidence. "This way, Senor Captain."
+
+He brought them to where Juarez lay upon the ground, partially held up
+by Tom, who had been crying and endeavoring to bring his comrade back to
+consciousness from the ugly blow that the Mexican had given him. I am
+sure that none could blame Tom for tears upon this occasion for it was
+calculated to try the heart of the stoutest.
+
+"Why, this boy looks like an Indian," said the Captain regarding Juarez
+closely.
+
+"He lived with the Indians when a boy, Senor Captain," volunteered the
+dwarf, who by subtle means of his own had become possessed of the
+history of the four boys.
+
+"He don't seem to be much more than a boy, now," said the Captain. They
+had not paid much attention to Tom because he seemed a mere kid, but the
+hunchback was not to be caught napping, for he had worked around back of
+Tom, and as the latter aimed his revolver at the Captain, having worked
+it cautiously out of his holster, the dwarf grabbed him in the nick of
+time else the expedition would have lost its head.
+
+Instead of being infuriated as one might have expected, the Captain was
+decidedly amused at the temerity of the youngster, for that is all Tom
+appeared to him, and, therefore, he did not hand him a beating.
+
+"The nerve of the little rooster," guffawed the Captain. "I'll make a
+real pirate out of you."
+
+Tom struggled wildly, but it was no use, as Jack Cales and the mate
+disarmed him. Just then there came a loud yell from up the trail.
+
+"Haul in, Cap'n!" It was Old Pete's well known and melodious voice.
+
+"Jack, go and see what the old cuss wants," ordered the Captain. "I
+expect that the lad up there is trying to kidnap Pete."
+
+When Jack arrived on the scene, he found that the Skipper had guessed
+right. For Jo had been playing possum and was not nearly so badly hurt
+as he had appeared to be.
+
+He came near escaping from his keeper and it was only by a quick forward
+lunge that Pete had grabbed him and then occurred a short struggle in
+which Pete had called for help and just as Jo had wrestled himself
+loose, Cales appeared and grabbed him. It took both Pete and Cales
+quite a while to subdue him.
+
+Finally it was accomplished and they made him go down the trail, one on
+either side. At the foot of the incline he saw the bruised and battered
+form of Jim lying on the ground and a big lump came into his throat.
+
+"You fellows will pay for this," he said, rendered desperate by the
+sight of Jim. But his captors only laughed, not realizing that the
+Frontier Boys were apt to keep their word.
+
+Then they joined the main gang and Jo saw to his dismay that Tom and
+Juarez were in the coils as well as himself and that Juarez, too, had
+been laid out and appeared dazed and only partially conscious of what
+was going on. Thus there was little hope of escape with the two leaders,
+Jim and Juarez, done for.
+
+"Better search these beggars for their money, Captain," suggested the
+mate.
+
+"It hadn't slipped my mind," replied the Skipper.
+
+Now the money and the jewels that the boys had found in Mexico were in
+leather belts around their bodies. These were soon in the possession of
+the Captain, but the crew knew full well that they would receive their
+share and thus it was that the Skipper gave promise of living to a ripe
+old age instead of being murdered for his money.
+
+"It's about time to make a start, Cap'n," announced the mate, and the
+Captain consulted his watch by the light of a lantern. He found that it
+was half-past eleven.
+
+"We won't be so long going back," he said. "We will use their horses."
+
+This was easier said than done, for when any of the crew approached
+Caliente, that noble animal became transformed into a tiger and as he
+came for them with bared teeth or whirled and kicked out with his heels,
+they decided that discretion was the better part of valor and they left
+him alone. Sailors at best are not very clever horsemen.
+
+"Let me have a chance and I'll quiet him for you," volunteered Jim
+gruffly. "I don't want to see you poor fellows eaten alive."
+
+"My lad," said the Skipper solemnly, "I'm no spring chicken and you
+can't catch me with any such chaff."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE
+
+
+The other three horses proved more tractable than Caliente, and after
+some skirmishing they managed to get their new ships rigged up with the
+saddles and other tackle. Now as soon as they got their cargo aboard,
+they would be prepared to set sail and to cruise over the plains. (I
+must use this nautical language out of respect for Captain Broom and his
+crew.)
+
+As I have said before, sailors are poor horsemen and when it came to
+making fast the double cinches, they were quite at sea, where sailors
+should be, perhaps. Old Pete came near getting his head kicked off by
+pulling the back cinch too tight, but he and Captain Broom profited by
+their youthful experience on a New England farm, so the horses were
+finally all saddled and bridled and ready for a flight--except Caliente.
+He was to be left marooned in the lonely canyon.
+
+It was surprising to Jim and his comrades how quietly Juarez's roan took
+matters, but there is no relying on a broncho, because he always does
+the unexpected, and the Captain was so pleased with his behavior that
+he decided to ride the animal himself.
+
+"Now, that's what I call a well broken hoss," he said. "I ain't so sure
+of the black so I will let you cruise on him, Jack, being the most
+active. I don't know what I shall do for Pete, unless I can find him a
+rocking-horse."
+
+"What are you going to do with the boys?" inquired the mate. "Have 'em
+walk?"
+
+"They can ride their pack mule," said the Captain grimly.
+
+So Jo, Juarez and Jim were securely fastened on the patient mule, while
+Tom rode behind the mate upon his own horse, but no longer as master.
+Then the queer procession started up the trail through the dense fog.
+The Captain was in the lead, followed by the mate with Tom, then the
+mule with Pete and the Mexican dwarf guarding the animal and its cargo,
+while the active Jack Cales was the rear guard. It was exactly twelve
+o'clock when they weighed anchor and sailed from the harbor or cove in
+the mountain canyon.
+
+The three boys said little to each other. They did not waste their
+breath with threats of what they would do to their captors later on, but
+accepted the situation with true western stoicism. But you may be sure
+that their minds were active even if their tongues said little.
+
+They were so securely tied that there was no chance for them to make a
+move as their arms were corded tight to their bodies and their feet were
+tied under the belly of the mule. Unless they had been experienced
+riders they would have had a difficult time of it. But it was terribly
+humiliating, especially under the insolence of the malignant Mexican.
+But he did not dare do them any actual injury, because the Skipper had
+given him a warning which he did not dare to disregard. Finally, old
+Pete put an end to his slurring remarks to the prisoners, so he had to
+content himself with ugly looks and frequent expectoration wherewith to
+express his disgust.
+
+Before they reached the foot of the trail, Jack Cales changed with Pete,
+though the latter demurred at first, at boarding the strange black craft
+with four legs, but finally consented under the urging of Jack and the
+warm recommendation of the boys, who had taken somewhat of a fancy to
+the old sailor, since he had shut up the Mexican in their behalf.
+
+"He won't hurt you, Pop," said Jim, "he is a good horse. Any lady could
+ride him."
+
+"I ain't no lady," replied the old fellow suspiciously, as he slowly
+and stiffly mounted, while Jack held his head, that is to say, the
+horse's head, not Pete's.
+
+"What did he do that for?" inquired Pete, anxiously, preparing to
+dismount.
+
+"Stay on, you old Barnacle," roared the Captain from the head of the
+procession, for though he could not see anything in the rear, still he
+seemed able to keep an instinctive tab on his old comrade Pete.
+
+"That horse is all right, Pop," said Jo, "and I ought to know. I've
+ridden him a good many hundred miles. Don't tickle him with your heels,
+that's all."
+
+"I guess that's what I've done," admitted Pete.
+
+Then the procession resumed its march with Pete as rear guard, riding
+with due caution and circumspection as though his craft was loaded with
+dynamite and liable to explode at any time. Jack Cales tried to quiz the
+prisoners on the mule in a friendly way, but they would not relax in
+their attitude of grim, if not sullen, defiance towards their captors.
+
+Captain Broom need not think that his prisoners would ever accept any
+conditions from him. Doubtless, he thought that these boys might be
+trained to help him in his business for he appreciated their courage
+and fighting ability, but he did not fully understand what stuff the
+frontier boys were made of.
+
+The procession of pirates and their prisoners had now reached the foot
+of the range and were in close proximity to the ranch, but everything
+favored the plans of the Skipper of the Sea Eagle. The fog became denser
+when they reached the level plain so that it was scarcely possible for
+the rider to see the ears of his horse.
+
+Every sound was deadened, so that they could have gone directly past the
+ranch houses and not even the dogs would have heard them. But the
+Captain was determined to take no chances, and as soon as the party were
+free of the canyon, he bore off toward the south, making quite a
+circuit.
+
+Anybody but an experienced navigator would have been lost in the fog
+upon the plain, but you could not lose Captain Broom either on the high
+seas or the low plains. They passed between two wooded hills, which the
+reader will have to take on faith as he cannot see them. Then across a
+gully, on the other side of which they came to a barb wire fence.
+
+This did not stop them long, as the Captain cut it and they rode
+through. From the footing which was about all that could be observed,
+they appeared to be in a pasture land with a gentle slope towards the
+sea. The fog did not diminish in thickness and the boys determined to
+escape. Here was their chance, if they could be said to have one.
+
+"Here's where we make a break," said Jim to Juarez. "Guide the mule
+alongside of Tom. Then we will run for it." Jim did not say this in so
+many words, but he had ways and means of indicating to Juarez, who was
+tied directly back of him, by a sign and poke language which Juarez was
+quick to seize.
+
+It seemed at every turn that his experience with the Indians was a help
+to him. The mule was a protege of Juarez and with a word he could guide
+it in any direction that he wished it to go. The fog was one thing that
+favored them. The Mexican could scarcely be seen and Jack Cales stalked
+along looking like a giant through the mist.
+
+He had grown somewhat lax through the long march. This was the time, if
+ever. Jim gave Juarez the signal that all was ready. A quick word to the
+mule and he trotted out from his place in the column, knocking over the
+Mexican and before Cales was fairly awake to the situation, he was
+obscured by the fog.
+
+In about two seconds he had hove alongside of the horse that the mate
+was on. Tom was foot-loose, and no sooner did he see Missouri's long
+ears through the fog, than he was ready for action.
+
+"Jump, Tom," urged Jim. It took only about two seconds for Tom to
+execute the manoeuvre.
+
+"Halt!" roared the Captain, and he tried to turn the roan to capture the
+runaways, but right here, the broncho strain in the animal showed
+itself.
+
+He began to buck and never in all his experience had the redoubtable
+Captain Broom ever been on so choppy a sea. It was hard to distinguish
+fog from whiskers. At the second hunch upward, the Captain shot into
+space. The boys did not tarry to watch for his descent. A word from
+Juarez to the mule, and Missouri turned directly south just as Jack
+Cales came rushing up.
+
+"Touch him with your foot, Tom," said Juarez, meaning the mule, not
+Cales. Tom's heel reached the right spot and up flew the mule's hind
+feet with the rapidity of a rapid fire-gun.
+
+One foot struck Cales on the shoulder with a sufficient impact to send
+him down and out. The mate had been involved in the cyclone of which
+Captain Broom was the centre. Tom's horse, considered the gentlest of
+the four, had become infected with the roan's example and he started in
+to do a little bucking on his own account. Never since the mate had
+rounded Cape Horn, had he known so much action in so short a time.
+
+The only one left was Old Pete and he came on right gallantly, but by
+dodging and turning they got away in the fog. After putting what they
+considered a safe distance between themselves and their former captors,
+Juarez persuaded Missouri to halt, and Tom went to work and with great
+difficulty first untied, then lifted, them to the ground for the boys
+were as stiff as boards from being tied hard and fast for so long a
+time.
+
+"My, but it certainly hurts," said Jo, stamping around in an endeavor to
+get the blood to circulating again. "It's just like it used to be back
+home in the winter when we would go skating and get our hands numb."
+
+"What is the matter, Juarez?" asked Jim in alarm.
+
+"Oh, I'm all right, I guess," he said in a voice that sounded faint to
+the boys and far away to himself. Then, without warning, he fell over on
+the ground and stiffened out.
+
+"It's from the blow that the greaser gave him," said Tom. "It would have
+killed him if it had struck him fair."
+
+"Wait until I get my hands on him," cried Jim, significantly.
+
+What should they do now? It was not an easy question to decide.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE RANCHERO
+
+
+They could not desert Juarez and they could not get far with him. It was
+enough to stagger them and it seemed that they had reached the end of
+their resources.
+
+"If it wasn't such an open country," said Jo, "we might hide until they
+had got out of range and then get to the nearest ranch."
+
+"If they overtake us we can stand them off," saying this Jim reached for
+his revolver. To his astonishment it was gone. Then he remembered he had
+been disarmed by Captain Broom, and they were absolutely defenseless
+unless they could depend on Missouri's heels which had furnished them
+such active protection.
+
+Finally they brought Juarez around so that he was able to sit up.
+
+"Where am I?" he asked in a sort of daze.
+
+"You will be all right in a minute, old chap," encouraged Jim, speaking
+cheerfully, but he did not feel so.
+
+"You bet I will," he assented feebly, but with invincible determination.
+"What are you holding me for, Jim? Let's get at those fellows." It was
+evident that his mind was not exactly clear yet. They got him on his
+feet and he seemed better, though still very wabbly.
+
+"There come those fellows," cried Jim, suddenly, with more of despair in
+his tone than he had ever spoken before, no matter how hard pressed they
+had been. But before there had always been something to do, but now they
+were helpless. Jim looked hastily around for some weapon. All he found
+was a small round stone.
+
+With a yell of exultation, Jack Cales and the mate dashed down upon
+them, followed by the Captain and old Pete. They had been able to follow
+the distinctive mark of the mule's shoes in the soft earth until they
+came in hearing of the boys' voices. Then they jumped upon them. They
+were out for blood this time, for they had the boys' revolvers in their
+hands, probably because they were better than their own.
+
+Missouri, finding himself free, made off. Tom halted when covered by one
+of the sailor's revolvers, but Jim dodged as the mate fired at him. The
+lug of lead spattered the mud between his feet, the next second he was
+off full speed through the fog, followed by fleet Jo.
+
+The sailors soon gave up the useless chase, for there was no trail to
+guide them, so they had to content themselves with half of their
+original capture and they started for the cove where the Sea Eagle was
+anchored as fast as they could go, though they were hampered by Juarez.
+
+"Better leave him, Captain," urged old Pete. "He is nothing but a
+nuisance."
+
+"I'll have use for that fellow yet," said the Captain. "As for the other
+lad, he won't feel so lively after a few days on shipboard."
+
+This did not have a very cheerful sound for Tom and he was in anything
+but a happy frame of mind. Still he had great confidence in Jim and did
+not give up hope of being rescued before the coast was reached. It was
+now getting towards daybreak, and the fog began to lift somewhat so that
+they could see a distance of thirty or forty yards.
+
+Captain Broom's gang had now left the region of the level pasture and
+were coming to the brush section, fringing the coast, and beyond that
+they reached the sand dunes. The nearer they came to the sea the more
+depressed Tom became. The only thing that encouraged him was the fact
+that Juarez began to seem like himself.
+
+Let us now return to Jo and Jim, who had been so fortunate as to make
+their escape. As soon as they were sure that the pursuit was at an end,
+they slowed down to a walk.
+
+"Well, they didn't give us much of a chase," remarked Jim.
+
+"Plenty to suit me. What are we going to do now?"
+
+"This fog is beginning to lift," said Jim, "and then we can take our
+bearings. I want to locate this ranch the first thing, and then we can
+get help."
+
+"Here's a wire fence," announced Jo, "I reckon it's the one the old
+geser cut."
+
+"It surely is and a straight course north is our direction," remarked
+Jim.
+
+"Here are hills that look like those we rode through," said Jo.
+
+"We will soon be there now," was Jim's cheerful comment "What's that? It
+sounds like a dog barking." They stopped, listening intently, as the
+sound came faint, but there was no mistaking it.
+
+"I suppose it's some big hound, that they usually keep on these
+ranches," said Jo, who was beginning to feel depressed from hunger and
+fatigue, "and he will jump at us because we haven't any weapons."
+
+But in spite of Jo's fear they hurried on in the direction of the sound.
+In a short time, they came to a road between two barb wire fences, which
+the reader will remember that the Captain and his crew took when they
+were coming through the Sebastian ranch. But the boys struck it higher
+up, and were soon in the pasture that sloped down from the ranch houses
+toward the road.
+
+Jim and Jo now heard the voices of men as well as the baying of the
+dogs. The men were talking excitedly about the finding of one of their
+number in the canyon tied and gagged, and it was evident that it was not
+a good time for strangers to visit the ranch of the Sebastians.
+
+But Jim and Jo were dulled to danger and did not care what risk they ran
+and so they called to the men in a friendly Spanish greeting. There was
+instantly a great hubbub, and two men charged down upon them, preceded
+by a couple of fierce-looking mongrels. These came dashing for them with
+red, gaping mouths. The boys defended themselves gallantly with two
+stout sticks that they had picked up. Then the two Mexicans took a hand.
+
+"Look out, Jo," cried Jim, who was ever on the alert. "That fellow is
+going to throw his lasso." Jo dodged just in the nick of time, but this
+gave one of the dogs a chance, and if Jim had not stunned him by a
+resounding crack on the head it would have gone hard with his brother.
+
+Just then another man appeared on the scene, attracted from the vicinity
+of the house by the noise of the encounter. He came full speed on a
+splendid sorrel. It was Juan Sebastian, a dark, handsome young man, a
+true son of Spain.
+
+"What's all this?" he cried as he rode up. "Here, Sancho, Jan, you
+brutes, come off." The dogs slunk obediently to heel.
+
+"We found those insolent Gringoes," said one of the men, "coming
+straight for the Senor's house. We undertook to stop them."
+
+"Senor," said Jim, bowing low and speaking in his best Spanish, "we are
+sorry, my brother and I, to have caused this disturbance. We are
+strangers and unfortunate, and we have heard of your hospitality,
+Senor"--Jim bowed again. He was not so simple, after all.
+
+The Senor Sebastian returned the bow with more grace than Jim could
+command.
+
+"I regret, Senor--" he hesitated.
+
+"Darlington," added Jim.
+
+"Senor Darlington, that you have been attacked in this manner, but there
+has been a party of desperadoes that have been overrunning this part of
+the country for the past two days, and they took one of my men and bound
+and gagged him and so you see, Senors," a smile and bow completed the
+Spanish gentleman's apology perfectly.
+
+"We have just escaped, not more than an hour ago, from these same
+desperadoes," said Jim. "They have taken my brother and friend with them
+towards the coast."
+
+"We will saddle and overtake them," promised the Senor, "after we have
+had breakfast."
+
+Jim was stunned by this gentle sort of procrastination.
+
+"But, Senor," he said gravely, "we will not be able to overtake them if
+we do not start immediately. Pardon my abruptness, but I cannot rest
+while there are two of my party prisoners in the hands of this gang of
+cut-throats."
+
+"It is to be perfectly understood," replied the Spaniard with no less
+gravity, "we will make haste, but first we will eat while the servants
+are getting two of the horses ready for you and your brother."
+
+This was not Jim's idea of making haste by a long shot, but he was
+enough of a traveler to recognize that the ways of men and nations
+differed and that nothing was to be gained by going against the grain
+of a national characteristic. So while fuming inwardly, he was outwardly
+quiet and composed. He argued, too, that it was not likely the pirate
+gang would retain the captured prisoners. Later, when they were
+themselves at a safe distance they would set free the others.
+
+As they went towards the house, the Spaniard dismounted and walked with
+them, giving his horse into the charge of one of the men, with
+directions to bring two other horses to the house. There was an
+unmistakable courtesy in doing this and the boys appreciated it. They
+could not help but contrast their appearance with that of the Spaniard.
+He was not gaudily dressed like a vaquero, but everything he wore was
+possessed of a certain richness and was not lacking in color. He truly
+was a Prince of the South in appearance as well as in courtesy.
+
+Jim and Jo were disreputable beyond words. Their clothes were muddy,
+torn and disheveled, their faces so grimed that it was hard to tell
+their original color, and there were blotches of blood upon their
+clothes as well as faces and hands. But, though they looked worse than
+tramps, there was something straightforward in their manner and their
+way of speech that the Spaniard was quick to recognize.
+
+As they walked along the Spaniard explained that his household had been
+unusually disturbed that morning. His mother, he said, was an invalid,
+and had escaped from her attendant. Some mental trouble, he briefly
+mentioned as the cause of the elderly lady's worriment. Evidently, he
+did not connect the tragedy in his own life, in which his father's life
+was sacrificed, with the boys' antagonist. His mother, he assured them,
+had been found and was returned to her home.
+
+The boys now had a good view of the house, as they approached it. The
+fog having lifted, they could take in the whole situation. The structure
+itself was of adobe, of the early California type, low, with broad
+verandas, and built on four sides around a court with a fountain in the
+centre, with fish in the basin, and grass around it. There were
+beautiful rose-tree bushes with gold and red clusters growing over the
+corners of the house.
+
+From the verandah there was a beautiful view looking off over the
+surrounding country. The house itself stood on a rise of ground that
+sloped gently from the plain below. Back of it rose the mountains of the
+coast range, while in the distance glittered the broad breadths of the
+Pacific, shining like an azure floor. As far as eye could see was the
+domain of this great ranch. It was, indeed, a princely estate, and one
+of which the Senor Sebastian might well be proud. Those were the days of
+romance and of charm in the land of Southern California.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+A NEW FRIEND
+
+
+The servants eyed the two boys curiously as they stepped upon the
+verandah and the brothers were not reassured by any looks of
+friendliness, though they were outwardly courteous. A withered looking
+old woman, who looked to Jim as though she had Indian blood showed the
+boys to a room, where they could wash up.
+
+"Jove! Doesn't it dazzle your eyes, Jo?" exclaimed Jim, "to see a real
+room, with a bed and a white spread, with those starched things where
+the pillows ought to be."
+
+"This room would certainly please Aunt Maria," remarked Jo. "That four
+poster bed with the canopy over it, is an old timer, I'll warrant you."
+
+"If I slept in this room," said Jim, "I would make a low bow to the bed
+and then roll up in my blanket and go to sleep on the floor."
+
+"How do I look?" asked Jo, after he had rubbed and scrubbed his face
+for a long time.
+
+"You have got off the first layer," replied Jim, "and look about the
+color of a half-breed. Let me try my hand at polishing up."
+
+"It will take you a week," remarked Jo discouragingly.
+
+It cannot be truly said that they looked ornamental even when they were
+clean, for Jim's face was badly torn, one side of it being scraped raw.
+He got this memento when he tackled the Captain and fell down into the
+canyon with him. One eye was blackened and the other cheek bruised.
+These disadvantages were not to be overcome in a short time.
+
+Jo was somewhat more presentable, but he, too, showed signs of the rough
+time that they had had with the Captain and his "merry" crew. But in
+spite of all this, there was something in their bearing, an honest
+hardihood and manliness that could not be discounted by torn clothes and
+bruised faces.
+
+"This room looks dirty, now," said Jo, "I'm ashamed to leave it like
+this."
+
+"We will go outside to brush off our clothes," proposed Jim, "and I'm
+going to empty this dirty water myself." He started out with it when he
+met one of the servants in the hall. With many explanations, numerous
+gestures and much excitement, she took the pail from Jim and disappeared
+with it.
+
+"They won't let you do anything for yourself here, Jo," reported Jim,
+returning to the room.
+
+This was correct and the boys noticed afterwards that the servants
+regarded them with odd expressions of amusement and it was evident to
+the sensitive Jo that they were being "guyed" by them, to use a modern
+expression. The boys being American lads, were self-reliant, and were
+accustomed to do everything for themselves, and, unknowingly they had
+gone counter to a custom of constant service of the Spaniards. It was to
+demean oneself, according to their code, to do any menial work.
+
+"Might as well start for the dining room," proposed Jo. "I hate leaving
+Tom and Juarez to their fate this way."
+
+"I more than hate it," protested Jim, "but as you can't hurry these
+people, we will make the best time by falling in with their way of doing
+business."
+
+Then they went out into a passageway and, taking the wrong turn, which
+was quite easy in the rambling old house, they came to a door that
+entered into the courtyard.
+
+"My, but this is beautiful," exclaimed Jo. "It makes you appreciate
+California better when you see a place like this."
+
+"That hammock looks good to me," said Jim. "I would like to stretch out
+in it right now."
+
+Just then the door opened on the verandah and a really beautiful young
+girl stepped out. She was probably seventeen years of age, dressed in
+white, with a black mantilla over her equally black hair and her dark
+cheeks glowed with color. A very romantic meeting, Messieurs, the
+gallant young Americans at one end of the verandah and the Senorita at
+the other. Then she saw Jim and Jo with their scarred and bruised faces.
+With a little shriek, and clasping her hand to her eyes, she retreated
+quickly to her room.
+
+"What did you do to scare that girl, Jo?" inquired Jim severely of his
+brother.
+
+"Nothing," declared Jo, stoutly. "It was the sight of your face. It
+would give a wooden Injun a chill." Jim felt of the said face
+reflectively.
+
+"I guess you are right, Jo," he admitted, "but you ain't so charming in
+appearance that you would do any damage."
+
+"Let's walk along this side," proposed Jo. "Perhaps we will locate the
+breakfast."
+
+"All right," agreed Jim.
+
+So they stalked along, more or less conscious that a pair of dark blue
+eyes were regarding them, and they thought they heard a trill of
+laughter, but it might have been one of the maids. They need not have
+felt embarrassed for there was the grace in their movements that goes
+with strength and youth and suppleness.
+
+They were walking under a perfect bower of flowers anyway. For this side
+was beautifully latticed and over the lattice work grew vines with
+purple and golden flowers, that would give a grateful shade when the
+California sun would drive the fog away.
+
+Under foot there was a double flagging of stone with trodden dirt on
+either side.
+
+"I don't see a broom anywhere," said Jo.
+
+Just then they heard the voice of Senor Sebastian behind them and they
+turned quickly.
+
+"I had begun to fear, Senors, that you had become lost again."
+
+"We were, partially, Senor."
+
+"Our simple breakfast is ready now if you are," he said.
+
+"We will have to brush the dirt off before we can go in," protested Jim.
+
+"Antonio bring a brush," called the Senor. In a moment a gray-haired,
+bent Mexican came with a big kitchen broom. Instantly the Senor flushed
+with anger.
+
+"Stupid one, my guests are not my horses. Have a care."
+
+A suspicion flashed through Jim's mind that the ancient servitor had
+brought the broom on purpose. It was clear that the servants did not
+have a very high opinion of their American visitors. The next time he
+returned he had gotten the right brush, and made a point of sneezing as
+the dust flew from their mud-dried clothes. This made Jim laugh in spite
+of himself.
+
+"More dust than the Sirocco brings," said Jim. The old servitor regarded
+him with a cunning eye.
+
+"Si, Senor," he said, then he was seized with a perfect convulsion of
+sneezing. This aroused his master's ire.
+
+"No more of that, Antonio," he commanded, "or it will be the lash."
+Antonio's cold was cured from that moment. Jim's mouth twitched at the
+corners with the humor of it but he did not laugh now for that would be
+discourteous to his host.
+
+Finally the brushing was finished to the regret of the servants, who had
+kept an amused eye on Antonio's performance, while pretending to be busy
+on some trivial tasks near the Patio or court. In her own room, the
+Senorita was faint with laughter as she watched Antonio dusting the two
+American lads.
+
+It was a simple breakfast that the boys found prepared for them in a
+long, low dining-room, with its dark beams and white plastered walls.
+The coffee was excellent, with a delicate aroma, and was probably the
+best that Mexico could afford. There was a large plate of meat garnished
+with peppers, and a mixed dish of vegetables that looked odd, but that
+tasted deliciously. You may be sure that Jim and Jo appreciated their
+meal, and they felt invigorated when it was finished, wishing all the
+while, however, that they were on the trail of their captured comrades.
+
+"Now, Senors, the horses are at the door. They are spirited, but I am
+sure that you ride well."
+
+This was a mere expression of courtesy on his part, for he did not
+expect any such thing and thought to see his guests fall off if the
+horses should rise on their hind legs, as they no doubt would, for there
+was not a horse on the big rancho but what was peppery and spirited. No
+sooner had the Senor spoke than Jim jumped to his feet, putting his hand
+to his head.
+
+"I have forgotten about Caliente!" he exclaimed. "It is my horse,
+Senor," he explained to his host. "He is up the canyon because the gang
+that attacked us last night were afraid of him."
+
+"I will send for him," said the Senor.
+
+"By the pool in the pocket," said Jim. "But I think I ought to get him
+myself, though I appreciate your offer, but one's horse, you know--"
+
+"I understand perfectly."
+
+"I cannot leave him without food and water," said Jim.
+
+"I will attend to that. I will send a trustworthy man," and he spoke to
+the servant who was waiting on the table. In a short time he returned
+with a tall, sinewy man, with straight black hair and dark skin. He gave
+this man the necessary instructions and with a "Si, Senor," the man went
+out.
+
+"A good reliable fellow," remarked Jim. "He looks like an Indian."
+
+"He is an Indian," replied their host, "but of the right kind. Your
+horse is in good hands."
+
+"Tell him to bring him down to the ranch," said Jim. "I'll trust
+Caliente with him." The Indian was called back and under his stolid
+demeanor was an appreciation of Jim's confidence.
+
+Breakfast over they went out on the verandah, where they could see the
+horses. They were spirited looking beasts all right. One was a bay, the
+two front legs white stockinged, very trimly built, with a flashing eye,
+that he kept rolling around. The boy who was holding him had his hands
+full, as the bay would rise on his hind legs and strike out viciously
+with his forefeet.
+
+The other animal was much heavier than the bay. A brilliant black, whose
+coat fairly shone with careful grooming. He had been standing
+comparatively quiet until the three appeared upon the verandah of the
+house, then, with a sudden surge backward, he dragged the Mexican boy
+off his feet, shaking his head viciously.
+
+"We ought to be armed, Senor," advised Jim. "If we should overtake those
+men, they will put up a desperate fight."
+
+"Certainly, Senor," he answered. "Come into this room and select your
+weapon."
+
+After both Jim and Jo were armed, they went out to the horses.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+THE PURSUIT
+
+
+All the servants seemed just now to find duties of importance in front
+of the house or near it. They had no idea of missing the chance of
+seeing these Gringoes, whom they held in contempt, thrown from their
+horses.
+
+Jim took the black and Jo was left the red, the easiest to manage even
+if he seemed the liveliest. Jo was too quick for his horse and before he
+could whirl to one side, he was in the saddle. Then his animal reared
+and plunged but Jo sat on him as easily as a cowboy does his steed.
+There was no mistaking his horsemanship. The servants were duly and
+deeply disappointed.
+
+But their hopes revived when they saw Jim tackle the black. He began
+that steady sideways movement which Jim knew so well, whenever he tried
+to put his foot in the stirrup. The servants began to smile, here would
+be some fun. The "Black Devil," as they called the horse, had been known
+to kill men, so they had pleasant anticipations. When Jim found that he
+could not mount by the stirrup, he made a quick, powerful leap and was
+in the saddle.
+
+"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian, but he knew that the fight had just
+begun.
+
+Jo looked on with interest and perfect confidence in brother Jim's
+ability. The black stood perfectly stunned for a moment or two at being
+so suddenly mounted, then he sprang into action. With his back in a hump
+he shot into the air and came down stiff-legged.
+
+Without loss of a second he went into the air again, higher than before.
+From the corral the Mexican cowboys were looking at the duel between the
+horse and the boy with lively interest.
+
+"The Diablo will kill him," said one nonchalantly, blowing a puff of
+smoke from his cigarette.
+
+"Five dollars that the Gringo stays on," said a second. The wager was
+made and others followed, for the Mexicans are inveterate gamblers. The
+third time the horse pitched into the air, Jim swaying with the animal's
+every motion as the trained cowboy does. Finding that he could not
+dislodge his rider that way, the black rose on his hind legs to a
+perpendicular position.
+
+Jim knew the trick of old, and was prepared for it. As the horse started
+to fall backwards, Jim who had been sticking like a leech, leaped
+lightly to the ground and with all his strength, pulling upon the
+bridle, slammed him to the ground. No sooner was the horse upon his feet
+again than Jim was in the saddle.
+
+Once more he tried that falling back trick and this time Jim brought him
+down upon the damp earth with a thud that jarred things. The black devil
+had had enough. He stood quivering and sweating, but for the time being
+subdued.
+
+"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian again, and he shook his guest by the
+hand warmly. "You are a true horseman. Now we shall go. We shall eat up
+the miles."
+
+The crowd of cowboys swung their hats in a salute to the Gringo, who
+could conquer the black devil, while the house servants, disappointed at
+the stranger's triumph, went back to their different tasks.
+
+The three horsemen galloped away down the sloping pasture, the Spaniard
+in advance as he knew the country and the most direct way to the coast.
+His horse was a splendid sorrel, somewhat taller than the horse that Jim
+rode. And he was a gallant figure in his leather riding suit and peaked
+sombrero with a brilliant colored band around it.
+
+Jim and Jo rode few yards behind the Spaniard and side by side. Jim felt
+a certain exultation in his victory over the Black before people who
+would have liked to have seen him defeated. It was exhilarating, too,
+this plunging gallop ahead with a chance to rescue Tom and Juarez and to
+get even with Captain Broom and his gang, who had taken away their
+valuables and had given the boys such a cruel defeat.
+
+"This is a fine horse," said Jim, "though he hasn't the stride of
+Caliente."
+
+"He is a beauty, when it comes to bucking," Jo commented. "There is
+nothing the matter with this bay but my black can beat him for speed."
+
+So they flew on, the speed of their steeds blowing back their horses'
+manes, and the fresh air from the sea bringing a feeling of hope to
+their hearts, that they would yet be able to overtake the pirates, and
+rescue their comrades in distress. Their horses' feet were devouring the
+miles.
+
+"We stand a chance to get 'em at this rate," shouted Jim.
+
+"Won't it be fine if we can all sit down to dinner tonight?" replied Jo.
+"I bet that Tom and Juarez would enjoy a square meal with the Senor at
+the ranch house. Ifs kind of nice to be civilized once in a while."
+
+"You're right, it is," declared Jim emphatically.
+
+"I wonder if there isn't a store around here where we could buy some
+clothes," inquired Jo, anxiously. "We look too disreputable to appear in
+polite society."
+
+"Thinking about that girl, I suppose?" remarked Jim with brotherly
+intuition.
+
+"I wouldn't be so sure if I were you," replied Jo evasively. "How about
+the Senorita down in Mexico who threw you the rose at the castle?" This
+reference to the Senorita Cordova whom the Frontier Boys had rescued in
+Mexico, checked Jim from getting too gay for he still had a tender place
+in his memory for her.
+
+The fog by this time was entirely dissipated, and they could see by
+certain white or rather light spots in the clouds where the sun was
+going to break through and an absolutely clear day would result. The
+three riders had now reached the brush region that began a few miles
+from the coast and they were compelled to go more slowly.
+
+But if they had only known what was going on not more than two miles
+away from where they were, they would not have slackened speed no
+matter what risk they ran. For Captain Broom and his crew with the two
+captives had arrived at the cove and old Pete and Jack Cales were going
+into the cave for the boat.
+
+There was a chance, but the Senor and his companions must hurry. Some
+mishap to the pirates' expedition just at this point and the frontier
+boys would win. Tom and Juarez might have sung the tune that they had
+often sung before in camp.
+
+          "Tramp, tramp, tramp, the boys are marching,
+            Cheer up, comrades, they will come,
+          And beneath the starry flag
+          We will breathe the air again
+            Of freedom in our own beloved home."
+
+But they did not know and they sat miserable and dejected upon the damp
+sand of the beach, not knowing that Jim and Jo were coming nearer every
+second. Then there came an accident, though a slight one, that gave the
+pursuers a chance.
+
+Old Pete was carrying one end of the boat. He was nervous, anyway, in
+regard to the cave and its grewsome contents, thought he saw some dark
+spectre coming for him out of the blackness of the cave and he dropped
+his end of the boat and scudded for the beach.
+
+The Captain was furious, giving him a blow that sent him spinning half
+way down to the water, and he and the mate rushed back to see what
+damage the boat had suffered. It was only slightly stove in, but every
+second was precious. The pursuers were only a mile away.
+
+Jim began to grow restless as they neared the coast. He seemed to feel
+that they were nearing the enemy, and at his urging, the Spaniard, who
+had an increased respect and liking for Jim ever since he had conquered
+Black Diablo, put his horse to the gallop, and away they went along the
+narrow winding path through the bushes.
+
+The branches whipt them, but they paid no attention, but on they went;
+it was evident that they made considerable racket and Captain Broom,
+with a fierce burst of energy for which he was famous, got the boat
+launched, the two prisoners in, and with himself and the mate at the
+oars, made the boat leap forward over the lazy rolling swell towards the
+graceful Sea Eagle.
+
+When they had reached a point half-way to the vessel, the horsemen came
+tearing through the last screen of brush onto the yellow sand. The enemy
+had escaped by the skin of its teeth and it was heart-rending to see Tom
+and Juarez being carried away from them at every stroke of the oars
+towards their black prison. Jim put up his hands to his mouth and
+yelled:
+
+"We will rescue you, boys. Don't give up. We'll get 'em yet."
+
+A derisive yell greeted this challenge and one of the men in the boat
+fired at the group on the shore, but the bullet fell harmlessly short.
+They did not dare to fire in return lest they hit either Tom or Juarez.
+
+"They have steam up on board," observed Jim. "But I see one chance to do
+some execution."
+
+It was this. The Sea Eagle was anchored close under a cliff on the
+northern side of the cove. So Jim slipped off his horse, for the way on
+that side was impracticable except on foot. It was hard going at that,
+especially as there were a good many cacti with their wretched thorns.
+
+Jim stepped gingerly along over the rocks, gliding through the bushes
+until at last he reached a point above the vessel where he could almost
+look down upon her decks. The boat from the shore had just come
+alongside and the prisoners were hustled into the cabin and the door
+locked. Tom and Juarez were a dejected-looking pair and it made Jim's
+heart ache to see them.
+
+The Captain went upon the quarter-deck and gave an order to the man at
+the wheel. The anchor had already been weighed. Slowly and gracefully
+the Sea Eagle turned, and there stood Captain Broom, as big as life upon
+the bridge. Why did not Jim fire? Because he had come to a certain wise
+conclusion.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE
+
+
+As Jim had raised his revolver to fire, a sudden idea came to him. In
+the first place he rebelled instinctively from shooting a man down in
+cold blood from ambush, even if he was as desperate and crime-stained a
+character as Captain Bill Broom, besides it would not save Tom and
+Juarez and only make their captivity harder to endure, if any injury was
+done the Captain.
+
+Another thing, Jim was sure that if he began the attack that his two
+comrades would be used as shields to protect the man at the wheel, so
+that the Sea Eagle could be navigated safely out of the cove. He saw
+with interest the narrow place between two lines of foam above hidden
+ledges where the boat must pass in order to reach the open sea. He
+marvelled at the temerity of Captain Broom in daring to bring his ship
+through such a place.
+
+Then a brilliant thought came to him, a sudden stroke that might turn
+defeat into victory. The Sea Eagle was now making straight for the
+narrow channel. Jim slipped back for a short distance an ran as rapidly
+as he could to a point a little to the west of where he had first
+hidden. He did not have long to wait. The Sea Eagle was almost directly
+opposite his place of ambush, and was just sticking her nose into the
+narrow passage.
+
+Jim raised his revolver and took careful aim and fired. The man at the
+wheel gave a yell and clapped his hand to the shoulder, letting go the
+wheel and the nose of the little steamer swung toward the rock. A swell
+lifted her bow clear by a few inches, and the Captain caught the steamer
+by the wheel and brought her to a course.
+
+"Bring those boys up on deck and shoot them if that black-haired devil,"
+(meaning Jim) "fires another shot," he called to the mate.
+
+That worthy was not slow to obey the order, he had them on deck in full
+sight in a jiffy and held a pistol at Tom's head. Jim had raised his arm
+to fire at the Captain when he heard his order and it was as if he had
+been paralyzed. He knew that Tom and Juarez would have been killed to a
+certainty if he fired another shot.
+
+Luck had broken against him again, for that was all that had kept the
+Sea Eagle from going on the reef, where if she had not been wrecked,
+she and her crew would have been at the mercy of the men on shore. Just
+the lifting of the wave had saved the vessel by a few inches, that, and
+Captain Broom's quick and skillful action.
+
+The second round of the contest had gone in favor of the pirate and his
+crew, but only by a shade as it were. But it would not surprise me a bit
+if Jim evened up matters in the third and final round. Let us hope so,
+at least, for that will give a silver lining to the black cloud that had
+rolled over the boys' fortunes at this particular time.
+
+Jim made his way slowly back to where Jo and the Senor were waiting for
+him on the beach. He was despondent over the failure of his plans by so
+close a margin, and the sight of Tom and Juarez helpless on the deck in
+the hands of these sea-coast pirates, was always before his eyes.
+
+"What were you trying to do, Jim?" inquired Jo, "Sink the ship?" Before
+Jim could reply, the Spaniard gave a cry of warning.
+
+"Look out, they are going to shoot."
+
+Glancing toward the Sea Eagle, which was now a half mile from shore,
+they saw a puff of smoke, and then a shell struck into the beach below
+them and exploding, sent a shower of sand over them and the horses. The
+latter, frightened, reared and plunged, but the boys soon got their
+animals under control, as they quickly tired of acting up in the heavy
+sand. Jim shook his fist in the direction of the Sea Eagle.
+
+"Curse your insolence!" he yelled. "I'll make every one of you eat crow,
+you miserable hounds!"
+
+Jim looked ugly, his eyes glared with concentrated fury and the veins on
+his temple were swollen and throbbing. Unthinkingly, he pulled back hard
+upon the bit, sending his horse up in the air.
+
+"Easy, boy," he said, soothingly. "Easy. It was my fault for yanking
+you."
+
+When the horse was quieted, Jim was cooled down to his normal
+temperature, and he told his comrades of his attack upon the Sea Eagle
+and how it had turned out.
+
+"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard impressively, "I will take off my
+hat to you. You are a natural General. Take my advice, my friend, and go
+to Spain. There you might head a revolution and in time rise to high
+mark."
+
+"I appreciate your praise deeply, Senor Sebastian," responded Jim, "but
+my own country, Senor, I could not leave it for another."
+
+"Right, Senor," replied the Spaniard, "you have the true spirit."
+
+"Which way will she turn, do you suppose?" asked Jo, pointing to the
+vessel that was moving steadily out on the Pacific in a straight line
+from the shore.
+
+"To the North, doubtless," replied the Spaniard.
+
+"Wherever she goes we must find her out," said Jim, with grim
+determination.
+
+"I wish we could follow them," sighed Jo. "If we could only hire a
+boat."
+
+"They have our money," replied Jim, briefly.
+
+"I had forgotten that," said Jo, and his face showed his disappointment.
+
+"Permit me to help you," said the Spaniard, "I am to blame for detaining
+you at breakfast."
+
+"That is generous of you, Senor," replied Jim, "but I do not favor going
+to the expense of chartering a steamer. Even if it were possible, my
+plan would be to follow along the coast on horseback and see what can be
+done when they make a landing."
+
+"As you are the General," replied the Spaniard, "we will allow you to
+make the plans."
+
+"Look!" exclaimed Jo, "they are turning South instead of North."
+
+"Impossible!" cried the Spaniard. "There is only one port within two
+hundred miles. I do not understand. Yes, they are surely going South."
+
+"Perhaps they have a secret landing place," hazarded Jim.
+
+"Not so," replied the Spaniard. "Not a harbor where they could land save
+one and there they would not dare to go."
+
+The three watchers on horseback gazed until there was little to be seen
+other than a smudge of smoke upon the horizon. It was no use, the Sea
+Eagle was holding to her southerly course to some mysterious port. The
+sun had now come out and was shining with sheer brilliance upon the
+sparkling ocean.
+
+"We must return now," said the Spaniard. "There is nothing more for us
+to do at present."
+
+"I think that my brother and I will start this afternoon and take the
+trail to the south," announced Jim, "wherever those fellows set foot, I
+want to be waiting for them."
+
+"I fear it is impossible to start so soon," replied the Spaniard, "I
+must go with you as I know the country to the South, every foot of it."
+
+"The Senor is right, Jim," put in Jo, quickly, as he saw a frown on
+Jim's face and was afraid that he was going to say something abruptly.
+"You will want to give Caliente a good rest, so that when we start, we
+will make the distance without delay. Then we have to make some
+preparations ourselves."
+
+Jim looked at his brother with a moment's dark suspicion, but it was
+evident that Jo was perfectly sincere in what he said.
+
+"I will promise, Senor," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile, "that
+when we start which will be early tomorrow morning, that we will travel
+far and fast enough to suit you and your horse." There was a challenge
+in his voice that Jim met smilingly.
+
+"So be it, Senor," he said, "I will try to be in sight at the finish."
+
+"My horse is a remarkable animal for speed and endurance, I must tell
+you frankly," said the Senor gravely. "He has no equal in this country
+of California. He has proved it more than once and against all comers."
+
+"He is certainly a fine horse," admitted Jim, looking at the sorrel with
+admiring eyes. "He has a splendid stride."
+
+"Ah, no, Senor," laughed the Spaniard with a gleam of his white teeth,
+"I did not mean him," patting the horse on the neck, "a good animal,
+indeed, but more for my little sister to ride than for me. Wait, my
+friend, until I introduce you to Don Fernando and then you will see a
+horse for the first time."
+
+"I should be very much pleased to see him," said Jim, frankly curious
+and interested.
+
+"Tomorrow," said the Spaniard.
+
+They had now turned into the narrow trail among the bushes and had only
+ridden a few steps when Jo called a sudden halt.
+
+"What do you think, Jim, there's my horse and Tom's tied in that
+thicket."
+
+Sure enough there they were, utterly worn out, but with spirit enough to
+recognize their old comrades Jim and Jo, and if ever horses expressed a
+welcome these two did when they first caught sight of their two friends.
+
+"They have cut the saddles to pieces, the brutes," exclaimed Jo.
+
+"I'm glad to get the horses," said Jim, "I am surprised that they didn't
+cut their throats."
+
+"They will follow us all right," said Jo, in reply to the Spaniard's
+suggestion that they would have to be led, and they trotted along behind
+Jo, who was the last one in line.
+
+"Do you know of any place where we could buy things?" asked Jim. "We
+need a new outfit."
+
+"But we have no money," put in Jo quickly.
+
+"I will get the money or its equivalent today," said Jim. "If there is a
+store where the Senor can get me credit."
+
+"Yes, there is a store where a Portugee sells about everything that we
+need in this country," replied the Spaniard. "It is some distance to the
+north. We will ride there before we return to the ranch. There will be
+no difficulty about the credit," he concluded, with a bow to Jim.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE
+
+
+"You do not know my ability to spend," said Jim, "I may have to plunge
+to the extent of several hundred dollars. You see my brother has very
+expensive tastes. It will cost quite a small fortune when I buy him a
+complete trousseau including diamonds."
+
+"I will pledge my lands if necessary to get the young Senor diamonds,"
+said the Spaniard laughingly.
+
+In about an hour's time they came to a large one story frame building
+painted a rather light blue, which color had weathered a good deal. It
+had a square, false front with a sign on it that read, "Mr. Gonsalves,
+General Trader."
+
+They hitched their horses to some well graveled posts, and went inside
+leaving Jo's and Tom's horses free to graze at will around, or to stand
+under the shelter of some drooping pepper tree across the road. The
+proprietor, a short, thick-set Portugee with a close trimmed black
+beard, and a gray slouch hat which he always wore, apparently, received
+them graciously. The contents of the store were entirely at their
+service,--if they paid for them.
+
+"We will miss poor Tom here," said Jo, "he was always our purchasing
+agent."
+
+"And a mighty good one," added Jim. "Not even a Connecticut Yankee could
+get the best of him in a bargain."
+
+The Spaniard sat in a round armed wooden chair, gracefully smoking a
+cigarette, while his guests busied themselves making purchases. First
+the boys bought some new clothes, which they retired behind a counter to
+put on, and emerged in proper apparel for the plains.
+
+Blue flannel shirts, and pants of the same color, held up by leather
+belts, with much glitter of silver on them, then they bought a sombrero
+apiece, not after the Mexican style, but of the American type. Jim had a
+red band around his and Jo had a blue.
+
+"Now we want some handkerchiefs to tie around our necks," said Jo.
+
+"Of course," remarked Jim with a wink, "something that will catch the
+eyes of the ladies."
+
+So M. Gonsalves brought out a brilliant assortment of handkerchiefs.
+
+"Here's a very fine article, gents," he said holding out a red silk
+handkerchief, clustered with white horseshoes.
+
+"Nothing the matter with that," admitted Jim admiringly, with a droll
+look at Jo. "But this plain red one will suit me. My brother would
+probably like the horseshoe one." But Jo also declined.
+
+"I will take the dark blue one," he said, "it matches my costume
+better."
+
+"Gee! but you will look like a color scheme," laughed Jim, "blue eyes,
+blue pants, shirt, tie and socks, and hat band, you ought to be a sailor
+on the blue Pacific."
+
+"The next things are boots," remarked Jo.
+
+"Not for me," said Jim briefly, "I want moccasins. Worn 'em all my life,
+and I am not going to change to boots now."
+
+"Fine line of moccasins," said the accommodating Mr. Gonsalves in his
+best trade manner. You see he had been in business in San Francisco and
+knew something of the ways of customers.
+
+"But it gives us more style to wear boots. You notice that all the
+inhabitants wear them, we can buy moccasins too. You wear them all the
+time and they will set you down for an Indian."
+
+"When a fellow once gets the idea of style in his head," said Jim
+resignedly, "nothing this side of matrimony is going to stop him. So lay
+on MacDuff and cursed be he who first cries hold, enough."
+
+"I feel like I was anchored," commented Jim, stepping across the floor
+with heavy tread. "I should like to stalk a deer or an Indian in these
+things. He could tell you were arriving before you got above the
+horizon."
+
+"But you look fine in 'em," said Jo.
+
+It was true that he made a striking figure in his blue togs. The lithe
+powerful physique, and the strong, resolute face.
+
+"Better look out, Jo," grinned Jim. "No Senorita would look at you, when
+they see me dashing over the landscape."
+
+"I'm a pretty stylish looking guy myself," responded Jo, confidently. He
+did make a good appearance, there was no doubt of that. Though slighter
+than his brother he was well set up, and his frame was well muscled. He
+was handsomer than Jim. But there was no nonsense about either of the
+two boys and they never gave an unnecessary thought to their appearance.
+
+"Now, Mr. Gonsalves," said Jim, "we would like to look at some of your
+man-killers."
+
+"Revolvers?" he questioned, "just step this way. I can fit you out all
+right."
+
+He did have a fine collection and Jim examined the different ones
+carefully, noting their action and how easily they worked.
+
+"I see you are no tenderfoot," complimented the proprietor. "You have
+handled shooting irons before."
+
+"I'll be a tenderfoot before long, if I wear these condemned boots you
+sold me," said Jim gruffly ignoring the compliment. He did not care
+especially for M. Gonsalves' style. "Now let's have a look at your
+rifles." The proprietor actually took off his hat and bowed.
+
+It was evident that the distinguished gentlemen from nowhere in
+particular were going to buy out his entire stock.
+
+"Would you be so gracious as to step this way?" he said, "I have the
+rifles in the back of the store."
+
+They were so gracious, and after due examination they selected a couple
+of well balanced guns and purchased enough ammunition to stand off a few
+Indian raids. All the stuff besides what they had on their backs they
+packed upon Tom's horse, as Tom was not present to resent the indignity.
+
+"Now the last things are some saddles," said Jim, "seeing that our kind
+friends, the pirates, cut up those we owned."
+
+"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard coming forward and touching Jim
+lightly on the arm, "Do not speak of buying saddles. I will see to
+that." Jim did not know exactly what their host meant but he thanked him
+and deferred to his request.
+
+Now behold the frontier boys in complete costume, with glittering
+revolvers at their hips and rifles swung across their backs, upon their
+hands were fringed buckskin gloves. They had gone the whole hog as Jim
+said.
+
+"I'll take the shine off this costume in about one day," said Jim
+grimly, "when I get in the open, I would rather break a broncho, than a
+new suit of clothes." There was no doubt about his impressive
+appearance, as the sun flashed on the metal of the accoutrements and he
+swung himself into the saddle. Even their host seemed to hold them in
+higher regard. Different people, different manners.
+
+When they reached the house ranch the first thing Jim did was to find
+Caliente. He was in the long adobe stable that was a half-mile from the
+house, at the beginning of a wide mountain valley, where the air drew
+through from the sea.
+
+"How are you, Caliente old fellow," cried Jim, as he opened the box
+stall and went in to shake hands with his old comrade. But the horse
+leaped to one side, and then reared up as if to strike Jim.
+
+"He don't know you," cried Jo who was on the outside of the stall. "Take
+off your hat."
+
+Jim whirled it out of the stall, and a change came over Caliente. He
+recognized his master, and nickering in recognition he rubbed his head
+against Jim's shoulder, and took playful nips at his fine new shirt,
+while Jim fairly hugged him, and gave him resounding whacks with his
+open hand upon his splendid sides and shoulders.
+
+"A magnificent animal, Senor Darlington," said Senor Sebastian to Jim,
+"I congratulate you."
+
+It was a true word. Caliente with his proud neck, small but shapely
+head, powerful but not too heavy frame, and color of mottled gray was
+magnificent.
+
+All that afternoon Jim busied himself grooming his horse until his coat
+fairly glistened. He looked carefully to his feed, and saw to his
+watering. For Jim was determined that his horse should not be beaten by
+the Spaniard's. He knew that the latter's horse must be an unusual
+animal. It was not a short race, instead, one of two hundred miles that
+lay before them on the morrow.
+
+That evening the American boys presented a better appearance than they
+did at breakfast. It was a pretty scene that evening in the long dining
+room. The snowy table lit by light of candles and set with ancient
+silver brought from Spain. The young Senorita was seated at her
+brother's right, and on the other side were James Darlington and his
+brother Joseph. As to the impression she made upon them, we will say
+nothing, as this is not a romance, but they had a merry and delightful
+evening.
+
+Their host and the young Senorita were much interested in hearing of the
+adventures of the boys in Mexico, especially that part that referred to
+the rescue of the Senorita Cordova from the hands of Cal Jenkins and his
+gang. I do not know that The Frontier Boys told it with any less fervor
+because the eyes of the young girl, seated opposite, were fixed intently
+upon them. It appeared that their host knew of the Senor Cordova, who
+was a man of prominence in his country, though he had not actually met
+him. So there was one more bond of sympathy between the Senor Sebastian
+and James and Jo Darlington.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE
+
+
+Let us now turn our interest and attention for a time to the cruise of
+the Sea Eagle, under the guidance of that redoubtable free-booter,
+Captain Broom. It was a mystery to the three who watched the ship turn
+to the South, what her port could be. We will soon be in a position to
+solve that problem.
+
+No sooner had the Sea Eagle cleared the cove than Captain Broom went to
+his cabin to go over his spoils which he had taken from the frontier
+boys. He placed all the belts upon the table, took up one, and with a
+keen knife slit the first pouch. A large heavy Spanish coin rolled out
+and then clinked down upon the table.
+
+The Captain's eyes glistened. "By Gosh!" he exclaimed, "it was worth
+while rounding up those fellows. They must have struck it rich down in
+Mexico. I bet the boys will be tickled to death to get their share." For
+whatever crimes and shortcomings Captain Broom could be charged with,
+at least he always divided fairly with his crew. Thereby he held their
+loyalty. It was not all policy, either, for there was a sterling streak
+in the bad old fellow.
+
+Out of the next pouch there glittered upon the table several diamonds
+and a small palm full of rubies, with their rich color and radiance.
+"The boys will have enough to start a jewelry store," commented the
+Captain. "But I am not surprised at this haul. I know something about
+the hidden treasures myself, and they do say Mexico is the the place for
+them."
+
+Out of another belt he got some ingots of gold and a girdle that caused
+the Captain to open his eyes. At first he did not know what to make of
+it. When he held it up he saw that it was formed of golden disks linked
+with strings of rubies and sapphires. In the third belt was a necklace
+that might have been worn by some Princess of the Incas. It was oddly,
+almost weirdly beautiful.
+
+The fourth belt that he picked up chanced to belong to Jim.
+
+"This seems lighter than the others," remarked the Captain. "Three of
+the pouches are empty." His face got black with rage. For instantly his
+mind leaped to the suspicion that one of his men had rifled it. If such
+had been the case, the guilty party would have got short shift at the
+end of a rope from the yard arm.
+
+But the second examination showed that the cut was an old one.
+
+"So!" he cried, "one of the boys has cached part of his share. I bet it
+was that long-legged, black-haired guy. That fellow would give the best
+of us trouble. I wish I had him to train. Maybe, I can make something of
+the Injun boy," meaning Juarez.
+
+As to the belts, the shrewd old fellow, to make sure, measured them to
+see where the worn holes of the leather came, and the partially empty
+belt had been worn two inches longer than any of the others.
+
+"It was the big fellow's," said the Captain.
+
+Then he went upon deck and called the crew forward.
+
+"Now, lads, choose your man to get your share of the goods," he said.
+
+"It's Jack Cales, sir," they said, knowing that they would be called
+upon to select a man to take their share.
+
+"All right! Come, lad," said the Captain, and led the way to his cabin.
+When Jack Cales saw the treasures on the table, he opened his eyes and
+mouth in astonishment.
+
+"Why, Sir," he exclaimed, "we haven't seen anything like this since the
+day two years ago when--" he stopped suddenly, seeing from a look in the
+Captain's eyes that no reminiscences were desired.
+
+"This is your share, lad," said the Captain, gruffly.
+
+"Thank you, sir," responded Cales, as he swept the small pile of gold
+and jewels into the palm of his big hands.
+
+"And mind ye, lad," warned the Captain, "I don't want any quarreling
+among yourselves or ye will hear from me."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor and backed out of the cabin.
+
+There was an interesting gathering in the forecastle when Jack Cales
+deposited his handful of treasures on the top of a sea chest that had
+been hauled out for the purpose.
+
+For once it was not necessary to have the lantern lit, for a broad band
+of sunshine shone down the steep ladder and cut a golden swath through
+the dingy gloom and fell athwart the chest and illuminated the group:
+the tall and swaggering Cales, the rugged, grizzled Pete, and the other
+sailormen; a typical group and not to be matched for picturesqueness
+anywhere; with their faces intent upon the center of the old black sea
+chest, where glowed and glittered the gold and jewels in the band of
+light that shone upon some of the faces of the intent group, while
+others were in the shadow. It was a scene such as Rembrandt--pardon,
+kind reader, I forgot for a moment, this is a simple narrative of
+Adventure.
+
+"Pete," said Cales, "how the ladies will love you when they see a chain
+of glittering diamonds around your throat."
+
+"One thing is certain, lad," replied the grizzled Pete, "I won't be
+givin' none of my diamonds away to the ladies. I'll keep the stones safe
+in my jeans."
+
+"You'll have to be keerful, Pete," rallied another, "they'll be marrying
+you for your ill-gotten wealth, when they find out that you are an
+heiress. You can't help yourself, Pete. It won't make any difference
+because you are a pirate, that won't scare 'em. Not when they see them
+jewels."
+
+"What's the use of you boys a talkin' to me," he said with a wise wink,
+"you're only kittens. I'm sixty year old and I'm a free man yit."
+
+"Here's a pill for you, Pop," said Cales, dropping a diamond into his
+horny hand.
+
+"Gee! I'm just as well pleased to get this as I was to get a bunch of
+popcorn when I was a kid back in New England, off the Christmas tree."
+
+"Better have it sot in one of your front teeth, Pop," said Jack. This
+produced a roar of laughter, for Pete's front teeth were conspicuous by
+their absence.
+
+So the distribution went on without any bickering at first, only jovial
+jokes, but at last there came a bone of contention over the last
+diamond. And in a jiffy Jack Cales and a short, stocky sailor were all
+tangled up in a fierce encounter. Their comrades, none too gently,
+hoisted them up on deck. There they continued their fight.
+
+No sooner did Captain Broom see them than he cluttered down from the
+bridge at a furious rate. The two combatants ought to have taken warning
+but they were deaf to everything except their own struggle. He was livid
+with anger, and his wrath was in a large measure justified.
+
+"I'll larn you!" he yelled, grabbing each by the back of the neck. "You
+won't fight any more this trip."
+
+They were like children in his hands. He had not only the arms of a
+gorilla, but the strength of one when he was aroused and it was a
+caution the way he slammed them around, flaying the deck with them, and
+dashing their heads together. It seemed as if every bone in their bodies
+would be broken. Finally he flung them unconscious on the deck.
+
+"Put them in the Sagenette," he ordered the mate.
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," he replied, and with the aid of one of the sailors,
+they were chained in a narrow cell.
+
+Here was where Juarez and Tom came in. As the two fighters were knocked
+out and locked up, it made the crew short and they were ordered out on
+deck from the cabin where they had been kept. Almost famished though
+they were, they had to jump in and work like nailers, not to say,
+sailors.
+
+Fortunately for them, they had experienced a hard schooling in many
+different ways since they came west and were practical masters of
+several lines of industry, but this was their first experience
+sailoring. It was a hard school, but they learned more in a few days,
+than they would have under months of more gentle tuition. This was to
+stand them in good stead when they started on their cruise to Hawaii.
+
+"I'll get even with those fellows," growled Tom as he passed near Juarez
+who was busy polishing some brass work. "Yes, if it takes the rest of my
+life."
+
+"What do you mean, stopping and gabbing, you little shrimp?" roared the
+mate who chanced to see Tom stop.
+
+And he rushed up and grabbing Tom by the back of the neck, shook him
+ferociously, landing him a couple of kicks at the same time. This was
+too much for Juarez, who poised a stone that he was using and was about
+to brain the mate with it when the Captain's iron grip fell on his arm.
+He didn't throw that brick.
+
+"Easy, lad," said the Captain. "No more fighting on board this ship, or
+I'll take a hand again and don't you two lads pass the time of day
+either. You won't be killed if you work hard and keep cheerful." Then he
+gave the mate a look, which that worthy understood and Tom was allowed
+to go about his work without further molestation.
+
+But this was a new and hard doctrine that the Captain had laid down that
+the boys had to take hard usage and unceasing work and keep cheerful
+about it. They soon found that the Skipper meant what he said. It was a
+bitter lesson, but perhaps they were the manlier for learning it so
+young. For it's something that life hands out to everyone sooner or
+later.
+
+Often the boys looked longingly over the rail towards the faint, far
+outline of the California coast. The Skipper was keeping his ship far
+out from the land for reasons best known to himself. One thing was
+favorable in that the sea air had braced up Juarez so that he felt more
+like himself though his head was queer at times. And no wonder for that
+blow the Mexican dwarf had given him was sufficient to have stunned an
+ox.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+A DAY AT SEA
+
+
+The Sea Eagle was steaming steadily South to her mysterious harbor. The
+day was a brilliant one and as the afternoon wore on the wind from the
+Northwest began to blow with fresher force and the white caps began to
+jump, here, there and everywhere over the broad surface of the ocean,
+and then slide down on the back of the waves.
+
+There was a good deal of motion on the part of the Sea Eagle now, as she
+plunged into the waves and threw the spray back over her decks. Both
+Juarez and Tom proved themselves good sailors, which was just as well
+for if they had been sea sick together with their other miseries they
+might have succumbed.
+
+Finally the long afternoon wore away and the time came for supper. The
+boys being neither flesh, fish or fowl, were not allowed to eat with the
+crew, and they did not mind in the least. When their rations did arrive,
+or rather when they went to the ship's galley and got their share, they
+found the fare not lacking in quality and abundance. There was a heaping
+plate of Mexican beans, a big hunk of bread and a bowl of hot tea. After
+the boys had stowed this below in their hatches they felt a hundred per
+cent better and more fit to meet any fate that might await them.
+
+An hour before sunset a heavy bank of fog began to roll up from the
+West, soon covering the whole sky with its gracious softness, and
+decided restfulness, after the glittering blue-diamond beauty of the
+day.
+
+It is the fogs alone that make the climate of California, especially in
+the Southern part endurable. Too much sunshine becomes as unbearable as
+too much cloudiness.
+
+The sea went down, when the fog came up and the waters took on a steely
+color under their blanket of gray, rolling on, in that monotonous
+meditation that holds the mystery of forgotten ages in its brooding.
+
+"Here's where you will sleep, boys," said Old Pete, who had been
+appointed by the Captain to have special charge over their education.
+"The men won't have you in the fo'castle, and it's pretty crowded there
+anyway."
+
+"This will suit us, sir," replied Juarez. He did not call him Pop, as
+he would have on the land. This was the sea and had its own rules and
+customs, therefore Old Pete received his due of respect. But in his
+rough way he was not unfriendly towards the boys, for he remembered that
+they had given him friendly advice, when he was aboard that strange
+craft, a horse, the night before.
+
+The place where the boys were to sleep was a sort of cubby hole in the
+bow of the boat, that was roofed over and where anchor chains and other
+junk was sometimes kept. It was not over four feet high, five in width
+at the broadest and narrowing to the bow.
+
+A rude place to sleep in, but what did the Frontier Boys care for that?
+They could scarcely count the nights that they had slept out on the
+ground, and in bad weather too. They had a blanket apiece, and a
+tarpaulin to pull over them.
+
+The blankets they had spread out on the floor of the cubby hole and they
+found that the tarpaulin made a mighty warm protective covering, keeping
+out the damp sea air in fine style.
+
+"Where do you suppose we are heading for, Juarez?" inquired Tom.
+
+"Maybe a port in Mexico or South America and then again we may head for
+Hawaii before we intend to."
+
+"We are going South now, though," said Tom.
+
+"If we run in close to the coast, we'll jump overboard, and swim for
+it," said Juarez.
+
+"We could do it if we get within a mile," said Tom, "if it is not too
+rough."
+
+Just then Juarez put his hand over Tom's mouth, he felt sure that
+someone was listening or was preparing to. Juarez ran his fingers
+carefully over the boards until he found where a hole had been bored
+through the planking a little back of their heads. It was just as he had
+suspected, someone was listening to hear what plans they would make.
+
+With the noiselessness characteristic of him when scouting, Juarez crept
+out partially and cautiously raised his head until he caught sight of
+the sole of a man's boot. Then he crept back to his place and gave Tom a
+nudge. Forthwith they began talking in rather loud tones.
+
+"Say Tom, do you know I rather like this ship. These fellows are rough
+in their way but that is to be expected."
+
+"Of course," said Tom, in an equally loud voice, "but we might as well
+make the best of it. There is no chance for the boys to find us."
+
+"You're right there, Tom."
+
+Then in a short time they appeared to fall into a deep and sonorous
+sleep. This was no fake on the part of Tom who was actually and
+thoroughly tired. But Juarez was more of a veteran and he kept his eyes
+open and he was rewarded in a few minutes by seeing a man's feet hanging
+over the edge of their bunk house and then he saw the figure of the mate
+slouch aft.
+
+"You sly old rascal, you," remarked Juarez. "We will 'larn' you to try
+and be too smart with the Frontier Boys. We may be young but we are not
+fools."
+
+Nothing happened for a while and the gentle plunge of the Sea Eagle into
+the long rolling swell soon lulled the tired Juarez into a sound sleep,
+so that neither he nor Tom were aware that the ship had suddenly changed
+her course.
+
+By and by however, Juarez waked with a start. Something had happened, he
+knew not what. He sat up and struck his head upon the planking overhead.
+Fortunately however he did not hit the place where the Mexican had
+struck him but at the best his head was a tender place with him and the
+blow stunned him, but as he was now more his rugged self, he soon
+recovered.
+
+He found what had wakened him was the stopping of the ship. He saw
+several dark forms moving aft and he crept out to see what was afoot. He
+had to move very carefully but managed to reach the hood of the
+forecastle, where he crouched looking and listening.
+
+He saw that they were lying to, close in to shore and could see the
+white splash of the breakers as they rolled towards the shore and could
+hear their monotonous thunder upon the beach. Here perhaps was their
+chance. Just then he heard the heavy voice of the Captain from the
+bridge.
+
+"Lower away there." Then the starboard boat slid noiselessly down from
+the davits into the water.
+
+Juarez got up and glided back into the cubby hole to tell Tom the good
+news. It was their opportunity to escape and seemingly a good one. The
+sea was smooth and the night was dark. They could slip over the side of
+the vessel and pull for the shore, and not a soul on the Sea Eagle would
+be the wiser until they looked into their nest in the morning to find it
+empty.
+
+Once they got to the shore it would be an easy matter to make their way
+North until they met Jim and Jo.
+
+The anticipation of the escape had already thrilled through every nerve
+in Juarez's body. But he had just started to wake Tom, when something
+made him look down the deck. There was the tall figure of one of the
+sailors coming directly towards the bow.
+
+Juarez lay down quickly as though asleep. Then the man reached down and
+caught hold of Tom's foot and Juarez's and gave them a rough yank. "So
+you are here, you young brats. You had better make a move or the Cap'n
+will finish you."
+
+Juarez was fairly sizzling with rage especially as Tom was really
+frightened by being wakened in such rough fashion and after all Tom was
+but a boy and it pained Juarez to see him so scared, but he was
+helpless, and all he could do was to add one more black mark to the
+score he was charging up to the free-booters.
+
+Instead of moving away, the man sat on a capstan a few feet distant from
+the boys' den, watching for the slightest move on their part, a marlin
+spike dangling playfully in his hands. Juarez had not taken the crafty
+and keen sighted Captain Broom into account.
+
+From the Bridge, that worthy, although he was watching the launching of
+the boat, had chanced to catch sight out of the tail of his eye of a
+dark shadow flitting back to the forecastle. He was not sure it was one
+of the boys, but he was taking no chances, for he had a real respect for
+their prowess and audacity as he might well have.
+
+So he had sent one of his crew to guard this young lions' den, while the
+ship was so close in shore. He did not intend to stay longer than was
+necessary right at this point, and he waited with some anxiety for the
+return of the mate and Pete in the boat.
+
+It was now two o'clock in the morning and Captain Broom wanted to be out
+at sea a good safe distance before the light broke. The mate's boat had
+now been gone over a half-hour, and the Captain stood at the end of the
+Bridge looking towards the shore. There was not a light upon the vessel
+to show her position. She lay silent and black upon the dark waters.
+
+Then the Captain straightened up. He saw a moving body approaching the
+ship and heard the slight dip of oars. Then the boat was alongside and
+instead of two men, there were three in the boat. The Captain went down
+to the main deck to meet them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+THE PASSENGER
+
+
+They met without any formality. The new passenger was a tall, slightly
+stooped man, with long hair falling down to his shoulders. Juarez was
+exceedingly anxious to see him, but could make out only a dark form
+moving along the deck.
+
+"Come to the cabin, Jeems," called the Captain. "I've got something to
+tell ye."
+
+They were soon seated in the Captain's cabin. This was a good-sized
+room, panelled in light wood and very neatly kept. There was quite a
+broad table of the same wood as the walls and a swivel chair in front of
+it. The Captain seated himself in this chair and whirled to talk to the
+visitor from the shore.
+
+It was evident that he was not a temporary visitor for scarcely had they
+seated themselves in the cabin than the Sea Eagle slowly and gently
+turned and they felt the pulsation of her engines as she headed once
+more for sea. The man was seated on a sea chest opposite the Captain.
+
+He wore long cowhide boots, with jeans pants thrust into their tops,
+flannel shirt of a nondescript color and a corduroy jacket. His hat was
+of a battered gray. The face was smooth-shaven, deeply lined and burnt
+to a dull brown. The hair which came down to his shoulders had that
+peculiar sun-burnt weathered tinge that comes from continual exposure to
+the weather. He was not an old man, probably on the sunny side of forty.
+
+"Well, Jeems, what is your news?" inquired the Captain.
+
+"The government boat is in the harbor, that's all." The Captain gave a
+low, peculiar whistle.
+
+"When did she show up?" he asked.
+
+"Two days ago, Cap'n," he replied.
+
+"Come from the South?"
+
+"Yes," replied the man. "Put in for coal, I reckon."
+
+"Then put out for us," said the Captain briefly.
+
+"Any 'baccy, Cap'n? Been out two days," remarked Jeems.
+
+"Lift your lanky frame off that chest," replied the Captain, "and I'll
+git you some."
+
+The man sprang up with remarkable alacrity, and as he unfolded length
+after length of his long figure, it seemed as if his head would touch
+the ceiling of the cabin. In fact, he did not miss it by many inches.
+It was a comical contrast between the short stooping figure of the
+Captain and the tall stranger.
+
+"Waal, Jeems, I wouldn't advise you to grow any more, or I'll have to
+raise the roof of my cabin."
+
+"That's what, Cap'n," replied Jeems imperturbably. "That's what happens
+when you grow up in Californy. You grow all the year around, and not
+like in New England where the winters makes you stubby."
+
+Then the native philosopher seated himself on the chest again and took
+long and delightful pulls at his recently staked pipe.
+
+"Hum!" he said. "This tastes right. Did yer ever know what it war to be
+starved for yer 'baccy, Cap'n?"
+
+"No," replied the Captain, "I can't say that I ever did."
+
+"Well, I want to tell you, Cap'n, that it is worse than going without
+water and I know what that is. Been on a desert till my tongue was as
+thick as a cow's, and hung out between my teeth, black."
+
+"How long have you been away?" inquired the Captain.
+
+"Three weeks, Cap'n."
+
+"How are the sheep lookin'?"
+
+"Pretty fair, Cap'n," he replied. "I think that they had a whiff of rain
+over there a few days ago."
+
+"It won't be long till we git the rains," suggested the Captain.
+
+"I don't know, Cap'n," remarked the lanky one. "The climate of Californy
+is a curious proposition. It's built on the bias down at this end."
+
+"How's that?" asked the Captain curiously. He had a certain interest in
+this particular courier's theories, however he might laugh at their
+peculiarities. For there was apt to be a basis of reason in them.
+
+"Well, it's this way, Cap'n," said James Howell, to give him his correct
+name, thrusting one lanky hand deep into his jeans pocket and bending
+forward awkwardly. "It's this way. You see the storms come down from the
+North to the Tehatchipei mountains, where there isn't any way for them
+to get through to the south. Then the clouds shift around to Arizony,
+and if the wind is right they are blown through the passes of the Sierra
+Madre into Southern Californy, then we get the rain. That's why I said,
+Cap'n, that this dazzling climate is built on the bias."
+
+"Waal, Jeems, as a weather prophet you can't be beat," said the
+Skipper.
+
+"In my business I get plenty of time to think, Cap'n," he remarked, "and
+as they ain't much to see except climate I think about that."
+
+"Waal, I have a good sight more than that to consider," replied the
+Skipper. "I'm thinking right now about that government boat. I'm going
+on deck. You can turn in."
+
+The Captain showed him to an empty cabin and the lanky stranger
+proceeded to make himself comfortable for the balance of the night,
+while the Captain went up on the Bridge.
+
+"Where are you heading this boat to?" he asked gruffly of the man at the
+wheel.
+
+Then he took the helm himself and immediately the Sea Eagle's prow
+pointed to the Westward as if she were heading directly for Japan.
+However, she held this course for only an hour and a half when the
+Skipper swung her bow once more to the South.
+
+Long before the morning broke, Tom and Juarez, hauled out of their
+resting place, were set to scrubbing the decks and rubbing them down
+with holy-stone. They waited eagerly for the first break of day to see
+where they were.
+
+Then the light came slowly through the fog-covered sky, showing a glossy
+sea with a slight swell and not a sign of land anywhere. The boys'
+hearts sank within them and they felt sure that they would not see their
+native land again.
+
+Once in a while they would glance up at the Bridge where stood the
+Captain with his powerful stooped figure. He was evidently on the
+lookout, for with his eye at a long glass, he kept scanning the sky-line
+to the east. What was he looking for? Juarez knew instinctively that he
+was afraid of pursuit.
+
+If only they could be overtaken and captured, his heart thrilled at the
+thought and he watched the Captain eagerly for the first sign of
+excitement. About ten o'clock he saw by the Skipper's actions that
+something of interest had come under his observation.
+
+There were a number of quick, sharp orders given and Juarez noticed the
+increased volume of smoke pouring from the stack. The Sea Eagle began to
+show the speed that was in her trim, black form. Juarez worked around
+the port side of the boat as rapidly as he dared, and his heart leaped
+with hope.
+
+He saw low upon the eastern horizon a smudge of black smoke. If he only
+had known what the Skipper knew, his hopes would have risen still
+higher. Certain preparations were going on upon deck. The three cannon,
+one in the stern, that had fired the salute to the group on the shore,
+one on either side of the quarter-deck, were divested of their canvas
+jackets.
+
+They certainly gleamed bravely in their polished brass. Then the
+ammunition was got ready beside each separate gun. It begin to look like
+business. The Sea Eagle began to justify her name and fly through the
+water. Still the spot upon the horizon grew bigger.
+
+Then Juarez began to have a paralyzing feeling of doubt. The steamer,
+though coming up fast, did not seem to be steering the proper course to
+head the Sea Eagle, bearing on her port-quarter instead of across her
+bows as would have been the natural course if she wished to intercept
+her.
+
+Then the doubt in his mind was changed to disappointed certainty for the
+Skipper waved his hand to the mate, who was busy on the deck below. It
+was after he had taken a pull at the spyglass, which this time seemed to
+have an intoxicating effect upon the Captain.
+
+"It's all right, Bill," he yelled, "It's nothing but a steamer bound for
+'Frisco. It looks like the Panama."
+
+Juarez and Tom resumed their work doggedly. That was all that was left
+for them to do. They scarcely glanced at the big steamer as she
+appeared, growing constantly larger above the horizon, and then
+diminishing as she steamed North towards San Francisco.
+
+Juarez was scrubbing the deck near a cabin door when it suddenly opened,
+and a tall, long-legged figure stepped out and fairly over him. He came
+to the conclusion that it was the man who had come aboard the night
+before.
+
+He took in the tall, gaunt man with the smooth-shaven face and long hair
+at two glances--one not being sufficient to his height.
+
+"Well, who are you?" he inquired lounging on the rail and regarding
+Juarez with mild-eyed interest.
+
+"I'm Juarez Hopkins, deck scrubber. Who are you?"
+
+"I'm James Howell, sheep farmer. I'll add you two lambs to my flock," he
+replied, whimsically, glancing at Tom who was down the deck a way.
+
+"You are more apt to find us wolves in lamb's hide," retorted Juarez.
+"Where's your farm?"
+
+"There," said the stranger, pointing with a long, bony finger on the
+port-quarter, "that nigh island."
+
+Then Juarez saw to his surprise, two islands that seemed to have sprung
+like magic upon the South-eastern horizon. The further one lay long and
+low and dark but distant beneath the fog-lined sky, the "nigh one" was
+more short and dumpy in appearance.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+TO THE RESCUE
+
+
+During the afternoon, everything had been made ready for the journey of
+the morrow. There was not a great deal to be done for the three rescuers
+would travel light. There would be no need of a pack animal, because the
+Senor had assured the boys that they would find hospitality on the way.
+
+Jo however was in mourning because when he gave his black a trial
+gallop, it was discovered that he was badly lamed in the right knee. It
+would not have been safe for any of the pirate gang to come within range
+of Jo's wrath.
+
+"The cursed brutes stove him up for fair," he declared grinding his
+teeth.
+
+"I'm afraid it will take a month's rest before he will be fit,"
+determined Jim.
+
+"Then I'm out of it," exclaimed Jo sorrowfully.
+
+"Not so, my friend," interrupted the Spaniard. "Take the bay. He is not
+as good a horse as yours, but he has great endurance. He is yours to use
+as long as you wish."
+
+Jo thanked the Spaniard heartily for his kindness and generosity. Then
+he spoke in a low voice to his brother. "How about that money, Jim?
+Don't forget to pay the Spaniard for those goods we bought at the
+store." Jim spoke up.
+
+"Senor, I wish to show you a little something of interest."
+
+Then Jim got his heavy saddle, on which he had ridden so many hundred
+miles. And the Senor regarded it with interest, because of the carved
+leather workmanship which was of the finest and he was a connoisseur of
+such matters.
+
+"How much would you give for it, Senor Sebastian," inquired Jim, "if it
+were put up for purchase?"
+
+"It is a beautiful saddle. I would be willing to give a hundred dollars.
+It is worth it."
+
+"That saddle is worth several thousand, Senor," replied Jim confidently.
+
+"I do not understand," replied the Spaniard. "It is the personal value,
+I suppose."
+
+"I will show you," said Jim.
+
+Then he took from his hip pocket a heavy bone handled knife which he had
+bought at the store and pulled back the hoof cleaner, an instrument
+attached to the knife that was used to get a pebble or anything that had
+got into the horse's hoof.
+
+With this he worked at the leather that covered the high and rather
+thick horn of the saddle. Finally he pried the top leather flap off.
+There was a heavy piece fitted into the top of the horn. With some
+difficulty Jim got this out disclosing a hollow, in which was concealed
+most of the jewels he had found in Mexico.
+
+"Hold your hands, Jo. Tight now." And with the word he emptied the
+contents of the horn into Jo's palms. Diamonds, rubies, turquoises and
+some heavy gold pieces.
+
+"That is what you might call a horn of plenty," said Jim jocosely.
+
+"But!" cried the Spaniard in amazement, "where did you get these?"
+
+"In Mexico," replied Jim. "This was what the Pirates were after. And
+they got all but this. Sometime I will tell you the story of its
+discovery. Now take this to reimburse you, Senor, for the money we spent
+at the store." And he held out the diamond.
+
+"That is far too much. That stone is worth five hundred dollars at
+least," said the Spaniard. "These three rubies would be more exact and I
+will take them."
+
+Jim, handing over the three stones selected, said, "Now, Senor, you
+shall take the diamond as a token of good will from my brother and
+myself."
+
+"We insist upon it," chimed in Jo.
+
+Finally the Spaniard accepted the gifts with many protestations of
+obligation and appreciation. Jo was about to urge him to accept a jewel
+for his sister, but Jim stopped him, knowing that the proud Spaniard
+would not hear to such a present.
+
+The next morning they were up an hour before daylight and ate a hearty
+breakfast by the light of the candles. Veterans though they were, the
+boys felt a thrill go through their pulses as they thought of the
+expedition that lay before them. Outside they could hear the pawing of
+the impatient horses.
+
+"To the success of our expedition and the rescue of our friends!" was
+the toast the Spaniard proposed as they rose from the table. The
+Frontier Boys drank it, but not in wine. They felt just a little foolish
+too, but such is the reward that often comes with doing what is right.
+But they were sturdy in their determination to stick to their
+principles.
+
+If they had only known it, down in his heart the Spaniard respected them
+the more, even though it seemed odd to him.
+
+Then they went out on the verandah, fully armed and ready to take their
+departure. Two oil lamps near the door and fastened to the wall, backed
+by shining reflectors sent a strong light across the verandah and into
+the darkness outside.
+
+There stood the three horses, eager to be off, each one held by a
+Mexican groom. Caliente we already know, and the horse that Jo is to
+ride also. So let us take a glance at the third animal, Don Fernando. He
+evidently justified all the enthusiasm of his master, a truly splendid
+creature.
+
+A dark chestnut, as large as Caliente and built on something the same
+lines. They were beautifully matched except in color. It was with a
+thrill of pleasure that Jim swung himself into the saddle. His mount was
+in fine fettle and ready for the long pull ahead.
+
+They started from the home ranch with a thunder of hoofs in unison, the
+riders checking their horses to a slow gallop with a heavy hand.
+Together they pressed through the waning darkness. There was a wonderful
+exhilaration, as they leaped forward, the horses powerful and fresh.
+
+Instead of following in the direction of the morning before, the
+Spaniard turned to the East until they came near the foot of the range.
+In a short time they came to a gate, which seemed to open mysteriously
+as they approached, but the motive power proved to be a small Mexican
+boy, whom the Senor had sent on ahead.
+
+Now they were on a turf road with bushes on either side and down this
+they thundered, Caliente the gray, and Don Fernando the dark, matching
+stride for stride, with Jo well in the rear. For he found if he rode
+close up he was blinded and stung by sods and stones thrown back from
+the flying hoofs of the two horses in the front.
+
+It was a bit lonely for Jo and he wished that one of the other boys was
+here to keep him company. As they rode, the bushes seemed to fly by as
+they do when you look from a railroad train and Jo was afraid lest his
+horse would be unable to keep the pace indefinitely. One thing in Jo's
+favor was that he was the lightest of the three and what is more to the
+purpose a very light rider.
+
+So like the good horseman he was, he determined to save his horse all he
+could and make him last out. For eight miles or more they rode without a
+stop until they came to another gate. This the Spaniard unfastened and
+swung open without dismounting, then closed it after Jo.
+
+The morning light was now distinct, although the fog was over the sky.
+Before them stretched a long level plain that broke into sand dunes near
+the sea. They could see the ocean lying dark in its monotonous level of
+color, to the Western horizon.
+
+"We have just left the Sebastian ranch," called the Spaniard.
+
+"It is immense," commented Jim. "May I ask how many acres it embraces?"
+
+"It was immense in the old days," replied the Spaniard. "Before your
+people took possession of the land. It was held by no fences then. But
+your laws were not ours and we lost many square miles. Now there are
+fifty thousand acres under fence."
+
+"Fifty thousand acres!" exclaimed Jo.
+
+"Ah, but it was double that before the Americans came," replied the
+Spaniard. Then he glanced critically at Caliente. "Your horse looks as
+cool as though he had been standing in the stable. The pace does not
+affect his wind either. Splendid condition!"
+
+"Caliente is as hard as nails," said Jim proudly. "But your horse has
+wonderful speed."
+
+The chestnut seemed more on edge than the old warrior, Caliente, and
+tossed the foam from his bit, until his dark coat was speckled with it.
+
+"He is high strung," said the Spaniard, "but I would back him against
+any horse flesh in California. We can let them out here for a half dozen
+miles."
+
+"Let her go, Senor. I won't let you lose me."
+
+At the word the Spaniard gave his chafing horse his head and away the
+chestnut sprang in the lead. It was slightly down grade for a mile,
+then there was a gulch twelve feet wide and of considerable depth. It
+was a good jump and to make it saved a little distance. Going at top
+speed the chestnut took the jump in fine style. His rider half turned in
+his saddle to watch Jim's effort. Caliente had faced worse leaps than
+that, he rose to it and swept over it as gracefully as a bird.
+
+"Good fellow!" exclaimed Jim patting him affectionately on the neck.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+THE BANDITS
+
+
+When Jo saw the gulch ahead, he decided that discretion was the better
+part of valor as he did not know his mount well enough to risk the leap,
+so he galloped a few hundred feet below, where the gulch narrowed and
+then he took the jump nicely, and scampered after the other two riders
+who were quite a way ahead.
+
+Jim purposely held Caliente in check, keeping a hundred yards in the
+rear of the Spaniard. Ahead a few miles, there was a perfect sea of
+yellow where the tall mustard covered the plain for a great distance.
+Into this they charged full tilt, the mustard reaching as high as their
+heads.
+
+There was a swish of its blossoms in their faces as the powerful horses
+charged into it and in spite of their strength they began to tire after
+going some distance.
+
+"Where is Jo?" inquired Jim suddenly after they had slowed down, "I
+don't see a sign of him." And he rose in his stirrups looking over the
+level lake of mustard.
+
+"Hello, Jo," he yelled at the top of his voice. No answer came. Could he
+be drowned in this lake? There was not a motion to indicate his
+whereabouts, no waving of the yellow tops.
+
+"It is very strange," said the Spaniard. "Did he cross the gully all
+right?"
+
+"Yes, I saw him take the jump below us a ways." Then Jim raised his
+revolver above his head and fired.
+
+"That ought to fetch him," he said. Then they listened intently.
+Suddenly about a quarter of a mile ahead of them they saw a sombrero
+rise like a gray mushroom above the yellow surface of the mustard, and
+Jo's voice came back to them.
+
+They both gave their horses the rein, this time Jim did nothing to hold
+Caliente back, and with their powerful speed the two great horses tore
+forward, on even terms until in the last hundred yards Caliente forged
+ahead by half a length.
+
+"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. There was Jo sitting quietly on
+his horse.
+
+"That's how you beat us," exclaimed Jim, pointing to a cow trail running
+diagonally through the growth of mustard.
+
+"Yes," laughed Jo, "I struck it further down after I jumped the gully.
+Otherwise you fellows would have lost me."
+
+"Good work, Jo," said Jim. "Now we will have it easier going."
+
+So in single file they galloped along the path, until they found
+themselves by noon, at the foot of a spur of mountains that extended
+from the main coast range to the ocean. Jim regarded this barrier in
+their way with a practised eye.
+
+"This will slow us down, Senor," he said. "It looks like a pass below
+there, about two miles."
+
+"Yes," said the Senor, "we can get through there all right, but it is
+pretty rough going."
+
+They had to advance more slowly now, as the ground was broken into stony
+ravines, and there was a good deal of brush. In this kind of country
+Jo's horse more than held its own with the bigger animals, for he was as
+nimble as a goat.
+
+"I hope we will find water, Senor," remarked Jim. "Our horses are pretty
+dry now."
+
+"Yes," replied the Spaniard, "there is a good spring at the foot of the
+Pass."
+
+They found it all right, in the entrance to the Pass, where there was a
+small green cove, surrounded with bushes, and on one side was a sheep
+herder's shanty. Jo investigated this immediately and found nothing in
+it but the charred remnants of a fire and a pair of discarded overalls.
+
+Jim, who had himself been looking around, made a more important find.
+
+"There has been somebody here recently," he announced. "Here are some
+tracks around the spring and not over twelve hours old."
+
+"Yes, I have no doubt," said the Spaniard carelessly puffing at his
+cigarette. "This Pass is used occasionally by ranchmen and herders."
+
+"There have been five or six horses here," said Jim, whose experiences
+had made him suspicious.
+
+"There are no Indians," said Jo, "in this section, at least none who are
+on the warpath."
+
+"I suppose you do have cattle rustlers, Senor?" inquired Jim.
+
+"Yes, there is a band of outlaws," replied the Spaniard, "that raids
+from as far north as our ranch, south to San Diego, but we have seen no
+trace of them for many months."
+
+"Then, Senor," remarked Jim, "it is about time that they paid you
+another visit."
+
+"Ah, Senor Darlington," exclaimed the Spaniard. "We Castilians do not
+reason so. We say that there is no trouble today, why worry about
+tomorrow. Perhaps these bandits may have starved to death, or been hung,
+or the good Padres may have persuaded them by the fear of Hell, to
+become quiet, sheep raising citizens. God knows."
+
+"I fear that they are raising sheep in their old style," grinned Jo. The
+pun glanced off the Spaniard harmlessly.
+
+"The theory that they may be hung, sounds plausible, Senor," admitted
+Jim. "But before we advance into the Pass, I will scout a little."
+
+"If the Senor pleases," responded the Spaniard courteously.
+
+"Do you chance to know of a small, hunchbacked Mexican who is more or
+less in this section of the country, Senor?" Jim suddenly inquired.
+
+The Spaniard flushed with red anger and spit emphatically on the ground.
+
+"You give him into my hands and I will reward you well," cried the
+Spaniard.
+
+Jim made no immediate reply but gazed thoughtfully at the ground. He was
+considering the case. This was not the time to turn aside in a chase for
+even so desperate a criminal as the hunchbacked greaser. So he made no
+definite reply to the Spaniard.
+
+After the horses were fed, and watered, and while Jo was looking after
+the coffee, Jim started off, to do a little scouting up the Pass. The
+first thing that he did was to slip off his heavy riding boots, which
+the stylish Jo had forced him to buy, and to put on his noiseless footed
+moccasins.
+
+Then with his revolver loaded and ready to his hand, he went swiftly and
+silently up the trail that followed through thick brush, gradually
+working up the side of the mountain. It was no difficult task to follow
+the tracks of the horses. In a half hour's swift climbing he came to the
+top of a stony ridge, over which the trail curved, and dipped down the
+other side.
+
+Jim now saw that the Pass was an irregular one with recurrent spurs,
+thrusting out from the mountains on either side, at quite frequent
+intervals. There were innumerable chances for ambuscades. Jim did not
+stand in the trail but to one side partially hidden in a thicket.
+
+All the time his keen eyes were taking in the canyon below, not however
+admiring the scenery. In fact there was nothing particularly beautiful,
+or interesting in the view. In the Rockies and further South too he had
+seen canyons incomparable to the rather ordinary ones that he had seen
+in California.
+
+Jim was watching for some slight movement of a living creature in the
+canyon. Finally he gave it up, and was about to turn away, then he gave
+a start, he saw one, two, three, men crouch across the trail, a quarter
+of a mile below, and disappear into the thick brush. He was almost
+certain that the first one was the hunchback.
+
+That was all that Jim wanted to see. He noiselessly took the back trail,
+thinking over the best course to pursue. He would have liked nothing
+better under ordinary circumstances than to fight it out with the
+outlaws and to capture the hunchback. But their first object must be the
+rescue of Tom and Juarez.
+
+Was there not some way by which they could get to the South without
+going through this bandit infested Pass?
+
+"Well brother, what didst thou find?" inquired Jo, who was at times
+pleased to be dramatic.
+
+"Very few specimens in the way of bandits," replied Jim.
+
+"As I said, Senor," remarked the Spaniard, "they have become good
+citizens."
+
+"Not yet, I am sure, because they are alive."
+
+"That is a good one, Jim," remarked Jo, appreciatively, but the Spaniard
+was politely mystified. "Same as Indians."
+
+"I found one thing out," said the diplomatic Jim, "and that is, that the
+Pass is a hard one on horses. Are you sure, Senor, that there is no
+easier way than this to get through?"
+
+"Positive," briefly responded the Spaniard.
+
+Jim who was seated on a rock digging his heel into the soft earth,
+looked up as a sudden idea struck him,--but without knocking him out.
+
+"How far is it from here to the sea, Senor?" he asked.
+
+"Not over five miles."
+
+"Can we not get around that way?" Jim inquired eagerly.
+
+"Why, yes," replied the Spaniard slowly, "if the tide is not coming in.
+In that case we should be drowned." Jim glanced hastily at his watch.
+
+"We can try for it and make it, if we do not waste any time," he said.
+"The horses have had a good rest."
+
+"Very well, Senor," said the Spaniard resignedly. He regarded Jim as an
+amiable hurricane whom it was not worth while battering to resist. Jim
+hastily swallowed his coffee and a hunk of bread and in five minutes the
+three musketeers were in the saddle again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+RACE WITH THE TIDE
+
+
+In spite of the rough going, they made good time for the five miles,
+spurred on by the constant anxiety lest they should not reach the beach
+before the tide began coming in. There were several gathered to see them
+off when they left the mouth of the Pass, but not to give them a send
+off.
+
+A short explanation will prove this. It is not to be supposed that the
+hunchbacked Mexican and the bandits did not know that the three horsemen
+were coming over the plain of the mustard growth. Indeed, their scout,
+the Mexican dwarf, saw Jim, Jo and the Spaniard when they first landed
+in the entrance to the canyon.
+
+He had gone back to report to the bandits their coming, and after Jim
+had returned, they had prepared the nicest trap imaginable near where
+Jim had been hiding. They had had numerous experiences in that line and
+were perfectly qualified experts. The spider and the fly was nothing to
+the arrangements they had made to receive their supposably unsuspicious
+guests.
+
+You can imagine the surprise and disgust of the bandits and their scout
+when they saw the three horsemen ride in an entirely different direction
+than that they had looked for. Talk about convulsions, you should have
+seen these desperadoes express their disappointment. It was terrific.
+Not a saint in the long calendar was left unscathed.
+
+How Jim would have enjoyed the performance. But entirely oblivious to
+this, Jo, Jim and the Spaniard were riding rapidly towards the sea.
+Before an hour had passed, they had ridden between the rounded sand
+dunes and then out upon the hard, smooth sand of the beach.
+
+"This is splendid going, Senor Sebastian," exclaimed Jim.
+
+"It is all right," he replied, "if the sea does not get hungry too
+soon." But the sea appeared to be in a very pleasant mood and the white
+breakers had withdrawn as far out as it was possible to get. It was such
+a smooth smiling sea with the laugh of its little sparkling waves that
+it seemed that there could be no possible harm in it.
+
+"I never saw a road that was better than this!" exclaimed Jo in
+delight. "It is perfectly springy and no dust or mud."
+
+It deserved all of Jo's praises, this broad, firm California beach. The
+brown sand, that had been pounded down by the force of the great rollers
+some hours before, showed scarcely a sign of the shoes of the horses.
+
+There was plenty of width and the three horses pressed on abreast, the
+powerful sweep of the gray Caliente and the chestnut Don Fernando, and
+the snappy, nervous leaps of the little bay that Jo was riding. With the
+bracing sea air and the exhilarating speed, the three musketeers were
+invigorated.
+
+The Spaniard hummed a gay ballad, while at times Jim's heavy bass and
+Jo's lighter treble were joined in a rollicking American song. They
+laughed without reason, for the simple joy of being alive and on the
+move; but as pride sometimes goes before destruction, so happiness often
+goes before disaster.
+
+It was a small matter too, but it made for trouble. The Spaniard's horse
+stepped between two small rocks that were close together and wrenched
+one of his hind shoes nearly off. Jim and Senor Sebastian hastily
+dismounted. Of course they carried with them the necessary things to
+fix the shoe on again, but even then it was a question of a number of
+minutes.
+
+"You had better ride ahead, Jo," urged Jim. "Your horse is beginning to
+tire and we will overtake you, when we once get started."
+
+"It is a good idea," joined in the Spaniard.
+
+"All right," acquiesced Jo readily enough, and he gave his bay the rein,
+riding slowly down the beach.
+
+Then the two began operations on Don Fernando's hind foot. Here they
+found their first real delay. At the point where the accident happened,
+the mountains came down quite close to the sea, so that they were
+crowded in much closer than they had been. The nearness of the water
+made the big chestnut restless and hard to handle.
+
+The Spaniard had great difficulty in getting near enough to his horse to
+get hold of his hind foot. When he did succeed in doing this, and was
+just starting to peg the shoe on, an extra big wave slapped down upon
+the beach, though at a safe distance and caused the big chestnut to jump
+and hurl his master to a distance of a dozen feet.
+
+"This won't do," cried Jim. "I'll take my horse around to the sea side
+of yours and close up. Perhaps that will give your animal confidence."
+
+It worked like a charm, for though Caliente was high-spirited, he was
+not flighty and he steadied his comrade so that the two workers were
+able to fasten the shoe.
+
+"We have lost a good half hour," said Jim, looking at his watch with a
+grave face.
+
+"Perhaps we shall have to turn back," remarked the Spaniard with
+gravity. "We may not escape the incoming tide if we go on."
+
+"Don't you believe it," cried Jim, impetuously. "I've got business ahead
+and must go."
+
+"Have it your way," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile. He knew
+what dangers lay ahead with a rising tide and Jim did not or he probably
+would not have been so insistent.
+
+"I see no sign of Jo," remarked Jim, as they swung into the saddles.
+
+"Ah, we will not catch him. He is safe," replied the Spaniard.
+
+Then with tremendous speed, they swept down the beach, the splendid
+horses responding to the crisis. It was their fleetness against the
+steadily rising rush of the inexorable sea. They actually gained ten
+minutes on the first two miles and a half. Then Jim saw ahead the dark
+form of a headland thrusting out towards the sea.
+
+Already the rush of a long wave would send the water lapping around
+their horses' feet. Jim recognized the danger. They must get around that
+promontory or give up beaten. Then he gave Caliente a touch with a spur,
+the first that day. With a snort, the spirited animal sprang forward
+faster than before and at his shoulder was the chestnut with flaming
+nostril.
+
+None too soon had they reached the headland, for the recurrent waves
+were beginning to surge against it, with full force and gnawing foam. In
+the fierce fury of their charge, they sent their horses against the sea.
+It was at the long withdrawal that made bare the scattered black rocks,
+that they rounded the headland.
+
+But too soon a great thundering wave with the force of the Pacific
+behind it came roaring in and swelled to the horses' throats, almost
+submerging the riders. But the animals held against its withdrawing
+power and before the ocean could return to the attack, they had got
+beyond the headland to a safe place on the beach.
+
+The horses were trembling and quivering with their exertions and with
+the fear of the sea which is the most terrible and paralyzing of all
+fears. Jim drew a long breath of relief and looked ahead to see if there
+was any sign of Jo. Then to his consternation he saw that the beach
+curved inland and at the further end of the curve was another frowning
+headland thrusting itself out somewhat further than the one they had but
+just rounded.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+THE ENCHANTED ISLE
+
+
+Let us now return to the Sea Eagle, and find out what is happening
+there.
+
+You recollect that Juarez had just discovered two islands lying on the
+South-eastern horizon, the one, long and low, the other comparatively
+short and dumpy. He had been conversing with the tall shepherd of the
+island, who seemed to take an interest in Juarez. But because of his
+isolated life during a greater part of the year, he would have taken an
+interest in a stone idol, if he had chanced to discover one.
+
+"Which of these islands are we making for?" inquired Juarez.
+
+"The one where we land," replied the sheep farmer oracularly. "I might
+ask the Cap'n, only I never pester him with questions. You aren't a
+Yankee, are you?"
+
+"No," replied Juarez, "I'm not. My folks live in Western Kansas."
+
+"I'm glad to hear it, son. But what are you doing here?" he asked.
+
+"You aren't a Yankee, are you?" inquired Juarez, quizzically. The man
+laughed softly to himself.
+
+"You've got me there, lad," he said. "It looks to me," he continued,
+"that the old man is going to steer for the further island."
+
+"Then you will have to swim for your home," remarked Juarez.
+
+"I can wade," he replied whimsically, looking down at his long legs.
+
+"You are a humorist," said Juarez.
+
+"No, you can put me down for a philosopher, that is to say, a man who
+has much time to think and nothing to do."
+
+"I should like to be one," said Juarez. "Suppose you holy-stone these
+decks while I try it."
+
+"No, my friend," replied the shepherd, "I am too much of a philosopher
+to make any such swap."
+
+"Is Captain Broom one?" asked Juarez.
+
+"Well, he is a sort of a philosopher till he gets mad, then he becomes a
+living active volcano, belching out a lava of hot language and scorching
+things generally. I guess that I had better be moving along. I see that
+he is eyeing me from the Bridge, and he is likely to get active any
+moment if I keep you from working." With this the lanky shepherd
+strolled forward and seating himself upon the top of the boys' sleeping
+place in the bow, smoked his pipe in meditative comfort.
+
+His estimate in regard to the destination of the Sea Eagle proved to be
+correct. For in the early afternoon the ship passed under the lee of the
+long island and was steaming up the channel between it and the mainland,
+which was distant some thirty-five miles.
+
+The fog had cleared by noon, and there was that complete transition to
+brilliant, sunny weather. There was a sort of a white haze along the
+distant coast and beyond far inland, rose the faint summits of the high
+mountains.
+
+Fortunately Juarez and Tom had a chance to observe their new
+surroundings for they had been set to work sewing on a small sail that
+was to be used in one of the boats. They sat upon the top of one of the
+hatches, under the watchful eyes of old Pete and the philosophic gaze of
+the shepherd. Sewing was one of the accomplishments of the Frontier
+Boys. They had been obliged to learn.
+
+"What is that particular bronze looking weed, floating in these waters?"
+asked Tom. It was as Tom phrased it, bronze and a most beautiful color.
+
+It was indeed a giant among weeds; just such as the garden of the ocean
+would grow. The stems were fifty to eighty feet long, with peculiar
+colored leaves eight to ten inches in length, growing on little boughs
+from the parent stem. The whole structure was held up by small bronze
+buoys, of a round shape.
+
+"Well as ye seem likely boys and want to learn, I'll tell you about this
+plant," said the shepherd. "The scientific fellows call it Algae. When
+the world was first made this algae covered the whole surface of the
+ocean."
+
+"How did you learn this?" asked Juarez.
+
+"You know that the Captain is quite a collector, and in his travels has
+gotten together among many other things some interesting books. He gives
+them to me when convenient." The face of the lanky shepherd was
+perfectly grave when he spoke of Captain Broom as a collector.
+
+"What makes the water so clear around here?" asked Juarez. "I never saw
+anything like it."
+
+"Well, you see," replied their mentor, "this island is placed
+peculiarly, I mean this side of it. You see how quiet the water is?"
+
+"It is certainly smooth and blue," said Juarez. "More like a lake than
+the ocean."
+
+"That's only true of this side," resumed the shepherd, "the other is
+rough enough, but you see the prevailing winds are from the Northwest
+and this shore is never disturbed. So on the beaches you will find not
+sand, but smooth round pebbles, because there is no action of the water,
+no breakers or waves to grind them into sand."
+
+About four o'clock the Sea Eagle came into a perfectly beautiful little
+harbor, at the South-eastern end of the island. There was a small level
+plot back from the beach and on all sides rose steep hills and back of
+them the mountains. It was the most picturesque scene the boys had ever
+beheld in all their travels.
+
+What would they not have given to have been free to roam that island,
+hunting inland, or fishing or bathing along those quiet, enchanted
+shores. But this was no pleasure excursion. Far from it. Captain Broom
+had his own ideas, and he did not intend to make a landing at all.
+
+"Get the whale boat ready, lads!" he ordered. "And put her over, we've
+got no time to lose."
+
+They lost no time either, under Captain Broom's commanding eye.
+
+What was necessary for the cruise was already in the boat. Two casks of
+water, several guns, and a lot of provisions. Then the boat was hove
+overboard into the quiet bay. The captain was ready with a much battered
+satchel in his hand. Not for one second did he entrust it to any one
+else.
+
+"Now over with you, you two lads," he commanded and Juarez and Tom,
+with a sinking of the heart, got into the boat. This was the last leg of
+their mysterious journey, and it boded them no good they felt sure of
+that. The mate they noticed stayed aboard in charge of the ship.
+
+They were put in the stern where old Pete had the steering oar. Near
+them sat the shepherd on one of the casks of water, his long legs
+getting uncertain accommodation. The captain had his position in the bow
+and two powerful sailors were at the oars, one on either side. They did
+not sit down, but stood up to their work.
+
+Without any loss of time the boat got under way proceeding seaward from
+the shelter of the beautiful little harbor. In spite of their
+depression, the two boys could not help being interested in the
+absolutely clear water in which they could look down for eighty feet.
+
+They could see the straight slender columns of the Algae rising to the
+surface, starting from where they were rooted in the bottom of the bay
+and swaying to the slow pulsation of the tide. These strange plants of
+this marine garden were marvels indeed. Between their stalks and among
+the encrusted rocks swam in absolute unconsciousness of being watched,
+many beautiful, and strange fishes.
+
+Some were small of golden hue, with little spots of a marvelous blue
+(poetry) that flashed like keen electric dew, (that will do). Others
+were like gold fishes, a foot in length and of corresponding breadth.
+There were long mackerel, and innumerable minnows, and over the rocks a
+peculiar little fish crawled or rather walked on thin rat-like feet.
+
+Before they had time to observe further the boat had got out of the
+harbor where the water sunk away to blue unfathomed depth. When clear of
+the harbor, they turned to the South, passing near a cove with a
+symmetrical pebbly beach, built up for five feet, above the level of the
+water. The ocean was perfectly smooth, with not a ripple upon its
+surface. They were evidently making to round the Southern extremity of
+the Island.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+IN THE WHITE BOAT
+
+
+Ahead of them was a rock rising fifty or sixty feet out of the water. It
+was evident that the rock was inhabited for there could be seen dark
+forms moving around upon it. Nothing had been said since they started,
+for the Captain was not in a talkative mood. Jeems Howell, the shepherd,
+had sat silently smoking his pipe in philosophic contentment.
+
+"What are those things on that rock?" inquired Tom, his curiosity
+getting the best of his reserve.
+
+"Two yankees in this boat," commented the shepherd. "Those are seals,
+son. Didn't you ever see any before?"
+
+"No!" admitted Tom.
+
+"You didn't know that seals, next to humans, are the smartest animals,
+in the world."
+
+"Is that so?" inquired Juarez. "They certainly are sleek."
+
+"They have got the most brain room, that's a fact."
+
+The boys regarded the seals with peculiar interest as the boat passed
+near the rock. They were moving about awkwardly by means of their
+flippers, moving their sinuous necks this way and that and regarding the
+strange boat with their soft brown eyes. Then they dived headlong into
+the sea, swimming about with a peculiar grace.
+
+"Queer animals," remarked Tom, "belong half to the sea and half to the
+land."
+
+"Something like sailors," remarked the shepherd.
+
+"What's the Captain going to do with us?" asked Juarez in a low voice.
+The shepherd's face took on a solemn expression, but before he could
+reply the Captain's voice roared.
+
+"None of that, you'll find out soon enough. You can talk about the flory
+and fauny, with long shanks, but don't let me hear anything else out of
+you," such was the Captain's ultimatum.
+
+But soon matters grew so interesting that they lost all inclination for
+talking. When they got near the Southern end of the island they began to
+notice white caps to the Southward, dotting the darkness of the sea.
+
+"You lads will have to hold tight now in a few minutes," remarked
+Howell. "Do you get seasick?"
+
+"No," replied the boys.
+
+"Well, you will have a chance soon, and if it don't fetch you, nothing
+will."
+
+So far they had been rowing under the sheltering lee of the island whose
+huge rocky bulk had shouldered off the charge of the wind-driven seas.
+Now before they had fairly rounded the island the character of the water
+began to change. The boat began to toss on the great rollers. Then as
+they cleared the land for good and were in the channel, a fresh gust of
+wind struck them, drenching the occupants of the boat with spray.
+
+The Captain stood up in the bow of the boat and steadying himself took
+in the conditions of the sea and wind. There was nothing in his grim
+weatherbeaten face to show what he felt. The men at the oars now made
+hard work of it against the headwind and the running sea.
+
+They would climb up a steep wave and then with a sickening slide, go
+down into the hollow, then with a lusty pull the sailors would bring the
+heavy boat over the toppling crest of wave to find another rushing to
+meet them. No rest, this was what made it such heart breaking work.
+
+The early fog had come, covering the sea with gloom, and the waves did
+not go down perceptibly. At times, they shipped a good deal of water and
+Tom and Juarez were kept busy bailing out. After an hour's hard
+struggle the sailors were about all in and seemed hardly able to hold
+their own against the sea and wind. The Captain was quick to notice
+this.
+
+"Can you row, lad?" he inquired of Juarez. Now the latter's experience
+had been confined to his work going down the Grand Canyon of Colorado,
+on the raft-boat that the Frontier Boys had built.
+
+Even the old ocean itself could not show anything worse than some of the
+rapids that the boys had run. As for rocks, nothing could beat the
+canyon for them.
+
+"I'll try, sir," he replied, "I've never rowed on the ocean."
+
+"Humph!" grunted the Captain, "take the starboard. And you, you lazy
+long shanks, you take the other oar."
+
+"All right, sir," replied cheerfully, the one addressed.
+
+"Get out of here, Pete," he cried, giving that worthy a lift with his
+foot that landed him on top of Tom, "I'll do the steering. You boys will
+only have to pull, that's all. I'll keep her headed up right."
+
+Fortunately Juarez was in fine condition, or he could never have stood
+the gruelling work ahead. He weighed one hundred and sixty pounds and
+there was not an ounce of fat on him. Likewise he had had a sound
+night's sleep and three square meals so that he was fortified for what
+was ahead.
+
+Juarez buckled to the task with all his strength, and he was glad of the
+chance to get his blood in circulation for he was chilled to the bone by
+the flying spray, and then too, anything was better than thinking of the
+fate ahead. He was surprised to find out that the shepherd who appeared
+rather frail in physique was able to keep up the pace.
+
+But he had that sinewy length of muscles that counts for more than mere
+bunchy thickness. Juarez was crafty enough not to spend all of his
+strength in the first fifteen minutes of work. He liked this, fighting
+the sea and standing on his feet he was able to put the whole leverage
+of his body into the stroke.
+
+The change in speed was noticeable right away, and the boat began to
+pull ahead steadily. The two sailors who had been laid off from
+exhaustion, had watched Juarez with a sneering grin as he took the oar.
+They were sure that the first wave that came along would wrench the oar
+out of his hand. Great was their surprise when they saw him buckle to
+the oar, rising and pulling at the right time to meet the toppling,
+rustling seas.
+
+"That little shrimp will last about ten minutes," said one of them to
+his mate.
+
+"Sure, Bill," replied the other.
+
+Juarez choked back a hot reply, for he knew that it would not be good
+for him to say anything to them. They were in the majority and would get
+him if he did, besides making it bad for Tom. The ten minutes passed and
+Juarez was just beginning to warm to his work. This took the wind out of
+their sails completely.
+
+The powerful hand of the Skipper at the steering oar was a great help,
+for now all that the two men at the oars had to do was to pull and not
+to worry about keeping her headed right. Juarez kept steadily at it for
+an hour and then darkness began to fall over the channel but not until
+the island that they were approaching had begun to loom up, dead ahead.
+
+They were now getting in the lee of the strange island and the sea was
+moderating perceptibly. At this juncture the two sailors who had become
+thoroughly rested took the oars from Juarez and his co-worker and pulled
+steadily through the gathering gloom. In a short time the bulk of the
+island loomed above them in the darkness.
+
+Not a word was said, only the swish of the sea was heard and the
+groaning of the oars in the locks. Tom and Juarez were deeply depressed
+and gloomy. They felt exactly as though they were being taken to prison
+and could sympathize with sailors who had been marooned on lonely and
+desolate islands.
+
+"Easy now, lads," called the Captain, as he brought the boat's head
+squarely around towards the shore.
+
+"Two strokes," he yelled, "and let her run."
+
+With great force they pulled the oars in succession, then they shipped
+them in a hurry. Juarez could see the dashing of foam on either side of
+the boat where the waves smote the rocks. There was a roar in his ears
+as the boat rushed toward seeming sure destruction. It was going with
+great speed from the impetus of the sailors' strokes.
+
+The Captain was standing taut at the steering oars, his eyes piercing
+the darkness ahead, then the foam of the breakers dashed in their faces,
+there was a quick sliding past of dark rocks and before they could draw
+breath again the boat was in quiet water, under some black cliffs. At
+last they had reached the mysterious goal of their mysterious journey.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+IN PERIL
+
+
+We must now go back in our narrative to where we left Jim Darlington and
+the Spaniard, Senor Sebastian, in a position of extreme peril, between
+the cliffs and the deep sea, with the white-fanged tide coming in like a
+devouring monster eager for its prey.
+
+"Is there a chance, Senor?" cried Jim as soon as his horse gained his
+footing.
+
+"It is the fatal day, I fear," replied the Spaniard with resigned
+hopelessness. "The sea is hungry."
+
+"As for that, so am I," declared Jim coolly. "So let us try to get
+around the headland and after that, supper."
+
+"As you please," acquiesced the Spaniard quietly.
+
+Then Jim turned Caliente's head and with a quick touch of the spur sent
+him full stride along the curving beach, followed closely by the
+Spaniard. Already the heavy waves were licking far up the slant of the
+sand. Even the veteran Caliente seemed nervous at its approach, while
+Don Fernando would jump and shy as the hissing water crept around his
+feet.
+
+In about two minutes the two horsemen reached the base of the rocky
+headland that barred their way. It was a desperate moment, there was but
+one thing to do and that was to take the chance.
+
+"Better be drowned quick, Caliente, old boy," cried Jim, "than slowly,
+but we'll beat you yet," and he shook his clenched fist at the ocean,
+and whirled his horse to meet a wave that struck Caliente breast high.
+So for a moment, the two, boy and horse, stood facing their powerful
+enemy, The Sea, that came with the recurring charge, its evenly
+separated files robed in blue with white crests. Thus they stood getting
+a full free breath before they leaped into the ranks of the foe.
+
+Jim's strained, keen gaze took in every detail of the situation, noting
+the position of the rocks that a receding wave left bare, so that he
+might find a clear path or trail in his dash for life. Nor did his gaze
+flinch as he saw the advancing wave break against the front of the
+cliff.
+
+"Now, Caliente," yelled Jim, with a sense of fierce determination and
+exultation that communicated itself to his horse, and lifting his feet
+free from the stirrups so that he would not be entangled, if Caliente
+should fall, he headed him seaward, galloping fast down the beach upon
+the heels of the withdrawing wave.
+
+Meeting a smaller inrush of water and dashing through its foaming crest,
+his gallant horse swam until he got a foothold upon the rocks at the
+base of the cliff. Now was the crucial moment. With absolute
+recklessness, Jim urged his powerful horse over the foam-covered rocks,
+striving to get around the prow of the headland before the charge of the
+next wave. Not one look did Jim give seaward, all his energies were bent
+upon using every precious second, and Caliente was filled with his
+rider's indomitable spirit.
+
+Then above them towered the fatal wave, and with a confused roar, it
+broke over them in sweltering foam and they were swept towards the black
+front of the cliff. Then came the impact against the rock and the next
+moment, stunned and bruised, Jim holding to the pommel of the saddle,
+with a death-grip, was carried out to sea with Caliente in the grasp of
+the retreating wave.
+
+It was all over, as like pieces of drift, horse and rider were swept
+away, but fortune does sometime favor the brave and, being caught in a
+powerful current, Caliente was carried South of the headland and his
+progress towards the sea was stayed by a rock that rose high, an
+outer-guard of the headland. So then the next great wave bore them
+toward the beach, and once Caliente got his feet upon the sandy bottom
+he braced himself against the fierce pull of the retreating sea,
+striving to drag him back again.
+
+Though almost unconscious, Jim clung to the saddle with his body
+half-drooping over the pommel. Then Caliente plunged blindly forward
+until he stood with head bent down and nose almost touching the sand,
+his great sides heaving, but safe at last.
+
+In the distance, a horseman could be seen coming at full gallop along
+the straight line of the beach. It was Jo, who finally had become
+frightened by the non-appearance of his two comrades and had turned
+back. His fright had been increased by seeing a horse and rider coming
+apparently out of the sea.
+
+When he came up, he found his brother Jim sitting on the sand still half
+dazed but slowly coming to himself.
+
+"Where's the Senor, Jim?" cried Jo. This question served to bring Jim
+completely to himself. He got up, looking pale, with one side of his
+face bruised to a real blackness, and the flesh of his left hand badly
+torn, where it had struck the cliff, but he was not thinking of these
+matters.
+
+"Why, Jo, the Senor came after me. Where is he?" Then it came over him
+all at once, that his companion was even now caught between the jaws of
+the black cliff.
+
+"We must get to him, Jo," he cried.
+
+"But how did you ever get around that cliff?" asked Jo.
+
+Already it was an awesome sight as the waves crashed in foam against its
+front and rushed shoreward along its black sides. It seemed impossible
+that only fifteen minutes before Jim had actually come around that
+foaming headland.
+
+In reply to Jo's question, Jim threw his arms around Caliente's neck
+with warm affection.
+
+"This is the old fellow that pulled me through," he cried. "But we must
+go to the help of our Spanish friend."
+
+"How can we?" inquired Jo. "We can't get around the headland unless we
+become fishes."
+
+Jim considered the problem carefully. One thing he was determined on and
+that was not to leave the Spaniard who had been so hospitable and
+helpful to them.
+
+"No, we can't go around by the headland," he determined, "but we might
+be able to find a way over the rocks and down on the other side."
+
+"All right, I'm ready."
+
+"Let's find a place for Caliente first," advised his owner. Back a short
+distance from the beach there were some trees on a lower spur of the
+mountain. Here Jim brought Caliente and took off the saddle and bridle.
+
+"Now make yourself comfortable," said Jim.
+
+Caliente, in seeming recognition of what was said, took immediate
+advantage of the invitation and rolled heartily in a dry and dusty spot.
+
+"Get your lasso, Jo," urged Jim, "and we will start."
+
+So together they made for the steep rock and soon reached the base of
+it, and now began a hard climb, but no more difficult than they had
+encountered before in their travels.
+
+"Do you recollect, Jim," inquired Jo, "that day you got stalled in our
+first canyon in Colorado, when you tried to imitate an eagle and fly up
+a precipitous cliff and we had to get you down?"
+
+"Oh, yes, I remember," replied Jim, "and how I scared you and Tom by
+pretending that an Injun was after me, when I went down to the creek for
+water."
+
+"Poor Tom," said Jo sadly, "I wonder when we will see him again."
+
+"In a couple of days," stoutly declared the optimistic Jim.
+
+They were now going up the face of the cliff, the lariats over their
+shoulders, and searching with careful feet for a foothold, while their
+hands clutched some piece of projecting rock.
+
+"Lucky this rock isn't rotten," cried Jo, "or we would find ourselves
+stuck headfirst in the sand below."
+
+"Like an ostrich," said Jim. "We couldn't do much in a place like this
+without our moccasins, that's certain."
+
+The moccasins did make them nimble as goats, and they not only made
+possible a secure hold, but they protected as well the feet. At first
+they were not in any grave danger of a fall because the drifted sand at
+the bottom of the cliff would have made a soft landing. But after a
+while they were forced to work their way out over the rushing water,
+then if they had slipped and fallen it would have been all up with them.
+
+It seemed as if the sea, furious at having lost Jim a short while ago,
+was making fierce efforts to get at them now. The great waves foamed
+against the cliff and the spray dashed over the boys, making the
+surface of the rock treacherous and slippery.
+
+"I can't bear to look down," said Jo. "It makes me dizzy."
+
+"Look up, then," Jim called back.
+
+"That's almost as bad," replied Jo.
+
+"Keep 'em shut then," was Jim's command.
+
+Finally they came to a place that stopped Jo entirely. Jim was able to
+get over it, because of his superior height and reach, and he attained a
+point of safety above Jo.
+
+"What am I going to do now?" cried Jo. "I can't go any higher and it is
+impossible for me to go back."
+
+"You wait," urged Jim, "till I get a secure foothold above here."
+
+"Oh, I'll wait," said Jo grimly, "you don't observe any anxiety on my
+part to move, do you?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+TWO LASSOES
+
+
+Finally Jim reached a broad ledge, that gave him an excellent foothold,
+and he got his lariat ready and dangled the loop under Jo's nose.
+
+"What are you going to hang me for?" inquired Jo.
+
+"For a horse thief, I reckon," replied Jim, "that bay don't belong to
+you does it, Mister?"
+
+"Meaning this ocean bay?" queried Jo.
+
+"I certainly will hang you for that," retorted Jim, "Now get the loop
+under your armpits."
+
+"All ready," cried Jo.
+
+Then Jim, bracing himself, kept a taut line on his brother, and with
+this help he was able quite easily to get over the slippery, bare belt
+of rock, and in a few moments was safe with Jim on the ledge.
+
+"It won't take us long now," said Jo, "to get to the other side."
+
+"Let's give him a yell," suggested Jim, "to let him know that we are
+coming."
+
+Then Jim put his hands to his lips and cried:
+
+"Senor, ahoy." They listened breathlessly and in a few moments came a
+faint reply. This put renewed energy into the boys and as the way was
+now easier, they leaped ahead, agile as goats, and had soon reached the
+top of the cliff. They looked eagerly down.
+
+There was the deep short semi-circle of the little bay with the waves
+heaving in against the cliffs and at the point midway between the two
+head-lands, where the beach was highest, they saw the Spaniard on Don
+Fernando. Already the encroaching waves were gnawing at them.
+
+It was only a question of minutes now, and horse and rider would be
+carried out to sea. The Spaniard sat like a statute. It was seemingly
+possible for him to have made his escape up the cliffs, which were not
+overly precipitous, like those Jim and Jo had just scaled, but he was a
+fatalist and believed that his day had come. Perhaps he did not want to
+abandon his horse, in which his pride was centered.
+
+"Cheer up, Senor, we'll be there," yelled Jim.
+
+Then followed by Jo, he sprang forward, leaping from rock to rock, and
+from jutting point to opportune foothold. It was dangerous and daring
+work, but the life of their friend was at stake and the boys were not
+the kind to consider their own safety at such a time.
+
+It was only their sure-footedness and varied experience in climbing that
+saved them from broken limbs or possible death. In a remarkably short
+time, they stood upon a ledge above the Spaniard.
+
+"Here, Senor," yelled Jim, "catch the rope."
+
+He did as ordered but called up, "Is there no way to save my horse?"
+
+Jim considered a moment, then shouted: "All right, yes, we will save
+your horse, too. Tie the ends of the lasso to the iron rings at the ends
+of the front cinch." This was a broad, strong band, which would furnish
+a good purchase, when Jim tossed down the lariat. The Spaniard caught it
+and made it fast as ordered.
+
+"Now, fasten this under your arms," ordered Jim, as he cast down the
+second lariat, which belonged to Jo. They then drew up the Spaniard to
+safety and he appeared to be pleased in a quiet way but not at all
+enthusiastic.
+
+"I am your eternal debtor, Senors," he said with a courteous bow.
+
+"How was it you did not follow me, Senor?" questioned Jim, "when I
+sailed around the headland?"
+
+"Don Fernando balked," replied the Senor. "I thought, too, that you had
+been drowned."
+
+"Came near it," replied Jim. "I would, too, if it had not been for
+Caliente."
+
+"But my poor Fernando, he will be drowned," cried the Spaniard, now much
+more excited about the safety of his steed than he had been for his own.
+It did look rather bad for the big chestnut, as a large wave swelling
+in, almost took him off his feet. He began to neigh wildly.
+
+"Don't worry, Don, old boy," cried Jim to the frightened horse. "If you
+will help yourself." There was something in his voice that seemed to
+reassure the animal.
+
+"Now, Jo, we will let you down by the lariat and get the bridle reins
+over his head and help him get a foothold on that ledge below us. He
+will be safe enough there, even if he does get somewhat damp."
+
+"Let me go. It is my risk for my horse," urged the Spaniard.
+
+"It is no risk, Senor," replied Jim. "You are heavier than my brother
+and stronger and can do more good on this ledge with me."
+
+"The commands of the General!" said the Spaniard with a low bow. "I see
+your plan is good."
+
+"We will tie this end of the lasso to the tree," said Jim, "so you will
+feel perfectly safe, Jo."
+
+The tree referred to was a sturdy, gnarled cedar, growing on the ledge.
+Then Jim swung his brother off and with every confidence in the strength
+of the lariat to hold, Jo made his way quickly and safely down, while if
+he had been without the rope he would have doubtless fallen into the
+water below.
+
+A wave surged in, submerging him, and then started triumphantly to carry
+him out to sea, but when the lariat pulled taut Jo struggled safely back
+on the rock, while the wave went grumbling back.
+
+"Catch the bridle now, Jo," urged Jim. "Don't waste any more time
+swimming."
+
+Thus adjured, Jo grabbed the bridle reins and pulled them over Don
+Fernando's head, and braced himself on the rock above. All was ready
+now, and the two above held the loop of the lasso that had been tied at
+the cinch, with both hands, and they pulled together. Again a big wave
+swelled in towards the cliff, which gave the frightened horse a big
+boost.
+
+Then, with Jim and the Spaniard pulling mightily from the ledge above,
+and Jo giving the big chestnut a purchase by a steady pull upon his
+bridle, the horse scrambled with a mighty clatter and all his frightened
+energy up the sloping rock. The lariat and Jo's work helped a whole lot.
+Without the three, he would never have made it.
+
+Before the next wave swept in, Don Fernando stood, trembling and
+dripping, but safe, upon the lower ledge. He seemed above the danger
+point now, though an unusually big wave welled up around the horse's
+fetlocks and the spray was continually dashing upwards.
+
+"He is all right now," cried Jim, "better come up, Jo, where it is
+dryer."
+
+"Haul in then," replied Jo, and then he was landed safely on the ledge.
+
+"Caught a speckled trout," exclaimed Jim in happy humor again.
+
+"Referring to my freckles, I suppose," grinned Jo. "If I'm a fish, I
+reckon Don Fernando is a whale."
+
+"Do you suppose he is safe?" inquired the Spaniard anxiously.
+
+"Who, Jo?"
+
+"Ah, no," said the Spaniard smilingly. "I mean the Don. The water seems
+to be rising."
+
+"You may rest assured that he is safe," replied Jim. "It is the turn of
+the tide now, and it is only a westerly wind that makes it appear
+higher. All we will have to do now is to wait."
+
+"It is a great pity, this delay," said the Spaniard warmly. "You are
+anxious to be on to the rescue of your brother and his friend. Anyway, I
+hope you will succeed as well in their case as you did in mine."
+
+"In another hour we will be able to start," said Jim, "the tide will
+then commence to run out."
+
+"Where shall we stop tonight?" inquired Jo.
+
+"Camp in the open as usual," replied Jim.
+
+"I hope we will get up above the sea so high that it won't come within a
+mile of us," said Jo, fervently.
+
+"As to a place to stop, I will see to that," said the Spaniard. "Do not
+give yourselves any uneasiness on that score."
+
+"It's getting kind of chilly roosting up here," remarked Jo,
+plaintively, "especially as the fog is coming in."
+
+"I'll warm you," said Jim. "Put up your Dukes."
+
+"You'll take the counts if I put up my Dukes," said Jo, who was an
+inveterate punnist.
+
+"Shut up," yelled Jim, giving his brother a hearty chug in the chest.
+Then they went at it hammer and tongs, giving and receiving good hard
+blows, and after ten minutes of whaling at each other, both were plenty
+warm. The Spaniard looked on in mild wonder.
+
+"You Americans love the hard exercise," he said. "I should think you
+would have great pleasure in resting awhile."
+
+"I got the best of the bout," declared Jo. "See how black and blue your
+face is on this side."
+
+"You didn't do that," protested Jim. "That was a wallop that old Neptune
+handed me when he bumped my head against yonder cliff."
+
+"Neptune! Yonder cliff!" jeered Jo. "You ought to be a story writer and
+use fine words."
+
+"Me a story writer!" growled Jim. "I ain't got so low as that, not so
+long as I have got two hands to steal chickens with."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+ANOTHER FRIEND
+
+
+"Do you not think, Senor Darlington, that it is now safe to start?"
+inquired the Spaniard, who was fearful of bloodshed, not quite
+understanding the boys.
+
+"Certainly," responded Jim, "we will get Don Fernando down from his
+perch and proceed."
+
+This proved to be an easier task than getting him up. His master lowered
+by the rope to his side, one scrambling leap and the horse was on the
+firm wet sand of the beach, almost knocking his master over in his
+eagerness to be on safe footing again. Don Sebastian now showed the gay
+side of his nature, as he vaulted into the saddle.
+
+He swung his hat wildly, the blood mounting to his face, and the horse
+seemed to feel the sting and excitement of his master's mood, as he
+pranced, danced and caracoled upon the sand and ended up by bowing in
+unison with his master to the two American lads, who were looking on
+with interest and amusement.
+
+Then the party made their way quickly along the curve of the beach and
+went around the fateful headland with perfect safety, while quite a
+distance out among the hidden rocks snarled the defeated ocean. Then
+Caliente heard them coming and he quickly raised his head, neighing in
+welcome to Jim and his comrade, Don Fernando.
+
+Jim gave him a vigorous hug for more than ever he was fond of his
+faithful horse. In a few minutes he had him saddled and away the three
+horsemen thudded in a swift gallop down the beach. The horses fairly
+flew, the wind of their speed tossing their manes back. It was cool
+beneath the fog laden sky and the refreshing sea air seemed to give the
+horses tireless endurance.
+
+Soon three miles had spun backwards under their hoofs and the boys were
+filled with the joyous excitement of the run. It seemed now that every
+stride of the horses was bringing them nearer to the hoped-for rescue of
+Tom and Juarez. And this was an incentive to their energy.
+
+"Here, friends, is where we branch off from the beach," cried the
+Spaniard.
+
+Then he turned his horse to the left and headed straight for a wooded
+spur that extended from the range to the shore. In a short time the
+three came to a well-traveled trail and were soon riding through the
+semi-dusk of the woods. For two miles they went up a steady grade.
+
+Then they rounded the summit of the wooded ridge and saw stretching far
+below them in the indistinct dusk, a wide plain bounded on the West by
+the blue darkness of the level sea with its rim of yellow sand.
+
+"We will soon be at the home of my friend, Senor Valdez," said the
+Spaniard, "where we will spend the night."
+
+"I'm a lovely looking object to present itself in a civilized home,"
+protested Jim, "I look like a tough who has been in a bar-room rush."
+
+"You are my brave friend," said Senor Sebastian, quietly, "and will be
+welcome."
+
+Jim blushed, at least one side of his face did, the other was already
+too deeply colored to show any emotion, and he grinned sheepishly.
+Before he had time to reply they swept into an open driveway, carefully
+sanded, and drew rein in front of a long, low white adobe house, that
+from its mountain terrace looked over Plain and Sea.
+
+Out came Senor Valdez to receive them, a stately Spaniard, who furnished
+the boys with an ideal of perfect courtesy ever after. To the end of
+their days they remembered their first visit to the home of Senor
+Valdez. How they did enjoy their dinner that evening in the long,
+pleasantly lighted dining-room.
+
+It was an excellent meal, with delicious soup, a salad garnished with
+peppers of the Spanish style, and garlic. Jim and Jo had never tasted
+anything equal to it. Besides there were frijoles and lamb, while the
+dessert was some slight and delicate confection of jelly and cream, made
+by the hands of the Senora Valdez.
+
+"I feel wicked sitting here and eating this fine meal," said Jo,
+addressing Jim in a low voice, "when Tom and Juarez are being ill used
+and probably starved."
+
+"Well," replied Jim, who was always practical, "I think it is better to
+eat, and to keep my strength up."
+
+"I guess it won't fail," commented Jo slyly.
+
+The boys bore themselves well, and without any diffidence though Jim had
+a whimsical recollection of his bruised side face and blackened eye, and
+he tried to keep it turned from the Senora Valdez, the fragile little
+woman who sat at the end of the table opposite her husband. She had snow
+white hair, parted low over her ears and the pallid face was lined with
+years. Very gentle was the Senora Valdez, but she had in her time beheld
+scenes of carnage and terror, so Jim need not have worried about his
+bruised face. But the wise old lady noticed his solicitude and
+understanding, was the more gracious to the young Americano because of
+it.
+
+That evening they sat on the piazza, that looked out towards the sea,
+the Spaniards smoking and Jim and Jo enjoying the music of a guitar
+played by a Mexican in a dim corner of the verandah and the boys heard a
+bit of important news.
+
+"There was a mysterious ship put into shore several miles South of here,
+late last night, Senor," said their host, "one of my shepherds brought
+me word."
+
+"The first scent of the trail," cried Jim eagerly. Then the Senor
+Sebastian explained to his friend more fully the objects of their
+search. Immediately the listener was deeply interested. Then he sent for
+an Indian, one of his trusted men, to come to him, and gave him minute
+instructions about some matters. Without a word the Indian turned and
+disappeared in the darkness, and in a short time there came the sound of
+a horse galloping full speed down the road.
+
+"Tomorrow, Senor Darlington, this Indian will meet you at a point near
+the Puebla de los Angeles, which my friend knows and he will have all
+the information there is obtainable as to the location of this ship and
+its crew," thus spoke the Senor Valdez. Jim thanked him with deep fervor
+for his unusual kindness, but the Spaniard made light of it.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+A TALE OF YORE
+
+
+As they sat there in the dusk of the verandah, Jim would have liked to
+ask his host to relate some of his experiences in southern California
+for he felt sure that the Senor Valdez had known something of adventure
+not only because those early days were full of marvels of interest, but
+there was something in the bearing of the old Spaniard that spoke of
+former days of romance and of stirring incidents.
+
+Then, too, there was something in the after-dinner content and quiet,
+following the perilous adventure which they had been through that
+predisposed the boys to listen to a good story of adventure. Their
+friend, the Senor Sebastian, seemed to divine what was passing through
+Jim's mind, for he suddenly spoke, breaking the meditative spell that
+had fallen upon the group on the piazza.
+
+"It just occurred to me, Senor Valdez, that our friends here might like
+to hear something of the early days in this part of the country, for you
+of all men know it thoroughly and I am sure it would interest them."
+
+"Indeed, it would, Senor," cried Jim enthusiastically, "it was in my
+mind to ask Senor Valdez to tell us of the early days but I was afraid
+to impose upon him."
+
+"I feel greatly honored to think that you young men would care to hear
+anything my poor tongue could relate. It would hardly be worth your
+distinguished attention." Jim made due allowance for the courteous
+exaggeration characteristic of the Spaniard.
+
+"Try us, Senor," he said briefly, "we would want nothing better."
+
+"I will have the coffee brought first," replied the Senor, "that may
+serve to stimulate my dull imagination."
+
+In a short time a softly moving servant brought out a tray of coffee
+cups, and placed one before each guest on a small wicker table. Jim
+noticed these cups with immediate interest. They were certainly
+beautiful and he had never seen anything like them before. They were of
+a wonderful blue, each one, and had a coat of arms in gold with raised
+figures on it; a scroll above with a Latin motto, and beneath the
+representation of a wild animal couchant. The Senor Valdez was quick to
+see Jim's interest and respond to it. "That is the coat of arms of my
+family," he explained.
+
+"I am not a scholar, Senor," said Jim, "and all I can make of the motto
+is that it has something to do with a lion."
+
+"You are quite right," the ghost of a smile hovered around the
+white-fringed lips of the Spaniard, at Jim's innate boyishness.
+
+"That figure does not look exactly like a lion," remarked Jo frankly.
+
+"Not like an African lion certainly," replied the Spaniard, "but a lion
+nevertheless, such as one finds yet in the mountain fastnesses of Spain,
+something like a panther only larger and much more fierce."
+
+"The lion seems to have a rope or chain around his neck," commented Jim,
+"and fastened to a collar."
+
+"Quite so," responded the Spaniard, "likewise the motto translated
+reads, 'Gentle as a Lion.'"
+
+"Rather strange way of putting it," said Jim curiously.
+
+"I will explain, for you would naturally be puzzled by the phrase,
+'Gentle as a Lion,' as it seems to contradict common knowledge," said
+Senor Valdez. "You see my family has the distinction, if such it can be
+called, in these modern days, the distinction of being old. This
+coat-of-arms dates back to the eleventh century."
+
+Jo was about to give a prolonged whistle of surprise when Jim gripped
+his knee to enforce silence, for though Jo might mean all right, the
+Spaniard might not understand.
+
+"The founder of the family who flourished at that time was a rather
+rugged character, and I am afraid would regard the family
+representatives of this day as very puny and unworthy specimens. This
+Rodriquez de Valdez had his castle in a rugged mountainous part of
+Spain, where there were plenty of wild animals and of wilder and fiercer
+men, bandits and free-booters without number.
+
+"His castle was a very powerful one, not only in construction but
+likewise in location, as it was built on a shelf of rock above a deep
+chasm, with precipitous cliffs behind it. However, Rodriquez de Valdez
+spent but very little time behind the protection of its powerful walls.
+It would take the forces of some strong Duke from the lowland to cause
+him to seek the shelter of his castle and to raise his war banner of
+crimson with a blue cross upon it, above the turret.
+
+"He spent his days hunting among the mountains for wild beasts or for
+marauding bands of lawless men. Rodriquez was a man of wonderful
+strength, even for those days, when there were giants in the land. In
+stature six feet five and powerful in proportion and likewise very fleet
+of foot. If I should tell you of some of the legends of his strength and
+swiftness, you would probably laugh.
+
+"But the one that has to do with the coat-of-arms of my family I will
+tell you. It chanced one day that he was out in the wilds of the
+mountains and quite alone. Intent upon the trail of a deer that he was
+following along a shelving mountain side, he did not see a lion half
+grown, but nevertheless very dangerous, which was crouching on the
+branch of a tree ready to spring upon him when he got beneath it.
+
+"When he had passed by under the tree a pace or two, the lion sprang
+with distended claws. Some instinct of danger made Rodriquez turn and he
+was just in time to grapple with the brute, clutching it by the throat.
+The lion had some advantage in weight but not a great deal, for my brave
+ancestor was probably three hundred pounds of sinew, bone and muscle. So
+that the struggle was not such an unequal one, but it was terrific while
+it did last. Finally, though torn and bleeding, the man subdued the
+beast, and had it in abject fear of him.
+
+"Then instead of killing the lion as one would naturally expect,
+Rodriquez took a strange humorous notion into his head. He would make a
+pet of this same lion and it should be his dog to follow obediently at
+its master's heels wherever he went. This idea he carried out and he
+even had a heavy brass collar placed upon its neck, and it followed him
+on all his trips, slouching with padded tread at his heel, or behind his
+war horse as he rode abroad, like a powerful yellow dog.
+
+"I do not imagine that the beast ever had any great amount of affection
+for his master, but he no doubt was in great fear of him, which seemed
+to answer the purpose quite as well. So, my friends, you have a full and
+complete explanation of the coat-of-arms of my family. My only fear is
+that I have wearied you with what could not have the same interest for
+you as it does for me."
+
+"Indeed, you have not wearied us, Senor," exclaimed Jo enthusiastically.
+
+"That is one of the most interesting accounts that I have ever listened
+to," said Jim. "I only wish I could have lived in those days when there
+was plenty of adventure."
+
+"I do not think that you have any reason to complain," remarked the
+Spaniard laughingly. "Perhaps your descendants in future years will be
+pointing out your daring deeds as emblazoned on their coat-of-arms."
+
+"No danger of that, I guess," laughed Jim, "though they might have a
+picture of Jo and me tied to a mule. That was the way old Captain Broom
+treated us." The Spaniard joined in the merriment at this unheroic
+representation of Jo and Jim.
+
+"Now, Senor Valdez, you have told us a tale of old Spain, tell us
+something of new Spain here in California," urged Jo.
+
+"It seems to me that it is now someone else's turn," said the Senor. "I
+would not do all the talking. A host should sometimes listen. Perhaps
+Senor Darlington will tell us of some of his experiences. They will be
+much more stirring than any musty tales of mine." But Jim shook his head
+firmly, not to say obstinately.
+
+"I would not think of telling our adventures," he replied. "Perhaps
+after we have travelled more, we will have something worth while
+relating."
+
+"That's right," said Jo, "we would much rather listen to you, Senor."
+
+The Senor Valdez sipped slowly at his coffee, looking out into the
+semi-darkness beyond the verandah, where over the plain below stretched
+the gray blanket of the fog-clouds. Then he rolled another cigarette,
+lit it and took a few meditative puffs. The Senor now began his next
+story at a peculiar angle, and did not commence with the stereotyped
+form of "once upon a time," so dear to the days of one's childhood.
+
+"I see you do not take cream in your coffee," he said addressing Jim.
+
+"No, but I like some sugar, not too much."
+
+"It has seemed to me," said the Spaniard, "that the seasoning of coffee
+is in a way an indication of character."
+
+"Where the party uses milk in his coffee that indicates weakness, does
+it not, Senor?" inquired Jim with a sly look at Jo, but the subtle
+Spaniard was not to be trapped.
+
+"Not necessarily," he replied, "only mildness."
+
+"And when it is taken straight and black that means a strong character,"
+remarked Jo.
+
+"You have stated it," replied the Spaniard.
+
+"But I would like to know how I would be sized up?" questioned Jim, "you
+see I use a little sugar."
+
+"My friend," said the Spaniard with playful earnestness, putting his
+hand lightly on Jim's knee, "that shows a character of great strength,
+tempered with mercy and human kindness. All of which leads one to speak
+of a man who was once famous in this part of the country, but not
+popular. He always had the reputation for taking a strong liquor in his
+coffee, Fernet, if I remember right. His name was Alverado, but I judge
+that you are not acquainted with it."
+
+"No," replied Jim, "but I should say that he was a very fierce
+character."
+
+"He was. He was a bandit."
+
+"I thought so," agreed Jim.
+
+"This Don Alverado came from a well known Spanish family, of ancient
+lineage, but impoverished fortune. He was such a wild and unruly blade
+that his family were decidedly relieved when he left Spain and came to
+the new world to mend his fortune, if not his ways. He landed first in
+Mexico, and after a series of more or less remarkable adventures, he
+came to this part of California. I knew him, or rather I knew of his
+family in Spain, and for their sake I made him welcome here at my home.
+
+"He was really a charming fellow in manner and appearance, tall, slight,
+with dark eyes and hair, a typical cavalier. But the graces of his
+manner did not reach down to his heart, and after a disagreeable episode
+which I need not revive here, he left my rancho never to return except
+as an enemy. I heard nothing further of him after his departure for
+some six months. My next introduction to him was an unpleasant one.
+
+"It consisted in the loss of a band of horses and a herd of cattle which
+were driven off by a gang of raiders, thirteen in number, at the head of
+which was this fellow Alverado. His depredations went on for years among
+the ranchmen in this part of California. So resourceful and crafty was
+this desperado that he evaded trap after trap laid for his capture.
+
+"He had several very close calls and there were numerous battles between
+the outlaws and the ranch owners, but though some of his men were shot,
+he seemed to bear a charmed life. I remember one running fight over the
+plain yonder, when, believing me to be absent from home, as I had been,
+but returned unexpectedly from the north, this Alverado and his gang
+made a bold dash to capture some horses from a field directly below the
+house.
+
+"It did not take long to get my men together and I gave the bandits a
+surprise indeed. Nothing but the speed of Alverado's horse, a splendid
+black stallion, saved him from capture. We got several of his men
+however. At last there came the turning of the lane. Through the
+treachery of one of the band we found that their rendezvous was at the
+head of a small canyon in a range of foot-hills several miles south of
+here.
+
+"You will go through it tomorrow on your way south, if you carry out
+your speed schedule, which with your remarkable horses you ought to be
+able to. We came upon the gang about noon, where they were resting after
+a long chase. In a corral near by were a number of stolen stock. They
+were not expecting trouble of any kind. Some were playing cards, a few
+cooking, most, however, were enjoying the siesta, their leader among the
+number lay under the shadow of a tree, his head resting on a saddle,
+sound asleep.
+
+"There were fifty of us, and we had them surrounded, so that there was
+no chance of escape. Alverado himself made a desperate dash, but the
+cordon was too strong. The rest surrendered. That afternoon we took the
+bunch to the lower end of the canyon, where there was a giant sycamore
+tree. There we hanged the whole thirteen, and by them no more were
+troubled not even by their ghosts."
+
+Jim and Jo expressed their appreciation of their host's kindness in
+entertaining them as he truly had done in relating his tales. Then they
+said good night and went to their room.
+
+That night the boys slept in a comfortable bed in a quaint old bedroom
+with roses nodding in at the half open casement windows. By the light of
+the candles they could see the strange old and carved furniture and
+tired as they were how they did sleep.
+
+The next morning they started hours before daylight. "I will be prepared
+to welcome more of you in a few days," said the Senor Valdez, and the
+boys thanked him heartily. Promising to return soon they galloped away
+through the darkness.
+
+All day they rode, hardly drawing rein at all. At first through the
+foot-hills and then over the wide plains. Jo had a fresh horse, a
+powerful black, as his other mount could not stand the strain of the
+long trip that meant three score and ten of miles before evening.
+
+Early in the afternoon they left the plain and rode into the deep and
+rugged gorges of a mountain chain, running East and West. Thence into a
+broad valley leading South-easterly, and about four P. M. they turned
+directly South entering a Pass in the Southern side of the valley, from
+which they emerged on a plain. Where the trail left the Pass stood a
+large sycamore tree, when they reached it, the Indian messenger rose
+from its shelter.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+A WONDERFUL LEAP
+
+
+Now without hesitation we must take up the fortunes or rather
+misfortunes of Tom and Juarez as they landed in the darkness upon the
+mysterious island, for our narrative presses to its conclusion. Never
+did they feel more hopeless than on this occasion, when they were going
+to a dubious and uncertain fate.
+
+"You boys come with me," called the Captain gruffly.
+
+"How about me, Cap'n?" asked Jeems Howell, the lanky shepherd.
+
+"What's your business?" inquired Captain Broom briefly.
+
+"Looking after the sheeps."
+
+"Then attend to it," said the Captain grimly.
+
+"Certainly, Cap'n," replied the shepherd, who was incapable of taking
+offense.
+
+"You come, Jake," called the Captain, to one of the sailors, "and be
+quick about it, we haven't much time." Tom shivered, for in the gloom
+and tired as he was he felt that his time too was short.
+
+Then with the Captain in the lead, carrying a lantern, which was muffled
+in his great coat, they started, the sailor bringing up the rear.
+
+"Look out sharp, that these lads don't spring something on you, Jake.
+They are a bad lot."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor, "they'll have to be quick to get
+the jump on me, sir."
+
+"It's the Injun one's the worst. Don't let him scalp you," warned the
+Captain jocosely.
+
+"I'm no Indian," said Juarez, hoarsely and utterly reckless of his fate,
+"I'm an American, and was proud of it, till I found you were one, you
+cursed yankee barnacle."
+
+"Ho, ho, lad!" roared the Captain, "you won't talk so tall in a few
+minutes. Nothing like a slow fire for stewing the nonsense out of a
+fresh kid."
+
+"How far is this cave of yours, you are taking us to, old salt horse?"
+said Juarez insolently, and utterly unwise.
+
+This was too much for Captain Broom, and with an imprecation he turned
+to strike Juarez. This was what Juarez was looking for and as the
+furious Skipper whirled facing him, Juarez dodged his huge fist, and
+sent a fierce hook to the Captain's jaw. There was anger, desperation
+and strength behind that blow and the Captain fell, striking his head on
+a rock. That time the Frontier Boys scored.
+
+"Follow me, Tom," yelled Juarez, and he sprang away through the
+darkness. It seemed like a hopeless undertaking to make an escape with
+the sea on one side and the cliffs on the other, and a desperate enemy
+near at hand. But Juarez thought it was best to take a chance. Anything
+was better than captivity, that was seemingly just ahead of them.
+
+One thing he was determined on and that was, that he would not be taken
+alive. He ran splashing through the water, leaping rocks, with the two
+sailors in fast pursuit. Not far ahead to the right was the white dash
+of the breakers that shut off escape in that direction, to the left was
+the cliffs.
+
+Then before him rose a steep but not precipitous rock that had been
+divided from the main cliff by the action of the water. Instantly Juarez
+abandoned his desperate plan of plunging into the sea, and without
+lessening his speed, he sprang up the rock, in his moccasined feet.
+
+The sailor who was following most closely, got up ten feet when he
+slipped and rolled violently to the bottom, knocking down the one who
+came after. Once Juarez came near falling but he caught himself, and
+kept going up, driven by a desperation that seemed to carry him over
+every obstacle.
+
+"We've got yer, ye little shrimp," exultantly cried the sailors at the
+base of the rock, "Ye can't get away unless you fly."
+
+"Shoot the blasted little varmint," roared the Captain, who, still
+dizzy, had struggled to his feet. In obedience to the order a flash
+punctured the darkness and there was a roar like artillery echoing among
+the hollow cliffs. A slug of lead whistled past Juarez's head.
+
+The boy had now reached the top of the rock and was at the crisis of his
+fate, a distance of ten feet separated him from the main cliff, not an
+impossible jump but the foothold was precarious and uncertain, and fifty
+feet or more below were the jagged rocks, and enemies equally as hard,
+but Juarez did not hesitate.
+
+He dodged down just as the sailors fired another shot, then he sprang to
+the narrow pinnacle of the rock and bending slightly forward with bent
+knees and swinging hand, poised for the leap.
+
+"The condemned fool is going to jump," roared the Captain. "Shoot him on
+the wing."
+
+But the sailors were not ready and the skipper ran between the rock and
+the cliff to be at hand to stamp the life out of Juarez when he should
+fall as he knew he would. Then he leaped, a dark object flying through
+space, his hands caught the edge of the cliff, the roots of a small bush
+held him for a moment, then he slipped. Below him was certain death.
+
+Two strong hands caught his arms, and he was drawn in safety to the
+cliff above. The Captain and the two sailors watched in open mouthed
+wonder, all they could see was the dim figure of Juarez crawl in safety
+over the top of the cliff, but they could not determine the means of his
+escape.
+
+It struck a superstitious chord in their natures and the skipper became
+moody and silent.
+
+Juarez breathlessly followed the lanky figure of the shepherd through
+the darkness, for it was no other who had extended the rescuing hand.
+Hardly a word was spoken, and they started off. After going a
+considerable distance they came to a slab hut built at the foot of a
+high range of hills that formed the backbone of the island.
+
+Two shepherd dogs rushed forth and gave their master a boisterous
+welcome, and were soon good friends with Juarez. Everything in the hut
+was neat; with Indian rugs on the floor which gave a warm touch of
+color to the interior and one side of the hut was lined with books.
+
+"What am I thinking of," suddenly cried Juarez in dismay, "to leave Tom
+in the hands of that crew? My head is wrong." With that, he grew pale
+and slid unconscious to the floor. He had evidently not recovered from
+the blow that the Mexican had dealt him a few days before, and the
+strain he had been under brought on a relapse. The shepherd worked over
+him a long time before he finally brought him around.
+
+Meanwhile what had become of Tom? He had not been quick enough to make
+his escape, and his fate was in the balance when the Skipper came up to
+him just after Juarez had disappeared over the cliff.
+
+"You don't get away, I promise you that, lad," growled the Captain.
+Roughly seizing the boy by the shoulder he dragged him toward the cliff.
+Then the two disappeared into the entrance of a cave, the Captain still
+holding in one hand his battered leather satchel.
+
+The sailor who stood on guard at the entrance, saw just then the lights
+of a steamer that was just entering the channel and he rushed into the
+cave, called to the Captain, and in a few minutes that worthy appeared.
+If he felt any alarm he showed none, but without any loss of time he
+assembled his crew, got his boat free of land and rowed silently out to
+sea. Whatever he had intended to do with Tom, evidently passed from his
+mind, now awakened to the solution of some other problem.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+IN THE STRAIT
+
+
+As Juarez and Tom were under the kindly escort of Captain Broom and his
+sailors in the whale boat on their cruise to the mysterious island, Jo,
+Jim and the Spaniard had stopped at an old sycamore tree, where, as had
+been promised, the Indian messenger was awaiting their coming.
+
+"What news, Yaquis?" asked the Spaniard, who knew the Indian well.
+
+"I saw the boat by my own eyes," he replied, "heading for the Big
+Island," pointing to the South. "By her smoke she stopped in the Bow
+Harbor near the lower end." So spoke the Indian, standing straight and
+tall. He was a picturesque sight with his coarse, black hair cut square
+and long.
+
+"The trail is getting warm," exclaimed Jim eagerly. "Where can we get a
+boat?"
+
+"There is a small boat at the Harbor of San Pedro," replied the
+Spaniard, "that is the property of a friend of mine. I doubt not we can
+have the use of it."
+
+"It is now a little after six," said Jim. "How far is it to the Harbor?"
+
+"A dozen miles," replied the Indian.
+
+"Is your horse too tired, Senor Sebastian, to make it by eight?" The
+Spaniard's eyes flashed.
+
+"Senor, Don Fernando is never tired. Let us start."
+
+"We are ready," replied Jim. "Which is the shortest cut?"
+
+"I will guide you," was the Indian's response.
+
+"He knows this country like the foot does the shoe," assured the
+Spaniard.
+
+Without more ado, the new guide took the lead and they rode at a rapid
+gait in single file. At first they went down a gentle grade for several
+miles until they came to a perfectly level plain that stretched in three
+directions to the sea. At the end of the land was a perfectly rounded
+rise like a huge long bolster.
+
+The party of rescuers left the Puebla de los Angeles several miles to
+the East, taking the shortest way to the harbor. There was no let-up to
+the speed, if anything, they seemed to be going faster, with sweaty
+sides and shoulders, but with unaffected stamina. The going was fine,
+over a springy turf and sometimes they tore through wide belts of tall
+mustard.
+
+Jo and Jim were in fine fettle as the end of the journey came in sight
+and there was promise of their coming to close quarters with the pirates
+and possibly rescuing their oppressed brothers from captivity. Then,
+too, the passage of the strait in an open boat appealed to their sense
+of adventure.
+
+About eight o'clock, they came to a ranch two miles from the harbor,
+where Senor Sebastian had a short talk with a man who owned the small
+boat that had been referred to. He was perfectly willing to lend them
+the boat and also sent a Mexican servant to bring back their horses and
+put them up in his stables. Not forgetting to thank him for his great
+kindness to them, the boys turned their horses' heads for the harbor,
+the last lap of their long journey had begun.
+
+In a half hour, they stood on the shore of a long, narrow inlet, at a
+point where a craft was moored. From a small boat-house, they got the
+oars, the mast and the sail to be used if the wind was right. Then they
+were ready to get aboard. Jim looked at his watch. "It lacks ten minutes
+of nine," he said.
+
+Then they embarked. The boat was not a mere row-boat, but was found to
+be of good size and about equal to a whale boat. It was staunch, too,
+and sea worthy. The mooring was cast off. Jim was at the bow oar, and Jo
+at the one back of him on the other side, while the Indian, Yaquis,
+steered. The tide favored them as they glided quickly between the banks,
+and they were not long in reaching the channel.
+
+At first, there was a slow, heavy swell, while in the lee of the land,
+that did not bother the boys but within a half hour they were in a
+choppy sea with breaking crests, and now the real work for Jo and Jim
+began. Fortunately, the Indian was a most skillful oar, and he kept them
+from being swamped. As yet there was no breeze to help them.
+
+"This is almost as good as running the Rapids in the Grand Canyon,"
+cried Jim joyously.
+
+The boys were in fine fettle for their work, notwithstanding their long
+day in the saddle, and they buckled to it with a will, although wet
+through with flying spray. They had enjoyed a good rest the night before
+and after their long ride they were glad to get the kinks out of their
+muscles. They really made remarkably good headway against the sea and
+the stoical Indian grunted approval of their work. Ah, but it was fine,
+battling with the waves through the darkness, while the boat thrashed
+and beat its way ahead.
+
+The boys stood to their oars and put all the strength of their lithe
+young bodies into the stroke and they seemed tireless. The Spaniard had
+made himself comfortable in the bow, where, sheltered by a short
+overhead deck, he was soon fast asleep.
+
+"Wake me when it is time to be drowned," he said. "I know it is my
+fate." Jim remembered the Spaniard's melancholy of the day before, and
+laughed heartily, as he promised.
+
+"There are the lights of a vessel," cried Yaquis, who, though silent,
+was ever on the watch. "Ahead of us to the Southwest."
+
+"You are right," said Jim. The lights were like two faint, moving stars,
+one aloft and the other below.
+
+"That isn't the Pirate ship," declared Jo. "She wouldn't be showing any
+light." After a while, the lights of the vessel were suddenly eclipsed,
+but by the dull light of the moon, now risen, the vessel's bulk could
+still be made out.
+
+"She has gone into the further straits," said Yaquis, "between the two
+islands."
+
+A gentle breeze sprang up, but blowing directly toward them, it lent no
+aid. Before midnight, the westerly breeze had died absolutely down, and
+in a not very long time, the sea followed suit, leaving a long swell and
+the rowing became much easier. Nothing occurred to break the monotony
+for a while. There was the steady grinding of the oars in the row-locks
+and the lapping of the waves in the gloom, for the moon was now obscured
+by clouds. Then, of a sudden, the Indian called a halt.
+
+"Do you hear footsteps?" inquired Jim, jocosely.
+
+"A steamer coming, I hear her, no lights. Pull hard." In a minute, even
+the boys could hear the beat of her engines and saw the occasional flare
+from her stacks, then a dark form took shape through the night. They
+pulled lustily for they knew their danger and who it was. How quickly
+they would be run down, if discovered, and left to drown in the wide
+strait, when Captain Broom found out their identity. No wonder they
+pulled.
+
+"Stop now, draw in your oars. Lie down," warned the Indian.
+
+Not a hundred yards to the Eastward came The Sea Eagle and she was on an
+even line with the boat that lay a black patch on the dark water. If
+Captain Broom was not on the Bridge they would be safe.
+
+"Boat ahoy," boomed out his voice.
+
+"Indian fishermen," cried Yaquis. "Stop, take me ashore."
+
+With a growl, the Captain sent his ship ahead, paying no attention to
+the "Indian fisherman" in distress. There was a gleam of white teeth as
+the Indian smiled at the hearty congratulations of the boys and their
+glee at his stratagem. Then the Spaniard and Yaquis took the oars while
+Jim steered and Jo slept.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+CONCLUSION
+
+
+When morning came, they were but a few miles from the Northern end of
+the longer Island and the fog was over the whole sky. The sea was glassy
+with a sullen glaze. Nowhere was there sign of any steamer or ship. The
+Sea Eagle had made good her escape.
+
+"I wish we had a stiff breeze to help us along," said the Spaniard, who
+loved not manual labor, as did the boys.
+
+"It will come, the strong breeze, soon," said the Indian.
+
+"When we make the Island, what are we to do?" asked Jo.
+
+"Who can tell, maybe Tom and Juarez have been taken along with the
+Skipper, instead of being marooned."
+
+"That's so," replied Jo, and gloom settled down upon his spirits,
+heavier than the fog upon the sea.
+
+"We will keep after them," said the never despondent Jim, "even if we
+have to chase them around the world."
+
+The boat seemed to crawl so slowly along, and the boys began to fret in
+their eagerness to find out whether their comrades were on the island or
+not, but they were not yet close enough to make out any object upon its
+surface. Then from the West there came a breeze rippling the glassy
+water.
+
+"Up with the sail," cried Jim. "Here's where we fly."
+
+As the breeze strengthened to a wind, they went towards the island at a
+clipping gait. When they got within a half mile of the shore, they began
+to look eagerly for some sign of a living being and they were
+disappointed at first, but they drove their boat along as near the shore
+as they dared.
+
+"Say, did you hear that?" cried Jim in excitement. "That was a rifle
+shot, or my name is Dennis."
+
+"Three men on the shore," said the Indian, imperturbably.
+
+"I see them," cried Jo, "on that beach yonder. I believe it is Tom and
+Juarez. Hurrah for the Frontier Boys."
+
+"It is they," declared Jim as they drew closer, "but how Tom has grown.
+He looks over six feet."
+
+"That isn't Tom," said Jo. "It's some one else. The short one is Tom."
+Then he saw Jim grin and realized that he had been kidded.
+
+"If this wasn't my busy day," said Jo, "I'd give you a punching for
+being so smart."
+
+Five minutes later, the boat had grounded on the pebbly beach and The
+Frontier Boys were again united. There was a great jubilee for a while
+with the Spaniard, the Indian, and the lanky shepherd on the outskirts
+of the family celebration, but in a short time they were all good
+friends, each according to his different nature; the Spaniard, suave and
+courteous, the Indian stolid, but with his share in the general
+good-will, and Jeems Howell, the shepherd, lankily humorous.
+
+"We met our old friend Captain Broom in the channel, boys," said Jim,
+"steaming along like the Devil was after him."
+
+"I'll give him reason to think so," growled Juarez sullenly, "if I ever
+get on his trail."
+
+The Indian, Yaquis, grunted approval, for there seemed to be a bond of
+sympathy between him and Juarez, as the reader can well understand.
+
+"How far is that cave, Tom, where the old codger left you?" inquired
+Jo.
+
+"Just around the bend," said Tom. "Here's the rock where Juarez made his
+famous jump."
+
+"How did you ever get up there?" asked Jo in wonder, looking up at the
+pinnacle of rock.
+
+"You'd a done the same if those fellows had been chasing you," replied
+Juarez, "but if it hadn't been for Jeems here catching me when I jumped
+they would have got me after all."
+
+"I was afeard you might have fallen on the Skipper and a hurt him. He's
+a kind of a tender plant you know." The Shepherd made this remark with a
+perfectly sober face, in no wise disturbed by the hilarity of the boys,
+over the idea of the tenderness of the Skipper.
+
+"Here's the cave," said Juarez, and he led the way through an arched
+opening in the wall of the cliff. Picking up a lantern, he went ahead as
+guide.
+
+"This is certainly a dry cave," said Jim.
+
+"It ought to be," said Jeems Howell. "It don't rain on this Island more
+than twice a year, but I feel it in my bones that it is coming on to
+storm today."
+
+"I hope you don't feel it in _all_ your bones," remarked Jim,
+quizzically, "because it is liable to be a long drawn out storm if you
+do."
+
+The lanky Shepherd gave himself over to spasms of silent mirth at Jim's
+queer humor.
+
+"Here's where we found Tom," said Juarez. "Just discovered him a couple
+of hours before you discovered us."
+
+When the Captain had made his sudden change of plans, Tom made himself
+as comfortable as he could for the night, intending to search for Juarez
+in the morning.
+
+"Sometime I hope that this wretched Captain will be captured and
+imprisoned right here," said the Spaniard with a cold, vindictiveness.
+
+"If he comes snooping around here again, that is what will happen to
+him," remarked Jim quietly. "I suppose, Tom, that he hid some of the
+loot he took from us in this cave somewhere. I bet this is his safe
+deposit vault, all right."
+
+"He went back in there with his small satchel," said Tom, indicating the
+depths of the cave as yet unexplored.
+
+"It will keep," said Jim, "but before I leave this island for Hawaii, I
+am going to search every corner of this cave and see if I cannot find
+our property."
+
+"We discovered it in a cave and perhaps we will lose our treasure in a
+cave," said Juarez, who was something of a fatalist.
+
+"Don't you believe that we won't find it," declared Jim stoutly, "but no
+work for me for a while. I'm going to take a good rest."
+
+"So say we all of us," chanted the boys.
+
+"Gentlemen," said Jeems Howell oracularly, "If it pleases you, and
+Christopher Columbus," with a wave of his hand toward Jim, "who
+discovered this savage group, we will now adjourn to my castle on the
+distant hillside."
+
+"We are with you," declared those assembled in unison, and in a short
+time they were making their way up the slope towards the "castle" on the
+hillside, where they made themselves at home.
+
+All the new arrivals at the island were soon fast asleep.
+
+Later after several hours of rest, they occupied themselves according to
+their different ideas of comfort.
+
+The Spaniard amused himself thrumming on a guitar, that belonged to one
+of the Mexican herders on the island. Tom got a book, and stretched out
+on a rug forgetful of all his recent troubles, while Jim and Juarez
+borrowed a couple of guns and went for an hour's hunting, in the woods
+which at that time covered the mountain ridges of the island.
+
+That evening they were all gathered in the cabin before the blazing fire
+on the stone hearth, while outside raged the Easterly storm that Jeems
+Howell had predicted, with rush of wind and sweep of rain. But the slab
+cabin was storm proof and comfortable. It is a good place to leave the
+boys after their days of trial and bitter hardship. In our next book we
+will meet "The Frontier Boys in Hawaii, or The mystery of The Hollow
+Mountain." There, I feel confident they will cope with adventures as
+unusual and as remarkable as they have heretofore encountered. I am sure
+that the Reader will be anxious to accompany them on their journey. But
+we must permit the Frontier Boys to have the last word, in this volume.
+
+"Do you think that Captain Broom, will return here, before we get away
+for Hawaii, Jim?" inquired brother Jo.
+
+"I certainly do," replied Jim, "and we will be right here, to give him a
+warm and hearty Welcome, you can rest assured of that."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Transcriber's Notes:
+
+Obvious punctuation errors repaired.
+
+Page 9, "hearn" changed to "heard" (I heard the mate)
+
+Page 136, "wierdly" changed to "weirdly" (almost weirdly beautiful)
+
+Page 148, "ever" changed to "over" (hanging over the)
+
+Page 158, "besiide" changed to "beside" (got ready beside)
+
+Page 170, text was both missing and repeated in the original. The
+original read:
+
+          on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-
+          iente forged ahead by half a length.
+
+          "Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. +"Don't
+          on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-
+          horses up.+ There was Jo sitting quietly on his horse.
+
+The words between the ++ were removed to try to improve readability.
+
+Page 172, "supose" changed to "suppose" (I suppose you do)
+
+Page 213, "aint" changed to "ain't" (I ain't got)
+
+Page 231, "scycamore" changed to "sycamore" (sycamore tree, when)
+
+Page 232, "hestitation" changed to "hestitation" (without hesitation we)
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST ***
+
+***** This file should be named 25473.txt or 25473.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/4/7/25473/
+
+Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/25473.zip b/25473.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a4563f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25473.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3f2048
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #25473 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/25473)